Table of Contents

()

(FIVE STAR LOGO)

  Five Star

     Service Guaranteed

()

 


Table of Contents

     
    STAR GRAPHIC

The U.S. Bank Five Star Service Guarantee

  Our service is what ultimately differentiates U.S. Bank from our competitors. Every day. Every transaction. To win customers, satisfy them, keep them and expand their business relationship with U.S. Bank, we strive to deliver outstanding service to every customer.
       If we fall short in keeping our service guarantees, and the customer tells us they did not get the service they expected and deserved, we pay the customer for the inconvenience. We consider it a privilege to serve our customers; they are the reason we are in business and because of them, our bank succeeds.
       Our service guarantees apply to every line of business, and we pledge outstanding service to every customer—from personal checking account customers to large corporate banking clients; from small business partners to private banking clients. Every one of our ten million customers is covered by one or more guarantees that encompass accuracy, accessibility, timeliness and responsiveness.
       The U.S. Bank Five Star Service Guarantee is fundamental to the way we do business. Evaluating outstanding customer service is a key element in our recruiting practices, our training programs and our employee compensation structure.

 


Table of Contents

Corporate Profile

U.S. Bancorp is a multi-state financial holding company with headquarters in Minneapolis, Minnesota. U.S. Bancorp is the 8th largest financial holding company in the United States with total assets exceeding $180 billion at year-end 2002.
     Through U.S. Bank® and other subsidiaries, U.S. Bancorp serves more than 10 million customers , principally through 2,142 full-service branch offices in 24 states . In addition, specialized offices across the country and in several foreign countries provide corporate, loan, private client and brokerage services. Customers also access their accounts at U.S. Bancorp through 4,604 U.S. Bank ATMs and telephone banking. More than 1,300,000 customers also do all or part of their banking with U.S. Bancorp via U.S. Bank Internet Banking.
     U.S. Bancorp and its subsidiaries provide a comprehensive selection of premium financial products and services to individuals, businesses, nonprofit organizations, institutions, government entities and public sector clients.
     Major lines of business provided by U.S. Bancorp through U.S. Bank and other subsidiaries include Consumer Banking, Payment Services, Wholesale Banking and Private Client, Trust & Asset Management. All products and services are backed by the exclusive U.S. Bank Five Star Service Guarantee .

Recent announcement regarding our capital markets business: On February 19, 2003, U.S. Bancorp announced its plans to spin-off to U.S. Bancorp shareholders its capital markets business unit, including the investment banking and brokerage activities primarily conducted by its wholly owned subsidiary, U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray®. As a result, U.S. Bancorp shareholders would receive shares of the new Piper Jaffray company in a tax-free stock dividend distribution. It is anticipated that the spin-off will be completed in the third quarter of 2003. Once the spin-off is completed, our capital markets business will be owned 100 percent by U.S. Bancorp shareholders, and will become an independent publicly traded company. U.S. Bancorp will hold no continuing equity interest in the company.
     U.S. Bancorp will continue to offer a comprehensive range of investment and financial solutions through U.S. Bank, U.S. Bancorp Asset Management and U.S. Bancorp Investments. U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray, through its Capital Markets and Private Advisory Services operations, provides a full range of investment products and services to individuals, institutions and businesses.


(CONTENTS)

1 U.S. Bancorp


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Graphs of Selected Financial Highlights
Financial Summary
Letter to Shareholders
Corporate Governance
Outstanding Service and Convenience
Growing Core Revenue
Lines of Business Highlights:
Consumer Banking
Payment Services
Private Client, Trust & Asset Management
Wholesale Banking
Capital Markets
U.S. Bank Hispanic Initiative
Every Community Counts
Management’s Discussion and Analysis
Responsibility for Financial Statements of U.S. Bancorp
Report of Independent Accountants
Consolidated Balance Sheet
Consolidated Statement of Income
Consolidated Statement of Shareholders’ Equity
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
Consolidated Balance Sheet -- Five-Year Summary
Consolidated Statement of Income -- Five-Year Summary
Quarterly Consolidated Financial Data
Supplemental Financial Data
Consolidated Daily Average Balance Sheet and Related Yields and Rates
Annual Report on Form 10-K
Executive Officers
Directors
EX-10.02 Amendment 1 to 2001 Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.03 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.04 Summary 1991 Exec. Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.05 2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.06 Firstar 1999 Emp. Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.07 Firstar 1998 Emp. Stock Incentive Plan
EX-10.08 Star Banc 1996 Starshare Stock Incentive
EX-10.16 Non Qualified Executive Retirement Plan
EX-10.18 Amendment 1 to Deferred Compensation Plan
EX-10.22 Employment Agreement - Edward Grzedzinski
EX-12 Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed
EX-21 Subsidiaries of the Registrant
EX-23 Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP


Table of Contents

Graphs of Selected Financial Highlights (CHART) (CHART) (CHART) (CHART)

2 U.S. Bancorp

 


Table of Contents

Financial Summary

                                           
                               
                            2002   2001
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars and Shares in Millions, Except Per Share Data)   2002   2001   2000   v 2001   v 2000

 
 
 
 
 
Total net revenue (taxable-equivalent basis)
  $ 12,744.9     $ 11,761.9     $ 11,018.2       8.4 %     6.7 %
Noninterest expense
    5,932.5       5,658.8       5,368.3       4.8       5.4  
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,146.6       828.0                  
Income taxes
    1,925.7       1,405.7       1,715.0                  
   
 
 
       
 
Operating earnings (a)
  $ 3,537.7     $ 2,550.8     $ 3,106.9       38.7 %     (17.9 )%
Merger and restructuring-related items (after-tax)
    (211.3 )     (844.3 )     (231.3 )                
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (after-tax)
    (37.2 )                            
   
 
 
       
    Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6       92.7 %     (40.7 )%
   
 
 
       
 
                                       
Per Common Share
                                       
Earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.74     $ .89     $ 1.51       95.5 %     (41.1 )%
Diluted earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    1.73       .88       1.50       96.6       (41.3 )
Earnings per share
    1.72       .89       1.51       93.3       (41.1 )
Diluted earnings per share
    1.71       .88       1.50       94.3       (41.3 )
Dividends declared per share (b)
    .78       .75       .65       4.0       15.4  
Book value per share
    9.44       8.43       7.97       12.0       5.8  
Market value per share
    21.22       20.93       23.25       1.4       (10.0 )
Average shares outstanding
    1,916.0       1,927.9       1,906.0       (.6 )     1.1  
Average diluted shares outstanding
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5       (.7 )     1.1  
 
                                       
Financial Ratios
                                       
Return on average assets
    1.91 %     1.03 %     1.81 %                
Return on average equity
    19.4       10.5       20.0                  
Net interest margin (taxable-equivalent basis)
    4.61       4.42       4.33                  
Efficiency ratio
    50.3       57.5       51.9                  
 
                                       
Financial Ratios Excluding Merger and Restructuring-Related Items and Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principles (a)
                                       
Return on average assets
    2.06 %     1.54 %     1.96 %                
Return on average equity
    20.9       15.7       21.6                  
Efficiency ratio
    47.7       49.5       48.8                  
Banking efficiency ratio (c)
    44.0       45.2       43.5                  
 
                                       
Average Balances
                                       
Loans
  $ 114,456     $ 118,177     $ 118,317       (3.1 )%     (.1 )%
Investment securities
    28,829       21,916       17,311       31.5       26.6  
Earning assets
    149,143       145,165       140,606       2.7       3.2  
Assets
    171,948       165,944       158,481       3.6       4.7  
Deposits
    105,124       104,956       103,426       .2       1.5  
Total shareholders’ equity
    16,963       16,201       14,365       4.7       12.8  
 
                                       
Period End Balances
                                       
Loans
  $ 116,251     $ 114,405     $ 122,365       1.6 %     (6.5 )%
Allowance for credit losses
    2,422       2,457       1,787       (1.4 )     37.5  
Investment securities
    28,488       26,608       17,642       7.1       50.8  
Assets
    180,027       171,390       164,921       5.0       3.9  
Deposits
    115,534       105,219       109,535       9.8       (3.9 )
Total shareholders’ equity
    18,101       16,461       15,168       10.0       8.5  
Regulatory capital ratios
 Tangible common equity
    5.6 %     5.7 %     6.3 %                
 
Tier 1 capital
    7.8       7.7       7.2                  
 
Total risk-based capital
    12.2       11.7       10.6                  
 
Leverage
    7.5       7.7       7.4                  


(a)   The Company analyzes its performance on a net income basis in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, as well as on an operating basis before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles referred to in this Annual Report and Form 10-K as “operating earnings.” Operating earnings are presented as supplemental information to enhance the reader’s understanding of, and highlight trends in, the Company’s financial results excluding the impact of merger and restructuring-related items of specific business acquisitions and restructuring activities and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles. Operating earnings should not be viewed as a substitute for net income and earnings per share as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Merger and restructuring-related items excluded from net income to derive operating earnings may be significant and may not be comparable to other companies.
 
(b)   Dividends per share have not been restated for the 2001 merger of Firstar and the former U.S. Bancorp.
 
(c)   Without investment banking and brokerage activity.

Forward-Looking Statements

This Annual Report and Form 10-K contains forward-looking statements. Statements that are not historical or current facts, including statements about beliefs and expectations, are forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements cover, among other things, anticipated future revenue and expenses and the future prospects of the Company. Forward-looking statements involve inherent risks and uncertainties, and important factors could cause actual results to differ materially from those anticipated, including the following, in addition to those contained in U.S. Bancorp’s reports on file with the SEC: (i) general economic or industry conditions could be less favorable than expected, resulting in a deterioration in credit quality, a change in the allowance for credit losses, or a reduced demand for credit or fee-based products and services; (ii) changes in the domestic interest rate environment could reduce net interest income and could increase credit losses; (iii) the conditions of the securities markets could change, adversely affecting revenues from capital markets businesses, the value or credit quality of the Company’s assets, or the availability and terms of funding necessary to meet the Company’s liquidity needs; (iv) changes in the extensive laws, regulations and policies governing financial services companies could alter the Company’s business environment or affect operations; (v) the potential need to adapt to industry changes in information technology systems, on which the Company is highly dependent, could present operational issues or require significant capital spending; (vi) competitive pressures could intensify and affect the Company’s profitability, including as a result of continued industry consolidation, the increased availability of financial services from non-banks, technological developments or bank regulatory reform; (vii) acquisitions may not produce revenue enhancements or cost savings at levels or within timeframes originally anticipated, or may result in unforeseen integration difficulties; and (viii) capital investments in the Company’s businesses may not produce expected growth in earnings anticipated at the time of the expenditure. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made, and the Company undertakes no obligation to update them in light of new information or future events.

U.S. Bancorp 3

 


Table of Contents

   
Fellow Shareholders: (USBANK LOGO)
   
I am pleased to tell you that U.S. Bancorp achieved its goals for the year 2002—to successfully complete the systems integration of Firstar and the “old” U.S. Bancorp without any disruption of superior service to our customers; to reduce the risk profile of our corporation; and to improve customer service throughout our entire franchise

First, it is not overstating to say that the integration process was virtually flawless and transparent to our more than ten million customers. The integration was completed on schedule and met or exceeded our high expectations. We are now a rarity in our industry—a 24-state, $180 billion corporation doing business on a totally unified, single operating system for all of our markets and all of our customers. The service, cost, accuracy and responsiveness advantages of that are enormous, and we are already putting our new capabilities to work for our customers.
     Second, during the year, we continued to reduce the risk profile of our corporation. We exited higher risk businesses; we intensified and improved collection efforts; and we put improved credit and underwriting policies into effect across the corporation. While our credit costs are still too high, reflecting the nation’s current economic condition, it appears credit quality has stabilized, and the improvements we have made put us in a position of strength to take every advantage of our skill and expertise, our products and services, our markets and an economic recovery.
     Third, a re-energized culture of outstanding customer service is growing appreciably throughout our company, which is especially gratifying in those markets where our relentless pursuit of unparalleled service is a newer concept. We are pleased that our employees embrace customer service as the single most important factor in our ongoing and future success.
     Our goals for 2003 are to generate increased organic growth, maximize our operating leverage, skillfully manage credit quality, continue the reduction of our risk profile—and, as always, grow revenues faster than expenses. We are persistent and disciplined in our approach to these goals—we have specific initiatives in process, and fully anticipate achieving our goals.
     Despite a challenging economy, we ended 2002 seeing an increase in core revenue growth, a decrease in total noninterest expense, improvement in the net interest margin and a significant increase in deposits. Though 2003 will most certainly present its own demands, we have the pieces in place to grow and the momentum to meet whatever challenges may lie ahead.
     Please know that, as always, our highest priority is increasing the value of your investment in U.S. Bancorp. It is the reason we come to work each day.

Sincerely,

(JERRY A. GRUNDHOFER SIGNATURE)

Jerry A. Grundhofer

Chairman, President and
Chief Executive Officer

February 28, 2003


In Remembrance

September 26, 2002, was a sad day for all members of the U.S. Bank family. Four of our U.S. Bank colleagues and a valued customer were victims of a fatal robbery attempt at a U.S. Bank branch office in Norfolk, Nebraska.
      Our hearts are still heavy with the pain of this tragedy, and our thoughts and prayers continue to go out to the families, friends and co-workers of Lisa, Lola, Jo, Samuel and Evonne.

                 
Lisa Bryant   Lola Elwood   Jo Mausbach   Samuel Sun   Evonne Tuttle


4 U.S. Bancorp

 


Table of Contents

(PICTURE)

Corporate Governance

Good corporate governance promotes ethical business practices, demands meticulous accounting policies and procedures, and includes a structure with effective checks and balances. Corporate governance is vital to the continued success of U.S. Bancorp and the entire financial services industry.
     Our ethical standards have rewarded us with an enviable reputation in today’s marketplace—a marketplace where trust is hard to earn. Our shareholders, customers, communities and employees demand—and deserve—to do business with companies they can trust.
     U.S. Bancorp operates with uncompromising honesty and integrity. Our Board of Directors has had a Corporate Governance Committee for many years. We have adopted new Corporate Governance Guidelines in response to today’s heightened concern. Our Corporate Governance Guidelines are available for you to view on our Internet web site at usbank.com.
     Following are some of the important elements of our Corporate Governance practices.

Independent Oversight
Our Audit Committee is composed entirely of independent outside directors. In addition, the Board, the Audit Committee and the other committees of the Board meet in “executive session” without management in attendance at every meeting. The presiding director at every executive session of the Board is an independent director. The Board and each committee also have express authority to engage outside advisors to provide additional independent expertise for their deliberations.

Board of Directors’ Focus on U.S. Bancorp
To ensure that our directors are able to focus effectively on our business, we limit the number of other public company boards a director may serve on to three. The Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of U.S. Bancorp serves on only two other public company boards. Audit Committee members may serve on no more than three other public company audit committees, and the chairman of the Audit Committee serves on no other audit committees.

Board of Directors’ Knowledge and Expertise
All of our directors are skilled business leaders. Directors are encouraged to attend continuing director education seminars in order to keep a sharp focus on current good governance practices. In addition, the Board and each committee have express authority to retain outside advisors.

     The Board and each committee perform annual self-evaluations in order to assess their performance and to ensure that the Board and committee structure is providing effective oversight of corporate management. You may review the charters of each of our Board committees on our Internet web site at usbank.com.

Management’s Vested Interest in U.S. Bancorp
We understand clearly that U.S. Bancorp shareholders are the primary beneficiaries of management’s actions. All U.S. Bancorp executive officers and directors own shares of company stock, and in order to further emphasize the alignment of management’s interests with those of our shareholders, we have established stock ownership guidelines for our executive officers.

Disclosure Controls
We have established rigorous procedures to ensure that we provide complete and accurate disclosure in our publicly filed documents. We have also established a telephone hotline for employees to anonymously submit any concern they may have regarding corporate controls or ethical breaches. Management investigates all complaints and directs to our Audit Committee any relating to concerns about our financial statements or public disclosures.

Shareholder Approval of Equity Compensation Plans
All equity compensation plans under which future grants may be made have been shareholder approved. In addition, no options issued under any current plans have been repriced.

U.S. Bancorp Code of Ethics and Business Conduct
Each year, we reiterate the vital importance of our Code of Ethics and Business Conduct. The Code applies to directors, officers and all employees, who must certify annually their compliance with the standards of the Code. The content of the Code is based not solely on what we have the right to do, but, even more importantly, on what is the right thing to do. Our standards are higher than any legal minimum because our business is built on trust. You may review our Code of Ethics and Business Conduct on our Internet web site at usbank.com. Click on About U.S. Bancorp and then on Ethics at U.S. Bank.
(IMAGE)

U.S. Bancorp 5


Table of Contents

Outstanding Service and Convenience

Choices. Flexibility. Availability. U.S. Bank customers bank on their own schedules and on their own terms. Whether it’s visiting one of our 2,142 branch offices in 24 states, logging onto U.S. Bank Internet Banking from the comfort of home, or stopping by a U.S. Bank ATM while traveling, our customers enjoy the ease and convenience of financial services delivered when, where and how they want them. And, regardless of the distribution system they choose, we deliver responsive, prompt and helpful service—guaranteed.

Broadening Relationships Across Our Branch Network
Our expansive scope multiplies our sales opportunities, and enhances the access our customers have to bank when and where they want.
     Local decision-making, combined with the strength of our company’s extensive resources, is the hallmark of Community Banking. Smaller, non-urban communities enjoy our full array of financial products and services delivered by local people living and working in their communities and responding to local situations with autonomy. In our larger and urban locations, Metropolitan Banking staff deliver products and services as separate lines of business, partnering with all areas of the bank to provide customers with the specialized services they need, such as Commercial Banking, Corporate Banking, Trust or Treasury Management. Banking with us doesn’t stop with brick and mortar buildings. In-Store and Corporate On-Site Banking brings banking right to customers, inside grocery and convenience stores, colleges and universities, workplaces, retirement centers and other high-traffic locations. Specialized trust, home mortgage and brokerage offices across the country and in several international cities add to the extensive network of locations U.S. Bank operates.

Delivering Anytime ATM Access
Customers enjoy 24-hour access to 4,604 U.S. Bank ATMs, making ours the third largest bank-owned ATM network in the nation. But our ATM network isn’t just big; it’s the best in the business. Customers can withdraw funds, make deposits, check balances, receive statements, order checks, purchase phone minutes and stamps, transfer funds between accounts and request check copies. To deliver on our commitment of convenience, nearly one-half of the ATMs owned by U.S. Bank are located in non-bank settings, including corporate offices, manufacturing facilities, shopping centers, gas stations, medical facilities and airports. We deliver convenient access where our customers need it.

Providing Anytime Phone Banking Options
Around the clock, our 24-hour call center bankers are ready to take customers’ calls. Our service centers in Cincinnati, Milwaukee, St. Paul, Denver and Portland handled over 126 million inbound inquiries in 2002, including those served by our interactive voice response system. These centers also handled over one million inbound

(CHART)

6 U.S. Bancorp

 


Table of Contents

and outbound telesales calls, offering customers new products and services to meet their needs while generating revenue growth. Spanish language options and multilingual call center bankers are always available to meet the needs of our non-English-speaking customers. In 2002, an average of 50,000 callers each month chose to use the Spanish version of 24-Hour Banking, representing a 90 percent increase over 2001. The number of customer service calls to our multilingual call center bankers reached an average of 15,000 each month, representing a 131 percent annual increase. Personalized service, account information, product sales, and more—all with one phone call to U.S. Bank.

E-Enabling Customers with Online Capabilities
Our nationally recognized Internet web site, usbank.com, makes it easier than ever for customers to review account balances, make transfers, open checking accounts, apply for loans and more—anywhere they have Internet access. With a host of new features introduced in 2002, including a streamlined transfer function and online account opening, U.S. Bank Internet Banking was ranked in the elite top 10 Internet banking sites by Gomez.com, an independent quality measurement company. More than 1.3 million customers have selected U.S. Bank Internet Banking to meet their need for easy-to-use, comprehensive and secure online services. In 2002, enrollment in U.S. Bank Bill Pay, our online bill payment product, increased by 25 percent, showing that online banking is quickly becoming the most active banking delivery channel.
     Among other new benefits and functionality introduced in the past year, Trust customers can now enjoy the convenience of U.S. Bank TrustNow Essentials, a way to retrieve account information and reports via the Internet. Corporate Payment Systems has significantly enhanced the capabilities of PowerTrack®, our innovative online business to business payment and transaction system, giving corporate customers even greater control of costs in the supply and payment process. And U.S. Bank AccessOnline, a web-based program management and reporting tool, is the next generation in our complete suite of commercial products. (IMAGE)

(PICTURE)


U.S. Bank operates branches across 24 states in a wide variety of traditional offices and non-traditional locations. Our Pike Place Market office matches the excitement, traffic and customer service renown of the Pike Place Fish Market. Pictured from U.S. Bank in Seattle are (left) Jeff Shular, region manager, and (center) Julie Jin, assistant branch manager.

(PICTURE)

U.S. Bancorp 7

 


Table of Contents

Growing Core Revenue

Attracting. Retaining. Expanding. These are the building blocks we will use to grow core revenue, the foundation for creating and sustaining shareholder value. Ultimately, growth depends on our employees fulfilling the financial needs of our customers. By tapping into the tremendous potential of our employee sales force, focusing on the highest level of service, building cross-market and cross-business partnerships and developing new products and services, we are exceeding customers’ needs, positioning us for superior revenue growth.

Taking Ownership of Our Business
Employees, shareholders and customers are all linked by a common interest—achieving our goals and performance expectations. Ownership of these goals exists at the business line level. Business lines have the autonomy to implement industry-competitive business models and strategies. Resources are allocated based on growth and return expectations, and monthly financial reviews track results. This environment creates a front line accountability where every employee understands and contributes to sales volume targets, service standards and profit objectives. Results are measured quickly and widely shared. National sales management calls provide a forum to communicate sales opportunities and best practices among business lines.

Developing a Superior Sales Culture
Customer needs drive our business. U.S. Bank continues to develop a sales culture designed to proactively identify sales opportunities based on customer needs. Every employee contributes to the revenue growth of our company through sales production, superior customer service, efficiency and a continuous focus on shareholder value. Employees know what is expected within this dynamic sales environment, where everyone takes ownership of our business and is held accountable for the results. And every employee can stand proudly behind our Five Star Service Guaranteed products and services because they are among the finest in the industry, backed by up-to-date processing and technology, personalized training, ongoing product education, effective marketing campaigns and competitive performance incentives. Our Pay for Performance compensation program rewards employees financially and personally for their achievements in sales and customer service and for their contributions to company earnings.

(PICTURE)

Introducing a New FOCUS
Recognizing the power of the primary checking customer, on April 1, 2002, U.S. Bank introduced a dedicated and focused strategy across the entire franchise to attract, retain and expand the core U.S. Bank customer base, specifically those customers who maintain a primary checking account with U.S. Bank. This initiative, called FOCUS, involves dramatically modifying our activities, investments and attention to increase our demand deposit account base. By concentrating on this critical segment, we are more likely to grow and strengthen a customer’s existing banking relationship with us, providing opportunities for increased sales and service across every line of business, from credit cards and trust products to home mortgages and investments and insurance products.
     Among other support programs, employees are regularly supplied with specialized tools designed to drive growth, build new customer relationships and enhance existing relationships. We are extremely pleased with the exceptional results of our first year’s FOCUS efforts, which have energized us for an even more powerful FOCUS commitment in 2003.

8 U.S. Bancorp

 


Table of Contents

(PICTURE)

Partnering Across Our Company
We have the power to share ideas, best practices, capabilities and sales opportunities across business lines throughout 24 states. Local relationship management, combined with expert advice and support from across our organization, truly gives our customers an advantage—personalized service and increased resources. A great partnership in our Private Client Group shows the power of cross-business cooperation. In 2002, the collaboration among Private Banking, Personal Trust and Asset Management was strengthened, allowing clients to manage all their complex financial needs in one place. Significantly more referrals among these business lines resulted in a 28 percent increase in Personal Trust sales.

Providing Innovative Products and Services
We continuously expand our line of superior, competitive products and services to fulfill the financial needs of our broad customer base. In 2002, U.S. Bank introduced a variety of financial services that are helping to fuel revenue and customer growth, while providing first-rate benefits our customers expect and deserve.
     •     Checking That Pays® Rewards customers for using their U.S. Bank Check Card by giving them up to a one percent cash rebate for certain purchases, such as groceries or gas.
     •     Cash Rewards Visa® Card Allows consumer customers to earn a cash rebate of up to one percent on all purchases made with their U.S. Bank Cash Rewards Visa Card.
     •     Verified By Visa® A new security feature that lets customers add a personal password to their existing U.S. Bank Check Card and U.S. Bank Credit Card.
     •     Private Select Platinum Services A comprehensive, integrated approach to financial management in the areas of private banking, personal trust and investments offered through our Private Client Group.
     •     PowerTrack® The newest release in November 2002, significantly enhances customer capability to control costs in the supply chain and payment process.
     •     U.S. Bank Access Online A web-based program management and reporting tool that can be configured to best support customers’ business processes.
     •     Quick Credit Line A one-application line, loan or lease solution for small business credit needs under $50,000.
     •     SBA Express Provides streamlined loan processing for Small Business Administration loans under $250,000.
     •     U.S. Bank TrustNow Essentials A way for Trust customers to retrieve and customize account information and reports via the Internet.
     •     FACTS 529 Trust and Agency Accounts Unique products combining the benefits of a 529 Savings Plan with the value of a fiduciary relationship.

(FIRST AMERICAN FUNDS LOGO)

     •     First American Funds™ Enhanced family of funds with three new fixed income funds—Intermediate Government Bond Fund, Short Tax Free Fund and Ohio Tax Free Fund. (SYMBOL)

U.S. Bancorp 9

 


Table of Contents

Lines of Business

Diversified. Specialized. Extensive. U.S. Bancorp is among the leaders in virtually every segment of the financial services industry. Each U.S. Bancorp line of business works strategically with customers to meet their needs, deepening each relationship with best-in-class products and comprehensive service.

Consumer Banking
Consumer Banking delivers an extensive array of products and services to the consumer and small business markets. Our multiple delivery channels include full-service banking offices, ATMs, telephone customer service and telesales, highly-ranked online banking and direct mail. These channels ensure customers have anytime, all-the-time access to all of their U.S. Bank accounts. Our Consumer Banking business is a recognized industry leader with its mandate for service and convenience, new products and other competitive advantages.

(PIE CHART)

(PICTURE)

             
Strengths   Key Business Units
-   2,142 full-service branch banking offices   -   Community Branch Banking
-   4,604 ATMs   -   Metropolitan Branch Banking
-   Top 2 bank lessor   -   In-Store and Corporate On-Site Banking
-   Top 3 Small Business Administration (SBA) bank   -   24-Hour Banking and Financial Sales
    lender by volume   -   Consumer Lending
-   Top 3 small business lender   -   Home Mortgage
-   Top 4 branch network   -   Investments and Insurance
-   Top 4 Small Business Internet Banking site as rated by   -   Group Sales and Student Banking
    by Speer and Associates   -   Small Business Banking
-   Top 9 student loan provider        
-   Top 9 Internet Banking site as rated by Gomez.com        
-   Unparalleled sales and service culture built on customer needs        

Successes

  Enhanced usbank.com with a host of new features, including easy-to-use customer screens, a streamlined transfer function, online account opening and the ability to nickname accounts.
  U.S. Bank Internet Bill Pay reached 100,000 subscribers in 2002 as enrollment grew by 25 percent.
  In the August 12, 2002, issue of BtoB magazine, usbank.com was named one of the 100 best business to business sites in the country.
  U.S. Bank SBA Division provided an all-time record $416.9 million in SBA loans, a 24 percent increase over 2001; originated a record 1,127 loans to small businesses nationwide, a 91 percent increase over 2001.
  Introduced the innovative “Free x 3” checking program, offering free checking for small business owners, their businesses and their employees.
  Home Mortgage realized its fifth straight year of increased profitability, with an average annual growth rate of 23 percent.
  Consumer Finance achieved a record $5 billion in receivables. Consumer Finance, a nationally recognized Home Equity mortgage lender, provides an additional level of credit to U.S. Bank customers not served by traditional products.
  Group Sales and Student Banking reached a milestone of over 500 Campus Banking relationships with colleges and universities, and over 6,000 Group Sales workplace banking relationships with companies across the country.
 
*   Total net revenue is on a taxable-equivalent basis. Treasury and Corporate Support contributed 7.2% of 2002 total net revenue.

10 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Payment Services
Our unique payment services business specializes in credit and debit card products, corporate and purchasing card services and ATM and merchant processing. Customized products and services, coupled with cutting-edge technology, provide consumers, small and large merchants, government entities, financial institutions, small businesses, large corporations and co-brand partners with the most advanced payment services tools available. Revenue growth in this business is accelerating and its ultimate long-term potential is virtually limitless.

(PIE CHART)

                     
    Strengths               Key Business Units
  Top commercial bankcard issuer     Processor of 6 percent of all     Corporate Payment Systems
  Top purchasing bankcard     ATM/debit point of sale     – Travel and entertainment, purchasing, fleet,
provider     transactions in the U.S.     freight payment systems and business to business
Top corporate bankcard     Processor of     payments
provider     ATM/debit/credit     Transaction Services
Top 2 fleet card transactions for more than – ATM banking
provider     21 percent of all banks in the     – Elan Financial Services
Top 2 freight payments provider     U.S.     NOVA Information Systems, Inc.
  Top 3 bank-owned ATM network     Proprietary technology     – Merchant processing with top 3 market share
  Top 3 merchant payment     Industry-leading     Retail Payment Solutions
  processor     implementation and service     – Relationship-based retail payment solutions;
  Top 6 U.S. credit and debit card     models       includes credit, debit and stored value cards
  issuer in total sales volume           through U.S. Bank, correspondent agent banks
  Top 9 ATM processor           and co-brand partners
  Top 8 worldwide credit and debit          
  card issuer in total sales volume            
             
               

(CREDIT CARD PICTURE)

Successes

  We upgraded an additional 1,376 ATMs to meet the enhanced functionality of our network of 3,408 Super ATMs. Innovative products and services available include stamp dispensing, event ticket sales, voice guidance, multi-language support, pre-paid phone minutes, PIN changes, statements, check reorders and check copy requests.
  More than 3,300 financial institutions, located in every state and Puerto Rico, choose Elan Financial Services for credit card issuing and to fulfill their ATM, debit card and merchant processing needs.
  PowerTrack, our innovative online business to business payment and transaction processing system, is our fastest growing Corporate Payment Systems product, with 2002 revenue growth of 25 percent and income contribution growth of 60 percent.
  Leading the industry, Corporate Payment Systems successfully held its first ever Financial Supply Chain conference, attended by 1,000 clients.
  Corporate Payment Systems signed its first Global Corporate Payment Systems client, marking the start of exciting new growth and revenue potential.
  Introduced eCommerce Suite, an e-procurement product that helps businesses empower their employees to make company purchases while simplifying the procurement process.
  Retail Payment Solutions launched the U.S. Bank Payroll (AccelaPay) and Child Support (ReliaCard) products in 2002; one of the first four issuers to launch payroll product.
  Retail Payment Solutions successfully launched REI® Visa and Korean Air SKYPASS® co-brand credit card programs.
  Continued to expand U.S. Bank ATM convenience in non-bank locations such as corporate offices, manufacturing facilities, shopping centers, retailers, supermarkets, gas and convenience stores, colleges and universities, medical facilities, airports and more.

(SIDE PICTURE)

 


Table of Contents

(BOOKS PICTURE)

Private Client, Trust & Asset Management

To help individual and institutional clients build, manage and preserve wealth, Private Client, Trust & Asset Management provides mutual fund processing, trust, private banking, financial advisory, retirement, trustee, custody and investment management services. Experienced, committed advisors and relationship managers offer thoughtful solutions based on a highly sophisticated understanding of client needs.

(PIE CHART)

                             
Key Business Units               Strengths
  Corporate Trust Services     Private Client Group     Top municipal finance trustee
    -   Escrow       -   Private Banking     Top 5 in corporate and asset-backed bond issues
    -   Public Finance/Structured
Finance/Corporate Finance
      -
-
  Personal Trust
Investment Management
 
Top 5 bank-affiliated U.S. mutual fund family
Top 5 full-service, third-party provider of mutual fund services
    -   Document Custody       -   Financial and Estate Planning     Top 6 bank provider of recordkeeping by assets
  Institutional Trust & Custody     U.S. Bancorp Asset Management, Inc.     Private Client Group has $63.2 billion in assets under administration
    -
-
  Retirement Plans
Institutional Custody
      -
-
  Private Asset Management
Securities Lending
    U.S. Bancorp Asset Management has more than $113 billion in assets under management**; ranks as the 37th largest asset manager domiciled in the U.S.
    -   Master Trust       -   Institutional Advisory     First American Funds family includes open-end funds with assets of more
            -   First American Funds TM     than $52 billion**
              U.S. Bancorp Fund Services, LLC     24 First American Funds named Lipper leaders as of December 31, 2002
                -   Mutual Fund Administration and Compliance     Easy access, flexibility and creative customization of products and services
                -   Transfer Agent        
                -   Mutual Fund Accounting        
                -   Fund Distribution        
                -   Partnership Administration        
                -   Offshore Trust Administration        

Successes

  Introduced Private Select Platinum Services, an innovative and comprehensive approach to financial and estate management.
  Private Client Group implemented new financial and estate planning software tools, enhancing our ability to provide sophisticated planning for clients.
  Launched broker resource site within First American Funds Internet web site.
  Automation of the U.S. Bancorp Fund Services compliance and financial reporting in 2002, coupled with the development of online client service tools, increased efficiencies and accuracy and enhanced client convenience.
  Fund Services grew core revenue by 10 percent due to expansion of services offered, a solid and winning client base and a strong competitive position.
  Corporate Trust Services introduced U.S. Bank SPANS Online, a state-of-the-art Internet reporting and processing system for commercial paper and medium-term issuing and paying agency clients.
  Institutional Trust & Custody introduced Solution Online, an online, fully automated, multifund-family retirement product.
  Asset Management introduced the FACTS 529 Plan and Oregon College Savings Plan, and the Private Client Group introduced new FACTS 529 Trust and Agency Accounts, new tax-efficient ways to save for college expenses.
 
 

 
*   Total net revenue is on a taxable-equivalent basis. Treasury and Corporate Support contributed 7.2% of 2002 total net revenue.
 
**   Assets are as of December 31, 2002, and reflect U.S. Bancorp Asset Management, Inc. and its affiliated private asset management group within U.S. Bank National Association. Investment products, including shares of mutual funds, are not obligations of, or guaranteed by, any bank, including U.S. Bank or any U.S. Bancorp affiliate, nor are they insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Federal Reserve Board or any other agency. An investment in such products involves investment risk, including possible loss of principal.

(SIDE PICTURE)

 


Table of Contents

Wholesale Banking

U.S. Bank is a full financial partner with the expertise, flexibility and responsiveness to make a difference. We offer lending, depository, treasury management and other financial solutions to meet the complex needs of middle market, large corporate, financial institution and public sector clients. Whether working with local or global clients, U.S. Bank understands industries and markets, and has enormous resources to help our customers grow. Partnering with all areas of U.S. Bank, including Corporate Payment Systems, ATM and Merchant Processing, Trust, e-Commerce and more, we deliver all the financial “pieces” that can mean success.

(PIE CHART)

             
    Key Business Units       Strengths
  Commercial Banking     Leading depository bank for federal, state and municipal governments
  Corporate Banking     Leading correspondent banking depository for community banks
  Government Banking     Top 5 bank-owned leasing company
  International Banking     Top 7 treasury management provider
  Real Estate Banking     Locally based relationship managers
  Treasury Management U.S. Bancorp Equipment Finance     Combine superior relationship-based partnerships with the most effective new electronic systems and technology platforms
          Strategic solutions driven by customer need

(PICTURE)

Successes

  Launched U.S. Bank E-Payment Service, allowing government entities and businesses to accept or collect payments via the Internet (e-check).
  Enhanced imaging functionality and Internet access for lockbox customers.
  U.S. Bancorp Equipment Finance ended 2002 with record bookings in the small ticket leasing group.
  Corporate Banking Capital Markets had a record year using interest rate risk management products to help customers take full advantage of the historical low interest rates.
  Record spread on new business volume in U.S. Bancorp Equipment Finance.
  Launched U.S. Bank Global Trade Works, an Internet-based international trade solution for initiating and reviewing import, export and standby letters of credit, as well as documentary collections.

Capital Markets

Under the U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray brand, the division engages in equity and fixed income trading activities, offers investment banking and underwriting services for corporate and public sector clients and provides financial advisory services and securities, mutual funds, annuities and insurance products to consumers and regionally based businesses through a network of brokerage offices.

(PIE CHART)

             
    Key Business Units       Strengths
  Equity Capital Markets     Leading provider of fixed-income investment banking services
  Fixed Income Capital Markets     Leading growth company investment bank
  Private Advisory Services     Experienced, trusted advisors
  Venture Capital     Offers personalized guidance and convenient financial products and services to meet investment needs
          Provides in-depth research in the communications, consumer, health care, financial institutions, industrial growth and technology industries

Successes

  Private Advisory Services enhanced financial advisor tools and streamlined back office systems, creating greater client convenience and satisfaction.
  Equity Capital Markets continued to gain share in merger and acquisition product area, despite a decline in the overall industry.
  Expanded in various strategic product categories, including a significant addition to convertible securities investment banking and trading product offering.
  Record year for Fixed Income Capital Markets in public finance deal volume.
  Fixed Income taxable co-managed deals doubled over 2001.

U.S. Bancorp 13

 


Table of Contents

U.S. Bank Hispanic Initiative
You have friends at U.S. Bank.

Our vision is to become the Best Bank in America for Hispanics. To deliver on our commitment of providing unparalleled products, service and support to the Hispanic market, the coordinated U.S. Bank Hispanic Initiative focuses our strategies on four impact areas: staffing, marketing, products and community involvement.
     Hiring Spanish-speaking branch staff and call center representatives is a priority. Our employees reflect the diversity of their local communities, maintain strong relationships with Hispanic individuals, businesses and community organizations and communicate most effectively with customers.
     Any employee across our company can contact bilingual bankers using an internal directory, so customers who speak another language can be served anywhere, anytime.
     Spanish-language marketing tools assist our employees in fulfilling the financial needs of Spanish-speaking customers. Branch signage, brochures, bilingual direct mail, billboards and print and radio advertisements communicate our products, services and commitment to the Hispanic market.
     We offer many products and services tailored to meet the specific needs of Hispanic customers. Our ATMs and 24-Hour Banking system feature complete Spanish language options. Product information in Spanish is also available on our web site at usbank.com/espanol. We accept identification issued by the Consulate of Mexico to open an account. First-time borrowers can qualify for credit using our Credit Builder Secured Loan and the Secured Visa Card, and U.S. Bank is a partner in the En Su Casa program to provide homeownership counseling and flexible mortgages. We reach out to Hispanic-owned businesses in face-to-face meetings, calling sessions and letters.
     U.S. Bank also sponsors a variety of cultural and community events of importance to Hispanic communities, including events during Cinco de Mayo and Hispanic Heritage Month. We sponsor and partner with local and national Hispanic organizations, including the United States Hispanic Chamber of Commerce (USHCC), the National Council of La Raza (NCLR) and the Latin Business Association (LBA). (SYMBOL)

(PICTURE)

Iniciativa Hispana de U.S. Bank        
Usted tiene amigos en U.S. Bank.

Nuestra vision es convertirnos en el Mejor Banco de los Estados Unidos de America para la comunidad hispana. Para poder cumplir con nuestro compromiso de brindar productos, servicios y asistencia inigualables al mercado de la comunidad hispana, la coordinada Iniciativa Hispana de U.S. Bank concentra su estrategia en cuatro areas de impacto: contratacion de personal, mercadeo, productos y compromiso con la comunidad.
     Una de nuestras prioridades es la contratacion de personal que hable espanol para las sucursales y centros de atencion telefonica. Nuestros empleados reflejan la diversidad de sus comunidades locales, mantienen solidas relaciones con particulares, empresas y organizaciones comunitarias hispanas y se comunican de un modo muy eficaz con los clientes. Todos los empleados de nuestra empresa pueden ponerse en contacto con agentes bilingües por medio de un directorio interno, para que los clientes que hablan otros idiomas puedan recibir atencion en cualquier lugar y en cualquier momento.
     Las herramientas de mercadeo en espanol ayudan a nuestros empleados a satisfacer las necesidades financieras de los clientes de habla hispana. Los carteles publicitarios de las sucursales, los folletos, la correspondencia directa bilingüe, las carteleras y la publicidad en medios graficos y radiofonicos difunden nuestros productos, servicios y compromiso con el mercado hispano.
     Ofrecemos multiples productos y servicios personalizados para satisfacer las necesidades especificas de los clientes hispanos. Nuestros cajeros automaticos y nuestro Servicio bancario las 24 horas (24-Hour Banking) presentan todo el menu de opciones en espanol. La informacion de productos en espanol tambien esta disponible en nuestro sitio de Internet: usbank.com/espanol. Aceptamos documentos de identidad emitidos por el Consulado de Mexico para abrir una cuenta. Quienes solicitan un credito por primera vez pueden calificar para dicho credito utilizando nuestro Prestamo Asegurado para el Desarrollo de Historial de Credito y la Tarjeta Visa Asegurada. U.S. Bank es socio del programa En Su Casa que brinda asesoramiento e hipotecas flexibles a los propietarios. Llegamos a las empresas cuyos duenos son hispanos a traves de reuniones personales, sesiones telefonicas y correspondencia.
     U.S. Bank tambien es patrocinador de una variedad de acontecimientos culturales y comunitarios de importancia para la poblacion hispana, entre los cuales se incluyen los eventos del Cinco de Mayo y del Mes de la Herencia Hispana. Patrocinamos y nos asociamos con organizaciones hispanas locales y nacionales, incluyendo la Camara de Comercio Hispana de los Estados Unidos de America (USHCC, por sus siglas en ingles), el Consejo Nacional de la Raza (NCLR) y la Asociacion de Empresas Latinas/os (LBA). (SYMBOL)

14 U.S. Bancorp

 


Table of Contents

(PICTURE)

U.S. Bank supports a wide range of community events and activities, including (above) the U.S. Bank Junior Padres program for youngsters in San Diego and (left) U.S. Bank Wild Lights at the St. Louis Zoo.

Every Community Counts

From Seattle to Sioux Falls, from San Diego to Paducah, from Minneapolis to Missoula, U.S. Bank values each community we serve. Recognizing that we are only as successful as the communities in which we operate, we take a leadership position in economic development, quality of life issues and cultural and charitable endeavors.
     We offer customers in all our markets top quality financial products and services, and we offer specialized products for those customers who may just be starting out or who need extra help in getting established or reestablished financially.
     Among those specialized products are our innovative programs for first-time home buyers, small businesses and affordable housing developers. In 2002, we made over a billion dollars in loans and investments to support the creation of affordable housing, to launch businesses and to foster economic revitalization.

U.S. Bancorp Continues Our Long Tradition of Charitable Giving
Through the U.S. Bancorp Foundation, in 2002, we provided more than $22 million in cash grants to a wide range of qualified nonprofit organizations. From affordable housing to art museums, from youth mentorship to United Way, U.S. Bancorp Foundation helped communities achieve their dreams in 2002.
     In addition to cash grants, we provide loan assistance, expertise, more than 150 sponsor relationships across our banking region, in-kind donations and tens of thousands of hours of volunteering by our employees.

Local Bank Management and Bank Advisory Boards Ensure Focus on Each Market
Our bank is structured so that every community has seasoned leaders, capable managers and an employee base committed to their local market. These leadership teams know their markets and the people in them; they know the community needs and what it takes to build a strong economic base; they understand the businesses and the industries that make their communities strong. In addition, we have more than 174 local advisory boards whose 1,266 members are respected business leaders of the cities, towns and rural areas in which we do business. Our advisory boards offer us valuable insights and perspective.. (IMAGE)

(PIE CHART)

U.S. Bancorp 15

 


Table of Contents

Management’s Discussion and Analysis

OVERVIEW

U.S. Bancorp and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) comprise the organization created by the acquisition by Firstar Corporation of the former U.S. Bancorp of Minneapolis, Minnesota (“USBM”). The merger was completed on February 27, 2001, as a pooling-of-interests, and accordingly all financial information has been restated to include the historical information of both companies. Each share of Firstar stock was exchanged for one share of the Company’s common stock while each share of USBM stock was exchanged for 1.265 shares of the Company’s common stock. The new company retained the U.S. Bancorp name.

     The Company began 2002 with several specific goals. The first goal was to successfully complete the integration of Firstar and the former U.S. Bancorp. The second goal was to reduce the overall risk profile of the Company. Third, the Company was determined to improve customer service throughout the franchise in an effort to enhance customer retention and longer-term revenue growth opportunities. Finally, despite the efforts to complete these goals, the Company had an additional objective, to grow revenues faster than expenses. The Company’s results for 2002 largely reflected the achievement of these goals and improved significantly over 2001 despite the current economic conditions.

Earnings Summary The Company reported net income of $3.3 billion in 2002, or $1.71 per diluted share, compared with $1.7 billion, or $.88 per diluted share, in 2001. Return on average assets and return on average equity were 1.91 percent and 19.4 percent in 2002, compared with returns of 1.03 percent and 10.5 percent in 2001. The increase in earnings per diluted share, return on average assets and return on average equity was primarily due to total net revenue growth, lower noninterest expense and a reduction in the provision for credit losses. Net income in 2002 included after-tax merger and restructuring-related items of $211.3 million ($324.1 million on a pre-tax basis) and a cumulative effect of change in accounting principles of $37.2 million, or $0.2 per diluted share, compared with after-tax merger and restructuring-related items of $844.3 million ($1.3 billion on a pre-tax basis) in 2001. Refer to the “Accounting Changes” section for further discussion of the earnings impact of changes in accounting principles. Merger and restructuring-related items in 2002, on a pre-tax basis, included $271.1 million of net expenses associated with the Firstar/USBM merger and $53.0 million associated with the acquisition of NOVA Corporation and other smaller acquisitions. In 2001, merger and restructuring-related items, on a pre-tax basis, included a $62.2 million gain on the sale of branches, $847.2 million of noninterest expense and $382.2 million of provision for credit losses associated with the Firstar/USBM merger. Merger and restructuring-related items in 2001 also included $50.7 million of expense for restructuring operations of U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray, and $48.5 million related to the acquisition of NOVA and other smaller acquisitions. Refer to the “Merger and Restructuring-Related Items” section for further discussion.

     The Company reported operating earnings (net income excluding merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles) of $3.5 billion in 2002, or $1.84 per diluted share, compared with $2.6 billion, or $1.32 per diluted share in 2001. Return on average assets and return on average equity, excluding merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles, were 2.06 percent and 20.9 percent in 2002, respectively, compared with returns of 1.54 percent and 15.7 percent in 2001. Operating earnings in 2002 reflected total net revenue growth, on a taxable-equivalent basis, excluding merger and restructuring-related gains, of 8.4 percent. This growth was driven by strong core growth in consumer and payment processing revenues, cash management fees, and mortgage banking as well as the impact of acquisitions. This revenue growth was offset somewhat by growth of 4.8 percent in noninterest expense, excluding merger and restructuring-related charges. The change in noninterest expense, excluding merger and restructuring-related charges, reflected the impact of acquired businesses and a higher level of impairments of mortgage servicing rights (“MSRs”), offset by cost savings and the elimination of goodwill amortization upon adopting new accounting principles for business combinations. As a result, the efficiency ratio on an operating basis was 47.7 percent in 2002, compared with 49.5 percent in 2001. The banking efficiency ratio (the ratio of expenses to revenues without the impact of investment banking and brokerage activity), on an operating basis, was 44.0 percent in 2002, compared with 45.2 percent in 2001. The change in the banking efficiency ratio reflected the favorable impact in 2002 of adopting new accounting principles and cost savings from ongoing integration efforts, partially offset by an increase in MSR impairments and the impact of acquisitions of fee-based businesses that have higher efficiency ratios than the core banking business. The provision for credit losses, on an operating basis, declined by $797.6 million from a year ago primarily reflecting credit related actions taken in 2001.
     While net income and operating earnings for 2002 and 2001 included a number of significant items, core growth was strong. Notable items in 2002 included net gains on the sale of securities of $299.9 million, a decrease of
 
16 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Table 1   Selected Financial Data
                                           
Year Ended December 31
(Dollars and Shares in Millions, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Condensed Income Statement
                                       
Net interest income (taxable-equivalent basis) (a)
  $ 6,876.3     $ 6,423.0     $ 6,091.8     $ 5,888.0     $ 5,659.9  
Noninterest income
    5,568.7       5,072.0       4,918.3       4,276.4       3,637.2  
Securities gains, net
    299.9       329.1       8.1       13.2       29.1  
   
  Total net revenue     12,744.9       11,824.1       11,018.2       10,177.6       9,326.2  
Noninterest expense
    6,256.6       6,605.2       5,717.0       5,661.3       5,423.4  
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0       646.0       491.3  
   
 
Income before taxes and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    5,139.3       2,690.1       4,473.2       3,870.3       3,411.5  
Taxable-equivalent adjustment
    36.6       55.9       85.4       96.3       111.2  
Income taxes
    1,776.3       927.7       1,512.2       1,392.2       1,167.4  
   
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    3,326.4       1,706.5       2,875.6       2,381.8       2,132.9  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (after-tax)
    (37.2 )                        
   
  Net income   $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6     $ 2,381.8     $ 2,132.9  
   
Per Common Share
                                       
Earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.74     $ .89     $ 1.51     $ 1.25     $ 1.12  
Diluted earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    1.73       .88       1.50       1.23       1.10  
Earnings per share
    1.72       .89       1.51       1.25       1.12  
Diluted earnings per share
    1.71       .88       1.50       1.23       1.10  
Dividends declared per share (b)
    .78       .75       .65       .46       .33  
Book value per share
    9.44       8.43       7.97       7.23       6.61  
Market value per share
    21.22       20.93       23.25       21.13       31.00  
Average shares outstanding
    1,916.0       1,927.9       1,906.0       1,907.8       1,898.8  
Average diluted shares outstanding
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5       1,930.0       1,930.5  
 
Financial Ratios
                                       
Return on average assets
    1.91 %     1.03 %     1.81 %     1.59 %     1.49 %
Return on average equity
    19.4       10.5       20.0       18.0       17.2  
Net interest margin (taxable-equivalent basis)
    4.61       4.42       4.33       4.40       4.43  
Efficiency ratio
    50.3       57.5       51.9       55.7       58.3  
 
Average Balances
                                       
Loans
  $ 114,456     $ 118,177     $ 118,317     $ 109,638     $ 102,451  
Loans held for sale
    2,644       1,911       1,303       1,450       1,264  
Investment securities
    28,829       21,916       17,311       19,271       21,114  
Earning assets
    149,143       145,165       140,606       133,757       127,738  
Assets
    171,948       165,944       158,481       150,167       142,887  
Noninterest-bearing deposits
    28,715       25,109       23,820       23,556       23,011  
Deposits
    105,124       104,956       103,426       99,920       98,940  
Short-term borrowings
    11,304       12,980       12,586       11,707       11,102  
Long-term debt
    29,604       24,608       22,410       20,248       15,732  
Total shareholders’ equity
    16,963       16,201       14,365       13,221       12,383  
 
Period End Balances
                                       
Loans
  $ 116,251     $ 114,405     $ 122,365     $ 113,229     $ 106,958  
Allowance for credit losses
    2,422       2,457       1,787       1,710       1,706  
Investment securities
    28,488       26,608       17,642       17,449       20,965  
Assets
    180,027       171,390       164,921       154,318       150,714  
Deposits
    115,534       105,219       109,535       103,417       104,346  
Long-term debt
    28,588       25,716       21,876       21,027       18,679  
Total shareholders’ equity
    18,101       16,461       15,168       13,947       12,574  
Regulatory capital ratios
                                       
 
Tangible common equity
    5.6 %     5.7 %     6.3 %     *       *  
 
Tier 1 capital
    7.8       7.7       7.2       7.4       *  
 
Total risk-based capital
    12.2       11.7       10.6       11.0       *  
 
Leverage
    7.5       7.7       7.4       7.5       *  

Information was not available to compute pre-merger proforma percentages.

 
U.S. Bancorp  17


Table of Contents

$29.2 million, compared with 2001, and the recognition of $186.0 million in MSR impairments in 2002, an increase of $125.2 million, compared with 2001. Results for 2002 also reflected $67.4 million in gains from credit card portfolio sales; a $50.0 million litigation charge, including investment banking regulatory matters at Piper; incremental personnel costs of $46.4 million, in part to rationalize post-integration technology, operations and support functions; and $25.5 million in leasing residual impairments. Notable items in 2001 included $1.2 billion in the provision for credit losses representing an incremental third quarter provision of $1,025 million and a $160 million increase in the first quarter of 2001 in connection with the acceleration of certain workout strategies. Results for 2001 also reflected $36.0 million of leasing residual impairments, $40.2 million of write-downs of commercial leasing partnerships and $22.2 million of asset write-downs of tractor/trailer inventory and other items. Excluding the impact of these items, accounting changes and acquisitions, the Company’s revenue growth in 2002 was 5.4 percent while noninterest expense was essentially flat.

     The Company analyzes its performance on a net income basis determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, as well as on an operating basis before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles, referred to in this Annual Report and Form 10-K as “operating earnings.” Management believes that separately capturing merger and restructuring-related items in the income statement is important because each acquisition transaction is discrete, and the amount and nature of the non-recurring items related to the integration can vary significantly from transaction to transaction. Moreover, merger and restructuring-related items are not incurred in connection with the core operations of the business and their separate disclosure provides more transparent financial information about the Company. Operating earnings and related discussions are presented as supplementary information to enhance the reader’s understanding of, and highlight trends in, the Company’s core financial results by excluding the effects of discrete business acquisitions and restructuring activities. Operating earnings should not be viewed as a substitute for net income and earnings per share as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Merger and restructuring-related items excluded from net income to derive operating earnings may be significant and may not be comparable to other companies.
     Table 2 provides a reconciliation of operating earnings to net income in accordance with GAAP.
 
 Table 1   Selected Financial Data — Supplemental Information

Financial Results and Ratios on an Operating Basis (c)

                                           
Year Ended December 31
(Dollars and Shares in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Condensed Income Statement
                                       
Net interest income (taxable-equivalent basis) (a)
  $ 6,876.3     $ 6,423.0     $ 6,091.8     $ 5,888.0     $ 5,659.9  
Noninterest income
    5,568.7       5,009.8       4,918.3       4,276.4       3,589.1  
Securities gains, net
    299.9       329.1       8.1       13.2       29.1  
   
 
Total net revenue
    12,744.9       11,761.9       11,018.2       10,177.6       9,278.1  
Noninterest expense
    5,932.5       5,658.8       5,368.3       5,128.5       4,829.6  
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,146.6       828.0       638.5       453.4  
   
 
Income before taxes and merger and restructuring- related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    5,463.4       3,956.5       4,821.9       4,410.6       3,995.1  
Taxable-equivalent adjustment
    36.6       55.9       85.4       96.3       111.2  
Income taxes
    1,889.1       1,349.8       1,629.6       1,515.3       1,364.6  
   
Operating earnings
    3,537.7       2,550.8       3,106.9       2,799.0       2,519.3  
Merger and restructuring-related items (after-tax)
    (211.3 )     (844.3 )     (231.3 )     (417.2 )     (386.4 )
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (after-tax)
    (37.2 )                        
   
 
Net income in accordance with GAAP
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6     $ 2,381.8     $ 2,132.9  
   
Average diluted shares outstanding
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5       1,930.0       1,930.5  
 
Financial Ratios
                                       
Return on average assets
    2.06 %     1.54 %     1.96 %     1.86 %     1.76 %
Return on average equity
    20.9       15.7       21.6       21.2       20.3  
Efficiency ratio
    47.7       49.5       48.8       50.5       52.2  
Banking efficiency ratio (d)
    44.0       45.2       43.5       46.3       49.7  

(a) Interest and rates are presented on a fully taxable-equivalent basis utilizing a tax rate of 35 percent.
(b) Dividends per share have not been restated for the 2001 Firstar/USBM merger.
(c) The Company analyzes its performance on a net income basis in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, as well as on an operating basis before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles referred to in this Annual Report and Form 10-K as “operating earnings.” Operating earnings are presented as supplemental information to enhance the reader’s understanding of, and highlight trends in, the Company’s financial results excluding the impact of merger and restructuring-related items of specific business acquisitions and restructuring activities and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles. Operating earnings should not be viewed as a substitute for net income and earnings per share as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Merger and restructuring-related items excluded from net income to derive operating earnings may be significant and may not be comparable to other companies.
(d) Without investment banking and brokerage activity.

 
18 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Acquisition and Divestiture Activity In addition to restating all prior periods to reflect the Firstar/USBM merger, operating results for 2002 reflected the following transactions accounted for as purchases from the date of completion.

     On December 31, 2002, the Company acquired the corporate trust business of State Street Bank and Trust Company (“State Street Corporate Trust”) in a cash transaction valued at $725 million. State Street Corporate Trust was a leading provider, particularly in the Northeast, of corporate trust and agency services to a variety of municipalities, corporations, government agencies and other financial institutions serving approximately 20,000 client issuances representing over $689 billion of assets under administration. With this acquisition, the Company is among the nation’s leading providers of a full range of corporate trust products and services. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $681 million and total liabilities of $39 million at the closing date. Included in total assets were contract and other intangibles with a fair value of $225 million and the excess of purchase price over the fair value of identifiable net assets (“goodwill”) of $444 million. The goodwill reflected the strategic value of the combined organization’s leadership position in the corporate trust business and processing economies of scale resulting from the transaction. As part of the purchase price, $75 million was placed in escrow for up to eighteen months with payment contingent on the successful transition of business relationships. Concurrent with the system conversion expected in 2003, certain State Street Corporate Trust assets under administration will be transferred to the Company or its affiliated mutual funds.
     On November 1, 2002, the Company acquired 57 branches and a related operations facility in California from Bay View Bank, a wholly owned subsidiary of Bay View Capital Corporation, in a cash transaction. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $853 million and total liabilities (primarily retail and small business deposits) of $3.3 billion. Included in total assets were approximately $336 million of select loans primarily with depository relationships, core deposit intangibles of $56 million and goodwill of $427 million. The goodwill reflected the strategic value of expanding the Company’s market within the San Francisco Bay area.
     On April 1, 2002, the Company acquired Cleveland-based The Leader Mortgage Company, LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of First Defiance Financial Corp., in a cash transaction valued at $85 million. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $527 million and total liabilities assumed of $446 million. Included in total assets were mortgage servicing rights (“MSRs”) and other intangibles of $173 million and goodwill of $17 million. Leader specializes in acquiring servicing of loans originated for state and local housing authorities. The purchase agreement allows for an additional payment of up to $1.2 million if certain performance criteria are met.
     On September 7, 2001, the Company acquired Pacific Century Bank in a cash transaction. The acquisition included 20 branches located in Southern California with

 
 Table 2   Reconciliation of Operating Earnings to Net Income in Accordance with GAAP
                                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Operating earnings (a)
  $ 3,537.7     $ 2,550.8     $ 3,106.9     $ 2,799.0     $ 2,519.3  
Merger and restructuring-related items
                                       
 
Gains on the sale of branches
          62.2                   48.1  
 
Integration, conversion and other charges
    (324.1 )     (946.4 )     (348.7 )     (355.1 )     (593.8 )
 
Securities losses to restructure portfolio
                      (177.7 )      
 
Provision for credit losses (b)
          (382.2 )           (7.5 )     (37.9 )
   
 
Pre-tax impact
    (324.1 )     (1,266.4 )     (348.7 )     (540.3 )     (583.6 )
 
Applicable tax benefit
    112.8       422.1       117.4       123.1       197.2  
   
   
Total merger and restructuring-related items (after-tax)
    (211.3 )     (844.3 )     (231.3 )     (417.2 )     (386.4 )
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (after-tax)
    (37.2 )                        
   
Net income in accordance with GAAP
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6     $ 2,381.8     $ 2,132.9  
   
Diluted earnings per share
                                       
 
Operating earnings (a)
  $ 1.84     $ 1.32     $ 1.62     $ 1.45     $ 1.30  
 
Net income in accordance with GAAP
    1.71       .88       1.50       1.23       1.10  

(a)  The Company analyzes its performance on a net income basis in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, as well as on an operating basis before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles referred to in this Annual Report and Form 10-K as “operating earnings.” Operating earnings are presented as supplemental information to enhance the reader’s understanding of, and highlight trends in, the Company’s financial results excluding the impact of merger and restructuring-related items of specific business acquisitions and restructuring activities and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles. Operating earnings should not be viewed as a substitute for net income and earnings per share as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Merger and restructuring-related items excluded from net income to derive operating earnings may be significant and may not be comparable to other companies.
(b)  Provision for credit losses in 2001 includes losses of $201.3 million on the disposition of an unsecured small business product, losses of $76.6 million on the sales of high loan-to-value home equity loans and the indirect automobile loan portfolio of USBM, a $90.0 million charge to align risk management practices, align charge-off policies and expedite the transition out of a specific segment of the health care industry not meeting the lower risk appetite of the Company, and a $14.3 million charge related to the restructuring of a co-branding credit card relationship.

 
U.S. Bancorp  19


Table of Contents

approximately $712 million in deposits and $570 million in assets.
     On July 24, 2001, the Company acquired NOVA Corporation, a merchant processor, in a stock and cash transaction valued at approximately $2.1 billion. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $2.9 billion and total liabilities assumed of $773 million. Included in total assets were merchant contracts and other intangibles of $650 million and goodwill of $1.6 billion. The goodwill reflected NOVA’s leadership position in the merchant processing market and its ability to provide a technologically superior product that is enhanced by a high level of customer service. The Company believes that these factors, among others, will allow NOVA to generate sufficient positive cash flows from new business in future periods to support the goodwill recorded in connection with the acquisition.
     The following acquisitions were completed during the year 2000. On October 13, 2000, the Company acquired Scripps Financial Corporation of San Diego, which had 10 branches in San Diego County and total assets of $650 million. On September 28, 2000, the Company acquired Lyon Financial Services, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of the privately held Schwan’s Sales Enterprises, Inc. (now known as The Schwan Food Company) in Marshall, Minnesota. Lyon Financial specialized in small-ticket lease transactions and had $1.3 billion in assets. On April 7, 2000, the Company acquired Oliver-Allen Corporation, Inc., a privately held information technology equipment leasing company with total assets of $280 million. On January 14, 2000, the Company acquired Peninsula Bank of San Diego, which had 11 branches in San Diego County and total assets of $491 million. In addition to these business combinations, the Company purchased 41 branches in Tennessee from First Union National Bank on December 8, 2000, representing approximately $450 million in assets and $1.8 billion in deposits.
     Refer to Notes 4 and 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding business combinations and merger and restructuring-related items.

Planned Tax-Free Distribution On February 19, 2003, the Company announced that its Board of Directors approved a plan to effect a spin-off of its capital markets business unit, including investment banking and brokerage activities primarily conducted by its wholly owned subsidiary, U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. In 2002, the capital markets business unit had average assets of $3.0 billion, generated revenues of $737.3 million (5.8 percent of total consolidated revenues) and contributed $1.1 million of net income representing less than 1 percent of the Company’s consolidated net income.

     The Company intends to execute this plan as a tax-free distribution of 100% of its ownership interests in the capital markets business and plans to retain $215 million of subordinated debt of the new company. The distribution is subject to certain conditions including SEC registration, regulatory review and approval and a determination that the distribution will be tax-free to the Company and its shareholders. While expected to be completed in the third quarter of 2003, the Company has no obligation to consummate the distribution, whether or not these conditions are satisfied.
     This distribution does not include brokerage, financial advisory or asset management services offered to customers through its other business units. The Company will continue to provide asset management services to its customers through the Private Client, Trust and Asset Management business units and access to investment products and services through an extensive network of licensed financial advisors within the retail brokerage platform of the Consumer Banking business unit.
     These statements are forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act. Refer to “Forward-Looking Statements” on page 3 of the Annual Report on Form 10-K.

STATEMENT OF INCOME ANALYSIS

Net Interest Income Net interest income, on a taxable-equivalent basis, was $6.9 billion in 2002, compared with $6.4 billion in 2001 and $6.1 billion in 2000. The increase in net interest income in 2002 was due to improvement in net interest margin and growth in average earning assets. The net interest margin in 2002 was 4.61 percent, compared with 4.42 percent and 4.33 percent in 2001 and 2000, respectively. Average earning assets were $149.1 billion for 2002, compared with $145.2 billion and $140.6 billion for 2001 and 2000, respectively.

     The 19 basis point improvement in 2002 net interest margin, compared with 2001 reflected the funding benefits of the declining interest rate environment, a more favorable funding mix and improving spreads due to product repricing dynamics, growth in net free funds and a shift in mix toward retail loans, partially offset by lower yields on the investment portfolio. The $3.9 billion (2.7 percent) increase in average earning assets for 2002, compared with 2001 was primarily driven by increases in the investment portfolio and retail loan growth, partially offset by transfers of high credit quality commercial loans to Stellar Funding Group, Inc. (the “loan conduit”) and a decline in commercial and commercial real estate loans partially due to current economic conditions.
     Total average loans of $114.5 billion in 2002 were $3.7 billion (3.1 percent) lower, compared with 2001, reflecting strong growth in average retail loans and residential mortgages of $3.1 billion (9.1 percent) and
 
20 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

$.2 billion (1.9 percent), respectively, which was more than offset by an overall decline in average commercial and commercial real estate loans of $6.3 billion (12.5 percent) and $.4 billion (1.4 percent), respectively. The decline in commercial and commercial real estate loans was primarily driven by softness in loan demand, workout activities and reclassifications and transfers to other loan categories. Approximately $721 million of the change in average commercial loans year-over-year for 2002 was due to the transfer of high credit quality commercial loans to the loan conduit. Also included in the change in average commercial and commercial real estate loans in 2002, compared with 2001, was a reclassification of approximately $634.5 million of commercial loans to other loan categories, including the commercial real estate category ($266.9 million) and residential mortgages ($327.0 million), in connection with conforming loan classifications at the time of system conversions. Prior years were not restated, as it was impractical to determine the extent of reclassification for all periods presented.
     Average investment securities were $28.8 billion (31.5 percent) higher in 2002, compared with 2001, reflecting the reinvestment of proceeds from loan sales, declines in commercial and commercial real estate loan balances and deposits assumed in connection with the Bay View transaction. During 2002, the Company sold $13.7 billion of fixed-rate securities with a portion replaced with floating-rate securities in conjunction with the Company’s interest rate risk management strategies.
     Average interest-bearing deposits of $76.4 billion in 2002 were lower by $3.4 billion, compared with 2001. Growth in average savings products (5.4 percent) for 2002 reflected service quality initiatives, product promotions directed toward government banking sectors and customer decisions to maintain liquidity given the current economic environment. The increase in savings products was more than offset by reductions in the average balances of higher cost time certificates of deposit (17.3 percent) and time certificates of deposit greater than $100,000 (13.2 percent). The decline in time certificates and time deposits greater than $100,000 reflected funding decisions toward more favorably priced wholesale funding sources given the rate environment and customers’ desire to maintain liquidity.
     Average net free funds increased from a year ago, including an increase in average noninterest-bearing deposits of $3.6 billion (14.4 percent) in 2002, compared with 2001. The increase in noninterest-bearing deposits, primarily in business and government banking accounts, reflected product promotions and customers maintaining higher compensating balances given the current rate environment.
     The 9 basis point improvement in net interest margin for 2001, compared with 2000, was due to the funding benefit of the declining rate environment and improved spreads due to product repricing dynamics and loan conduit activities, partially offset by the first quarter of 2001 sales of the high loan-to-value (“LTV”) home equity portfolios and lower yields on the investment portfolio. The $4.6 billion (3.2 percent) increase in average earning assets for 2001, compared with 2000, was primarily driven by increases in the investment portfolio, core retail loan growth and the impact of acquisitions. This growth was partially offset by a $2.6 billion decline in lower margin residential mortgages and a $2.2 billion reduction related to transfers of high credit quality commercial loans to the loan conduit. Average investment securities were $4.6 billion (26.6 percent) higher in 2001, compared with 2000, reflecting net purchases of
 
 Table 3   Analysis of Net Interest Income
                                           
2002 2001
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 v 2001 v 2000

Components of net interest income
                                       
 
Income on earning assets (taxable-equivalent basis) (a)
  $ 9,590.3     $ 11,097.8     $ 12,114.7     $ (1,507.5 )   $ (1,016.9 )
 
Expenses on interest-bearing liabilities
    2,714.0       4,674.8       6,022.9       (1,960.8 )     (1,348.1 )
   
Net interest income (taxable-equivalent basis)
  $ 6,876.3     $ 6,423.0     $ 6,091.8     $ 453.3     $ 331.2  
   
Net interest income, as reported
  $ 6,839.7     $ 6,367.1     $ 6,006.4     $ 472.6     $ 360.7  
   
Average yields and rates paid
                                       
 
Earning assets yield (taxable-equivalent basis)
    6.43 %     7.64 %     8.62 %     (1.21 )%     (.98 )%
 
Rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities
    2.26       3.92       5.19       (1.66 )     (1.27 )
   
Gross interest margin (taxable-equivalent basis)
    4.17 %     3.72 %     3.43 %     .45 %     .29 %
   
Net interest margin (taxable-equivalent basis)
    4.61 %     4.42 %     4.33 %     .19 %     .09 %
   
Average balances
                                       
 
Investment securities
  $ 28,829     $ 21,916     $ 17,311     $ 6,913     $ 4,605  
 
Loans
    114,456       118,177       118,317       (3,721 )     (140 )
 
Earning assets
    149,143       145,165       140,606       3,978       4,559  
 
Interest-bearing liabilities
    120,221       119,390       116,002       831       3,388  
 
Net free funds (b)
    28,922       25,775       24,604       3,147       1,171  

(a) Interest and rates are presented on a fully taxable-equivalent basis utilizing a tax rate of 35 percent.
(b) Represents noninterest-bearing deposits, allowance for credit losses, non-earning assets, other liabilities and equity.

 
U.S. Bancorp  21


Table of Contents

securities. Average interest-bearing deposits increased $241 million (.3 percent) in 2001, compared with 2000. Growth in average interest checking and money market deposits was more than offset by reductions in the average balances of higher cost time certificates of deposit less than $100,000. The decline in time certificates of deposit less than $100,000 reflected funding decisions toward more favorably priced wholesale funding sources given the interest rate environment during 2001. The increase in average net free funds of $1.2 billion from 2000 included an increase in noninterest-bearing deposits of $1.3 billion (5.4 percent).

Provision for Credit Losses The provision for credit losses is recorded to bring the allowance for credit losses to a level deemed appropriate by management based on factors discussed in the “Analysis and Determination of Allowance for Credit Losses” section. The provision for credit losses was $1,349.0 million in 2002, compared with $2,528.8 million and $828.0 million in 2001 and 2000, respectively.

     The decline in the provision for credit losses of $1,179.8 million in 2002 and the corresponding increase of $1,700.8 million in 2001 was primarily related to specific credit actions taken in 2001. Included in the provision for credit losses in 2001 was a $1,025 million incremental provision recognized in the third quarter of 2001 and a $160 million charge during the first quarter of 2001 in connection with an accelerated loan workout strategy. The third quarter of 2001 provision for credit losses was significantly above the level anticipated earlier in that quarter and was taken after extensive reviews of the Company’s commercial portfolio in light of the events of September 11, 2001, declining economic conditions, and company-specific trends. This action reflected the Company’s expectations, at that time, of a prolonged economic slowdown and recovery. In addition to these actions, the provision for credit losses in 2001 included a merger and restructuring-related provision of $382.2 million. The merger and restructuring-related provision consisted of a $201.3 million provision for losses related to the disposition of an unsecured small business product; a $90.0 million charge to align risk management practices, align charge-off policies and expedite the
 
 Table 4   Net Interest Income — Changes Due to Rate and Volume (a)
                                                       
2002 v 2001 2001 v 2000

(Dollars in Millions) Volume Yield/Rate Total Volume Yield/Rate Total

Increase (decrease) in
                                               
 
Interest income
                                               
   
Commercial loans
  $ (450.8 )   $ (535.7 )   $ (986.5 )   $ .8     $ (614.1 )   $ (613.3 )
   
Commercial real estate
    (27.5 )     (338.9 )     (366.4 )     3.6       (297.8 )     (294.2 )
   
Residential mortgages
    (12.6 )     (50.3 )     (62.9 )     (202.9 )     (2.6 )     (205.5 )
   
Retail loans
    288.2       (543.6 )     (255.4 )     248.4       (245.3 )     3.1  
   
     
Total loans
    (202.7 )     (1,468.5 )     (1,671.2 )     49.9       (1,159.8 )     (1,109.9 )
   
Loans held for sale
    56.4       (32.7 )     23.7       47.7       (2.9 )     44.8  
   
Investment securities
    403.7       (235.2 )     168.5       314.1       (190.5 )     123.6  
   
Money market investments
    (1.8 )     (14.2 )     (16.0 )     (12.7 )     (14.6 )     (27.3 )
   
Trading securities
    12.6       (31.0 )     (18.4 )     (.6 )     2.3       1.7  
   
Other earning assets
    (3.9 )     9.8       5.9       (22.1 )     (27.7 )     (49.8 )
   
     
Total
    264.3       (1,771.8 )     (1,507.5 )     376.3       (1,393.2 )     (1,016.9 )
 
 
Interest expense
                                               
   
Interest checking
    24.4       (125.7 )     (101.3 )     19.2       (86.0 )     (66.8 )
   
Money market accounts
    8.7       (406.9 )     (398.2 )     94.7       (383.7 )     (289.0 )
   
Savings accounts
    3.3       (20.7 )     (17.4 )     (6.7 )     (24.8 )     (31.5 )
   
Time certificates of deposit less than $100,000
    (215.2 )     (282.8 )     (498.0 )     (142.9 )     (74.0 )     (216.9 )
   
Time deposits greater than $100,000
    (83.1 )     (244.8 )     (327.9 )     9.2       (195.7 )     (186.5 )
   
     
Total interest-bearing deposits
    (261.9 )     (1,080.9 )     (1,342.8 )     (26.5 )     (764.2 )     (790.7 )
   
Short-term borrowings
    (68.9 )     (215.8 )     (284.7 )     24.5       (272.1 )     (247.6 )
   
Long-term debt
    240.3       (582.4 )     (342.1 )     148.4       (475.3 )     (326.9 )
   
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities
    62.1       (53.3 )     8.8       43.9       (26.8 )     17.1  
   
     
Total
    (28.4 )     (1,932.4 )     (1,960.8 )     190.3       (1,538.4 )     (1,348.1 )
   
   
Increase (decrease) in net interest income
  $ 292.7     $ 160.6     $ 453.3     $ 186.0     $ 145.2     $ 331.2  

(a) This table shows the components of the change in net interest income by volume and rate on a taxable-equivalent basis utilizing a tax rate of 35 percent. This table does not take into account the level of noninterest-bearing funding, nor does it fully reflect changes in the mix of assets and liabilities. The change in interest not solely due to changes in volume or rates has been allocated on a pro-rata basis to volume and yield/rate.

 
22 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

transition out of a specific segment of the health care industry not meeting the lower risk appetite of the combined company; a $76.6 million provision for losses related to the sales of high LTV home equity loans and the indirect automobile loan portfolio of USBM; and a $14.3 million charge related to the restructuring of a co-branding credit card relationship. Refer to Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on merger and restructuring-related items.
     Overall, the level of the provision for credit losses and the level of the allowance for credit losses still reflected elevated levels of nonperforming assets and net charge-offs, continued stress in certain segments of the portfolio and the economic uncertainty existing at year-end 2002.
     Refer to the “Corporate Risk Profile” section for further information on the provision for credit losses, net charge-offs, nonperforming assets and other factors considered by the Company in assessing the credit quality of the loan portfolio and establishing the allowance for credit losses.

Noninterest Income Noninterest income in 2002 was $5.9 billion, compared with $5.4 billion in 2001 and $4.9 billion in 2000. Noninterest income in 2001 included $62.2 million of merger and restructuring-related gains in connection with the sale of 14 branches representing $771 million in deposits. Refer to Note 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on merger and restructuring-related items.

     Excluding merger and restructuring-related gains, noninterest income was $5.9 billion in 2002, an increase of $529.7 million (9.9 percent), compared with 2001. The growth in noninterest income in 2002, compared with 2001 was primarily driven by growth in banking product revenues of $248.7 million (6.3 percent) and increases resulting from acquisitions, including NOVA, Pacific Century, Leader and Bay View, which accounted for approximately $301.3 million of the increase in noninterest income in 2002. Offsetting these favorable variances was a decline in capital markets-related revenue of $97.1 million (10.3 percent), reflecting continued softness in the equity capital markets that has reduced investment banking activities, brokerage transaction volumes and fees based on the valuation of assets under management. Credit and debit card revenue, corporate payment products revenue and ATM processing services revenue were higher in 2002, compared with 2001, by $51.1 million (11.0 percent), $28.0 million (9.4 percent) and $6.3 million (4.8 percent), respectively, primarily reflecting growth in sales and card usage. Merchant processing services revenue grew by $258.4 million (83.7 percent), primarily due to the acquisition of NOVA in July of 2001. Deposit service charges increased in 2002 by $46.7 million (7.0 percent), primarily due to fee enhancements and new account growth. Cash management fees and commercial products revenue grew by $69.6 million (20.0 percent) and $41.8 million (9.6 percent), respectively, primarily driven by changes in the earnings credit rate for business deposits, growth in commercial business activities, fees related to loan conduit activities and product enhancements. Commercial product revenue growth was offset somewhat by lease residual impairments in 2002. In addition to the impact of the acquisition of Leader, the $96.2 million (41.1 percent) increase in mortgage banking revenue was also due to higher levels of mortgage originations and sales and loan servicing revenue in 2002, compared with 2001. Included in noninterest income were net securities gains of
 
 Table 5   Noninterest Income
                                           
2002 2001
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 v 2001 v 2000

Credit and debit card revenue
  $ 517.0     $ 465.9     $ 431.0       11.0 %     8.1 %
Corporate payment products revenue
    325.7       297.7       299.2       9.4       (.5 )
ATM processing services
    136.9       130.6       141.9       4.8       (8.0 )
Merchant processing services
    567.3       308.9       120.0       83.7       *  
Trust and investment management fees
    899.1       894.4       926.2       .5       (3.4 )
Deposit service charges
    714.0       667.3       555.6       7.0       20.1  
Cash management fees
    416.9       347.3       292.4       20.0       18.8  
Commercial products revenue
    479.2       437.4       350.0       9.6       25.0  
Mortgage banking revenue
    330.2       234.0       189.9       41.1       23.2  
Trading account profits and commissions
    206.5       221.6       258.4       (6.8 )     (14.2 )
Investment products fees and commissions
    428.9       460.1       466.6       (6.8 )     (1.4 )
Investment banking revenue
    207.4       258.2       360.3       (19.7 )     (28.3 )
Securities gains, net
    299.9       329.1       8.1       (8.9 )     *  
Other
    339.6       286.4       526.8       18.6       (45.6 )
   
 
Total operating noninterest income
    5,868.6       5,338.9       4,926.4       9.9       8.4  
Merger and restructuring-related gains
          62.2             *       *  
   
 
Total noninterest income
  $ 5,868.6     $ 5,401.1     $ 4,926.4       8.7 %     9.6 %

* Not meaningful

 
U.S. Bancorp  23


Table of Contents

$299.9 million in 2002, compared with $329.1 million in 2001, representing a decline of $29.2 million (8.9 percent). Other fee income was higher in 2002, compared with 2001, by $53.2 million (18.6 percent), primarily due to $67.4 million in gains from credit card portfolio sales in 2002, a reduction in retail leasing residual and other asset impairments and lower levels of equity investment losses, compared with 2001, offset somewhat by lower official check revenue that is sensitive to changes in interest rates.
     Excluding merger and restructuring-related gains, noninterest income was $5.3 billion in 2001, an increase of $412.5 million (8.4 percent) from 2000. Credit and debit card revenue increased $34.9 million (8.1 percent) in 2001, compared with 2000, reflecting slower growth in corporate, purchasing and retail card transaction volumes during the year. Corporate card transaction volumes declined somewhat in late 2001, principally due to slower economic conditions and declining business travel since the events of September 11, 2001. Merchant processing services increased $188.9 million (157.4 percent), principally due to the NOVA acquisition in July 2001. Deposit service charges, commercial product revenue, cash management fees, and mortgage banking revenue also improved in 2001, compared with 2000 by $111.7 million (20.1 percent), $87.4 million (25.0 percent), $54.9 million (18.8 percent), and $44.1 million (23.2 percent), respectively. The increase in deposit service charges was primarily due to the alignment and re-design of products and features following the Firstar/USBM merger in February 2001. The increase in commercial product revenue and cash management fees was primarily driven by growth in core business, loan conduit activities and product enhancements. Mortgage banking revenue increased in 2001, compared with 2000 due to increased origination and sales fees and loan servicing revenue, partially offset by a decrease in gains on the sale of servicing rights. Trust and investment management fees declined $31.8 million (3.4 percent) and capital markets-related revenue declined $145.4 million (13.4 percent), reflecting softness in equity capital markets since late 2000. Included in noninterest income for 2001 was $329.1 million of gains on the sale of investment securities and principal-only residuals, compared with $8.1 million of similar gains in 2000. Other income declined $240.4 million in 2001, compared with 2000, primarily reflecting a $125.0 million decline in the level of earnings from equity investments and a $40.0 million impairment of retail leasing residuals in 2001. The decline in other income for 2001 also reflected a decline in gains from sales of buildings of $42.5 million from 2000.

Noninterest Expense Noninterest expense in 2002 was $6.3 billion, compared with $6.6 billion and $5.7 billion in 2001 and 2000, respectively. Noninterest expense included merger and restructuring-related charges of $324.1 million in 2002, compared with $946.4 million in 2001 and $348.7 million in 2000. Excluding merger and

 
 Table 6   Noninterest Expense
                                           
2002 2001
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 v 2001 v 2000

Salaries
  $ 2,409.2     $ 2,347.1     $ 2,427.1       2.6 %     (3.3 )%
Employee benefits
    367.7       366.2       399.8       .4       (8.4 )
Net occupancy
    409.3       417.9       396.9       (2.1 )     5.3  
Furniture and equipment
    306.0       305.5       308.2       .2       (.9 )
Professional services
    142.5       123.8       109.0       15.1       13.6  
Advertising and marketing
    117.9       121.6       122.1       (3.0 )     (.4 )
Travel and entertainment
    83.6       90.6       107.0       (7.7 )     (15.3 )
Capitalized software
    148.1       136.1       111.9       8.8       21.6  
Data processing
    112.5       80.0       149.7       40.6       (46.6 )
Communication
    183.8       181.4       138.8       1.3       30.7  
Postage
    178.4       179.8       174.5       (.8 )     3.0  
Printing
    79.8       77.9       86.5       2.4       (9.9 )
Goodwill
          251.1       235.0       *       6.9  
Other intangible assets
    553.0       278.4       157.3       98.6       77.0  
Other
    840.7       701.4       444.5       19.9       57.8  
   
 
Total operating noninterest expense
    5,932.5       5,658.8       5,368.3       4.8       5.4  
Merger and restructuring-related charges
    324.1       946.4       348.7       (65.8 )     *  
   
 
Total noninterest expense
  $ 6,256.6     $ 6,605.2     $ 5,717.0       (5.3 )%     15.5 %
   
Efficiency ratio (a)
    50.3 %     57.5 %     51.9 %                
Efficiency ratio, operating basis (b)
    47.7       49.5       48.8                  
Banking efficiency ratio, operating basis (b) (c)
    44.0       45.2       43.5                  

(a) Computed as noninterest expense divided by the sum of net interest income on a taxable-equivalent basis and noninterest income excluding securities gains (losses), net.
(b) Operating basis represents the efficiency ratios excluding merger and restructuring-related items.
(c) Without investment banking and brokerage activity.
 * Not meaningful

 
24 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

restructuring-related charges, noninterest expense, on an operating basis, was $5.9 billion in 2002, compared with $5.7 billion in 2001 and $5.4 billion in 2000. The increase in noninterest expense in 2002, on an operating basis, of $273.7 million (4.8 percent) was primarily the result of costs associated with recent acquisitions, an increase in MSR impairments, litigation costs, post-integration realignment costs, and core expense growth. Recent acquisitions, including NOVA, Pacific Century, Leader and Bay View, accounted for approximately $317.4 million of the increase in 2002, which was comprised primarily of increased intangible and personnel expenses. Included in noninterest expense in 2002 was $186.0 million in MSR impairments, compared with $60.8 million in 2001, an increase of $125.2 million. The increase in MSR impairments was related to increasing mortgage prepayments driven by declining interest rates. Other significant items impacting noninterest expense included recognizing a $50.0 million litigation charge in 2002, including $25.0 million for investment banking regulatory matters at Piper and a $7.5 million liability for funding independent analyst research for Piper’s customers, and $46.4 million of personnel and related costs for post-integration rationalization of technology, operations and certain support functions. Offsetting these higher costs was a reduction in capital markets-related expenses, the elimination of $251.1 million of goodwill amortization in connection with new accounting principles adopted in 2002 and a reduction in asset write-downs of $52.6 million related to commercial leasing partnerships and repossessed tractor/trailer property taken in 2001. Refer to the “Acquisition and Divestiture Activity” section for further information on the timing of acquisitions.
     The increase in noninterest expense in 2001, compared with 2000, on an operating basis, of $290.5 million (5.4 percent) was primarily the result of acquisitions, including NOVA, Scripps Financial Corporation, Pacific Century, Lyon Financial Services, Inc. and 41 branches in Tennessee, and represented an aggregate increase of approximately $241.7 million. In addition to the impact of acquisitions, noninterest expense in 2001 increased over 2000 due to the recognition of MSR impairments of $60.8 million related to increasing mortgage prepayments during the declining rate environment, and asset write-downs of $52.6 million related to commercial leasing partnerships and repossessed tractor/trailer property. These increases were partially offset by a reduction in expenses related to capital markets activity of $108.0 million and cost savings related to merger and restructuring-related activities.
     The efficiency ratio, before merger and restructuring-related charges, improved to 47.7 percent in 2002, compared with 49.5 percent in 2001 and 48.8 percent in 2000. The banking efficiency ratio, before merger and restructuring-related charges, was 44.0 percent for 2002, compared with 45.2 percent in 2001 and 43.5 percent in 2000. The improvement in both the efficiency ratio and the banking efficiency ratio for 2002, compared with 2001, was primarily due to revenue growth, the impact in 2002 of adopting the new accounting standards related to amortization of intangibles and cost savings from ongoing integration efforts, partially offset by an increase in MSR impairments and the impact of acquisitions of fee-based businesses that have higher efficiency ratios than the core banking business. Both the efficiency ratio and the banking efficiency ratio increased in 2001, compared with 2000, primarily due to the NOVA acquisition.

Pension Plans Because of the long-term nature of pension plans, the accounting for pensions is complex and can be impacted by several factors, including accounting methods, investment and funding policies and the plan’s actuarial assumptions. The Company’s pension accounting policy complies with the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 87, “Employer’s Accounting for Pension Plans” (“SFAS 87”), and reflects the long-term nature of benefit obligations and the investment horizon of plan assets. The Company has an established process for evaluating the plans, their performance and significant plan assumptions, including the assumed discount rate and the long-term rate of return (“LTROR”). At least annually, an independent consultant is engaged to assist U.S. Bancorp’s Compensation Committee in evaluating plan objectives, investment policies considering its long-term investment time horizon and asset allocation strategies, funding policies and significant plan assumptions. Although plan assumptions are established annually, the Company may update its analysis on an interim basis in order to be responsive to significant events that occur during the year, such as plan mergers and amendments.

     The Company’s pension plan measurement date for purposes of its financial statements is September 30. At the measurement date, plan assets are determined based on fair value, generally representing observable market prices. The projected benefit obligation is determined based on the present value of projected benefit distributions at an assumed discount rate. The discount rate utilized is based on match-funding maturities and interest payments of high quality corporate bonds available in the market place to the projected cash flows of the plan as of the measurement date. At September 30, 2002 and 2001, the discount rate approximated the Moody’s Aa corporate bond rating for projected benefit distributions with duration of 11.6 years. Periodic pension expense includes service costs, interest costs based on an assumed discount rate, an expected return on plan assets based on an actuarially derived market-related
 
U.S. Bancorp  25


Table of Contents

value and amortization of actuarial gains and losses. Accounting guidance provided within SFAS 87 has the effect of reducing earnings volatility related to short-term changes in interest rates and market valuations. Actuarial gains and losses include the impact of plan amendments and various unrecognized gains and losses which are deferred and amortized over the future service periods of active employees. The market-related value utilized to determine the expected return on plan assets is based on fair value adjusted for the difference between expected returns and actual performance of plan assets. The unrealized difference between actual experience and expected returns is included in the market-related value ratably over a five-year period. Any unrecognized gains or losses related to changes in the amount of the projected benefit obligation or plan assets resulting from experience different from the assumed discount rate or expected returns and from changes in assumptions are deferred. To the extent an unrecognized gain or loss, excluding the unrecognized asset gain or loss, exceeds 10 percent of the greater of the projected benefit obligation or the market-related value of plan assets (“10 percent corridor”), the excess is recognized over the future service periods of active employees. At September 30, 2002, the accumulated unrecognized loss subject to minimum amortization requirements under SFAS 87 for 2003 approximated $177 million and was less than the 10 percent corridor. The total unrecognized asset loss approximated $675 million and will ratably decrease the actuarially derived market-related value of plan assets through 2007. The impact to pension expense of the net unrecognized losses will increase pension costs in each year from 2004 to 2007, by approximately $36.6 million, $41.9 million, $52.3 million and $18.0 million, respectively, during that timeframe. This assumes that the performance of plan assets meets the assumed LTROR. Actual results may vary depending on the performance of plan assets and changes to assumptions required in the future.
     In accordance with its existing practices, the independent pension consultant utilized by the Company updated the analysis of expected rates of return and evaluated peer group data, market conditions and other factors relevant to determining the LTROR assumptions for determining pension costs for 2003. In light of recent market performance and the results of the independent analysis, the Company made a decision to re-measure its pension plans effective in the third quarter of 2002 based on current information with respect to asset values, a reduction in the LTROR, discount rates, census data and other relevant factors. The impact of changes to assumptions for the pension plans did not have a material impact on the future financial results of the Company. The funding policy is generally to maintain a funded status sufficient to meet participant benefit obligations. The Company contributed $150.0 million in 2002 to the qualified pension plan in accordance with this policy. Future funding requirements are dependent on the performance of the pension plan but are not expected to have a material impact on the liquidity of the Company. The table below provides a summary of changes in pension plan assumptions as of September 30.
     As a result of this interim period re-measurement and other factors, the Company’s total pension cost for 2002 increased by approximately $1.0 million, reducing the Company’s pension and profit sharing credit from $64.8 million in 2001 to $63.8 million in 2002. Pension costs increased by $32.5 million related to a reduction in the expected rate of return on the Company’s pension plan assets, utilizing a lower discount rate to determine the projected benefit obligation given the declining rate environment and the impact of changes in employee demographics. Offsetting this increase were a one-time curtailment gain of $9.0 million related to freezing certain benefits of a nonqualified pension plan, a reduction in service costs of $11.9 million related to changes in the pension plans at the time of the plan mergers and a $10.5 million reduction in pension costs associated with establishing a profit sharing plan for employees of Piper and discontinuing their participation in the defined benefit plan. Contributions to the profit sharing plan in 2002 were minimal given the lower financial performance of the Capital Markets business line.
     For purposes of determining the periodic pension cost for 2002, the LTROR declined from 12.2 percent for the Firstar pension plan and 11.0 percent for the USBM plan (a blended rate of approximately 11.6 percent) in 2001 to approximately 10.9 percent for 2002. This reflected utilizing a LTROR of 11.9 percent for the first six months of 2002 and 9.9 percent for the remainder of the year. The discount rate declined from 8.0 percent for the Firstar pension plan and 7.8 percent for the USBM pension plan (blended rate of approximately 7.9 percent) to 7.2 percent for 2002. This
                                                         
As Reported

Combined or Weighted Plan
Assumptions (a) USBM Firstar

2003 2002 2001 2001 2000 2001 2000

Expected long-term return on plan assets
    9.9 %     10.9 %     11.6 %     11.0 %     9.5 %     12.2 %     12.2 %
Discount rate in determining benefit obligations
    6.8       7.2       7.9       7.5       7.8       7.5       8.0  
Rate of increase in future compensation
    3.5       3.5       4.8       3.5       5.6       3.5       4.0  

(a) The weighted rates for 2002 represent a blended rate utilizing the original 2002 assumption for the first six months of 2002 and the rates for 2003 for the second six months of 2002. The rates for 2003 represent the most recent information available at the re-measurement date.

 
26 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

reflected utilizing a discount rate of 7.5 percent for the first six months of 2002 and 6.8 percent for the remainder of the year. Offsetting these factors somewhat was the expected benefit of merging the defined benefit pension plan of Firstar, which used a final average pay formula for determining pension benefits, with the cash balance pension plan of USBM.
     In 2003, it is estimated that changes to the LTROR and discount rate will increase 2003 pension costs by approximately $27.3 million. Offsetting much of this increase is an expected benefit of approximately $19.0 million associated with lower interest costs related to cash balance accounts and actual changes in employee demographics, such as retirement age. Excluding the impact of the one-time curtailment gain in 2002, the net increase in pension cost relative to 2002 will be approximately $8.3 million.
     As discussed above, investment and funding policies and related pension plan assumptions can have an impact on the results of the Company. As such, U.S. Bancorp’s Compensation Committee regularly evaluates plan objectives, investment policies considering its long-term investment time horizon and asset allocation strategies, funding policies and significant plan assumptions. The Company’s pension plan objectives include maintaining a funded status sufficient to meet participant benefit obligations over time while reducing long-term funding requirements and pension costs. In establishing its investment policies and asset allocation strategies, the Company considers expected returns and the volatility associated with different strategies. The independent consultant performs stochastic modeling that projects numerous outcomes using a broad range of possible scenarios, including a mix of possible rates of inflation and economic growth. Some of the scenarios included are: low inflation and high growth (ideal growth), low inflation and low growth (recession), high inflation and low growth (stagflation) and high inflation and high growth (inflationary growth). Starting with current economic information, the model bases its projections on past relationships between inflation, fixed income rates and equity returns when these types of economic conditions have existed over the previous 30 years, both in the U.S. and in foreign countries. Approximately five-hundred different scenarios are modeled and then the results are summarized into percentiles that are utilized to evaluate the potential performance of alternative asset allocation strategies under different scenarios.
     Based on an analysis of historical performance by asset class, over any 20-year period since the mid-1940’s, investments in equities have outperformed other investment classes but are subject to higher volatility. While an asset allocation including bonds and other assets generally has lower volatility and may provide protection in a declining interest rate environment, it limits the pension plan’s long-term up-side potential. Given the pension plan’s investment horizon and the financial viability of the Company to meet its funding objectives, the Committee has determined that an asset allocation strategy investing in 100% equities diversified among various domestic equity categories and international equities is appropriate. The following table provides a summary of asset allocations adopted by the Company compared with a typical asset allocation alternative:
                                                   
Asset Allocation Expected Returns


Typical December Standard
Asset Class Asset Mix 2002 Target (a) Compound Average Deviation

Domestic Equities
                                               
 
Large Cap
    30 %     33 %     36 %     8.5 %     9.9 %     18.0 %
 
Mid Cap
    15       18       18       8.8       10.8       21.1  
 
Small Cap
    15       27       26       9.0       11.5       24.0  
 
International Equities
    10       18       20       8.7       10.8       21.9  
 
Fixed Income
    30                                      
 
Other
          4                                
     
     
     
                         
Total mix or weighted rates
    100 %     100 %     100 %     9.1       10.7       18.8  
     
     
     
                         
 
LTROR assumed
    8.1 %             9.9 % (b)                        
 
Standard deviation
    14.1 %             18.8 %                        
 
Sharpe ratio (c)
    .409               .382                          

(a)  The target asset allocation was modified slightly from the existing asset allocation at September 30, 2002, to enhance the portfolio’s diversification.
(b)  The LTROR assumed for the target asset allocation strategy of 9.9 percent is based on a range of estimates evaluated by the Company, including the compound expected return of 9.1 percent and the average expected return of 10.7 percent.
(c)  The Sharpe ratio is a direct measure of reward-to-risk. The Sharpe ratio for these asset allocation strategies is considered to be within acceptable parameters.

     Regardless of the extent of the Company’s analysis of alternative asset allocation strategies, economic scenarios and possible outcomes, plan assumptions developed are subject to imprecision and changes in economic factors. To illustrate, for the period from 1994 to 2001, the actual return on plan assets was 11.3 percent compared with an

 
U.S. Bancorp  27


Table of Contents

assumed LTROR of approximately 11.1 percent and an expected compound rate of return of 9.9 percent. As a result of the modeling imprecision and uncertainty, the Company considers a range of potential expected rates of return, economic conditions for several scenarios, historical performance relative to assumed rates of return and asset allocation and LTROR information for a peer group in establishing its assumptions. The Company plans to use the 9.9 percent LTROR established in the recent re-measurement to initially estimate its periodic pension expense for 2003.
     Because of the subjective nature of plan assumptions, a sensitivity analysis to hypothetical changes in the LTROR and the discount rate is provided below:
     Due to the complexity of forecasting pension plan activities, the accounting method utilized for pension plans, management’s ability to respond to factors impacting the plans and the hypothetical nature of this information, the actual changes in periodic pension costs could be significantly different than the information provided in the sensitivity analysis.
                                         
Base
LTROR 7.9% 8.9% 9.9% 10.9% 11.9%

Incremental benefit (cost)
  $ (40.7 )   $ (20.4 )   $     $ 20.4     $ 40.7  
Percent of 2002 net income
    (.77 )%     (.38 )%     %     .38 %     .77 %

                                         
    Base
Discount 4.8% 5.8% 6.8% 7.8% 8.8%

Incremental benefit (cost)
  $ (49.3 )   $ (25.2 )   $     $ 9.9     $ 26.2  
Percent of 2002 net income
    (.93 )%     (.48 )%     %     .19 %     .49 %

Merger and Restructuring-Related Items The Company incurred merger and restructuring-related items in each of the last three years in conjunction with its acquisitions. Merger and restructuring-related items included in pre-tax earnings were $324.1 million ($211.3 million after-tax) in 2002, compared with $1,266.4 million ($844.3 million after-tax) and $348.7 million ($231.3 million after-tax) for 2001 and 2000, respectively. Merger and restructuring-related items in 2002 included $271.1 million of net expense associated with the Firstar/USBM merger and $53.0 million associated with NOVA and other smaller acquisitions. Merger and restructuring-related items in 2002 associated with the Firstar/USBM merger were primarily related to systems conversions and integration, asset write-downs and lease terminations recognized at the completion of conversions. Offsetting a portion of these costs in 2002 was an asset gain related to the sale of a non-strategic investment in a sub-prime lending business and a mark-to-market recovery associated with the liquidation of U.S. Bancorp Libra’s investment portfolio. The Company exited this business in 2001 and the liquidation efforts were substantially completed in the second quarter of 2002.

     At December 31, 2002, the integration of Firstar and USBM was completed. Total merger and restructuring-related items associated with the Firstar/ USBM merger were approximately $1.4 billion and no additional costs are expected going forward. In connection with the acquisition of NOVA, the integration of merchant processing platforms and business processes of U.S. Bank National Association and NOVA will continue through late 2003. Management estimates the Company will incur pre-tax merger and restructuring-related charges of approximately $36.9 million in 2003 to complete the NOVA acquisition. In addition, the Company anticipates additional pre-tax merger and restructuring related expenses in 2003 of $14.7 million related to the Bay View acquisition, $8.6 million related to the State Street Corporate Trust acquisition and $7.2 million as a result of other smaller acquisitions.
     Merger and restructuring-related items in 2001 included $382.2 million in the provision for credit losses, a $62.2 million gain on the required sale of branches and $946.4 million of noninterest expense. Total merger and restructuring-related items in 2001 consisted of $1,167.2 million related to the Firstar/USBM merger, $50.7 million of restructuring expenses for Piper and $48.5 million related to NOVA and other smaller acquisitions. With respect to the Firstar/USBM merger, the $1,167.2 million of merger and restructuring-related items included $268.2 million for severance and employee-related costs and $477.6 million of charges to exit business lines and products, sell credit portfolios or otherwise realign business practices in the new Company. The Company also incurred $208.1 million of systems conversion and business integration costs, $48.7 million for lease cancellation and other building-related costs, $226.8 million for transaction costs, funding a charitable foundation to reaffirm a commitment to its markets and other costs, and a $62.2 million gain related to the required sale of branches. In response to significant changes in the securities markets during 2001, including increased volatility, changes in equity valuations and the increasingly competitive environment for the industry, Piper restructured its operations. The restructuring improved the operating efficiency of the business by removing excess capacity
 
28 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

from its product distribution network and by implementing more effective business processes. Restructuring activities related to Piper were completed in 2001.
     In 2000, merger and restructuring-related items included in noninterest expense consisted of $227.0 million related to the merger of Firstar and Mercantile Bancorporation, $52.6 million related to the merger of Firstar and Star Banc Corporation and $69.1 million primarily related to other acquisitions by USBM. Included in merger and restructuring-related items were $59.4 for severance and employee-related costs, $193.5 million for systems conversions, $47.3 million for lease cancellations and other building-related costs and $48.5 million of other business integration costs.
     Refer to Notes 4 and 5 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on these acquired businesses and merger and restructuring-related items.

Income Tax Expense The provision for income taxes was $1,776.3 million (an effective rate of 34.8 percent) in 2002, compared with $927.7 million (an effective rate of 35.2 percent) in 2001 and $1,512.2 million (an effective rate of 34.5 percent) in 2000. The decrease in the effective tax rate in 2002, compared with 2001, was primarily driven by a change in unitary state tax apportionment factors, a decrease in non-deductible merger and restructuring-related charges and the change in accounting for goodwill. The effective tax rate increase in 2001, compared with 2000, was primarily due to a decline in tax-exempt interest related to sales of investment securities, the impact of unitary state tax apportionment factors on the Company, non-deductible merger and restructuring-related costs and the acquisition of NOVA.

     The Company’s net deferred tax liability was $1,664.1 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $573.2 million for the year ended 2001. The change in 2002 primarily relates to leasing activities and unrealized appreciation in securities available-for-sale and financial instruments. For further information on income taxes, refer to Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

BALANCE SHEET ANALYSIS

Average earning assets were $149.1 billion in 2002, compared with $145.2 billion in 2001. The increase in average earning assets of $3.9 billion (2.7 percent) was primarily driven by increases in the investment portfolio, core retail loan growth, and the impact of acquisitions. This growth was partially offset by declines in commercial and commercial real estate loans reflecting lower borrowing

 
 Table 7   Loan Portfolio Distribution
                                                                                       
2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total

Commercial
                                                                               
 
Commercial
  $ 36,584       31.5 %   $ 40,472       35.4 %   $ 47,041       38.5 %   $ 42,021       37.1 %   $ 37,777       35.3 %
 
Lease financing
    5,360       4.6       5,858       5.1       5,776       4.7       3,835       3.4       3,291       3.1  
   
   
Total commercial
    41,944       36.1       46,330       40.5       52,817       43.2       45,856       40.5       41,068       38.4  
 
Commercial real estate
                                                                               
 
Commercial mortgages
    20,325       17.5       18,765       16.4       19,466       15.9       18,636       16.5       16,602       15.5  
 
Construction and development
    6,542       5.6       6,608       5.8       6,977       5.7       6,506       5.7       5,206       4.9  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    26,867       23.1       25,373       22.2       26,443       21.6       25,142       22.2       21,808       20.4  
 
Residential mortgages
    9,746       8.4       7,829       6.8       9,397       7.7       12,760       11.3       14,982       14.0  
 
Retail
                                                                               
 
Credit card
    5,665       4.9       5,889       5.1       6,012       4.9       5,004       4.4       4,856       4.5  
 
Retail leasing
    5,680       4.9       4,906       4.3       4,153       3.4       2,123       1.9       1,621       1.5  
 
Home equity and second mortgages (a)
    13,572       11.6       12,235       10.7       11,956       9.7       *       *       *       *  
 
Other retail
                                                                               
   
Revolving credit
    2,650       2.3       2,673       2.3       2,750       2.2       *       *       *       *  
   
Installment
    2,258       1.9       2,292       2.0       2,186       1.8       *       *       *       *  
   
Automobile
    6,343       5.5       5,660       5.0       5,609       4.6       *       *       *       *  
   
Student
    1,526       1.3       1,218       1.1       1,042       .9       *       *       *       *  
   
     
Total other retail (a)
    12,777       11.0       11,843       10.4       11,587       9.5       22,344       19.7       22,623       21.2  
   
   
Total retail
    37,694       32.4       34,873       30.5       33,708       27.5       29,471       26.0       29,100       27.2  
   
     
Total loans
  $ 116,251       100.0 %   $ 114,405       100.0 %   $ 122,365       100.0 %   $ 113,229       100.0 %   $ 106,958       100.0 %

(a)  Home equity and second mortgages are included within the total other retail category for the periods prior to the year 2000.
 * Information not available

 
U.S. Bancorp  29


Table of Contents

requirements of commercial customers and credit related actions of the Company. The increase in average earning assets was funded with an increase in net free funds, including an increase in average noninterest-bearing deposits of $3.6 billion, and an increase in average interest-bearing liabilities of $.8 billion, consisting principally of higher core savings balances and more favorably priced longer-term wholesale funding.
     For average balance information, refer to Consolidated Daily Average Balance Sheet and Related Yields and Rates on pages 108 and 109.

Loans The Company’s total loan portfolio was $116.3 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $114.4 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $1.9 billion (1.6 percent). The increase in total loans was driven by strong retail loan and residential mortgage growth, partially offset by a decline in commercial loans due in part to current economic conditions. During 2002, there were reclassifications between loan categories that occurred in connection with conforming loan classifications at the time of system conversions. Prior years were not restated, as it was impractical to determine the extent of reclassification for all periods presented. Average total loans decreased $3.7 billion (3.1 percent) in 2002, compared with 2001. The decline in total average loans in 2002, compared with 2001, was driven by the decline in commercial and commercial real estate loans in 2002 and the impact of transfers of high credit quality commercial loans to the loan conduit in 2001. The decline in commercial and commercial real estate loans was partially offset by growth in retail loans and residential mortgages. Average total loans on a core basis decreased by $2.7 billion (2.2 percent) relative to the prior year.

Commercial Commercial loans, including lease financing, totaled $41.9 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $46.3 billion at December 31, 2001, a decrease of $4.4 billion (9.5 percent). The decline was driven by softness in loan demand, credit-related actions including

 
 Table 8   Commercial Loan Exposure by Industry Group and Geography
                                   
December 31, 2002 December 31, 2001

Industry Group  (Dollars in Millions) Loans Percent Loans Percent

Consumer products and services
  $ 7,206       17.2 %   $ 7,622       16.5 %
Financials
    5,769       13.7       5,859       12.6  
Capital goods
    5,486       13.1       6,497       14.0  
Commercial services and supplies
    3,853       9.2       4,178       9.0  
Agriculture
    3,153       7.5       3,433       7.4  
Transportation
    2,231       5.3       2,560       5.5  
Consumer staples
    1,924       4.6       2,060       4.5  
Private investors
    1,759       4.2       1,864       4.0  
Paper and forestry products, mining and basic materials
    1,664       4.0       2,053       4.4  
Health care
    1,475       3.5       1,567       3.4  
Property management and development
    1,266       3.0       1,384       3.0  
Technology
    797       1.9       1,089       2.4  
Energy
    575       1.4       410       .9  
Other
    4,786       11.4       5,754       12.4  
   
 
Total
  $ 41,944       100.0 %   $ 46,330       100.0 %

Geography
                               

California
  $ 4,127       9.8 %   $ 3,969       8.6 %
Colorado
    1,796       4.3       2,008       4.3  
Illinois
    2,214       5.3       2,339       5.0  
Minnesota
    6,605       15.7       6,511       14.1  
Missouri
    2,895       6.9       2,104       4.5  
Ohio
    2,455       5.9       2,896       6.3  
Oregon
    1,604       3.8       2,014       4.3  
Washington
    3,129       7.5       3,882       8.4  
Wisconsin
    3,052       7.3       3,115       6.7  
Iowa, Kansas, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota
    4,421       10.5       5,059       10.9  
Arkansas, Indiana, Kentucky, Tennessee
    1,865       4.4       1,897       4.1  
Idaho, Montana, Wyoming
    996       2.4       1,014       2.2  
Arizona, Nevada, Utah
    986       2.4       1,057       2.3  
   
 
Total banking region
    36,145       86.2       37,865       81.7  
Outside the Company’s banking region
    5,799       13.8       8,465       18.3  
   
 
Total
  $ 41,944       100.0 %   $ 46,330       100.0 %

 
30 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

workout activities, and reclassifications to other loan categories. Included in the change for commercial loans was a reclassification of approximately $1.2 billion from commercial loans predominately to the commercial real estate ($.5 billion) and residential mortgages ($.7 billion) loan categories in 2002. Average commercial loans in 2002 decreased by $6.3 billion (12.5 percent). Approximately $721 million of the change in average commercial loans year-over-year for 2002 was due to the transfer of high credit quality commercial loans to the loan conduit. Also impacting the decline in average commercial loans was the transfer of $680 million in unsecured small business product to loans held for sale in 2001. On a core basis, average commercial loans decreased by $5.3 billion (9.9 percent) relative to the prior year.
     Table 8 provides a summary of commercial loans by industry and geographic locations.

Commercial Real Estate The Company’s portfolio of commercial real estate loans, which includes commercial mortgages and construction loans, was $26.9 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $25.4 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $1.5 billion (5.9 percent). Included in the change in commercial real estate loans at year-end was a net reclassification of approximately $.5 billion to the commercial real estate loan category predominately from the commercial loan category. Commercial mortgages outstanding increased by $1.6 billion (8.3 percent), driven by loan reclassifications and growth in small business administration lending, while real estate construction and development loans remained essentially flat compared with a year ago. Average commercial real estate loans were essentially flat at $25.7 billion in 2002, compared with $26.1 billion in 2001. Table 9 provides a summary of commercial real estate exposures by property type and geographic location.

     The Company maintains the real estate construction designation until the project is producing sufficient cash flow to service traditional mortgage financing, at which time, if retained, the loan is transferred to the commercial mortgage portfolio. Approximately $1.4 billion of construction loans were permanently financed and transferred to the commercial mortgage loan category in 2002. At year-end 2002, $182 million of tax-exempt industrial development loans were secured by real estate.
 
 Table 9   Commercial Real Estate Exposure by Property Type and Geography
                                   
  December 31, 2002   December 31, 2001

Property Type (Dollars in Millions) Loans Percent Loans Percent

Business owner occupied
  $ 6,513       24.2 %   $ 5,159       20.3 %
Multi-family
    3,258       12.1       2,842       11.2  
Commercial property
                               
 
Industrial
    1,227       4.6       1,995       7.9  
 
Office
    3,564       13.3       2,948       11.6  
 
Retail
    3,832       14.3       2,704       10.7  
 
Other
    1,447       5.4       1,949       7.7  
Homebuilders
    2,142       8.0       1,417       5.6  
Hotel/motel
    2,585       9.6       1,985       7.8  
Health care facilities
    1,290       4.8       1,183       4.7  
Other
    1,009       3.7       3,191       12.5  
   
 
Total
  $ 26,867       100.0 %   $ 25,373       100.0 %

Geography
                               

California
  $ 4,277       15.9 %   $ 3,399       13.4 %
Colorado
    1,190       4.4       840       3.3  
Illinois
    1,140       4.2       1,581       6.2  
Minnesota
    1,508       5.6       1,401       5.5  
Missouri
    2,297       8.6       2,439       9.6  
Ohio
    2,264       8.4       2,274       9.0  
Oregon
    1,614       6.0       1,427       5.6  
Washington
    3,242       12.1       2,671       10.5  
Wisconsin
    2,040       7.6       2,128       8.4  
Iowa, Kansas, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota
    1,895       7.1       2,016       8.0  
Arkansas, Indiana, Kentucky, Tennessee
    1,679       6.2       2,055       8.1  
Idaho, Montana, Wyoming
    682       2.5       690       2.7  
Arizona, Nevada, Utah
    1,439       5.4       1,182       4.7  
   
 
Total banking region
    25,267       94.0       24,103       95.0  
Outside the Company’s banking region
    1,600       6.0       1,270       5.0  
   
 
Total
  $ 26,867       100.0 %   $ 25,373       100.0 %

 
U.S. Bancorp  31


Table of Contents

The Company’s commercial real estate mortgages and construction loans had unfunded commitments of $7.9 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $6.0 billion at December 31, 2001. The Company also finances the operations of real estate developers and other entities with operations related to real estate. These loans are not secured directly by real estate and are subject to terms and conditions similar to commercial loans. These loans were included in the commercial loan category and totaled $635 million at December 31, 2002.

Residential Mortgages Residential mortgages held in the loan portfolio were $9.7 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $7.8 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $1.9 billion (24.5 percent). The increase in residential mortgages was driven by an increase in refinancing given the current rate environment and strong growth in first lien home equity loans through the Company’s Consumer Finance division. The increase also reflects a decision to retain adjustable rate mortgages in the portfolio for asset liability management purposes and a reclassification of approximately $.7 billion to the residential mortgages category predominately from the commercial loan category. This growth was partially offset by approximately $.9 billion in residential loan sales during 2002. Average residential mortgages of $8.4 billion were essentially unchanged from a year ago.

Retail Total retail loans outstanding, which include credit card, retail leasing, home equity and second mortgages and other retail loans, were $37.7 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $34.9 billion at December 31, 2001. The increase of $2.8 billion (8.1 percent) was driven by an increase in home equity lines during the recent declining rate environment and an increase in the retail leasing portfolio. This growth was partially offset by two credit card sales in 2002 that totaled approximately $483 million. Average retail loans increased $3.1 billion (9.1 percent) to $36.5 billion in 2002. Impacting the growth in average retail loans in 2002, compared with 2001, were portfolio sales of $1.3 billion in 2001 related to the high loan-to-value home equity portfolio and indirect automobile loans. On a core basis, average retail loans increased $1.8 billion (5.3 percent) from a year ago with growth in most retail loan categories. Of the total retail loans outstanding, approximately 89.8 percent are to customers located in the Company’s banking region.

Loans Held for Sale At December 31, 2002, loans held for sale, consisting primarily of residential mortgages to be sold in the secondary markets, were $4.2 billion, compared with $2.8 billion at December 31, 2001. The $1.3 billion (47.5 percent) increase primarily reflected strong mortgage loan origination volume in connection with refinancing activity in 2002 given the declining interest rates for residential mortgage loans. Residential mortgage production was $23.2 billion in 2002, compared with $15.6 billion in 2001. This is substantially higher than mortgage production of $6.7 billion in 2000.

Investment Securities The Company uses its investment securities portfolio for several purposes. It serves as a vehicle to manage interest rate and prepayment risk, generates interest and dividend income from the investment of excess funds depending on loan demand, provides liquidity and is used as collateral for public deposits and wholesale funding sources.

     At December 31, 2002, investment securities, both available-for-sale and held-to-maturity, totaled $28.5 billion, compared with $26.6 billion at December 31, 2001. The $1.9 billion (7.1 percent) increase reflected the reinvestment of proceeds from loan sales, declines in commercial and commercial real estate loan balances and deposits assumed from the recent Bay View transaction. During 2002, the Company sold $13.7 billion of fixed-rate securities, in part to realign the portfolio to hedge against interest rate changes and to generate gains given the impact of prepayments in the mortgage servicing rights portfolio. A portion of the fixed-rate securities sold was replaced with floating-rate securities in conjunction with the Company’s interest rate risk management strategies. At December 31, 2002, approximately 18.6 percent of the investment securities portfolio represented adjustable rate financial instruments, compared with 15.6 percent as of December 31, 2001.
 
 Table 10   Selected Loan Maturity Distribution
                                   
Over One
One Year Through Over Five
December 31, 2002 (Dollars in Millions) or Less Five Years Years Total

Commercial
  $ 21,037     $ 18,039     $ 2,868     $ 41,944  
Commercial real estate
    7,382       13,147       6,338       26,867  
Residential mortgages
    841       1,827       7,078       9,746  
Retail
    11,660       16,010       10,024       37,694  
   
 
Total loans
  $ 40,920     $ 49,023     $ 26,308     $ 116,251  
Total of loans due after one year with
Predetermined interest rates
                          $ 38,185  
 
Floating interest rates
                          $ 37,146  

 
32 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

     The weighted-average yield of the available-for-sale portfolio was 4.97 percent at December 31, 2002, compared with 5.58 percent at December 31, 2001. The average maturity of the available-for-sale portfolio dropped to 2.8 years at December 31, 2002, down from 5.4 years at December 31, 2001. The relative mix of the type of investment securities maintained in the portfolio is provided in Table 11. The change in investment portfolio mix reflected sales of tax-exempt municipal securities that were replaced primarily by collateralized mortgage obligations. At December 31, 2002, the available-for-sale portfolio included a $714 million net unrealized gain, compared with a net unrealized gain of $15 million at December 31, 2001.
 
 Table 11   Investment Securities
                                                                     
Available-for-Sale Held-to-Maturity

Weighted Weighted
Average Weighted Average Weighted
Amortized Fair Maturity in Average Amortized Fair Maturity in Average
December 31, 2002 (Dollars in Millions) Cost Value Years Yield Cost Value Years Yield

 
U.S. Treasury and agencies
                                                               
 
Maturing in one year or less
  $ 162     $ 164       .44       3.83 %   $     $             %
 
Maturing after one year through five years
    207       218       2.97       4.37                          
 
Maturing after five years through ten years
    41       42       7.33       4.12                          
 
Maturing after ten years
    11       12       11.38       5.23                          
   
   
Total
  $ 421     $ 436       2.64       4.16 %   $     $             %
   
 
Mortgage-backed securities
                                                               
 
Maturing in one year or less
  $ 3,878     $ 3,904       .61       3.33 %   $     $             %
 
Maturing after one year through five years
    20,359       20,988       2.69       5.18       20       20       3.25       7.67  
 
Maturing after five years through ten years
    725       768       5.61       5.27                          
 
Maturing after ten years
    5       6       13.85       6.12                          
   
   
Total
  $ 24,967     $ 25,666       2.46       4.90 %   $ 20     $ 20       3.25       7.67 %
   
 
Asset-backed securities
                                                               
 
Maturing in one year or less
  $ 1     $ 1       .25       5.50 %   $     $             %
 
Maturing after one year through five years
    446       459       3.39       5.24                          
 
Maturing after five years through ten years
    199       210       7.12       5.72                          
 
Maturing after ten years
                                               
   
   
Total
  $ 646     $ 670       4.53       5.39 %   $     $             %
   
 
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
                                                               
 
Maturing in one year or less
  $ 102     $ 103       .42       7.26 %   $ 34     $ 35       .47       3.60 %
 
Maturing after one year through five years
    263       275       2.73       7.26       62       66       2.97       6.20  
 
Maturing after five years through ten years
    140       147       6.89       7.42       48       52       7.20       6.28  
 
Maturing after ten years
    53       54       18.32       9.32       69       67       15.07       5.85  
   
   
Total
  $ 558     $ 579       4.83       7.50 %   $ 213     $ 220       7.44       5.69 %
   
 
Other debt securities
                                                               
 
Maturing in one year or less
  $ 33     $ 34       .63       5.50 %   $     $             %
 
Maturing after one year through five years
    165       165       2.57       11.41                          
 
Maturing after five years through ten years
    4       3       6.54       5.15                          
 
Maturing after ten years
    262       233       24.36       2.30                          
   
   
Total
  $ 464     $ 435       14.76       5.80 %   $     $             %
   
Other investments
  $ 485     $ 469             %   $     $             %
   
Total investment securities
  $ 27,541     $ 28,255       2.77       4.97 %   $ 233     $ 240       7.08       5.86 %

Note:  Information related to asset and mortgage-backed securities included above is presented based upon weighted average maturities anticipating future prepayments. Average yields are presented on a fully-taxable equivalent basis. Yields on available-for-sale securities are computed based on historical cost balances. Average yield and maturity calculations exclude equity securities that have no stated yield or maturity.

                                   
2002 2001

Amortized Percent Amortized Percent
At December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Cost of Total Cost of Total

U.S. treasuries and agencies
  $ 421       1.5 %   $ 439       1.7 %
Mortgage-backed securities
    24,987       90.0       21,965       82.6  
Asset-backed securities
    646       2.3       2,091       7.9  
Obligations of states and political subdivisions
    771       2.8       1,148       4.3  
Other securities and investments
    949       3.4       950       3.5  
   
 
Total investment securities
  $ 27,774       100.0 %   $ 26,593       100.0 %

 
U.S. Bancorp  33


Table of Contents

Deposits Total deposits were $115.5 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $105.2 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $10.3 billion (9.8 percent). The increase in total deposits was the result of the continued desire by customers to maintain liquidity and specific deposit gathering initiatives and funding decisions in 2002.

     Noninterest-bearing deposits were $35.1 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $31.2 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $3.9 billion (12.5 percent). Average noninterest-bearing deposits were $28.7 billion in 2002, an increase of $3.6 billion (14.4 percent), compared with 2001. The increase in noninterest-bearing deposits was primarily attributable to business and government banking customers that maintained higher compensating balances given the current interest rate environment.
     Interest-bearing savings deposits totaled $50.2 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $44.7 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $5.5 billion (12.3 percent). Average interest-bearing savings deposits were $45.8 billion in 2002, an increase of $2.3 billion (5.4 percent), compared with 2001. This growth was related to specific deposit gathering initiatives of the Company in 2002, the continued downturn in equity capital markets and the current interest rate environment prompting many customers to increase their liquidity in accessible deposits.
     Interest-bearing time deposits were $30.2 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $29.3 billion at December 31, 2001, an increase of $.9 billion (3.1 percent). The increase in interest-bearing time deposits was driven by an increase of $3.7 billion (42.7 percent) in time deposits greater than $100,000 partially offset by a decline in the higher cost time certificates of deposits less than $100,000 of $2.8 billion (13.3 percent). Time certificates of deposits are largely viewed as purchased funds and are managed to levels deemed appropriate given alternative funding sources. The decline in time certificates of deposits less than $100,000 reflected a shift in product mix toward savings products and funding decisions toward more favorably priced wholesale funding sources given the current interest rate environment. Average time certificates of deposit less than $100,000 declined $4.0 billion (17.3 percent). The decline in average time certificates of deposit less than $100,000 reflected the net impact of bank acquisitions and branch divestitures and management’s pricing decisions to change the mix of funding toward lower rate wholesale funding sources.
     Table 12 provides a summary of total deposits by type of deposit.

Borrowings The Company utilizes both short-term and long-term borrowings to fund growth of earning assets in excess of deposit growth. Short-term borrowings, which include federal funds purchased, securities sold under agreements to repurchase and other short-term borrowings, were $7.8 billion at December 31, 2002, down $6.9 billion (46.8 percent) from $14.7 billion at year-end 2001. Short-term funding is managed to levels deemed appropriate given

 
 Table 12   Deposits

The composition of deposits was as follows:

                                                                                     
2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total Amount of Total

Noninterest-bearing deposits
  $ 35,106       30.4 %   $ 31,212       29.7 %   $ 26,633       24.3 %   $ 26,350       25.5 %   $ 27,479       26.3 %
Interest-bearing deposits
                                                                               
 
Interest checking
    17,467       15.1       15,251       14.5       13,982       12.8       13,141       12.7       13,385       12.8  
 
Money market accounts
    27,753       24.0       24,835       23.6       23,899       21.8       22,751       22.0       22,086       21.2  
 
Savings accounts
    5,021       4.4       4,637       4.4       4,516       4.1       5,445       5.3       6,352       6.1  
   
   
Total of savings deposits
    50,241       43.5       44,723       42.5       42,397       38.7       41,337       40.0       41,823       40.1  
Time certificates of deposit less than $100,000
    17,973       15.5       20,724       19.7       25,780       23.5       25,394       24.5       27,935       26.8  
Time deposits greater than $100,000
                                                                               
 
Domestic
    9,427       8.2       7,286       6.9       11,221       10.3       9,348       9.0       6,261       6.0  
 
Foreign
    2,787       2.4       1,274       1.2       3,504       3.2       988       1.0       848       .8  
   
   
Total interest-bearing deposits
    80,428       69.6       74,007       70.3       82,902       75.7       77,067       74.5       76,867       73.7  
   
 
Total deposits
  $ 115,534       100.0 %   $ 105,219       100.0 %   $ 109,535       100.0 %   $ 103,417       100.0 %   $ 104,346       100.0 %

The maturity of time deposits greater than $100,000 was as follows:

           
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002

Three months or less
  $ 7,533  
Over three months through six months
    1,376  
Over six months through twelve months
    1,701  
Over twelve months
    1,604  
     
 
 
Total
  $ 12,214  

 
34 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

alternative funding sources. The decrease in short-term borrowings reflected the impact of funding earning assets primarily through growth in deposits and, to a lesser extent, a shift toward longer-term funding sources.
     Long-term debt was $28.6 billion at December 31, 2002, up from $25.7 billion at December 31, 2001. The $2.9 billion (11.2 percent) increase in long-term debt included the issuance of $1.0 billion of fixed-rate subordinated notes in February 2002, the issuance of $6.5 billion of medium-term notes and bank notes and the issuance of $3.1 billion of long-term Federal Home Loan Bank advances in 2002. The issuance of long-term debt was partially offset by repayments and maturities of $8.4 billion in 2002, including the repurchase on August 6, 2002, of approximately $1.1 billion accreted value of the Company’s convertible senior notes (the “CZARS”) due to mature in 2021. Refer to Note 14 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding long-term debt and the “Liquidity Risk Management” section for discussion of liquidity management of the Company.

CORPORATE RISK PROFILE

Overview Managing risks is an essential part of successfully operating a financial services company. The most prominent risk exposures are credit, residual, operational, interest rate, market and liquidity. Credit risk is the risk of not collecting the interest and/or the principal balance of a loan or investment when it is due. Residual risk is the potential reduction in the end-of-term value of leased assets or the residual cash flows related to asset securitization and other off-balance sheet structures. Operational risk includes risks related to fraud, legal and compliance risk, processing errors, technology and breaches of internal controls. Interest rate risk is the potential reduction of net interest income as a result of changes in interest rates. Rate movements can affect the repricing of assets and liabilities differently, as well as their market value. Market risk arises from fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, and equity prices that may result in changes in the values of financial instruments, such as trading and available-for-sale securities that are accounted for on a mark-to-market basis. Liquidity risk is the possible inability to fund obligations to depositors, investors or borrowers. In addition, corporate strategic decisions, as well as the risks described above, could give rise to reputation risk. Reputation risk is the risk that negative publicity or press, whether true or not, could result in costly litigation or cause a decline in the Company’s stock value, customer base or revenue.

Credit Risk Management The Company’s strategy for credit risk management includes well defined, centralized credit policies, uniform underwriting criteria, and ongoing risk monitoring and review processes for all commercial and consumer credit exposures. The strategy also emphasizes diversification on a geographic, industry and customer level, regular credit examinations and management reviews of loans experiencing deterioration of credit quality. The Company strives to identify potential problem loans early, take any necessary charge-offs promptly and maintain adequate reserve levels for probable loan losses. Commercial banking operations rely on a strong credit culture that combines prudent credit policies and individual lender accountability. The Company utilizes a credit risk rating system to measure the credit quality of individual commercial loan transactions and regularly forecasts potential changes in risk ratings and nonperforming status. The risk rating system is intended to identify and measure the credit quality of lending relationships. In the Company’s retail banking operations, standard credit scoring systems are used to assess consumer credit risks and to price consumer products accordingly. The Company also engages in non-lending activities that may give rise to credit risk, including interest rate swap contracts for balance sheet hedging purposes, foreign exchange transactions and interest rate swap contracts for customers, settlement risk and the processing of credit card transactions for merchants. These activities are also subject to credit review, analysis and approval processes.

     In evaluating its credit risk, the Company considers changes, if any, in underwriting activities, the loan portfolio composition (including product mix and geographic, industry or customer-specific concentrations), trends in loan performance, the level of allowance coverage and macroeconomic factors. The domestic economy has experienced slower growth since late 2000. During 2001, corporate earnings weakened and credit quality indicators among certain industry sectors deteriorated. Large corporate and middle market commercial businesses announced or continued to implement restructuring activities in an effort to improve operating margins. The stagnant economic growth was evidenced by the Federal Reserve Board’s (“FRB”) actions to stimulate economic growth through a series of interest rate reductions over the past 24 to 30 months. In response to declining economic conditions, company-specific portfolio trends, and the Firstar/USBM merger, the Company undertook an extensive review of its commercial and consumer loan portfolios in early 2001. As a result of this review, the Company initiated several actions during the first six months of 2001 including aligning the risk management practices and charge-off policies of the companies and restructuring and disposing of certain portfolios that did not align with the credit risk profile of the combined company. Credit portfolio restructuring activities included a specific segment of the Company’s health care portfolio, selling certain USBM
 
U.S. Bancorp  35


Table of Contents

consumer loan portfolios, renegotiating a credit card co-branding relationship and discontinuing an unsecured small business product that did not align with the product offerings of the combined company. The Company also implemented accelerated loan workout strategies for certain commercial credits. By the end of the second quarter of 2001, economic stimulus by the FRB as well as management’s actions appeared to have reduced the rate of credit quality deterioration. However, world events during the third quarter of 2001 had a profound impact on consumer confidence and related spending, governmental priorities and business activities. As a result of these events, the Company expected the economic slowdown to accelerate or be more prolonged than it had originally estimated. Accordingly, the Company conducted a review of its credit portfolios and recognized the need to address the impact that these events would have. In response to this evaluation, the Company increased the provision for credit losses by approximately $1,025 million in the third quarter of 2001 beyond expected levels.
     By the end of 2002, economic conditions had stabilized somewhat although the banking sector continued to experience elevated levels of nonperforming assets and net charge-offs, especially with respect to certain industry segments. Unemployment rates had increased slightly from a year ago and consumer spending and confidence levels had declined since 2001.

Credit Diversification The Company manages its credit risk, in part, through diversification of its loan portfolio. As part of its normal business activities, it offers a broad array of traditional commercial lending products and specialized products such as asset-based lending, commercial lease financing, agricultural credit, warehouse mortgage lending, commercial real estate, health care and correspondent banking. The Company also offers an array of retail lending products including credit cards, retail leases, home equity, revolving credit, lending to students and other consumer loans. These retail credit products are primarily offered through the branch office network, specialized trust, home mortgage and loan production offices, indirect distribution channels, such as automobile dealers and a consumer finance company. The Company monitors and manages the portfolio diversification by industry, customer and geography. Table 7 provides information with respect to the overall product diversification and changes in mix in 2002.

     The commercial portfolio reflects the Company’s focus on serving small business customers, middle market and larger corporate businesses throughout its 24-state banking region and national customers and within certain niche industry groups. Table 8 provides a summary of the significant industry groups and geographic locations of commercial loans outstanding at December 31, 2002 and 2001. The commercial loan portfolio is diversified among various industries with somewhat higher concentrations in consumer products and services, capital goods (including manufacturing and commercial construction-related businesses), and consumer staple industries. Additionally, the commercial portfolio is diversified across the Company’s geographical markets with 86.2 percent of total commercial loans within the 24 state banking region. Credit relationships outside of the Company’s banking region are typically niche businesses including the mortgage banking and the leasing businesses. Loans to mortgage banking customers are primarily warehouse lines which are collateralized with the underlying mortgages. The Company regularly monitors its mortgage collateral position to manage its risk exposure.
     Certain industry segments within the commercial loan portfolio, including communications, transportation and manufacturing sectors, as well as highly leveraged enterprise value financings, have experienced economic stress in 2002. Since 2001, the communications sector has been adversely impacted by excess capacity and represented only 1.2 percent of the commercial loan portfolio at December 31, 2002. At December 31, 2002, the transportation sector represented 5.3 percent of the total commercial loan portfolio. It has been impacted by reduced airline travel, slower economic activity and higher fuel costs that adversely impacted the trucking businesses. At year-end 2002, the Company’s transportation portfolio consisted of airline and airfreight businesses (28.1 percent of the sector), trucking businesses (52.9 percent of the sector) and the remainder in the railroad and shipping businesses (19.0 percent of the sector). Capital goods represented 13.1 percent of the total commercial portfolio at December 31, 2002. Included in this sector were approximately 34.0 percent of loans related to building products while engineering and construction equipment and machinery businesses were 31.6 percent and 21.6 percent, respectively. Manufacturing production levels and inventory reductions continues to cause financial stress in these portfolios.
     Within its commercial lending business, the Company also provides financing to enable customers to grow their businesses through acquisitions of existing businesses, buyouts or other recapitalizations. During a business cycle with slower economic growth, businesses with leveraged capital structures may experience insufficient cash flows to service their debt. The Company manages leveraged enterprise-value financings by maintaining well-defined underwriting standards, portfolio diversification and actively managing the customer relationship. Regardless of these actions, leveraged enterprise-value financings often exhibit stress during a recession or period of slow economic growth. Given this risk profile, the Company began to significantly de-emphasize and reduce the size of this
 
36 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

portfolio during the past year. The Company actively monitors the credit quality of these customers and develops action plans accordingly. Such leveraged enterprise-value financings approximated $2.9 billion in loans outstanding at December 31, 2002, compared with approximately $3.9 billion outstanding at December 31, 2001. The decline was primarily due to the Company’s decision to reduce its exposure to these types of lending arrangements through repayments, refinancing activities and loan sales. The sector has also been reduced by charge-offs taken during the year. The Company’s portfolio of leveraged financings is included in Table 8 and is diversified among industry groups similar to the total commercial loan portfolio.
     The commercial real estate portfolio reflects the Company’s focus on serving business owners within its footprint as well as regional investment-based real estate. Table 9 provides a summary of the significant property types and geographic locations of commercial real estate loans outstanding at December 31, 2002 and 2001. At December 31, 2002, approximately 24.2 percent of the commercial real estate loan portfolio represented business owner-occupied properties that tend to exhibit credit risk characteristics similar to the middle-market commercial loan portfolio. Generally, the investment-based real estate mortgages are diversified among various property types with somewhat higher concentrations in multi-family, office and retail properties. Additionally, the commercial real estate portfolio is diversified across the Company’s geographical markets with 94.0 percent of total commercial real estate loans outstanding at December 31, 2002, within the 24-state banking region. While vacancies in multi-family and commercial properties had risen during the past 18 months, declining interest rates have allowed real estate owners to reduce interest costs and generally maintain adequate cash flows.

Analysis of Loan Net Charge-Offs Total loan net charge-offs decreased $173.5 million to $1,373.0 million in 2002, compared with $1,546.5 million in 2001 and $825.4 million in 2000. The ratio of total loan net charge-offs to average loans was 1.20 percent in 2002, compared with 1.31 percent in 2001 and .70 percent in 2000. Included in loan net charge-offs for 2001 were $313.2 million of commercial loan charge-offs related to specific events or credit initiatives taken by management, $160 million of loan charge-offs relating to the Company’s accelerated loan workout strategy and $90 million of loan write-offs to conform risk management practices, align loan charge-off policies and expedite the transition out of a specific segment of the health care portfolio not meeting the lower risk appetite of the Company. The level of loan net charge-offs during 2002 reflected the impact of soft economic conditions and continued weakness in the communications, transportation and manufacturing sectors, as well as the impact of the weak economy on highly leveraged enterprise value financings. Assuming no further deterioration in the economy, net charge-offs are expected to remain at recent levels until the economy improves.

     Commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs for 2002 were $679.9 million (.98 percent of average loans outstanding), compared with $884.6 million (1.16 percent of average loans outstanding) in 2001 and
 
 Table 13   Net Charge-offs as a Percent of Average Loans Outstanding
                                               
Year Ended December 31 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Commercial
                                       
 
Commercial
    1.29 %     1.62 %     .56 %     .41 %     * %
 
Lease financing
    2.67       1.95       .46       .24       *  
   
   
Total commercial
    1.46       1.66       .55       .40       .31  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
 
Commercial mortgages
    .17       .21       .03       .02       *  
 
Construction and development
    .11       .17       .11       .03       *  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    .15       .20       .05       .02       (.04 )
 
Residential mortgages
    .23       .15       .11       .11       .07  
 
Retail
                                       
 
Credit card
    4.98       4.80       4.18       4.00       4.02  
 
Retail leasing
    .72       .65       .41       .28       *  
 
Home equity and second mortgages
    .74       .85       *       *       *  
 
Other retail
    2.10       2.16       1.32       1.26       *  
   
   
Total retail
    1.85       1.94       1.69       1.63       1.54  
   
     
Total loans (a)
    1.20 %     1.31 %     .70 %     .61 %     .53 %

(a) In accordance with guidance provided in the Interagency Guidance on Certain Loans Held for Sale, loans held with the intent to sell are transferred to the Loans Held for Sale category based on the lower of cost or fair value. At the time of transfer, the portion of the mark-to-market losses representing probable credit losses determined in accordance with policies and methods utilized to determine the allowance for credit losses is included in net charge-offs. The remaining portion of the losses is reported separately as a reduction of the allowance for credit losses under “Losses from loan sales/transfers.” Had the entire amount of the loss been reported as charge-offs, total net charge-offs would have been $1,875.8 million (1.59 percent of average loans) for the year ended December 31, 2001.
 * Information not available

 
U.S. Bancorp  37


Table of Contents

$289.2 million (.38 percent of average loans outstanding) in 2000. Commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs in 2002 continued to experience higher levels of net charge-offs related to the leasing portfolio including airline and other transportation related losses. Additionally, credit losses related to highly leveraged enterprise value financings continued at elevated levels. Commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs in 2001 included approximately $313.2 million related to several factors including: a large cattle fraud, collateral deterioration specific to transportation equipment caused by the impact of higher fuel prices and the weak economy, deterioration in the manufacturing, communications and technology sectors and specific management decisions to accelerate its workout strategy for certain borrowers. Also included in 2001 commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs were $95 million in merger and restructuring-related charge-offs and charge-offs of $160 million associated with an accelerated loan workout strategy. Excluding loan net charge-offs associated with merger and restructuring-related items, commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs were .98 percent of average loans outstanding in 2002, 1.04 percent in 2001 and .38 percent in 2000. The decrease in commercial and commercial real estate loan net charge-offs in 2002 when compared with 2001, and the increase for 2001 when compared with 2000 was driven by the specific credit actions noted above taken in the third quarter of 2001.
     Retail loan net charge-offs in 2002 were $674.0 million (1.85 percent of average loans outstanding), compared with $649.3 million (1.94 percent of average loans outstanding) in 2001 and $523.8 million (1.69 percent of average loans outstanding) in 2000. The improvement in the retail loan net charge-offs in 2002, compared with 2001, principally reflected changes in the mix of the retail loan portfolio to auto loans and leases and home equity products, and improvement in ongoing collection efforts as a result of the successful completion of the integration efforts. The increase in retail loan net charge-offs for 2001, compared with 2000, was primarily due to increased bankruptcies and consumer delinquencies in 2001, reflecting the downturn in economic conditions.

Analysis of Nonperforming Assets Nonperforming assets include nonaccrual loans, restructured loans not performing in accordance with modified terms, other real estate and other nonperforming assets owned by the Company. Interest payments are typically applied against the principal balance and not recorded as income. At December 31, 2002, total nonperforming assets were $1,373.5 million, compared with $1,120.0 million at year-end 2001 and $867.0 million at year-end 2000. The ratio of total nonperforming assets to total loans and other real estate increased to 1.18 percent at December 31, 2002, compared with .98 percent and .71 percent for the years ending 2001 and 2000, respectively.

     The $253.5 million increase in total nonperforming assets in 2002 reflected an increase of $284.6 million in nonperforming commercial and commercial real estate loans partially offset by a decrease of $27.1 million in nonperforming residential mortgages and a $21.5 million decrease in nonperforming retail loans. The increase in nonperforming commercial and commercial real estate assets was principally due to the Company’s exposure to certain communications, cable, manufacturing and highly leveraged enterprise value financings. Nonperforming loans in the capital goods sector also increased in 2002. Although the level of nonperforming assets appeared to have stabilized in late 2002, the Company continues to remain cautious regarding the economy and its impact on the credit quality of the portfolio. Nonperforming assets are expected to remain at elevated levels until the economy rebounds.
     The $253.0 million increase in nonperforming assets in 2001 reflected an increase of $190.0 million of nonperforming commercial and commercial real estate loans, a $22.2 million increase in nonperforming residential mortgages and a $23.8 million increase in nonperforming retail loans. The increase in nonperforming commercial loans was primarily due to merger and restructuring-related and risk management actions taken during 2001; loans written down to secondary market valuations and placed on nonperforming status; and continued stress in certain sectors of the economy. The increase was partially offset by the disposition of nonperforming loans identified as part of the Company’s accelerated workout programs and commercial charge-offs taken during 2001. Certain industry sectors, including agriculture, had stabilized or improved from 2000. The increase in nonperforming residential mortgages and retail loans generally reflected changes in portfolio delinquencies and the national trends in unemployment and personal bankruptcies during 2001.
     The Company had $50.0 million and $18.2 million of restructured loans as of December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Commitments to lend additional funds under restructured loans were $1.7 million and $3.7 million as of December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Restructured loans performing under the restructured terms beyond a specific timeframe are reported as accruing. Of the Company’s total restructured loans at December 31, 2002, $1.4 million were reported as accruing.
     Accruing loans 90 days or more past due totaled $426.4 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $462.9 million at December 31, 2001, and $385.2 million at December 31, 2000. These loans were not included in nonperforming assets and continue to accrue interest because they are adequately secured by collateral and/or are in the process of collection and are reasonably expected to result in repayment or restoration to current status. The ratio of delinquent loans to total loans declined slightly to .37 percent at December 31, 2002, compared with .40 percent at December 31, 2001.
 
38 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 Table 14   Nonperforming Assets (a)
                                               
At December 31,

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

 
Commercial
                                       
 
Commercial
  $ 760.4     $ 526.6     $ 470.4     $ 219.0     $ 230.4  
 
Lease financing
    166.7       180.8       70.5       31.5       17.7  
   
   
Total commercial
    927.1       707.4       540.9       250.5       248.1  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
 
Commercial mortgages
    174.6       131.3       105.5       138.2       86.9  
 
Construction and development
    57.5       35.9       38.2       31.6       28.4  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    232.1       167.2       143.7       169.8       115.3  
 
Residential mortgages
    52.0       79.1       56.9       72.8       98.7  
 
Retail
                                       
 
Credit card
                8.8       5.0       2.6  
 
Retail leasing
    1.0       6.5             .4       .5  
 
Other retail
    25.1       41.1       15.0       21.1       30.4  
   
   
Total retail
    26.1       47.6       23.8       26.5       33.5  
   
     
Total nonperforming loans
    1,237.3       1,001.3       765.3       519.6       495.6  
 
Other real estate
    59.5       43.8       61.1       40.0       35.1  
 
Other assets
    76.7       74.9       40.6       28.9       16.9  
   
     
Total nonperforming assets
  $ 1,373.5     $ 1,120.0     $ 867.0     $ 588.5     $ 547.6  
   
Restructured loans accruing interest (b)
  $ 1.4     $     $     $     $  
Accruing loans 90 days or more past due (c)
  $ 426.4     $ 462.9     $ 385.2     $ 248.6     $ 252.9  
Nonperforming loans to total loans
    1.06 %     .88 %     .63 %     .46 %     .46 %
Nonperforming assets to total loans plus other real estate
    1.18 %     .98 %     .71 %     .52 %     .51 %
Net interest lost on nonperforming loans
  $ 65.4     $ 63.0     $ 50.8     $ 29.5     $ 21.3  

Delinquent Loan Ratios

                                               
At December 31,

(as a percent of ending loan balances) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998
90 days or more past due excluding nonperforming loans

 
Commercial
                                       
 
Commercial
    .14 %     .14 %     .11 %     .05 %     .08 %
 
Lease financing
    .10       .45       .02             .03  
   
   
Total commercial
    .14       .18       .10       .05       .07  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
 
Commercial mortgages
    .03       .03       .07       .08       .06  
 
Construction and development
    .07       .02       .03       .05       .06  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    .04       .02       .06       .07       .06  
 
Residential mortgages
    .90       .78       .62       .42       .52  
 
Retail
                                       
 
Credit card
    2.09       2.18       1.70       1.23       1.02  
 
Retail leasing
    .19       .11       .20       .12       .10  
 
Other retail
    .54       .74       .62       .41       .36  
   
   
Total retail
    .72       .90       .76       .53       .45  
   
     
Total loans
    .37 %     .40 %     .31 %     .22 %     .24 %

                                           
At December 31,
90 days or more past due including nonperforming
loans 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Commercial
    2.35       1.71       1.13       .59       .68  
Commercial real estate
    .90       .68       .60       .74       .59  
Residential mortgages
    1.44       1.79       1.23       .99       1.17  
Retail
    .79       1.03       .83       .62       .57  
   
 
Total loans
    1.43 %     1.28 %     .94 %     .68 %     .70 %

(a) Throughout this document, nonperforming assets and related ratios do not include accruing loans 90 days or more past due.
(b) Nonaccrual restructured loans are included in the respective nonperforming loan categories and excluded from restructured loans accruing interest.
(c) These loans are not included in nonperforming assets and continue to accrue interest because they are secured by collateral and/or are in the process of collection and are reasonably expected to result in repayment or restoration to current status.
 
U.S. Bancorp  39


Table of Contents

Residential mortgages 30 to 89 days or more past due were 2.85 percent of the total residential mortgage portfolio at December 31, 2002, compared with 3.40 percent at December 31, 2001, and 2.93 percent at December 31, 2000. Residential mortgages 90 days or more past due totaled 1.44 percent at December 31, 2002, compared with 1.79 percent at December 31, 2001, and 1.23 percent at December 31, 2000. The improvement in 2002 reflects, in part, the mix of first-lien home equity loans originated through the Company’s consumer finance division. Retail loans 30 to 89 days or more past due were 2.46 percent of the total retail portfolio at December 31, 2002, compared with 3.30 percent at December 31, 2001, and 2.96 percent at December 31, 2000. The percentage of retail loans 90 days or more past due was .79 percent of total retail loans at December 31, 2002, compared with 1.03 percent at December 31, 2001, and .83 percent at December 31, 2000. The improvement in retail loan delinquencies from December 31, 2001, to December 31, 2002, primarily reflected the risk management actions, stabilization and improvement in collection efforts resulting from the successful completion of the integration efforts. The increase in retail loan delinquencies from December 31, 2000, to December 31, 2001, was primarily related to the credit card, home equity and revolving credit line portfolios and reflected the economic slowdown and unemployment trends during 2001.

Analysis and Determination of the Allowance for Credit Losses The allowance for credit losses provides coverage for probable and estimable losses inherent in the Company’s loan and lease portfolio. Management evaluates the allowance each quarter to determine that it is adequate to cover inherent losses. The evaluation of each element and the overall allowance is based on a continuing assessment of problem loans and related off-balance sheet items, recent loss experience and other factors, including regulatory guidance and economic conditions.

     At December 31, 2002, the allowance for credit losses was $2.4 billion (2.08 percent of loans). This compares with an allowance of $2.5 billion (2.15 percent of loans) at December 31, 2001, and $1.8 billion (1.46 percent of loans) at December 31, 2000. The ratio of the allowance for credit losses to nonperforming loans was 196 percent at year-end 2002, compared with 245 percent at year-end 2001 and 233 percent at year-end 2000. The ratio of the allowance for credit losses to loan net charge-offs was 176 percent at year-end 2002, compared with 159 percent at year-end 2001 and 216 percent at year-end 2000.
     Management determined that the allowance for credit losses was adequate at December 31, 2002.
     Several factors were taken into consideration in evaluating the 2002 allowance for credit losses, including changes in the risk profile of the portfolios, extent of loan net charge-offs during the period, the increasing trend in nonperforming assets, the slight decline in accruing loans 90 days past due and the improvement in retail delinquencies. Management also considered changes in economic trends including corporate earnings, unemployment rates, bankruptcies and economic growth since December 31, 2001. The increase in the allowance for credit losses in 2001 reflected the impact of continued weakening of the economy and related deterioration in certain sectors of the Company’s credit portfolio. During 2001, the allowance for credit losses was impacted by several factors, including merger and restructuring-related credit actions and management’s extensive review of the commercial loan portfolio in light of economic conditions. The level of the allowance was also impacted by risk rating changes by regulators of shared national credits agented by other banks, Company-specific portfolio trends discussed previously, and the transfer of the unsecured small business product portfolio to loans held for sale. It also reflected management’s recognition that the economic slowdown had accelerated and may be more prolonged as a result of world events that occurred in the third quarter of 2001.
     Management determines the amount of allowance that is required for specific loan categories based on relative risk characteristics of the loan portfolio. Table 16 shows the amount of the allowance for credit losses by loan category. The allowance recorded for commercial loans is based on a regular review of individual credit relationships. The Company’s risk rating process is an integral component of the methodology utilized in determining the allowance for credit losses. An analysis of the migration of commercial and commercial real estate loans and actual loss experience throughout the business cycle is also conducted quarterly to assess reserves established for credits with similar risk characteristics. An allowance is established for pools of commercial and commercial real estate loans based on the risk ratings assigned. The amount is supported by the results of the migration analysis that considers historical loss experience by risk rating, as well as current and historical economic conditions and industry risk factors. The Company separately analyzes the carrying value of impaired loans to determine whether the carrying value is less than or equal to the appraised collateral value or the present value of expected cash flows. Based on this analysis, an allowance for credit losses may be specifically established for impaired loans. The allowance established for commercial and commercial real estate loan portfolios, including impaired commercial and commercial real estate loans, was $1,090.4 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $1,428.6 million and $496.9 million at
 
40 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Table 15   Summary of Allowance for Credit Losses
                                                 
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Balance at beginning of year
  $ 2,457.3     $ 1,786.9     $ 1,710.3     $ 1,705.7     $ 1,665.8  
 
Charge-offs
                                       
 
Commercial
                                       
   
Commercial
    559.2       779.0       319.8       250.1       *  
   
Lease financing
    188.8       144.4       27.9       12.4       *  
   
     
Total commercial
    748.0       923.4       347.7       262.5       202.3  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
   
Commercial mortgages
    40.9       49.5       15.8       19.1       *  
   
Construction and development
    8.8       12.6       10.3       2.6       *  
   
     
Total commercial real estate
    49.7       62.1       26.1       21.7       23.6  
 
Residential mortgages
    23.1       15.8       13.7       16.2       14.4  
 
Retail
                                       
   
Credit card
    304.9       294.1       235.8       220.2       223.9  
   
Retail leasing
    45.2       34.2       14.8       6.2       *  
   
Home equity and second mortgages
    107.9       112.7       *       *       *  
   
Other retail
    311.9       329.1       379.5       376.0       *  
   
     
Total retail
    769.9       770.1       630.1       602.4       533.4  
   
       
Total charge-offs
    1,590.7       1,771.4       1,017.6       902.8       773.7  
 
Recoveries
                                       
 
Commercial
                                       
   
Commercial
    67.4       60.6       64.0       84.8       *  
   
Lease financing
    39.9       30.4       7.2       4.0       *  
   
     
Total commercial
    107.3       91.0       71.2       88.8       81.9  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
   
Commercial mortgages
    9.1       9.1       10.8       15.1       *  
   
Construction and development
    1.4       .8       2.6       1.0       *  
   
     
Total commercial real estate
    10.5       9.9       13.4       16.1       31.0  
 
Residential mortgages
    4.0       3.2       1.3       1.4       3.0  
 
Retail
                                       
   
Credit card
    24.6       23.4       27.5       34.6       36.9  
   
Retail leasing
    6.3       4.5       2.0       1.1       *  
   
Home equity and second mortgages
    10.6       12.9       *       *       *  
   
Other retail
    54.4       80.0       76.8       88.2       *  
   
     
Total retail
    95.9       120.8       106.3       123.9       112.6  
   
       
Total recoveries
    217.7       224.9       192.2       230.2       228.5  
 
Net Charge-offs
                                       
 
Commercial
                                       
   
Commercial
    491.8       718.4       255.8       165.3       *  
   
Lease financing
    148.9       114.0       20.7       8.4       *  
   
     
Total commercial
    640.7       832.4       276.5       173.7       120.4  
 
Commercial real estate
                                       
   
Commercial mortgages
    31.8       40.4       5.0       4.0       *  
   
Construction and development
    7.4       11.8       7.7       1.6       *  
   
     
Total commercial real estate
    39.2       52.2       12.7       5.6       (7.4 )
 
Residential mortgages
    19.1       12.6       12.4       14.8       11.4  
 
Retail
                                       
   
Credit card
    280.3       270.7       208.3       185.6       187.0  
   
Retail leasing
    38.9       29.7       12.8       5.1       *  
   
Home equity and second mortgages
    97.3       99.8       *       *       *  
   
Other retail
    257.5       249.1       302.7       287.8       *  
   
     
Total retail
    674.0       649.3       523.8       478.5       420.8  
   
       
Total net charge-offs
    1,373.0       1,546.5       825.4       672.6       545.2  
   
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0       646.0       491.3  
Losses from loan sales/transfers (a)
          (329.3 )                  
Acquisitions and other changes
    (11.3 )     17.4       74.0       31.2       93.8  
   
Balance at end of year
  $ 2,422.0     $ 2,457.3     $ 1,786.9     $ 1,710.3     $ 1,705.7  
   
Allowance as a percent of
                                       
 
Period-end loans
    2.08 %     2.15 %     1.46 %     1.51 %     1.59 %
 
Nonperforming loans
    196       245       233       329       344  
 
Nonperforming assets
    176       219       206       291       312  
 
Net charge-offs (a)
    176       159       216       254       313  

(a) In accordance with guidance provided in the Interagency Guidance on Certain Loans Held for Sale, loans held with the intent to sell are transferred to the Loans Held for Sale category based on the lower of cost or fair value. At the time of the transfer, the portion of the mark-to-market losses representing probable credit losses determined in accordance with policies and methods utilized to determine the allowance for credit losses is included in net charge-offs. The remaining portion of the losses is reported separately as a reduction of the allowance for credit losses under “Losses from loan sales/transfers.” Had the entire amount of the loss been reported as charge-offs, total net charge-offs would have been $1,875.8 million for the year ended 2001. Additionally, the allowance as a percent of net charge-offs would have been 131 percent for the year ended December 31, 2001.
 * Information not available

 
U.S. Bancorp  41


Table of Contents

December 31, 2001 and 2000, respectively. The decline in the allowance for commercial and commercial real estate loans reflected a reduction of $93.7 million related to a change in the volume of commercial and commercial real estate portfolios and mix of the risk ratings within the portfolio. The remaining decline of $244.3 million reflected improvements in loss severity rates determined from historical migration analysis. Although the Company’s level of commercial and commercial real estate loans in higher risk loan categories declined approximately 11 percent, the level of nonperforming loans continued at elevated levels and increased by 22.6 percent in 2002. The change from year-end 2000 to year-end 2001 reflected higher levels of nonperforming loans, increased loss severity reflected in the historical migration, increased sector risk in certain industries and deterioration in credit risk ratings compared with 2000.

     The allowance recorded for the residential mortgages and retail loan portfolios is based on an analysis of product mix, credit scoring and risk composition of the portfolio, loss and bankruptcy experiences, economic conditions and historical and expected delinquency and charge-off statistics for each homogenous category or group of loans. Based on this information and analysis, an allowance was established approximating a rolling twelve-month estimate of net charge-offs. The allowance established for residential mortgages was $34.2 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $21.9 million and $11.6 million at December 31, 2001 and 2000, respectively. The increase in allowance for the residential mortgage portfolio primarily reflected the growth of the portfolio, a higher percentage of first-lien home equity loans originated by the Company’s Consumer Finance division that tend to have slightly higher loss ratios and the impact of the continued downturn in economic conditions. The allowance established for retail loans was $699.7 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $705.3 million and $650.8 million at December 31, 2001 and 2000, respectively. The slight decrease in the allowance for the retail portfolio in 2002 primarily reflected an improvement in the credit quality and delinquency trends of the credit card portfolio, offset by the impact of higher unemployment and continued softness in economic conditions. The increase in the allowance established for retail loans in 2001 was due to an increase in net loss ratios caused by deteriorating economic conditions.
     Regardless of the extent of the Company’s analysis of customer performance, portfolio trends or risk management processes, certain inherent but undetected losses are probable within the loan portfolios. This is due to several factors, including inherent delays in obtaining information regarding a customer’s financial condition or changes in their unique business conditions, the judgmental nature of individual loan evaluations, collateral assessments and the
 
 Table 16   Elements of the Allowance for Credit Losses (a)
                                                                                     
Allowance Amount Allowance as a Percent of Loans

December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Commercial
                                                                               
 
Commercial
  $ 776.4     $ 1,068.1     $ 418.8     $ 408.3     $ 343.7       2.12 %     2.64 %     .89 %     .97 %     .91 %
 
Lease financing
    107.6       107.5       17.7       20.2       21.5       2.01       1.84       .31       .53       .65  
   
   
Total commercial
    884.0       1,175.6       436.5       428.5       365.2       2.11       2.54       .83       .93       .89  
 
Commercial real estate
                                                                               
 
Commercial mortgages
    152.9       176.6       42.7       110.4       105.2       .75       .94       .22       .59       .63  
 
Construction and development
    53.5       76.4       17.7       22.5       25.9       .82       1.16       .25       .35       .50  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    206.4       253.0       60.4       132.9       131.1       .77       1.00       .23       .53       .60  
 
Residential mortgages
    34.2       21.9       11.6       18.6       27.2       .35       .28       .12       .15       .18  
 
Retail
                                                                               
 
Credit card
    272.4       295.2       265.6       320.8       304.3       4.81       5.01       4.42       6.41       6.27  
 
Retail leasing
    44.0       38.7       27.2       18.6       6.5       .77       .79       .65       .88       .40  
 
Home equity and second mortgages
    114.7       88.6       107.7       *       *       .85       .72       .90       *       *  
 
Other retail
    268.6       282.8       250.3       389.2       365.6       2.10       2.39       2.16       1.74       1.62  
   
   
Total retail
    699.7       705.3       650.8       728.6       676.4       1.86       2.02       1.93       2.47       2.32  
   
   
Total allocated allowance
    1,824.3       2,155.8       1,159.3       1,308.6       1,199.9       1.57       1.89       .95       1.16       1.12  
   
Available for other factors
    597.7       301.5       627.6       401.7       505.8       .51       .26       .51       .35       .47  
   
Total allowance
  $ 2,422.0     $ 2,457.3     $ 1,786.9     $ 1,710.3     $ 1,705.7       2.08 %     2.15 %     1.46 %     1.51 %     1.59 %

(a)  During 2001, the Company changed its methodology for determining the specific allowance for elements of the loan portfolio. Table 16 has been restated for 2000. Due to the Company’s inability to gather historical loss data on a combined basis for 1998 and 1999, the methodologies and amounts assigned to each element of the loan portfolio for these years have not been conformed. Utilizing the prior methods, the total assigned to the allocated allowance for 2000 was $1,397.3 million and the allowance available for other factors portion was $389.6 million. Refer to paragraph four in the section captioned “Analysis and Determination of Allowance for Credit Losses.”
 * Information not available

 
42 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

interpretation of economic trends. Volatility of economic or customer-specific conditions affecting the identification and estimation of losses from larger non-homogeneous credits and the sensitivity of assumptions utilized to establish allowances for homogeneous groups of loans, loan portfolio concentrations, and other subjective considerations are among other factors. Because of the imprecision surrounding these factors, the Company estimates a range of inherent losses based on statistical analyses and management judgment, and maintains an “allowance for other factors” that is not allocated to a specific loan category. The amount of the allowance available for other factors was $597.7 million at December 31, 2002, compared with $301.5 million at December 31, 2001, and $627.6 million at December 31, 2000.
     Given the many subjective factors affecting the credit portfolio, changes in the allowance for other factors may not directly coincide with changes in the risk ratings of the credit portfolio reflected in the risk rating process. This is, in part, due to a lagging effect between changes in the business cycle, the exposure and mix of loans within risk rating categories, levels of nonperforming loans, and the timing of charge-offs and recoveries. In late 2000, management identified a slowdown in the business cycle, deteriorating portfolio trends and other adverse factors relative to credit quality. At the beginning of a downward business cycle, the accuracy of risk ratings, migration loss ratios and available information of customers often does not fully reflect the impact of various leading economic indicators. In 2001, management conducted extensive reviews of its portfolios and enhanced its commercial migration methods to better differentiate and weight loss severity ratios by risk rating category to reflect the adverse impact of loss experienced in 2001. The $326.1 million decrease in the allowance for other factors in 2001 reflected the impact of that change in loss severity ratios, which led the Company to increase the allowance established for commercial loans. In 2002, the Company reduced the level of higher risk commercial credits and net charge-off ratios improved by 20 basis points from a year ago. As a result, loss severity rates determined through historical migration analysis had improved somewhat relative to 2001. This led the Company to reduce the level of the allowance specifically allocated to commercial loans; however, nonperforming assets continued to remain at elevated levels, economic growth continued to be soft and the ability to further reduce higher risk credits had diminished as refinancing opportunities had tightened. As such, volatility of loss rates remained higher relative to prior periods and management increased the level of the allowance for other factors. At December 31, 2002, quantifiable factors supporting the level of the allowance for other factors included $15 million related to imprecision in risk ratings, $290 million for volatility of commercial loss rates, $100 million for volatility of retail loss forecasts and $30 million for uncollectible interest and fees on credit card receivables. The remaining allowance for other factors was primarily related to uncertainty in the economic outlook, concentration risk, and other qualitative factors.
     Although the Company determines the amount of each element of the allowance separately and this process is an important credit management tool, the entire allowance for credit losses is available for the entire loan portfolio. The actual amount of losses incurred can vary significantly from the recorded amounts. The Company’s methodology included several factors intended to minimize the differences in recorded and actual losses. These factors allowed the Company to adjust its estimate of losses based on the most recent information available. Refer to Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for accounting policies related to the allowance for credit losses.

Residual Risk Management The Company manages its risk to changes in the value of lease residual assets through disciplined residual setting and valuation at the inception of a lease, diversification of its leased assets, regular asset valuation reviews and monitoring of residual value gains or losses upon the disposition of assets. Commercial lease originations are subject to the same well-defined underwriting standards referred to in the “Credit Risk Management” section which includes an evaluation of the residual risk. Retail lease residual risk is mitigated further by originating longer term vehicle leases and effective end-of-term marketing of off-lease vehicles. Also, to reduce the financial risk of potential changes in vehicle residual values, the Company maintains residual value insurance. The catastrophic insurance maintained by the Company provides for the potential recovery of losses on individual vehicle sales in an amount equal to the difference between: a) 105 percent or 110 percent of the average wholesale auction price for the vehicle at the time of sale; and, b) the vehicle residual value specified by the Automotive Lease Guide (an authoritative industry source) at the inception of the lease. The potential recovery is calculated for each individual vehicle sold in a particular policy year and is reduced by any gains realized on vehicles sold during the same period. The Company will receive claim proceeds if, in the aggregate, there is a net loss for such period. To reduce the risk associated with collecting insurance claims, the

 
U.S. Bancorp  43


Table of Contents

Company monitors the financial viability of the insurance carrier based on insurance industry ratings and available financial information.
     Included in the retail leasing portfolio was approximately $3.2 billion of retail leasing residuals at December 31, 2002, compared with $2.8 billion at December 31, 2001. The Company monitors concentrations of leases by manufacturer and vehicle “make and model.” At year-end 2002, no vehicle-type concentration exceeded five percent of the aggregate portfolio. Because retail residual valuations tend to be less volatile for longer-term leases, relative to the estimated residual at inception of the lease, the Company actively manages lease origination production to achieve a longer-term portfolio. At December 31, 2002, the weighted-average term of the portfolio was 52 months. Since 1998, the used vehicle market has experienced a decline in used car prices. Several factors have contributed to this deflationary cycle. Aggressive leasing programs by automobile manufacturers and competitors within the banking industry included a marketing focus on monthly lease payments, enhanced residuals at lease inception, shorter-term leases and low mileage leases. These practices have created a cyclical oversupply of certain off-lease vehicles causing significant declines in used vehicle prices. Automobile manufacturers and others have retreated somewhat from these marketing programs or exited the leasing business. However, zero percent financing offered with rebates continued to exert pressure on used car pricing. Another factor impacting the used vehicle market has been the deflation in new vehicle prices. This trend has been driven by surplus automobile manufacturing capacity and related production and highly competitive sales programs. Economic factors are expected to moderate new car production. Production levels have continued to decline from record levels in 2000. Also, many Internet marketers failed or transformed into distribution channels of dealers rather than direct competitors. These trends are expected to abate the deflationary pricing pressures of the past few years. Another factor that has slowed the decline in residual values is the growth of “certified” used car programs. Certified cars are low mileage, newer model vehicles that have been inspected, reconditioned, and usually have a warranty program. The Company’s exposure to declining valuation should benefit from certified car programs that receive premium pricing from dealers at auction. In response to factors impacting used vehicle prices, the Company recognized a retail lease impairment of $9.5 million in 2002 and $40.0 million in 2001. Given the current economic environment, it is difficult to assess the timing and degree of changes in residual values that may impact financial results over the next several quarters.
     At December 31, 2002, the commercial leasing portfolio had $896 million of residuals, compared with $985 million at December 31, 2001. At year-end 2002, lease residuals related to railcars were 16 percent of the total residual portfolio. Trucks and other transportation equipment represented 31 percent of the aggregate portfolio, while aircraft and manufacturing were 13 percent and 9 percent, respectively. No other significant concentrations of more than 10 percent existed at December 31, 2002. In 2002, reduced airline travel and higher fuel costs adversely impacted aircraft and transportation equipment lease residual values. In 2002, the Company recognized $16.0 million in equipment leasing residual impairments primarily related to airline and railcar equipment. While not considered significant, continued economic stress in certain industries may further impact used equipment values into next year.

Operational Risk Management Operational risk represents the risk of loss resulting from the Company’s operations, including, but not limited to, the risk of fraud by employees or persons outside the Company, the execution of unauthorized transactions by employees, errors relating to transaction processing and technology, and breaches of the internal control system and compliance requirements. This risk of loss also includes the potential legal actions that could arise as a result of an operational deficiency or as a result of noncompliance with applicable regulatory standards, adverse business decisions or their implementation, and customer attrition due to potential negative publicity.

     The Company operates in many different businesses in diverse markets and relies on the ability of its employees and systems to process a high number of transactions. Operational risk is inherent in all business activities, and the management of this risk is important to the achievement of the Company’s objectives. In the event of a breakdown in the internal control system, improper operation of systems or improper employees’ actions, the Company could suffer financial loss, face regulatory action and suffer damage to its reputation.
     The Company manages operational risk through a risk management framework and its internal control processes. The framework involves the business lines, corporate risk management personnel and executive management. Under this framework, business lines have direct and primary responsibility and accountability for identifying, controlling,
 
44 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

and monitoring operational risk. Clear structures and processes with defined responsibilities are in place. Business managers maintain a system of controls with the objective of providing proper transaction authorization and execution, proper system operations, safeguarding of assets from misuse or theft, and ensuring the reliability of financial and other data. Business managers ensure that the controls are appropriate and are implemented as designed.
     Each business line within the Company has designated risk managers. These risk managers are responsible, among other things, for coordinating the completion of ongoing risk assessments and ensuring that operational risk management is integrated into business decision-making activities. Business continuation and disaster recovery planning is also critical to effectively manage operational risks. Each mission critical business unit is required to develop, maintain and test these plans at least annually to ensure that recovery activities, if needed, can support mission critical functions including technology, networks and data centers supporting customer applications and business operations. The Company’s internal audit function validates the system of internal controls through risk-based, regular and ongoing audit procedures and reports on the effectiveness of internal controls to executive management and the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors.
     While the Company believes that it has designed effective methods to minimize operational risks, there is no absolute assurance that business disruption or operational losses would not occur in the event of a disaster.

Interest Rate Risk Management In the banking industry, a significant risk exists related to changes in interest rates. To minimize the volatility of net interest income and of the market value of assets and liabilities, the Company manages its exposure to changes in interest rates through asset and liability management activities within guidelines established by its Asset Liability Policy Committee (“ALPC”) and approved by the Board of Directors. ALPC has the responsibility for approving and ensuring compliance with asset/liability management policies, including interest rate risk exposure. The Company uses Net Interest Income Simulation Analysis and Market Value of Equity Modeling for measuring and analyzing consolidated interest rate risk.

Net Interest Income Simulation Analysis One of the primary tools used to measure interest rate risk and the effect of interest rate changes on rate sensitive income and net interest income is simulation analysis. The monthly analysis incorporates substantially all of the Company’s assets and liabilities and off-balance sheet instruments, together with forecasted changes in the balance sheet and assumptions that reflect the current interest rate environment. Through these simulations, management estimates the impact on rate sensitive income of a 300 basis point upward or downward gradual change of market interest rates over a one year period. The simulations also estimate the effect of immediate and sustained parallel shifts in the yield curve of 50 basis points as well as the effect of immediate and sustained flattening or steepening of the yield curve. These simulations include assumptions about how the balance sheet is likely to be affected by changes in loan and deposit growth. Assumptions are made to project rates for new loans and deposits based on historical analysis, management’s outlook and repricing strategies. These assumptions are validated on a periodic basis. A sensitivity analysis is provided for key variables of the simulation. The results are reviewed by ALPC monthly and are used to guide hedging strategies. ALPC policy guidelines limit the estimated change in rate sensitive income to 5.0 percent of forecasted rate sensitive income over the succeeding 12 months.

     The table below summarizes the interest rate risk of net interest income and rate sensitive income. The interest rate risk position of the Company was more liability sensitive at December 31, 2002, than at December 31, 2001. The change in the rate risk position is primarily due to higher levels of fixed rate investment portfolio securities despite the gradual portfolio mix shift toward floating rate securities. The rate risk position of these assets is partially offset by higher levels of demand deposits. At December 31, 2002 and 2001, the Company was well within its policy guidelines.

Sensitivity of Net Interest Income and Rate Sensitive Income:

                                                                 
2002 2001

Down 50 Up 50 Down 300 Up 300 Down 50 Up 50 Down 300 Up 300
Immediate Immediate Gradual Gradual Immediate Immediate Gradual Gradual

Net Interest Income
    .08 %     (.34 )%     %     (1.91 )%     (.10 )%     (.15 )%     %     .10 %
Rate Sensitive Income
    .20 %     (.55 )%     %     (2.57 )%     .24 %     (.38 )%     %     (.46 )%

Given the current level of interest rates, a downward 300 basis point scenario can not be computed.

 
U.S. Bancorp  45


Table of Contents

Market Value of Equity Modeling The Company also utilizes the market value of equity as a measurement tool in managing interest rate sensitivity. The market value of equity measures the degree to which the market values of the Company’s assets and liabilities and off-balance sheet instruments will change given a change in interest rates. ALPC guidelines limit the change in market value of equity in a 200 basis point parallel rate shock to 15 percent of the base case. Given the low level of current rates, the down 200 basis point scenario cannot be computed. The up 200 basis point scenario was a 2.5 percent decrease at December 31, 2002, compared with a 6.6 percent decrease at December 31, 2001. ALPC reviews other down rate scenarios to evaluate the impact of falling rates. The down 100 basis point scenario was a 1.0 percent decrease at December 31, 2002, and a 1.8 percent increase at December 31, 2001. The overall sensitivity was relatively neutral.

     The valuation analysis is dependent upon certain key assumptions about the nature of indeterminate maturity of assets and liabilities. Management estimates the average life and rate characteristics of asset and liability accounts based upon historical analysis and management’s expectation of rate behavior. These assumptions are validated on a periodic basis. A sensitivity analysis is provided to key variables of the valuation analysis. The results are reviewed by ALPC monthly and are used to guide hedging strategies. The results of the valuation analysis as of December 31, 2002, were well within policy guidelines.

Use of Derivatives to Manage Interest Rate Risk In the ordinary course of business, the Company enters into derivative transactions to manage interest rate and prepayment risk and to accommodate the business requirements of its customers. To manage its interest rate risk, the Company may enter into interest rate swap agreements and interest rate options such as caps and floors. Interest rate swaps involve the exchange of fixed-rate and variable-rate payments without the exchange of the underlying notional amount on which the interest payments are calculated. Interest rate caps protect against rising interest rates while interest rate floors protect against declining interest rates. In connection with its mortgage banking operations, the Company enters into forward commitments to sell mortgage loans related to fixed-rate mortgage loans held for sale and fixed-rate mortgage loan commitments.

     The Company actively trades foreign exchange contracts to meet customer business needs and acts as an intermediary for interest rate swaps and options on behalf of customers. The Company minimizes its market and liquidity risks by taking substantively similar offsetting positions. The Company does not utilize derivative instruments for speculative purposes.
     Derivative instruments are also subject to credit risk associated with counterparties to the derivative contracts. Credit risk associated with derivatives is measured based on the replacement cost should the counterparties with contracts in a gain position to the Company fail to perform under the terms of the contract. The Company manages this risk through diversification of its derivative positions among various counterparties, requiring collateral to support certain credit exposures, entering into master netting agreements in certain cases, and having a portion of its derivatives in exchange-traded instruments. Because exchange-traded instruments conform to standard terms and are subject to policies set by the exchange involved, including counterparty approval, margin and security deposit requirements, the credit risk is substantially reduced.
     Refer to Notes 1 and 21 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for significant accounting policies and additional information regarding the Company’s use of derivatives.
     Table 17 summarizes information on derivative positions as of December 31, 2002.
 
46 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Table 17   Derivative Positions

Asset and Liability Management Positions

                                                                               
Weighted-
Maturing Average

Remaining
December 31, 2002 Fair Maturity
(Dollars in Millions) 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 Thereafter Total Value in Years

Interest rate contracts
                                                                       
 
Receive fixed/pay floating swaps
                                                                       
   
Notional amount
  $ 606     $ 473     $ 1,761     $ 5,320     $ 5,670     $ 5,900     $ 19,730     $ 1,555       6.67  
   
Weighted-average
                                                                       
     
Receive rate
    6.02 %     6.86 %     5.50 %     3.54 %     4.59 %     6.51 %     5.06 %                
     
Pay rate
    1.51       1.48       1.57       1.42       1.44       1.88       1.58                  
 
Pay fixed/receive floating swaps
                                                                       
   
Notional amount
  $ 2,200     $ 2,050     $ 365     $     $     $ 150     $ 4,765     $ (117 )     1.64  
   
Weighted-average
                                                                       
     
Receive rate
    1.42 %     1.42 %     1.77 %                 1.31 %     1.45 %                
     
Pay rate
    2.74       3.81       4.28                   4.47       3.34                  
 
Futures and forwards
  $ 6,850     $     $     $     $     $     $ 6,850     $ (80 )     .13  
 
Options
                                                                       
   
Written
    2,940                   45                   2,985       26       .13  
Equity contracts
  $     $     $ 5     $     $     $     $ 5     $       2.92  

Customer-related Positions

                                                                             
Weighted-
Maturing Average

Remaining
December 31, 2002 Fair Maturity
(Dollars in Millions) 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 Thereafter Total Value in Years

Interest rate contracts
                                                                       
 
Receive fixed/pay floating swaps
                                                                       
   
Notional amount
  $ 715     $ 564     $ 652     $ 630     $ 502     $ 978     $ 4,041     $ 223       4.00  
 
Pay fixed/receive floating swaps
                                                                       
   
Notional amount
    700       564       652       630       502       978       4,026       (201 )     3.98  
 
Basis swaps
          1                               1             1.67  
 
Options
                                                                       
   
Purchased
    266       35       10       15       63       9       398       4       1.67  
   
Written
    261       35       10       15       63       9       393       (4 )     1.75  
Foreign exchange rate contracts
                                                                       
 
Swaps and forwards
                                                                       
   
Buy
  $ 3,292     $ 14     $     $     $     $     $ 3,306     $ 213       .50  
   
Sell
    3,292       14                               3,306       (212 )     .50  
 
Options
                                                                       
   
Purchased
    199                                     199       8       .57  
   
Written
    199                                     199       (8 )     .57  

Market Risk Management In addition to interest rate risk, the Company is exposed to other forms of market risk as a consequence of conducting normal trading activities. Business activities that contribute to market risk include, among other things, market making, underwriting, proprietary trading and foreign exchange positions. Value at Risk (“VaR”) is a key measure of market risk for the Company. Theoretically, VaR represents the maximum amount that the Company has placed at risk of loss, with a ninety-ninth percentile degree of confidence, to adverse market movements in the course of its risk taking activities.

     VaR modeling of trading activities is subject to certain limitations. Additionally, it should be recognized that there are assumptions and estimates associated with VaR modeling and actual results could differ from those assumptions and estimates. The Company mitigates these uncertainties through regular monitoring of trading activities by management and other risk management practices including stop-loss and position limits related to its trading activities. Stress-test models are used to provide management with perspectives on market events that VaR models do not capture.
     The Company establishes market risk limits, subject to approval by the Company’s Board of Directors. The Company’s VaR limit was $40 million at December 31, 2002 and 2001. The market valuation risk inherent in its customer-based derivative trading, mortgage banking pipeline, broker-dealer activities (including equities,
 
U.S. Bancorp  47


Table of Contents

fixed-income, and high-yield securities) and foreign exchange, as estimated by the VaR analysis, was $8.8 million at December 31, 2002, and $10.9 million at December 31, 2001.

Liquidity Risk Management ALPC establishes policies, as well as analyzes and manages liquidity, to ensure that adequate funds are available to meet normal operating requirements in addition to unexpected customer demands for funds, such as high levels of deposit withdrawals or loan demand, in a timely and cost-effective manner. The most important factor in the preservation of liquidity is maintaining public confidence that facilitates the retention and growth of a large, stable supply of core deposits and wholesale funds. Ultimately, public confidence is generated through profitable operations, sound credit quality and a strong capital position. The Company’s performance in these areas has enabled it to develop a large and reliable base of core funding within its market areas and in domestic and global capital markets. Liquidity management is viewed from a long-term and short-term perspective, as well as from an asset and liability perspective. Management monitors liquidity through a regular review of maturity profiles, funding sources, and loan and deposit forecasts to minimize funding risk.

     The Company maintains strategic liquidity and contingency plans that are subject to the availability of asset liquidity in the balance sheet. Monthly, ALPC reviews the Company’s ability to meet funding requirements due to adverse business events. These funding needs are then matched with specific asset-based sources to ensure sufficient funds are available. Also, strategic liquidity policies require diversification of wholesale funding sources to avoid concentrations in any one market source. Subsidiary banks are members of various Federal Home Loan Banks that provide a source of funding through FHLB advances. The Company maintains a Grand Cayman branch for issuing eurodollar time deposits. The Company also establishes relationships with dealers to issue national market retail and institutional savings certificates and short-and medium-term bank notes. Also, the Company’s subsidiary banks have significant correspondent banking networks and corporate accounts. Accordingly, it has access to national fed funds, funding through repurchase agreements and sources of more stable, regionally based certificates of deposit.
     The Company’s ability to raise negotiated funding at competitive prices is influenced by rating agencies’ views of the Company’s credit quality, liquidity, capital and earnings. The debt ratings noted in Table 18 reflect the rating agencies’ recognition of the strong, consistent financial performance of the Company and the quality of the balance sheet.
     The parent company’s routine funding requirements consist primarily of operating expenses, dividends to shareholders, debt service and funds used for acquisitions. The parent company obtains funding to meet its obligations from dividends collected from its subsidiaries and the issuance of debt securities.
     At December 31, 2002, parent company long-term debt outstanding was $5.7 billion, compared with $6.1 billion at December 31, 2001. The decrease in long-term debt in 2002 was driven by the issuance of $2.1 billion of fixed- and variable-rate medium-term notes, which was partially offset by medium-term note maturities of $1.2 billion and the repurchase on August 6, 2002, of $1.1 billion accreted value of the Company’s convertible senior notes. Total parent company debt scheduled to mature in 2003 is $1.5 billion. These debt obligations are expected to be met through medium-term note issuances and dividends from subsidiaries, as well as from parent company cash and cash equivalents. Federal banking laws regulate the amount of dividends that may be paid by banking subsidiaries without prior approval. The amount of dividends available to the parent company from its banking subsidiaries was approximately $614 million at December 31, 2002. For further information, see Note 24 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
 
 Table 18   Debt Ratings
                           
Standard &
At December 31, 2002 Moody’s Poors Fitch

U.S. Bancorp
                       
 
Short-term borrowings
                    F1  
 
Senior debt and medium-term notes
    Aa3       A       A+  
 
Subordinated debt
    A1       A-       A  
 
Preferred stock
    A2       BBB+       A  
 
Commercial paper
    P-1       A-1       F1  
 
U.S. Bank National Association
                       
 
Short-term time deposits
    P-1       A-1       F1+  
 
Long-term time deposits
    Aa2       A+       AA-  
 
Bank notes
    Aa2/P-1       A+/A-1       A+/F1+  
 
Subordinated debt
    Aa3       A       A  

 
48 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

     Refer to Table 19 for further information on contractual obligations.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements Asset securitization and conduits represent a source of funding the Company’s growth through off-balance sheet structures. The Company sponsors two off-balance sheet conduits to which it transfers high-grade assets: a commercial loan conduit and an investment securities conduit. These conduits are funded by issuing commercial paper. The commercial loan conduit holds primarily high credit quality commercial loans and held assets of $4.2 billion at December 31, 2002, and $6.9 billion in assets at December 31, 2001. The investment securities conduit holds high-grade investment securities and held assets of $9.5 billion at December 31, 2002, and $9.8 billion in assets at December 31, 2001. These investment securities include primarily (i) private label asset-backed securities, which are insurance “wrapped” by AAA/ Aaa-rated mono-line insurance companies and (ii) government agency mortgage-backed securities and collateralized mortgage obligations. The commercial loan conduit had commercial paper liabilities of $4.2 billion at December 31, 2002, and $6.9 billion at December 31, 2001. The investment securities conduit had commercial paper liabilities of $9.5 billion at December 31, 2002, and $9.8 billion at December 31, 2001. The Company benefits by transferring commercial loans and investment securities into conduits that provide diversification of funding sources in a capital-efficient manner and generate income.

     The Company provides liquidity facilities to both conduits. In addition, the Company retains the credit risk of the loans transferred to the commercial loan conduit through a credit enhancement agreement. Utilization of the liquidity facilities would be triggered by the conduits’ inability to issue commercial paper to fund their assets. The credit enhancement provided to the commercial loan conduit represents a recourse obligation under which the Company would be required to repurchase loans sold to the conduit if certain credit-related events of the underlying assets occur. The recorded fair value of the Company’s liability for the recourse obligation and for both liquidity facilities was $56.1 million at December 31, 2002, and was included in other liabilities. Changes in fair value of these liabilities are recorded in the income statement as other income or expense. In addition, the Company recorded at fair value its retained residual interest in both the commercial loan and investment securities conduits of $28.6 million and of $93.4 million, respectively, at December 31, 2002. The Company recorded revenue of $132.2 million from the conduits in 2002 and $132.7 million in 2001, including fees for servicing, management, administration and accretion income from retained interests.
     At December 31, 2002, the Company had two asset-backed securitizations to fund indirect automobile loans and an unsecured small business credit product. The indirect automobile securitization held $156.1 million in assets at December 31, 2002, compared with $431.5 million at December 31, 2001. The Company recognized income from an interest-only strip and servicing fees from this securitization of $2.8 million during 2002 and $6.1 million during 2001. The indirect automobile securitization held average assets of $276.9 million in 2002 and $655.3 million in 2001. In January 2003, the Company exercised a cleanup call option on the indirect automobile loan securitization. The remaining assets from the securitization were recorded on the Company’s balance sheet at fair value.
     The unsecured small business credit securitization held $652.4 million in assets at December 31, 2002, of which the Company retained $150.1 million of subordinated securities, transferor’s interests of $16.3 million and a residual interest-only strip of $53.3 million. This compared with $750.0 million in assets at December 31, 2001, of which the Company retained $175.3 million of subordinated securities, transferor’s interests of $18.8 million and a residual interest-only strip of $57.3 million. The qualifying special purpose entity issued asset-backed variable funding notes in various tranches. The Company provides credit enhancement in the form of subordinated securities and reserve accounts. The Company’s risk, primarily from losses in the underlying assets, was considered in determining the fair value of the Company’s retained interests in this securitization. The Company recognized income from subordinated securities,
 
 Table 19   Contractual Obligations
                                   
Over One Over Three
One Year Through Through Over Five
(Dollars in Millions) or Less Three Years Five Years Years

Contractual Obligations
                               
 
Deposits
  $ 106,866     $ 5,658     $ 2,979     $ 31  
 
Short-term debt
    7,806                    
 
Long-term debt
    7,937       13,231       1,779       5,641  
 
Trust preferred securities
                      2,994  
 
Capital leases
    9       15       13       45  
 
Operating leases
    358       349       421       503  

 
U.S. Bancorp  49


Table of Contents

an interest-only strip and servicing fees from this securitization of $52.8 million in 2002 and $5.2 million in 2001. The unsecured small business credit securitization held average assets of $700.6 million in 2002 and $123.0 million in 2001.
     The corporate and purchasing card securitization matured in February 2002. At maturity, $420.0 million of receivables were transferred from the trust to the Company and recorded at fair value at that time. The Company recognized servicing income of $.5 million in 2002 and $4.2 million in 2001 from this securitization.
     During 2002, the Company securitized $144.4 million of highly rated fixed rate municipal bonds. Each municipal bond is sold into a separate trust that is funded by variable rate certificates that reprice weekly. The Company retains a residual interest in each structure that is accounted for as a trading asset and is recorded at fair value. The purpose of the arrangements is to meet our customer demands for variable rate tax-free investments. Income and cash flows from these structures were not significant in 2002.
     With respect to real estate and certain equipment, the Company enters into capital or operating leases to meet its business requirements. Certain operating lease arrangements involve third-party lessors that acquire these business assets through leveraged financing structures commonly referred to as “synthetic leases.” At December 31, 2002, synthetic lease structures held real estate assets of $434.5 million and equipment assets of $45.5 million, compared with $372.7 million and $41.6 million, respectively, at December 31, 2001. The Company provides guarantees to the lender in the event of default by the leveraged financing structures or in the event that the Company does not exercise its option to purchase the property at the end of the lease term and the fair value of the assets is less than the purchase price. The maximum end-of-term guarantee, if the fair value of the assets is less than the purchase price, was $403.0 million at December 31, 2002, and $346.3 million at December 31, 2001. The Company performs an evaluation for possible declines in fair value of these assets on an annual basis and is not aware of any material declines in value of these assets.
     Credit, liquidity, operational and legal structural risks exist due to the nature and complexity of asset securitizations and other off-balance sheet structures. ALPC regularly monitors the performance of each off-balance sheet structure in an effort to minimize these risks and ensure compliance with the requirements of the structures. The Company utilizes its credit risk management systems to evaluate the credit quality of underlying assets and regularly forecasts cash flows to evaluate any potential impairment of retained interests. Also, regulatory guidelines require consideration of asset securitizations in the determination of risk-based capital ratios. The Company does not rely significantly on off-balance sheet arrangements for liquidity or capital resources.
     In January 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Interpretation No. 46 (“FIN 46”), “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities” (“VIEs”), an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51, “Consolidated Financial Statements,” to improve financial reporting of special purpose and other entities. The Company is in the process of determining whether its off-balance sheet structures are subject to the provisions of FIN 46. Because the loan and investment conduits and the asset-backed securitizations are qualified special purpose entities (“QSPEs”), which are exempted from consolidation, the Company does not believe the QSPE structures will require consolidation in its financial statements. The Company believes it is reasonably possible that synthetic leases will be consolidated under the provisions of FIN 46. At this time, the Company does not believe that the adoption of FIN 46 will have a material adverse impact on the Company’s financial statements.

CAPITAL MANAGEMENT

The Company is committed to managing capital for shareholder benefit while providing sound protection to its depositors and to its creditors. The Company continually assesses its business risks and capital position. The Company also manages its capital to exceed regulatory capital requirements for well-capitalized bank holding companies. To achieve these capital goals, the Company employs a variety of capital management tools including dividends, common share repurchases, and the issuance of subordinated debt and other capital instruments. Total shareholders’ equity was $18.1 billion at December 31, 2002, compared with $16.5 billion at December 31, 2001. The increase was primarily the result of corporate earnings, including merger and restructuring-related items, offset by dividends, share buybacks, the effect of a change in accounting principles and acquisitions.

     On March 12, 2002, the Company increased its dividend rate per common share by 4.0 percent, from $.1875 per quarter to $.1950 per quarter. On February 27, 2001, the Company increased its dividend rate per common share by 15.4 percent, from $.1625 per quarter to $.1875 per quarter. Excluding merger and restructuring-related charges, the dividend payout ratio for 2002 decreased to 42.5 percent, compared with a payout ratio of 57.0 percent in 2001.
     On July 17, 2001, the Company’s Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of up to 56.4 million shares of the Company’s common stock in connection with the July 24, 2001 acquisition of NOVA. During 2001, the Company repurchased 19.7 million shares of common stock in both public and private transactions in connection with
 
50 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

this authorization. On December 18, 2001, the Board of Directors approved an authorization to repurchase an additional 100 million shares of common stock through 2003. During the first quarter of 2002, the Company repurchased 40.0 million shares of common stock in both public and private transactions related to these authorizations, completing the July 17, 2001 authorization. In 2002, the Company purchased 5.2 million shares of common stock under the December 2001 plan. There are approximately 91.5 million shares remaining to be purchased under this authorization. For a complete analysis of activities impacting shareholders’ equity and capital management programs, refer to Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
     Banking regulators define minimum capital requirements for banks and financial services holding companies. These requirements are expressed in the form of a minimum tier 1 capital ratio, total risk-based capital ratio, and tier 1 leverage ratio. The minimum required level for these ratios is 4.0 percent, 8.0 percent, and 4.0 percent, respectively. The Company targets its regulatory capital levels, at both the bank and bank holding company level, to exceed the “well capitalized” threshold for these ratios of 6.0 percent, 10.0 percent, and 5.0 percent, respectively. As of December 31, 2002, the Company’s tier 1 capital, total risk-based capital, and tier 1 leverage ratio were 7.8 percent, 12.2 percent, and 7.5 percent, respectively. These ratios compare to 7.7 percent, 11.7 percent, and 7.7 percent, respectively, as of December 31, 2001. The increase in the total risk-based capital ratio was primarily related to the issuance of $1.0 billion of subordinated debt in 2002. All regulatory ratios, at both the bank and bank holding company level, continue to be in excess of stated “well capitalized” requirements. Table 20 provides a summary of tier 1 and total risk-based capital ratios as of December 31, 2002, and 2001, as defined by the regulatory agencies.
     The Company uses tangible common equity expressed as a percent of tangible common assets as an additional measure of its capital. At December 31, 2002, the Company’s tangible common equity ratio was 5.6 percent, compared with 5.7 percent at year-end 2001.

FOURTH QUARTER SUMMARY

In the fourth quarter of 2002, the Company had net income of $849.8 million ($.44 per diluted share), compared with $695.4 million ($.36 per diluted share) in the fourth quarter of 2001. The Company reported operating earnings (net income excluding merger and restructuring-related items) of $920.1 million ($.48 per diluted share) in the fourth quarter of 2002, compared with operating earnings of $785.2 million ($.40 per diluted share) in the fourth quarter of 2001. The Company’s results for the fourth quarter of 2002 improved over the same period of 2001, primarily due to strong growth in consumer banking and payment services revenue, offset somewhat by lower investment banking activity. The fourth quarter of 2002 results included $152.7 million of significant income items, which were

 
 Table 20   Regulatory Capital Ratios
                     
At December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

U.S. Bancorp
               
Tangible common equity
  $ 9,489     $ 9,374  
 
As a percent of tangible assets
    5.6 %     5.7 %
Tier 1 capital
  $ 12,606     $ 12,488  
 
As a percent of risk-weighted assets
    7.8 %     7.7 %
 
As a percent of adjusted quarterly average assets (leverage ratio)
    7.5 %     7.7 %
Total risk-based capital
  $ 19,753     $ 19,148  
 
As a percent of risk-weighted assets
    12.2 %     11.7 %
Bank Subsidiaries (a)
               
 
U.S. Bank National Association
               
   
Tier 1 capital
    6.7 %     7.5 %
   
Total risk-based capital
    10.8       11.8  
   
Leverage
    6.7       7.7  
 
U.S. Bank National Association ND
               
   
Tier 1 capital
    13.4 %     18.1 %
   
Total risk-based capital
    18.9       23.1  
   
Leverage
    12.1       17.9  

Bank Regulatory Capital Requirements
    Minimum    
Well-
Capitalized
   
 
Tier 1 capital
    4 %     6 %
 
Total risk-based capital
    8       10  
 
Leverage
    4       5  

(a) These balances and ratios were prepared in accordance with regulatory accounting principles as disclosed in the subsidiaries’ regulatory reports.

 
U.S. Bancorp  51


Table of Contents

offset by $161.0 million of noteworthy expense items and asset write-downs. Notable favorable items in the fourth quarter included gains on the sale of securities of $106.2 million, an increase of $84.2 million over the fourth quarter of 2001, and a $46.5 million gain on the sale of a co-branded credit card portfolio. Offsetting these favorable items were the recognition of $54.1 million of MSR impairment, an increase of $26.8 million over the fourth quarter of 2001, a $50.0 million litigation charge, including investment banking regulatory matters at Piper, incremental personnel costs of $31.4 million for rationalizing the Company’s post-integration technology, operations, and support functions, and a $25.5 million leasing residual impairment.
     Fourth quarter net interest income, on a taxable-equivalent basis, was $1,775.0 million, compared with $1,674.2 million in the fourth quarter of 2001. Average earning assets for the fourth quarter of 2002 increased over the fourth quarter of 2001 by $6.9 million (4.7 percent), primarily driven by increases in the investment portfolio, loans held for sale and retail loan growth, partially offset by a decline in commercial and commercial real estate loans. The net interest margin in the fourth quarter of 2002 was 4.63 percent, compared with 4.57 percent in the fourth quarter of 2001. The improvement in the net interest margin in the fourth quarter of 2002 over the fourth quarter of 2001 reflected higher net free funds, the funding benefits of the declining interest rate environment, a more favorable funding mix and improving spreads due to product repricing dynamics, and a shift in mix toward retail loans, partially offset by lower yields on the investment portfolio.
     The provision for credit losses for the fourth quarter of 2002 was $349.0 million, an increase of $83.2 million over the fourth quarter of 2001. This higher level of provision for credit losses reflected an increase in nonperforming assets and net charge-offs year-over-year reflecting continued weakness in certain industry sectors and the impact of the weak economy on highly leveraged enterprise value financings.
     Fourth quarter 2002 noninterest income was $1,546.1 million, an increase of $211.9 million (15.9 percent) over the same quarter of 2001. The growth in noninterest income over the fourth quarter of 2001 was driven by net securities gains, growth in core banking product revenues of $60.8 million (4.6 percent), a $46.5 million gain on the sale of a co-branded credit card portfolio, a reduction in equity investment losses of $29.0 million relative to the fourth quarter of 2001, and acquisitions, including Leader and the Bay View branches, which contributed approximately $18.3 million of the
 
 Table 21   Fourth Quarter Summary

Financial Results and Ratios on an Operating Basis (a)

                   
Three Months Ended
December 31,

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Condensed Income Statement
               
Net interest income (taxable-equivalent basis)
  $ 1,775.0     $ 1,674.2  
Noninterest income
    1,439.9       1,312.2  
Securities gains, net
    106.2       22.0  
   
 
Total net revenue
    3,321.1       3,008.4  
Noninterest expense
    1,551.2       1,503.9  
Provision for credit losses
    349.0       265.8  
   
 
Income before taxes and merger and restructuring-related items
    1,420.9       1,238.7  
Taxable-equivalent adjustment
    9.2       9.9  
Income taxes
    491.6       443.6  
   
Operating earnings
    920.1       785.2  
Merger and restructuring-related items (after-tax)
    (70.3 )     (89.8 )
   
 
Net income in accordance with GAAP
  $ 849.8     $ 695.4  
   
Financial Ratios
               
Return on average assets
    2.05 %     1.85 %
Return on average equity
    20.4       18.6  
Efficiency ratio
    48.3       50.4  
Banking efficiency ratio (b)
    44.1       46.6  

(a) The Company analyzes its performance on a net income basis in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, as well as on an operating basis before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles referred to as “operating earnings.” Operating earnings are presented as supplemental information to enhance the reader’s understanding of, and highlight trends in, the Company’s financial results excluding the impact of merger and restructuring- related items of specific business acquisitions and restructuring activities and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles. Operating earnings should not be viewed as a substitute for net income and earnings per share as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Merger and restructuring-related items excluded from net income to derive operating earnings may be significant and may not be comparable to other companies.
(b) Without investment banking and brokerage activity.

 
52 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

favorable variance. Credit and debit card revenue, corporate payment products revenue and ATM processing services revenue in the Payment Services line of business were higher in the fourth quarter of 2002, primarily reflecting growth in sales and card usage. Merchant processing services increased year-over-year, primarily due to higher charge volume, offset by slightly lower processing rates. Deposit service charges increased primarily due to fee enhancements and new accounts within the Consumer Banking line of business. Cash management fees revenue grew primarily due to growth in core business, product enhancements and lower earning credit rates to customers. Mortgage banking revenue was higher due to the acquisition of Leader in April 2002. Mortgage originations and sales and loan servicing revenue continued to be strong through the fourth quarter of 2002. Offsetting these favorable variances was a decline in capital markets-related revenue reflecting softness in the equity capital markets. Other fee income was higher in the fourth quarter of 2002 primarily due to gains on the sale of a co-branded credit card portfolio and a reduction in the level of equity investment losses relative to 2001.
     Fourth quarter of 2002 noninterest expense, before merger and restructuring-related charges, totaled $1,551.2 million, an increase of $47.3 million (3.1 percent) over the fourth quarter of 2001. The increase in expense year-over-year was primarily due to a $50.0 million litigation charge for investment banking regulatory matters at Piper, an increase in MSR impairment, the impact of recent acquisitions, including Leader and the branches of Bay View, and a charge for the realignment of the Company’s businesses post-integration. Offsetting these increases in expense were the impact of adopting new accounting standards related to business combinations and the amortization of intangibles, lower capital markets-related expense and lower core banking expenses, primarily the result of integration cost savings.

LINE OF BUSINESS FINANCIAL REVIEW

Within the Company, financial performance is measured by major lines of business, which include Wholesale Banking, Consumer Banking, Private Client, Trust and Asset Management, Payment Services, Capital Markets, and Treasury and Corporate Support. These operating segments are components of the Company about which financial information is available and is evaluated regularly in deciding how to allocate resources and assess performance.

Basis for Financial Presentation Business line results are derived from the Company’s business unit profitability reporting systems by specifically attributing managed balance sheet assets, deposits and other liabilities and their related income or expense. Funds transfer-pricing methodologies are utilized to allocate a cost of funds used or credit for funds provided to all business line assets and liabilities using a matched funding concept. Also, the business unit is allocated the taxable-equivalent benefit of tax-exempt products. Noninterest income and expenses directly managed by each business line, including fees, service charges, salaries and benefits, and other direct costs are accounted for within each segment’s financial results in a manner similar to the consolidated financial statements. Occupancy costs are allocated based on utilization of facilities by the lines of business. Noninterest expenses incurred by centrally managed operations or business lines that directly support another business line’s operations are not charged to the applicable business line. Goodwill and other intangible assets are assigned to the lines of business based on the mix of business of the acquired entity. To enhance analysis of core business line results, the amortization of goodwill for all prior periods is reported within Treasury and Corporate Support. The provision for credit losses for each business unit is based on its net charge-offs adjusted for changes in the allowance for credit losses, reflecting improvement or deterioration in the risk profile of the business lines’ loan portfolios. The difference between the provision for credit losses determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States recognized by the Company on a consolidated basis and the provision recorded by the business lines is recorded in Treasury and Corporate Support. Income taxes are assessed to each line of business at a standard tax rate with the residual tax expense or benefit to arrive at the consolidated effective tax rate included in Treasury and Corporate Support. Merger and restructuring-related charges and cumulative effects of changes in accounting principles are not identified by or allocated to lines of business. Within the Company, capital levels are evaluated and managed centrally; however, capital is allocated to the operating segments to support evaluation of business performance. Capital allocations to the business lines are based on the amount of goodwill and other intangibles, the extent of off-balance sheet managed assets and lending commitments and the ratio of on-balance sheet assets relative to the total Company. Certain lines of business, such as trust, asset management and capital markets, have no significant balance sheet components. For these business units, capital is allocated taking into consideration fiduciary and operational risk, capital levels of independent organizations operating similar businesses, and regulatory requirements.

     Designations, assignments and allocations may change from time to time as management systems are enhanced, methods of evaluating performance or product lines change or business segments are realigned to better respond to our diverse customer base. During 2002, certain organization and methodology changes were made and, accordingly,
 
U.S. Bancorp  53


Table of Contents

2001 results were restated and presented on a comparable basis.
     The Company’s basis of financial presentation differed significantly in 2000 due to organizational changes in connection with the Firstar/USBM merger. Therefore, the presentation of comparative business line results for 2000 is not practical at this time.

Wholesale Banking offers lending, depository, treasury management and other financial services to middle market, large corporate and public sector clients. Wholesale Banking contributed $1,372.7 million of the Company’s net operating earnings in 2002 and $708.4 million in 2001. The significant increase in operating earnings in 2002, compared with 2001 was primarily driven by a lower provision for credit losses.

     Total net revenue decreased 1.2 percent in 2002, compared with 2001. Net interest income, on a taxable-equivalent basis, decreased 6.7 percent, compared with 2001, as average loans declined $6.8 billion in 2002, compared with 2001. The impact of declining average loans on net interest income was offset somewhat by improving spreads and a decrease in the funding cost related to non-earning assets. The decrease in net interest income also reflected the adverse impact of declining interest rates on the funding benefits of customer deposits, partially offset by growth in average deposits of 23.6 percent in 2002, compared with 2001. Additionally, a decline in required capital for Wholesale Banking, driven by lower commercial loan balances and unfunded commitments, reduced the related earnings credit in 2002, compared with 2001. The decline in commercial loans was due in part to weak
 
 Table 22   Line of Business Financial Performance
                                                     
Wholesale Consumer
Banking Banking

Percent Percent
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 Change 2002 2001 Change

Condensed Income Statement
                                               
Net interest income (taxable-equivalent basis)
  $ 1,999.0     $ 2,141.8       (6.7 )%   $ 3,295.7     $ 3,259.7       1.1 %
Noninterest income
    739.5       629.4       17.5       1,477.4       1,248.4       18.3  
   
         
       
 
Total net revenue
    2,738.5       2,771.2       (1.2 )     4,773.1       4,508.1       5.9  
Noninterest expense
    395.9       394.5       .4       1,695.1       1,698.7       (.2 )
Other intangible amortization
    20.7       24.7       (16.2 )     339.0       166.2       *  
Goodwill amortization
                                   
   
         
       
 
Total noninterest expense
    416.6       419.2       (.6 )     2,034.1       1,864.9       9.1  
   
         
       
   
Operating income
    2,321.9       2,352.0       (1.3 )     2,739.0       2,643.2       3.6  
Provision for credit losses
    163.9       1,238.4       (86.8 )     428.6       550.9       (22.2 )
   
         
       
Income before income taxes
    2,158.0       1,113.6       93.8       2,310.4       2,092.3       10.4  
Income taxes and taxable-equivalent adjustment
    785.3       405.2       93.8       840.7       761.5       10.4  
   
         
       
Operating earnings, before merger and restructuring-related items and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1,372.7     $ 708.4       93.8     $ 1,469.7     $ 1,330.8       10.4  
   
         
       
Merger and restructuring-related items (after-tax)
                                               
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (after-tax)
                                               
Net income
                                               
 
Average Balance Sheet Data
                                               
Commercial
  $ 31,699     $ 37,586       (15.7 )%   $ 7,099     $ 8,278       (14.2 )%
Commercial real estate
    16,113       16,959       (5.0 )     8,789       8,283       6.1  
Residential mortgages
    167       157       6.4       8,001       8,229       (2.8 )
Retail
    136       221       (38.5 )     26,928       23,924       12.6  
   
         
       
 
Total loans
    48,115       54,923       (12.4 )     50,817       48,714       4.3  
Goodwill
    1,331       1,384       (3.8 )     1,787       1,724       3.7  
Other intangible assets
    127       157       (19.1 )     945       678       39.4  
Assets
    54,580       62,024       (12.0 )     59,287       56,906       4.2  
Noninterest-bearing deposits
    13,008       10,613       22.6       12,933       12,062       7.2  
Savings products
    5,563       4,125       34.9       35,790       34,466       3.8  
Time deposits
    2,591       2,386       8.6       22,609       26,864       (15.8 )
   
         
       
 
Total deposits
    21,162       17,124       23.6       71,332       73,392       (2.8 )
Shareholders’ equity
  $ 5,376     $ 6,117       (12.1 )   $ 4,858     $ 4,848       .2  

* Not meaningful

 
54 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

customer loan demand resulting from the current economic environment, in addition to the Company’s decisions in 2001 to tighten credit availability to certain types of lending, industries and customers, and reductions due to asset workout strategies. Also contributing to the decline were the transfers of high credit quality commercial loans to the loan conduit reducing average commercial loans by $721 million in 2002. Noninterest income increased 17.5 percent in 2002 to $739.5 million in 2002, reflecting core growth in cash management-related fees driven by lower earnings credit rates and new account growth, an increase in fee income related to the loan conduit and growth in commercial leasing income and international fee income.
     Noninterest expense was $416.6 million in 2002, compared with $419.2 million in 2001. The $2.6 million decrease was primarily due to the decline in personnel costs resulting from integration cost savings, in addition to lower intangible amortization costs, partially offset by increases in equipment financing related write-downs and loan workout expenses.
     During 2002 and 2001, the provision for credit losses was $163.9 million and $1,238.4 million, respectively. Included in 2001 was a significant charge taken after extensive reviews of the Company’s commercial loan portfolio in light of the world events that occurred in the third quarter of 2001, declining economic conditions, and company-specific trends. This action reflected management’s expectations at the time of a prolonged economic slowdown and recovery. In addition, net charge-offs were relatively higher in 2001 due to specific actions taken by management in response to changes in economic conditions. The

                                                                                                                         
Private Client, Trust Payment Capital Treasury and Consolidated
and Asset Management Services Markets Corporate Support Company

Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent
2002 2001 Change 2002 2001 Change 2002 2001 Change 2002 2001 Change 2002 2001 Change

    $ 319.5     $ 317.0       .8 %   $ 703.0     $ 619.5       13.5 %   $ 27.5     $ 23.0       19.6%     $ 531.6     $ 62.0       * %   $ 6,876.3     $ 6,423.0       7.1 %
      875.9       878.2       (.3 )     1,676.5       1,268.4       32.2       709.8       807.4       (12.1 )     389.5       507.1       (23.2 )     5,868.6       5,338.9       9.9  
   
         
         
         
         
       
      1,195.4       1,195.2             2,379.5       1,887.9       26.0       737.3       830.4       (11.2 )     921.1       569.1       61.9       12,744.9       11,761.9       8.4  
      443.3       446.7       (.8 )     637.8       523.7       21.8       735.6       768.5       (4.3 )     1,471.8       1,297.2       13.5       5,379.5       5,129.3       4.9  
      31.1       30.6       1.6       161.0       55.7       *                         1.2       1.2             553.0       278.4       98.6  
                                                                  251.1       *             251.1       *  
   
         
         
         
         
       
      474.4       477.3       (.6 )     798.8       579.4       37.9       735.6       768.5       (4.3 )     1,473.0       1,549.5       (4.9 )     5,932.5       5,658.8       4.8  
   
         
         
         
         
       
      721.0       717.9       .4       1,580.7       1,308.5       20.8       1.7       61.9       (97.3 )     (551.9 )     (980.4 )     43.7       6,812.4       6,103.1       11.6  
      18.4       25.4       (27.6 )     444.4       488.9       (9.1 )     (.1 )           *       293.8       (157.0 )     *       1,349.0       2,146.6       (37.2 )
   
         
         
         
         
       
      702.6       692.5       1.5       1,136.3       819.6       38.6       1.8       61.9       (97.1 )     (845.7 )     (823.4 )     (2.7 )     5,463.4       3,956.5       38.1  
      255.8       252.1       1.5       413.5       298.2       38.7       .7       22.5       (96.9 )     (370.3 )     (333.8 )     (10.9 )     1,925.7       1,405.7       37.0  
   
         
         
         
         
       
    $ 446.8     $ 440.4       1.5     $ 722.8     $ 521.4       38.6     $ 1.1     $ 39.4       (97.2 )   $ (475.4 )   $ (489.6 )     2.9       3,537.7       2,550.8       38.7  
   
         
         
         
         
       
                                                                                                      (211.3 )     (844.3 )        
                                                                                                   
       
                                                                                                      (37.2 )              
                                                                                                   
       
                                                                                                    $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5          
                                                                                                   
       
 
    $ 1,829     $ 1,774       3.1 %   $ 2,803     $ 2,584       8.5 %   $ 228     $ 178       28.1%     $ 162     $ (328 )     * %   $ 43,820     $ 50,072       (12.5 )%
      585       577       1.4                                           236       262       (9.9 )     25,723       26,081       (1.4 )
      234       182       28.6                                           10       8       25.0       8,412       8,576       (1.9 )
      2,082       1,882       10.6       7,303       7,381       (1.1 )                       52       40       30.0       36,501       33,448       9.1  
   
         
         
         
         
       
      4,730       4,415       7.1       10,106       9,965       1.4       228       178       28.1       460       (18 )     *       114,456       118,177       (3.1 )
      290       289       .3       1,814       972       86.6       306       316       (3.2 )                       5,528       4,685       18.0  
      227       253       (10.3 )     769       433       77.6                         12             *       2,080       1,521       36.8  
      5,800       5,787       .2       13,396       11,851       13.0       3,042       3,019       .8       35,843       26,357       36.0       171,948       165,944       3.6  
      2,322       2,143       8.4       229       168       36.3       216       173       24.9       7       (50 )     *       28,715       25,109       14.4  
      4,306       4,418       (2.5 )     7       6       16.7                         130       450       (71.1 )     45,796       43,465       5.4  
      473       545       (13.2 )                                         4,940       6,587       (25.0 )     30,613       36,382       (15.9 )
   
         
         
         
         
       
      7,101       7,106       (.1 )     236       174       35.6       216       173       24.9       5,077       6,987       (27.3 )     105,124       104,956       .2  
    $ 1,342     $ 1,403       (4.3 )   $ 3,224     $ 2,010       60.4     $ 642     $ 636       .9     $ 1,521     $ 1,187       28.1     $ 16,963     $ 16,201       4.7  

 
U.S. Bancorp  55


Table of Contents

improvement in provision for credit losses reflected a reduction in net charge-offs, the impact of reductions in total loan commitments and an improvement in the projected loss ratios for commercial loan risk rating categories that has occurred. These trends were attributable to the improvement in credit quality driven by the Company’s asset workout strategies, reductions in commitments to certain industries and customers and lower net charge-offs. Despite an improvement in risk ratings, nonperforming assets within the Wholesale Banking business line continues to be at elevated levels reflecting stress in several industry sectors increasing to $1.0 billion at December 31, 2002, from $738.7 million a year ago. Refer to the “Corporate Risk Profile” section for further information on factors impacting the credit quality of the loan portfolios.

Consumer Banking delivers products and services to the broad consumer market and small businesses through banking offices, telemarketing, on-line services, direct mail and automated teller machines (“ATMs”). It encompasses community banking, metropolitan banking, small business banking, consumer lending, mortgage banking, workplace banking, student banking, 24-hour banking and investment product and insurance sales. Consumer Banking contributed $1,469.7 million of the Company’s net operating earnings in 2002 and $1,330.8 million in 2001, a 10.4 percent increase.

     Total net revenue increased 5.9 percent from 2001. Fee-based revenue grew by 18.3 percent in 2002 while net interest income increased 1.1 percent in 2002. The increase in net interest income in 2002 was due to average loan growth, improved spreads on retail loans and residential real estate loans, slightly lower non-earning asset balances and growth in noninterest-bearing deposit balances and the related funding benefit. Partially offsetting the increase in net interest income was the impact of declining interest rates on the funding benefit of consumer deposits. The increase in average loan balances of 4.3 percent reflected core retail loan growth of 12.6 percent in 2002 offset by a decline of 4.1 percent in commercial and commercial real estate loans. The change in average deposits included core growth in noninterest-bearing, interest checking and savings account balances, offset by a reduction in balances associated with time deposits. The decline in lower margin time deposits primarily reflected a shift in product mix towards savings products. Fee-based revenue growth in 2002 was driven by increases in deposit service charge revenue, mortgage banking production and servicing revenue, investment product revenue, securities gains and lower end-of-term lease residual losses partially offset by lower trust and investment management fees. The growth in mortgage banking servicing and production revenue was partially attributable to the acquisition of Leader in the second quarter of 2002, which contributed $48.3 million in 2002, compared with 2001. The additional growth in mortgage banking servicing and production revenue, net interest income from higher average loans held for sale and the increase in securities gains offset the increased MSR impairments recognized in 2002.
     Noninterest expense was $2,034.1 million in 2002, compared with $1,864.9 million in 2001. The increase in noninterest expense in 2002 was attributable to the Leader acquisition of $34.5 million and recognition of higher MSR impairments in 2002 of $186.0 million, compared with $60.8 million in 2001, partially offset by expense control initiatives.
     The provision for credit losses decreased $122.3 million (22.2 percent) in 2002, compared with 2001. The decrease in the provision primarily reflected improvement in the Community Banking commercial loan portfolio, including lower net charge-offs, reductions in loan commitments and improvement in loss ratios on risk rated loan commitments. The change in the provision also reflected an improvement in retail loss ratios due to enhancements in collection efforts and lower delinquency levels.

Private Client, Trust and Asset Management provides mutual fund processing services, trust, private banking and financial advisory services through four businesses, including: the Private Client Group, Corporate Trust, Institutional Trust and Custody, and Fund Services, LLC. The business segment also offers investment management services to several client segments, including mutual funds, institutional customers, and private asset management. Private Client, Trust and Asset Management contributed $446.8 million of the Company’s net operating earnings in 2002, an increase of 1.5 percent, compared with 2001.

     Total net revenue was $1,195.4 million in 2002, essentially flat, compared with 2001. Net interest income increased .8 percent, compared with 2001. The increase in net interest income in 2002 is due to core growth of 10.6 percent in retail loans, and lower non-earning asset balances and related funding costs partially offset by the impact of declining rates on the funding benefit of deposits. Noninterest income decreased .3 percent, compared with 2001. Core account growth was approximately 2.3 percent in 2002 contributing $20.3 million. This growth was offset by a decrease in the value of assets under management driven by adverse capital market conditions relative to 2001. Noninterest expense decreased $2.9 million (.6 percent), compared with 2001 primarily attributable to a reduction in personnel costs.
     The provision for credit losses decreased $7.0 million (27.6 percent) in 2002, compared with the same period of a year ago. Net charges-offs were $1.4 million higher in 2002, compared with 2001. The improvement in the
 
56 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

provision for credit losses reflected lower projected loss ratios during 2002 based on recent experience as compared with 2001, as well as a reduction in commercial loan commitments in 2002 offset by the increase in net charge-offs.

Payment Services includes consumer and business credit cards, corporate and purchasing card services, consumer lines of credit, ATM processing, merchant processing and debit cards. Payment Services contributed $722.8 million of the Company’s net operating earnings in 2002, a 38.6 percent increase over 2001. The business unit’s financial results were, in part, driven by the impact of the NOVA acquisition completed during the third quarter of 2001.

     Total net revenue was $2,379.5 million in 2002, representing a 26.0 percent increase over 2001. Net interest income increased 13.5 percent, while fee-based income increased 32.2 percent over 2001. Excluding the impact of NOVA, total net revenue increased approximately 12.7 percent in 2002, compared with 2001 primarily due to growth in noninterest income of 16.2 percent. Net interest income, excluding NOVA, was up 7.3 percent in 2002, primarily due to an increase in average loans and lower funding costs on the noninterest-bearing corporate card loan portfolio. Noninterest income, excluding NOVA, was up 16.2 percent in 2002, primarily due to increases in credit and debit card revenue, corporate payment product revenue, ATM servicing revenues and the sales of two co-branded credit card portfolios.
     Total revenue growth was partially offset by an increase in noninterest expense of $219.4 million (37.9 percent), primarily due to the NOVA acquisition. Excluding the impact of the NOVA acquisition, noninterest expense for the segment was $8.1 million (2.1 percent) lower in 2002, compared with 2001, primarily due to personnel and other operating expense cost saves resulting from integration activities. The provision for credit losses decreased $44.5 million (9.1 percent), compared with 2001. The decrease in provision was primarily a reflection of the improvement in projected loss rates due to enhancements in collection efforts partially offset by an increase in net charge-offs of $24.7 million in 2002, compared with 2001.

Capital Markets engages in equity and fixed income trading activities, offers investment banking and underwriting services for corporate and public sector customers and provides financial advisory services and securities, mutual funds, annuities and insurance products to consumers and regionally based businesses through a network of brokerage offices. Capital Markets contributed $1.1 million of the Company’s net operating earnings in 2002, a 97.2 percent decline, compared with 2001. The unfavorable variance in net operating income from 2001 was due to a decline in fees related to trading, investment product fees and commissions, investment banking fees and mark-to-market valuation adjustments reflecting the recent adverse capital markets conditions. Capital markets activities continued to experience weak sales volumes and lower levels of investment banking and merger and acquisition transactions. Management anticipates continued softness in sales activities and related revenue growth throughout the next several quarters. Also contributing to the unfavorable variances was a litigation charge, including a $25.0 million settlement for investment banking regulatory matters at Piper and a $7.5 million liability for funding independent analyst research for its customers. Given continued adverse market conditions, the Capital Markets line of business continued to realign its business activities in 2002 to improve its operating model and rationalize the distribution network.

Treasury and Corporate Support includes the Company’s investment portfolios, funding, capital management and asset securitization activities, interest rate risk management, the net effect of transfer pricing related to average balances, and the change in residual allocations associated with the provision for loan losses. It also includes business activities managed on a corporate basis, including enterprise-wide operations and administrative support functions. Treasury and Corporate Support recorded net operating losses of $475.4 million in 2002, a 2.9 percent improvement, compared with 2001.

     During 2002, total net revenue was $921.1 million, compared with $569.1 million in 2001. The $352.0 million increase was primarily attributable to an increase in net interest income of $469.6 million. The increase in net interest income was primarily due to an increase in average investments of $6.9 billion from a year ago and the benefit of changes in the mix of funding during the declining rate environment. Noninterest income decreased $117.6 million in 2002 primarily due to a decline in securities gains of $97.6 million and a reduction in the level of equity investment losses relative to 2001.
     Noninterest expense was $1,473.0 million in 2002, compared with $1,549.5 million in 2001, a decrease of 4.9 percent. Adjusting for the adoption of SFAS 142 in 2002, noninterest expense excluding goodwill amortization increased by $174.6 million (13.4 percent) in 2002, compared with 2001. The increase was primarily the result of higher costs associated with corporate performance based compensation due to the improved Company performance in 2002, compared with 2001, in addition to personnel and related costs for post integration rationalization of technology, operations and support functions.
     The provision for credit losses for this business unit represents the residual aggregate of the credit losses allocated to the reportable business units and the
 
U.S. Bancorp  57


Table of Contents

Company’s recorded provision determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. The provision for credit losses reflected within the other business units is based on its net charge-offs adjusting for changes in the allowance for credit losses necessary to reflect improvement or deterioration in the risk profile of its specific loan portfolios. Historical loss factors are applied to commercial loan commitments stratified by risk rating plus the required amounts for homogeneous loan portfolios based on twelve month projected losses in computing the quarter end business unit allowance. The change in the managerial allowance for credit losses for the business units is reflected within the applicable business unit’s provision for credit losses. The provision for credit losses was a loss of $293.8 million in 2002, compared with a net recovery of $157.0 million in 2001. The increase in the provision for credit losses in 2002 over 2001 reflected the continued elevated levels of net charge-offs and nonperforming assets on a consolidated level, despite the improving mix of risk ratings in the other reportable business units. Improvements in the level of credit risk and mix of risk classifications within the portfolios of the other business units were driven by reductions in higher risk loan commitments due to the Company’s workout strategies. Refer to the “Corporate Risk Profile” section for further information on provision for credit losses, nonperforming assets and factors considered by the Company in assessing the credit quality of the loan portfolio and establishing the allowance for credit losses.

ACCOUNTING CHANGES

Note 2 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements discusses new accounting policies adopted by the Company during 2002 and the expected impact of accounting policies recently issued or proposed but not yet required to be adopted. To the extent the adoption of new accounting standards affects the Company’s financial condition, results of operations or liquidity, the impacts are discussed in the applicable section(s) of the Management’s Discussion and Analysis and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The accounting and reporting policies of the Company comply with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States and conform to general practices within the banking industry. The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions. The financial position and results of operations can be affected by these estimates and assumptions, which are integral to understanding reported results. Critical accounting policies are those policies that management believes are the most important to the portrayal of the Company’s financial condition and results, and require management to make estimates that are difficult, subjective or complex. Most accounting policies are not considered by management to be critical accounting policies. Several factors are considered in determining whether or not a policy is critical in the preparation of financial statements. These factors include, among other things, whether the estimates are significant to the financial statements, the nature of the estimates, the ability to readily validate the estimates with other information including third parties or available prices, and sensitivity of the estimates to changes in economic conditions and whether alternative accounting methods may be utilized under generally accepted accounting principles. Management has discussed the development and the selection of critical accounting policies with the Company’s Audit Committee.

     Significant accounting policies are discussed in Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Those policies considered to be critical accounting policies are described below.

Allowance for Credit Losses The allowance for credit losses is established to provide for probable losses inherent in the Company’s credit portfolio. The methods utilized to estimate the allowance for credit losses, key assumptions and quantitative and qualitative information considered by management in determining the adequacy of the allowance for credit losses are discussed in the “Credit Risk Management” section.

     Management’s evaluation of the adequacy of the allowance for credit losses is the most critical of accounting estimates for a banking institution. It is a highly subjective process impacted by many factors as discussed throughout the Management’s Discussion and Analysis section of the Annual Report. Although risk management practices, methodologies and other tools are utilized to determine each element of the allowance, degrees of imprecision exist in these measurement tools due, in part, to subjective judgments involved and an inherent lagging of credit quality measurements relative to the stage of the business cycle. Even determining the stage of the business cycle is highly subjective. As discussed in the “Analysis and Determination of Allowance for Credit Losses” section, management considers the effect of imprecision and many other factors in determining the allowance for credit losses by establishing an “allowance for other factors” that is not specifically allocated to a category of loans. If not considered, inherent losses in the portfolio related to imprecision and other subjective factors could have a dramatic adverse impact on the liquidity and financial viability of a bank.
 
58 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

     Given the many subjective factors affecting the credit portfolio, changes in the allowance for other factors may not directly coincide with changes in the risk ratings of the credit portfolio reflected in the risk rating process. This is, in part, due to the timing of the risk rating process in relation to changes in the business cycle, the exposure and mix of loans within risk rating categories, levels of nonperforming loans, and the timing of charge-offs and recoveries. For example, the amount of loans within specific risk ratings may change, providing a leading indicator of improving credit quality, while nonperforming loans and net charge-offs continue at elevated levels. Because the allowance specifically allocated to commercial loans is primarily driven by risk ratings and loss ratios determined through migration analysis and historical performance, the amount of the allowance for commercial and commercial real estate loans might decline. However, it is likely that management would maintain an adequate allowance for credit losses by increasing the allowance for other factors at a stage in the business cycle that is uncertain and when nonperforming asset levels remain elevated. Management believes these conditions existed at December 31, 2002.
     Sensitivity analysis to the many factors impacting the allowance for credit losses is difficult. Some factors are quantifiable while other factors require qualitative judgment. Management conducts analysis with respect to the accuracy of risk ratings and the volatility of inherent loss rates applied to risk categories and utilizes the results of this analysis to determine retail loss projections. This analysis is then considered in determining the level of the allowance for credit losses. Refer to the “Analysis and Determination of the Allowance for Credit Losses” section for further information.

Asset Impairment In the ordinary course of business, the Company evaluates the carrying value of its assets for potential impairment. Generally, potential impairment is determined based on a comparison of fair value to the carrying value. The determination of fair value can be highly subjective, especially for assets that are not actively traded or when market-based prices are not available. The Company estimates fair value based on the present value of estimated future cash flows. The initial valuation and subsequent impairment tests may require the use of significant management estimates. Additionally, determining the amount, if any, of an impairment may require an assessment of whether or not a decline in an asset’s estimated fair value below the recorded value is temporary in nature. While impairment assessments impact most asset categories, the following areas are considered to be critical accounting matters in relation to the financial statements.

Mortgage Servicing Rights Mortgage servicing rights (“MSRs”) are capitalized as separate assets when loans are sold and servicing is retained. The total cost of loans sold is allocated between the loans sold and the servicing assets retained based on their relative fair values. MSRs that are purchased from others are initially recorded at cost. The carrying value of the MSRs is amortized in proportion to and over the period of, estimated net servicing revenue and recorded in noninterest expense as amortization of intangible assets. The carrying value of these assets is periodically reviewed for impairment using a lower of carrying value or fair value methodology. For purposes of measuring impairment, the servicing rights are stratified based on the underlying loan type and note rate and the carrying value for each stratum is compared to fair value based on a discounted cash flow analysis, utilizing current prepayment speeds and discount rates. Events that may significantly affect the estimates used are changes in interest rates and the related impact on mortgage loan prepayment speeds and the payment performance of the underlying loans. If the carrying value is less than fair value, impairment is recognized through a valuation allowance for each impaired stratum and recorded as amortization of intangible assets. The changes in the fair value of MSRs at December 31, 2002, to immediate 25 and 50 basis point adverse changes in interest rates would be approximately $81 million and $145 million, respectively. An upward movement in interest rates at December 31, 2002, of 25 and 50 basis points would increase the value of the MSRs by approximately $88 million and $169 million, respectively. Refer to Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding MSRs.

Goodwill and Other Intangibles The Company records all assets and liabilities acquired in purchase acquisitions, including goodwill and other intangibles, at fair value as required by SFAS 141. Goodwill and indefinite-lived assets are no longer amortized but are subject, at a minimum, to annual tests for impairment. Other intangible assets are amortized over their estimated useful lives using straight-line and accelerated methods, and are subject to impairment if events or circumstances indicate a possible inability to realize the carrying amount. The initial goodwill and other intangibles recorded and subsequent impairment analysis requires management to make subjective judgments concerning estimates of how the acquired asset will perform in the future using a discounted cash flow analysis. Additionally, estimated cash flows may extend beyond ten years and, by their nature, are difficult to determine over an extended timeframe. Events and factors that may significantly affect the estimates include, among others, competitive forces, customer behaviors and attrition, changes in revenue growth trends, cost structures and technology, and changes in discount rates and specific

 
U.S. Bancorp  59


Table of Contents

industry or market sector conditions. In determining the reasonableness of cash flow estimates, the Company reviews historical performance of the underlying asset or similar assets in an effort to improve assumptions utilized in its estimates. In assessing the fair value of reportable operating segments, the Company may consider other information to validate the reasonableness of its valuations including public market comparables, multiples of recent mergers and acquisitions of similar businesses and third-party assessments. Refer to Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding intangible assets.

CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Under the supervision and with the participation of the Company’s management, including its principal executive officer and principal financial officer, the Company has evaluated the effectiveness of the design and operation of its disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rule 15d-14(c) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) as of a date within 90 days prior to the filing date of this report. Based upon this evaluation, the principal executive officer and principal financial officer have concluded that, as of such date, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective in making them aware on a timely basis of the material information relating to the Company required to be included in the Company’s periodic filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

     There were no significant changes made in the Company’s internal controls during the period covered by this report or, to the Company’s knowledge, in other factors that could significantly affect these controls subsequent to the date of their evaluation.
 
60 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Responsibility for Financial
Statements of U.S. Bancorp

Responsibility for the financial statements and other information presented throughout the Annual Report on Form 10-K rests with the management of U.S. Bancorp. The Company believes that the consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States and present fairly the substance of transactions based on the circumstances and management’s best estimates and judgment. All financial information throughout the Annual Report on Form 10-K is consistent with that in the financial statements.

In meeting its responsibilities for the reliability of the financial statements, the Company depends on its system of internal controls. The system is designed to provide reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded and transactions are executed in accordance with the appropriate corporate authorization and recorded properly to permit the preparation of the financial statements. To test compliance, the Company carries out an extensive audit program. This program includes a review for compliance with written policies and procedures and a comprehensive review of the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal control systems. Although control procedures are designed and tested, it must be recognized that there are limits inherent in all systems of internal accounting control and, as such, errors and irregularities may nevertheless occur. Also, estimates and judgments are required to assess and balance the relative cost and expected benefits of the controls. The Company believes that its system of internal controls provides reasonable assurance that errors or irregularities that could be material to the financial statements are prevented or would be detected within a timely period by employees in the normal course of performing their assigned functions.

The Board of Directors of the Company has an Audit Committee composed of directors who are not officers or employees of U.S. Bancorp. The committee meets periodically with management, the internal auditors and the independent accountants to consider audit results and to discuss internal accounting control, auditing and financial reporting matters.

The Company’s independent accountants, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, have been engaged to render an independent professional opinion on the financial statements and to assist in carrying out certain aspects of the audit program described above. Their opinion on the financial statements is based on procedures conducted in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States and forms the basis for their report as to the fair presentation, in the financial statements, of the Company’s financial position, operating results and cash flows.

     
-S- JERRY A. GRUNDHOFER   -S- DAVID M. MOFFETT
Jerry A. Grundhofer
Chairman, President and
Chief Executive Officer
  David M. Moffett
Vice Chairman and
Chief Financial Officer
 
Report of
Independent Accountants

To the Shareholders and Board of Directors of U.S. Bancorp:

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheet and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of U.S. Bancorp and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2002 and 2001, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2002, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management; our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America, which require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

As discussed in Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements, in 2002 the Company adopted the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.”

-S- PRICEWATERHOUSECOOPERS, LLP

Minneapolis, Minnesota

January 21, 2003, except for Note 3, as to which the date is
February 19, 2003
 
U.S. Bancorp  61


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Balance Sheet
                       
At December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Assets
               
Cash and due from banks
  $ 10,758     $ 9,120  
Money market investments
    434       625  
Trading securities
    898       982  
Investment securities
               
 
Held-to maturity (fair value $240 and $306, respectively)
    233       299  
 
Available-for-sale
    28,255       26,309  
Loans held for sale
    4,159       2,820  
Loans
               
 
Commercial
    41,944       46,330  
 
Commercial real estate
    26,867       25,373  
 
Residential mortgages
    9,746       7,829  
 
Retail
    37,694       34,873  
   
   
Total loans
    116,251       114,405  
     
Less allowance for credit losses
    2,422       2,457  
   
     
Net loans
    113,829       111,948  
Premises and equipment
    1,697       1,741  
Customers’ liability on acceptances
    140       178  
Goodwill
    6,325       5,459  
Other intangible assets
    2,321       1,953  
Other assets
    10,978       9,956  
   
   
Total assets
  $ 180,027     $ 171,390  
   
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
               
Deposits
               
 
Noninterest-bearing
  $ 35,106     $ 31,212  
 
Interest-bearing
    68,214       65,447  
 
Time deposits greater than $100,000
    12,214       8,560  
   
   
Total deposits
    115,534       105,219  
Short-term borrowings
    7,806       14,670  
Long-term debt
    28,588       25,716  
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company
    2,994       2,826  
Acceptances outstanding
    140       178  
Other liabilities
    6,864       6,320  
   
   
Total liabilities
    161,926       154,929  
Shareholders’ equity
               
 
Common stock, par value $0.01 a share — authorized: 4,000,000,000 shares
issued: 2002 — 1,972,643,060 shares; 2001 — 1,972,777,763 shares
    20       20  
 
Capital surplus
    4,850       4,906  
 
Retained earnings
    13,719       11,918  
 
Less cost of common stock in treasury: 2002 — 55,686,500 shares; 2001 — 21,068,251 shares
    (1,272 )     (478 )
 
Other comprehensive income
    784       95  
   
   
Total shareholders’ equity
    18,101       16,461  
   
   
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 180,027     $ 171,390  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
62 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Statement of Income
                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars and Shares in Millions, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001 2000

Interest Income
                       
Loans
  $ 7,743.6     $ 9,413.7     $ 10,519.3  
Loans held for sale
    170.6       146.9       102.1  
Investment securities
                       
 
Taxable
    1,438.2       1,206.1       1,008.3  
 
Non-taxable
    46.1       89.5       140.6  
Money market investments
    10.6       26.6       53.9  
Trading securities
    37.1       57.5       53.7  
Other interest income
    107.5       101.6       151.4  
   
   
Total interest income
    9,553.7       11,041.9       12,029.3  
 
Interest Expense
                       
Deposits
    1,485.3       2,828.1       3,618.8  
Short-term borrowings
    249.4       534.1       781.7  
Long-term debt
    842.7       1,184.8       1,511.7  
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company
    136.6       127.8       110.7  
   
   
Total interest expense
    2,714.0       4,674.8       6,022.9  
   
Net interest income
    6,839.7       6,367.1       6,006.4  
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0  
   
Net interest income after provision for credit losses
    5,490.7       3,838.3       5,178.4  
 
Noninterest Income
                       
Credit and debit card revenue
    517.0       465.9       431.0  
Corporate payment products revenue
    325.7       297.7       299.2  
ATM processing services
    136.9       130.6       141.9  
Merchant processing services
    567.3       308.9       120.0  
Trust and investment management fees
    899.1       894.4       926.2  
Deposit service charges
    714.0       667.3       555.6  
Cash management fees
    416.9       347.3       292.4  
Commercial products revenue
    479.2       437.4       350.0  
Mortgage banking revenue
    330.2       234.0       189.9  
Trading account profits and commissions
    206.5       221.6       258.4  
Investment products fees and commissions
    428.9       460.1       466.6  
Investment banking revenue
    207.4       258.2       360.3  
Securities gains, net
    299.9       329.1       8.1  
Merger and restructuring-related gains
          62.2        
Other
    339.6       286.4       526.8  
   
   
Total noninterest income
    5,868.6       5,401.1       4,926.4  
 
Noninterest Expense
                       
Salaries
    2,409.2       2,347.1       2,427.1  
Employee benefits
    367.7       366.2       399.8  
Net occupancy
    409.3       417.9       396.9  
Furniture and equipment
    306.0       305.5       308.2  
Communication
    183.8       181.4       138.8  
Postage
    178.4       179.8       174.5  
Goodwill
          251.1       235.0  
Other intangible assets
    553.0       278.4       157.3  
Merger and restructuring-related charges
    324.1       946.4       348.7  
Other
    1,525.1       1,331.4       1,130.7  
   
   
Total noninterest expense
    6,256.6       6,605.2       5,717.0  
   
Income before income taxes and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    5,102.7       2,634.2       4,387.8  
Applicable income taxes
    1,776.3       927.7       1,512.2  
   
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    3,326.4       1,706.5       2,875.6  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (37.2 )            
   
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
   
Earnings Per Share
                       
 
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.74     $ .89     $ 1.51  
 
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )            
   
 
Net income
  $ 1.72     $ .89     $ 1.51  
   
Diluted Earnings Per Share
                       
 
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.73     $ .88     $ 1.50  
 
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )            
   
 
Net income
  $ 1.71     $ .88     $ 1.50  
   
Average common shares
    1,916.0       1,927.9       1,906.0  
Average diluted common shares
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
U.S. Bancorp  63


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Statement of Shareholders’ Equity
                                                           
Common Other Total
Shares Common Capital Retained Treasury Comprehensive Shareholders’
(Dollars in Millions) Outstanding Stock Surplus Earnings Stock Income Equity

Balance December 31, 1999
    1,928,509,178     $ 19.4     $ 4,258.6     $ 10,049.4     $ (224.3 )   $ (156.6 )   $ 13,946.5  
Net income
                            2,875.6                       2,875.6  
Unrealized gain on securities available for sale
                                            436.0       436.0  
Foreign currency translation adjustment
                                            (.5 )     (.5 )
Reclassification adjustment for gains realized in net income
                                            (41.6 )     (41.6 )
Income taxes
                                            (141.8 )     (141.8 )
                                                     
 
 
Total comprehensive income
                                                    3,127.7  
Cash dividends declared on common stock
                            (1,267.0 )                     (1,267.0 )
Issuance of common stock and treasury shares
    32,652,574               (35.0 )             534.9               499.9  
Purchase of treasury stock
    (58,633,923 )                             (1,182.2 )             (1,182.2 )
Shares reserved to meet deferred compensation obligations
    (444,395 )             8.5               (8.5 )              
Amortization of restricted stock
                    43.5                               43.5  
   
Balance December 31, 2000
    1,902,083,434     $ 19.4     $ 4,275.6     $ 11,658.0     $ (880.1 )   $ 95.5     $ 15,168.4  

Net income
                            1,706.5                       1,706.5  
Unrealized gain on securities available for sale
                                            194.5       194.5  
Unrealized gain on derivatives
                                            106.0       106.0  
Foreign currency translation adjustment
                                            (4.0 )     (4.0 )
Realized gain on derivatives
                                            42.4       42.4  
Reclassification adjustment for gains realized in net income
                                            (333.1 )     (333.1 )
Income taxes
                                            (5.9 )     (5.9 )
                                                     
 
 
Total comprehensive income
                                                    1,706.4  
Cash dividends declared on common stock
                            (1,446.5 )                     (1,446.5 )
Issuance of common stock and treasury shares
    69,502,689       .7       1,383.7               49.3               1,433.7  
Purchase of treasury stock
    (19,743,672 )                             (467.9 )             (467.9 )
Retirement of treasury stock
            (.4 )     (823.2 )             823.6                
Shares reserved to meet deferred compensation obligations
    (132,939 )             3.0               (3.0 )              
Amortization of restricted stock
                    67.1                               67.1  
   
Balance December 31, 2001
    1,951,709,512     $ 19.7     $ 4,906.2     $ 11,918.0     $ (478.1 )   $ 95.4     $ 16,461.2  

Net income
                            3,289.2                       3,289.2  
Unrealized gain on securities available for sale
                                            1,048.0       1,048.0  
Unrealized gain on derivatives
                                            323.5       323.5  
Foreign currency translation adjustment
                                            6.9       6.9  
Realized gain on derivatives
                                            63.4       63.4  
Reclassification adjustment for gains realized in net income
                                            (331.6 )     (331.6 )
Income taxes
                                            (421.6 )     (421.6 )
                                                     
 
 
Total comprehensive income
                                                    3,977.8  
Cash dividends declared on common stock
                            (1,488.6 )                     (1,488.6 )
Issuance of common stock and treasury shares
    10,589,034               (75.3 )             249.3               174.0  
Purchase of treasury stock
    (45,256,736 )                             (1,040.4 )             (1,040.4 )
Shares reserved to meet deferred compensation obligations
    (85,250 )             2.9               (2.9 )              
Amortization of restricted stock
                    16.6                               16.6  
   
Balance December 31, 2002
    1,916,956,560     $ 19.7     $ 4,850.4     $ 13,718.6     $ (1,272.1 )   $ 784.0     $ 18,100.6  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
64 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Operating Activities
                       
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities
                       
 
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0  
 
Depreciation and amortization of premises and equipment
    285.3       284.0       262.6  
 
Amortization of goodwill and other intangibles
    553.0       529.5       392.3  
 
Provision for deferred income taxes
    357.9       (184.0 )     357.1  
 
Net (increase) decrease in trading securities
    81.8       (229.1 )     (135.6 )
 
(Gain) loss on sales of securities and other assets, net
    (411.1 )     (428.7 )     (47.3 )
 
Mortgage loans originated for sale in the secondary market
    (22,567.9 )     (15,500.2 )     (5,563.3 )
 
Proceeds from sales of mortgage loans
    20,756.6       13,483.0       5,475.0  
 
Other, net
    92.5       (7.9 )     279.7  
   
   
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
    3,786.3       2,181.9       4,724.1  
 
Investing Activities
                       
Proceeds from sales of investment securities
    14,386.9       19,240.2       10,194.0  
Maturities of investment securities
    11,246.5       4,572.2       2,127.7  
Purchases of investment securities
    (26,469.8 )     (32,278.6 )     (12,161.3 )
Net (increase) decrease in loans outstanding
    (4,111.3 )     2,532.3       (13,541.3 )
Proceeds from sales of loans
    2,219.1       3,729.1       6,655.8  
Purchases of loans
    (240.2 )     (87.5 )     (658.1 )
Proceeds from sales of premises and equipment
    211.8       166.3       212.9  
Purchases of premises and equipment
    (429.8 )     (299.2 )     (382.8 )
Acquisitions, net of cash acquired
    1,368.8       (741.4 )     904.4  
Divestitures of branches
          (340.0 )     (78.2 )
Other, net
    (126.1 )     (143.9 )     (570.6 )
   
   
Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities
    (1,944.1 )     (3,650.5 )     (7,297.5 )
 
Financing Activities
                       
Net increase (decrease) in deposits
    7,002.3       (4,258.1 )     3,403.7  
Net increase (decrease) in short-term borrowings
    (7,307.0 )     5,244.3       702.1  
Principal payments on long-term debt
    (8,367.5 )     (10,539.6 )     (5,277.5 )
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
    10,650.9       11,702.3       5,862.7  
Proceeds from issuance of Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company
          1,500.0        
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
    147.0       136.4       210.0  
Repurchase of common stock
    (1,040.4 )     (467.9 )     (1,182.2 )
Cash dividends paid
    (1,480.7 )     (1,235.1 )     (1,271.3 )
   
   
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities
    (395.4 )     2,082.3       2,447.5  
   
   
Change in cash and cash equivalents
    1,446.8       613.7       (125.9 )
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
    9,745.3       9,131.6       9,257.5  
   
   
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
  $ 11,192.1     $ 9,745.3     $ 9,131.6  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
U.S. Bancorp  65


Table of Contents

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 
 Note 1   Significant Accounting Policies

U.S. Bancorp and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) comprise the organization created by the acquisition by Firstar Corporation (“Firstar”) of the former U.S. Bancorp (“USBM”). The new Company retained the U.S. Bancorp name. The Company is a multi-state financial services holding company headquartered in Minneapolis, Minnesota. The Company provides a full range of financial services including lending and depository services through banking offices principally in 24 states. The Company also engages in credit card, merchant, and ATM processing, mortgage banking, insurance, trust and investment management, brokerage, leasing and investment banking activities principally in domestic markets.

Basis of Presentation The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. The consolidation eliminates all significant intercompany accounts and transactions. Certain items in prior periods have been reclassified to conform to the current presentation.

Uses of Estimates The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual experience could differ from those estimates.

BUSINESS SEGMENTS

Within the Company, financial performance is measured by major lines of business based on the products and services provided to customers through its distribution channels. The Company has six reportable operating segments:

Wholesale Banking offers lending, depository, treasury management and other financial services to middle market, large corporate, financial institution and public sector clients.

Consumer Banking delivers products and services to the broad consumer market and small businesses through banking offices, telemarketing, on-line services, direct mail and automated teller machines (“ATMs”).

Private Client, Trust and Asset Management provides mutual fund processing services, trust, private banking, financial advisory and investment management services to affluent individuals, businesses, institutions and mutual funds.

Payment Services specializes in credit and debit card products, corporate and purchasing card services and ATM and merchant processing. Customized products and services, coupled with cutting-edge technology are provided to consumer and business customers, government clients, correspondent financial institutions, merchants and co-brand partners.

Capital Markets provides financial advisory services and securities, mutual funds, annuities and insurance products to consumers and businesses, and engages in equity and fixed income trading activities and investment banking and underwriting services for corporate and public sector customers.

Treasury and Corporate Support includes the Company’s investment and residential mortgage portfolios, funding, capital management and asset securitization activities, interest rate risk management, the net effect of transfer pricing related to loan and deposit balances, and the change in residual allocations associated with the provision for loan losses. It also includes business activities managed on a corporate basis, including income and expense of enterprise-wide operations and administrative support functions.

Segment Results Accounting policies for the lines of business are the same as those used in preparation of the consolidated financial statements with respect to activities specifically attributable to each business line. However, the preparation of business line results requires management to establish methodologies to allocate funding costs and benefits, expenses and other financial elements to each line of business. For details of these methodologies and segment results, see “Basis for Financial Presentation” and Table 22 “Line of Business Financial Performance” included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis which is incorporated by reference into these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
66 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

SECURITIES

Trading Securities Debt and equity securities held for resale are classified as trading securities and reported at fair value. Realized and unrealized gains or losses are determined on a trade date basis and reported in noninterest income.

Available-for-sale Securities These securities are not trading securities but may be sold before maturity in response to changes in the Company’s interest rate risk profile or demand for collateralized deposits by public entities. Available-for-sale securities are carried at fair value with unrealized net gains or losses reported within other comprehensive income in shareholders’ equity. When sold, the amortized cost of the specific securities is used to compute the gain or loss.

Held-to-maturity Securities Debt securities for which the Company has the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity are reported at historical cost adjusted for amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts.

EQUITY INVESTMENTS IN OPERATING ENTITIES

Equity investments in public entities in which ownership is less than 20 percent are accounted for as available-for-sale securities and carried at fair value. Similar investments in private entities are accounted for using the cost method. Investments in entities where ownership interest is between 20 percent and 50 percent are accounted for using the equity method with the exception of limited partnerships and limited liability companies where an ownership interest of greater than 5 percent requires the use of the equity method. If the Company has a voting interest greater than 50 percent, the consolidation method is used. All equity investments are evaluated for impairment at least annually and more frequently if certain criteria are met.

LOANS

Loans are reported net of unearned income. Interest income is accrued on the unpaid principal balances as earned. Loan and commitment fees and certain direct loan origination costs are deferred and recognized over the life of the loan and/or commitment period as yield adjustments.

Commitments to Extend Credit Unfunded residential mortgage loan commitments entered into in connection with mortgage banking activities are considered derivatives and recorded on the balance sheet at fair value with changes in fair value recorded in income. All other unfunded loan commitments are generally related to providing credit facilities to customers of the bank and are not actively traded financial instruments. These unfunded commitments are disclosed as off-balance sheet financial instruments in Note 23 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Allowance for Credit Losses Management determines the adequacy of the allowance based on evaluations of the loan portfolio, recent loss experience, and other pertinent factors, including economic conditions. This evaluation is inherently subjective as it requires estimates, including amounts of future cash collections expected on nonaccrual loans, that may be susceptible to significant change. The allowance for credit losses relating to impaired loans is based on the loans’ observable market price, the collateral for certain collateral-dependent loans, or the discounted cash flows using the loan’s effective interest rate.

     The Company determines the amount of the allowance required for certain sectors based on relative risk characteristics of the loan portfolio. The allowance recorded for commercial loans is based on quarterly reviews of individual credit relationships and an analysis of the migration of commercial loans and actual loss experience. The allowance recorded for homogeneous consumer loans is based on an analysis of product mix, risk characteristics of the portfolio, bankruptcy experiences, and historical losses, adjusted for current trends, for each homogenous category or group of loans. The allowance is increased through provisions charged to operating earnings and reduced by net charge-offs.
     The Company also assesses the credit risk associated with off-balance sheet loan commitments and letters of credit and determines the appropriate amount of credit loss liability that should be recorded. The liability for off-balance sheet credit exposure related to loan commitments is included in the allowance for credit losses.

Nonaccrual Loans Generally commercial loans (including impaired loans) are placed on nonaccrual status when the collection of interest or principal has become 90 days past due or is otherwise considered doubtful. When a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, unpaid interest is reversed. Future interest payments are generally applied against principal. Revolving consumer lines and credit cards are charged off by 180 days past due and closed-end consumer loans other than loans secured by 1-4 family properties are charged off at 120 days past due and are, therefore, not placed on nonaccrual status.

Impaired Loans A loan is considered to be impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due (both interest and principal) according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.

Restructured Loans In cases where a borrower experiences financial difficulties and the Company makes certain concessionary modifications to contractual terms, the loan is classified as a restructured loan. Loans restructured at a rate equal to or greater than that of a new loan with comparable risk at the time the contract is modified may be excluded from restructured loans in the calendar years subsequent to the restructuring if they are in compliance with the modified terms.

 
U.S. Bancorp  67


Table of Contents

     Generally, a nonaccrual loan that is restructured remains on nonaccrual for a period of six months to demonstrate that the borrower can meet the restructured terms. However, performance prior to the restructuring, or significant events that coincide with the restructuring, are considered in assessing whether the borrower can meet the new terms and may result in the loan being returned to accrual status at the time of restructuring or after a shorter performance period. If the borrower’s ability to meet the revised payment schedule is uncertain, the loan remains classified as a nonaccrual loan.

Leases The Company engages in both direct and leveraged lease financing. The net investment in direct financing leases is the sum of all minimum lease payments and estimated residual values, less unearned income. Unearned income is added to interest income over the terms of the leases to produce a level yield.

     The investment in leveraged leases is the sum of all lease payments (less nonrecourse debt payments) plus estimated residual values, less unearned income. Income from leveraged leases is recognized over the term of the leases based on the unrecovered equity investment.
     Residual values on leased assets are reviewed regularly for other than temporary impairment. Valuations for retail automobile leases are based on independent assessments of expected used car sales prices at the end-of-term. Impairment tests are conducted based on these valuations considering the probability of the lessee returning the asset to the Company, re-marketing efforts and ancillary fees and costs. Valuations for commercial leases are based upon external or internal management appraisals. When there is other than temporary impairment in the estimated fair value of the Company’s interest in the residual value of a leased asset, the carrying value is reduced to the estimated fair value with the writedown recognized in the current period in commercial products revenue or other noninterest income.

Loans Held for Sale Loans held for sale (“LHFS”) represent mortgage loan originations intended to be sold in the secondary market and other loans that management has an active plan to sell. LHFS are carried at the lower of cost or market value as determined on an aggregate basis by type of loan. In the event management decides to sell loans receivable, the loans are transferred at the lower of cost or fair value. The Interagency Guidance on Certain Loans Held for Sale, dated March 26, 2001, requires loans transferred to LHFS to be marked-to-market (“MTM”) at the time of transfer. MTM losses related to the sale/ transfer of non-homogeneous loans that are predominantly credit-related, are reflected in charge-offs. With respect to homogeneous loans, the amount of “probable” credit loss determined in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 5 (“SFAS 5”), “Accounting for Contingencies,” methodologies utilized to determine the specific allowance allocation for the portfolio is also included in charge-offs. Any incremental loss determined in accordance with MTM accounting, that includes consideration of other factors such as estimates of future losses, is reported separately from charge-offs as a reduction to the allowance for credit losses. Subsequent decreases in fair value are recognized in noninterest income.

Other Real Estate Other real estate (“ORE”), which is included in other assets, is property acquired through foreclosure or other proceedings. ORE is carried at fair value, less estimated selling costs. The property is evaluated regularly and any decreases in the carrying amount are included in noninterest expense.

DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

In the ordinary course of business, the Company enters into derivative transactions to manage its interest rate and prepayment risk and to accommodate the business requirements of its customers. All derivative instruments are recorded as either assets or liabilities at fair value. Subsequent changes in a derivative’s fair value are recognized currently in earnings unless specific hedge accounting criteria are met.

     All derivative instruments that qualify for hedge accounting are recorded at fair value and classified either as a hedge of the fair value of a recognized asset or liability (“fair value” hedge) or as a hedge of the variability of cash flows to be received or paid related to a recognized asset or liability or a forecasted transaction (“cash flow” hedge). Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective and designated as a fair value hedge and the offsetting changes in the fair value of the hedged item are recorded in income. Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective and designated as a cash flow hedge are recognized in other comprehensive income until income from the cash flows of the hedged item is recognized. The Company performs an assessment, both at the inception of the hedge and on a quarterly basis thereafter, when required, to determine whether these derivatives are highly effective in offsetting changes in the value of the hedged items. Any change in fair value resulting from hedge ineffectiveness is immediately recorded in noninterest income.
     If a derivative designated as a hedge is terminated or ceases to be highly effective, the gain or loss is amortized to earnings over the remaining life of the hedged asset or liability (fair value hedge) or over the same period(s) that the forecasted hedged transactions impact earnings (cash flow hedge). If the hedged item is disposed of, or the forecasted transaction is no longer probable, the derivative is recorded at fair value with any resulting gain or loss
 
68 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

included in the gain or loss from the disposition of the hedged item or, in the case of a forecasted transaction that is no longer probable, included in earnings immediately.

OTHER SIGNIFICANT POLICIES

Premises and Equipment Premises and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and depreciated primarily on a straight-line basis over the estimated life of the assets. Estimated useful lives range up to 40 years for buildings and from 3 to 20 years for furniture and equipment.

     Capital leases, less accumulated amortization, are included in premises and equipment. The lease obligations are included in long-term debt. Capitalized leases are amortized on a straight-line basis over the lease term and the amortization is included in depreciation expense.

Mortgage Servicing Rights Mortgage servicing rights (“MSRs”) are capitalized as separate assets when loans are sold and servicing is retained. The total cost of loans sold is allocated between the loans sold and the servicing assets retained based on their relative fair values. MSRs that are purchased from others are initially recorded at cost. The carrying value of the MSRs is amortized in proportion to, and over the period of, estimated net servicing revenue and recorded in noninterest expense as amortization of intangible assets. The carrying value of these assets is periodically reviewed for impairment using a lower of carrying value or fair value methodology. For purposes of measuring impairment, the servicing rights are stratified based on the underlying loan type and note rate and the carrying value of each stratum is compared to fair value based on a discounted cash flow analysis, utilizing current prepayment speeds and discount rates. Events that may significantly affect the estimates used are changes in interest rates and the related impact on mortgage loan prepayment speeds and the payment performance of the underlying loans. If the carrying value is less than fair value, impairment is recognized through a valuation allowance for each impaired stratum and recorded as amortization of intangible assets.

Intangible Assets The price paid over the net fair value of the acquired businesses (“goodwill”) is not amortized. Other intangible assets are amortized over their estimated useful lives, using straight-line and accelerated methods. The recoverability of goodwill and other intangible assets is evaluated annually, at a minimum, or on an interim basis if events or circumstances indicate a possible inability to realize the carrying amount. The evaluation includes assessing the estimated fair value of the intangible asset based on market prices for similar assets, where available, and the present value of the estimated future cash flows associated with the intangible asset.

Income Taxes Deferred taxes are recorded to reflect the tax consequences on future years of differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and the financial reporting amounts at each year-end.

Statement of Cash Flows For purposes of reporting cash flows, cash and cash equivalents include cash and money market investments, defined as interest-bearing amounts due from banks, federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell.

Stock-Based Compensation The Company grants stock options for a fixed number of shares to employees and directors with an exercise price equal to the fair value of the shares at the date of grant. The Company accounts for stock option grants under the intrinsic value method in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,” (“APB 25”) and accordingly recognizes no compensation expense for the stock option grants. Refer to Note 19 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for information regarding the proforma impact to the Company’s earnings if the fair value accounting method was utilized.

Per Share Calculations Earnings per share is calculated by dividing net income (less preferred stock dividends) by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting income and outstanding shares, assuming conversion of all potentially dilutive securities, using the treasury stock method. All per share amounts have been restated for stock splits.

 
 Note 2   Accounting Changes

Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities In January 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Interpretation No. 46 (“FIN 46”), “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities” (“VIEs”), an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51, “Consolidated Financial Statements,” to improve financial reporting of special purpose and other entities. In accordance with the interpretation, business enterprises that represent the primary beneficiary of another entity by retaining a controlling financial interest in that entity’s assets, liabilities, and results of operating activities must consolidate the entity in their financial statements. Prior to the issuance of FIN 46, consolidation generally occurred when an enterprise controlled another entity through voting interests. Certain VIEs that are qualifying special purpose entities (“QSPEs”) subject to the reporting requirements of SFAS 140, “Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishment of Liabilities,” will not be required to be consolidated under the provisions of FIN 46. The consolidation provisions of FIN 46 apply to

 
U.S. Bancorp  69


Table of Contents

VIEs created or entered into after January 31, 2003, and for pre-existing VIEs in the first reporting period beginning after June 15, 2003. If applicable, transition rules allow the restatement of financial statements or prospective application with a cumulative effect adjustment. In addition, FIN 46 expands the disclosure requirements for the beneficiary of a significant or a majority of the variable interests to provide information regarding the nature, purpose and financial characteristics of the entities.
     The Company has various relationships with special purpose entities (“SPEs”). For details of the Company’s involvement with SPEs, refer to Note 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The Company is in the process of determining whether its off-balance sheet structures are subject to the provisions of FIN 46. Because the loan and investment conduits and the asset-backed securitizations are QSPEs, which are exempted from consolidation, the Company does not believe the conduits or securitizations will require consolidation in its financial statements. Refer to Note 9 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on conduits and securitizations. The Company believes it is reasonably possible that synthetic leases will be consolidated under the provisions of FIN 46. At this time, the Company does not believe that the adoption of FIN 46 will have a material adverse impact on the Company’s financial statements.

Stock-Based Compensation In December 2002, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 148 (“SFAS 148”), “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation— Transition and Disclosure,” an amendment of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123. SFAS 148 provides alternative methods of transition for a voluntary change to the fair value based method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation. In addition, SFAS 148 requires prominent disclosures in interim as well as annual financial statements about the method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation and the effect of the method used on reported net income. SFAS 148 is effective for fiscal years ended after December 15, 2002. The Company plans to continue to account for stock-based employee compensation under the intrinsic value based method and to provide disclosure of the impact of the fair value based method on reported income. Employee stock options have characteristics that are significantly different from those of traded options, including vesting provisions and trading limitations that impact their liquidity. Therefore, the existing option pricing models, such as Black-Scholes, do not necessarily provide a reliable measure of the fair value of employee stock options. Refer to Note 19 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for proforma disclosure of the impact of stock options utilizing the Black-Scholes valuation method.

Guarantees In November 2002, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Interpretation No. 45 (“FIN 45”), “Guarantor’s Accounting and Disclosure Requirements for Guarantees, Including Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness of Others,” to clarify accounting and disclosure requirements relating to a guarantor’s issuance of certain types of guarantees. FIN 45 requires entities to disclose additional information about certain guarantees, or groups of similar guarantees, even if the likelihood of the guarantor’s having to make any payments under the guarantee is remote. The disclosure provisions are effective for financial statements for fiscal years ended after December 15, 2002. For certain guarantees, the interpretation also requires that guarantors recognize a liability equal to the fair value of the guarantee upon its issuance. This initial recognition and measurement provision is to be applied only on a prospective basis to guarantees issued or modified after December 31, 2002. The Company does not expect the recognition and measurement provision to have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements and has provided additional disclosures required by FIN 45 in the financial statements. Refer to Note 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on guarantees.

Business Combinations and Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets In June 2001, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 141 (“SFAS 141”), “Business Combinations,” and Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142 (“SFAS 142”), “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.” SFAS 141 mandates that the purchase method of accounting be used for all business combinations initiated after June 30, 2001, and establishes specific criteria for the recognition of intangible assets separately from goodwill. SFAS 142 addresses the accounting for goodwill and intangible assets subsequent to their acquisition. The Company adopted SFAS 142 on January 1, 2002. The most significant changes made by SFAS 142 are that goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets are no longer amortized and are to be tested for impairment at least annually. Impairment charges from the initial impairment test were recognized as a “cumulative effect of change in accounting principles” in the income statement. The amortization provisions of SFAS 142 apply to goodwill and intangible assets acquired after June 30, 2001. With respect to goodwill and intangible assets acquired prior to July 1, 2001, the amortization provisions of SFAS 142 were effective upon adoption of SFAS 142.

     Applying the provisions of SFAS 141 to recent acquisitions and the provisions of SFAS 142 to purchase
 
70 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

acquisitions completed prior to July 1, 2001, increased after-tax income for the year ending December 31, 2002, by $205.6 million, or $.11 per diluted share. During the first quarter of 2002, the Company completed its initial impairment test as required by SFAS 142. As a result of this initial impairment test, the Company recognized an after-tax goodwill impairment charge of $37.2 million as a “cumulative effect of change in accounting principles” in the income statement in the first quarter of 2002. The impairment was primarily related to the purchase of a transportation leasing company in 1998 by the equipment leasing business. Banking regulations exclude 100 percent of goodwill from the determination of capital adequacy; therefore, the impact of this impairment on the Company’s capital adequacy was not significant.

Acquisitions of Certain Financial Institutions In October 2002, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 147 (“SFAS 147”), “Acquisitions of Certain Financial Institutions,” an amendment of Statements of Financial Accounting Standards Nos. 72 and No. 144 and Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 9. In accordance with SFAS 147, the acquisition of all or a part of a financial institution that meets the definition of a business is to be accounted for utilizing the purchase method in accordance with SFAS 141. In addition, SFAS 147 provides that long-term customer-relationship intangible assets, except for servicing assets, recognized in the acquisition of a financial institution, should be evaluated for impairment under the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.” SFAS 147 applies to acquisitions completed on or after October 1, 2002. Adopting the standard is not expected to have a material impact on the Company.

Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133 (“SFAS 133”), “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities,” as amended, establishes accounting and reporting standards for all derivative instruments and criteria for designation and effectiveness of hedging activities. SFAS 133 requires that an entity recognize all derivatives as either assets or liabilities on the balance sheet and measure those instruments at fair value. The changes in the fair value of the derivatives are recognized currently in earnings unless specific hedge accounting criteria are met. If the derivative qualifies as a hedge, the accounting treatment varies based on the type of risk being hedged. On January 1, 2001, the Company adopted SFAS 133. Transition adjustments related to adoption resulted in an after-tax loss of approximately $4.1 million recorded in net income and an after-tax increase of $5.2 million to other comprehensive income. The transition adjustments related to adoption were not material to the Company’s financial statements, and as such, were not separately reported in the consolidated statement of income.

 
 Note 3   Subsequent Event

On February 19, 2003, the Company announced that its Board of Directors approved a plan to effect a spin-off of its capital markets business unit, including investment banking and brokerage activities primarily conducted by its wholly-owned subsidiary, U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. In 2002, the capital markets business unit had average assets of $3.0 billion, generated revenues of $737.3 million (5.8 percent of total revenues) and contributed $1.1 million of net income, representing less than 1 percent of the Company’s consolidated net income. This distribution does not include brokerage, financial advisory or asset management services offered to customers through the retail brokerage platform of U.S. Bank National Association, U.S. Bancorp Investments, Inc. or U.S. Bancorp Asset Management, Inc. The spin-off would be effected through a dividend of 100% of the Company’s ownership interest in the capital markets business, and the Company plans to retain $215 million of subordinated debt of the new company. The distribution is subject to certain conditions including SEC registration, regulatory review and approval and a determination that the distribution will be tax-free to the Company and its shareholders. While expected to be completed in the third quarter of 2003, the Company has no obligation to consummate the distribution, whether or not these conditions are satisfied.

 
 Note 4   Business Combinations

On February 27, 2001, Firstar and USBM merged in a pooling-of-interests transaction and accordingly all financial information has been restated to include the historical information of both companies. Each share of Firstar stock was exchanged for one share of the Company’s common stock while each share of USBM stock was exchanged for 1.265 shares of the Company’s common stock. The new Company retained the U.S. Bancorp name.

     On July 24, 2001, the Company acquired NOVA Corporation (“NOVA”), a merchant processor, in a stock and cash transaction valued at approximately $2.1 billion. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $2.9 billion and total liabilities assumed of $773 million. Included in total assets were merchant contracts and other intangibles of $650 million and the excess of purchase price over the fair value of identifiable net assets (“goodwill”) of $1.6 billion. The goodwill reflected NOVA’s leadership position in the merchant processing market and its ability to provide a technologically superior product that is enhanced by a high level of customer service. The Company believes
 
U.S. Bancorp  71


Table of Contents

that these factors, among others, will allow NOVA to generate sufficient positive cash flows from new business in future periods to support the goodwill recorded in connection with the acquisition.
     On December 31, 2002, the Company acquired the corporate trust business of State Street Bank and Trust Company (“State Street Corporate Trust”) in a cash transaction valued at $725 million. State Street Corporate Trust was a leading provider, particularly in the Northeast, of corporate trust and agency services to a variety of municipalities, corporations, government agencies and other financial institutions serving approximately 20,000 client issuances representing over $689 billion of assets under administration. With this acquisition, the Company is among the nation’s leading providers of a full range of corporate trust products and services. The transaction represented total assets acquired of $681 million and total liabilities of $39 million at the closing date. Included in total assets were contract and other intangibles with a fair value of $225 million and goodwill of $444 million. The goodwill reflected the strategic value of the combined organization’s leadership position in the corporate trust business and processing economies of scale resulting from the transaction. As part of the purchase price, $75 million was placed in escrow for up to eighteen months with payment contingent on the successful transition of business relationships. Concurrent with the system conversion expected in 2003, certain State Street Corporate Trust assets under administration will be transferred to the Company or its affiliated mutual funds.
     In addition to these mergers and business acquisitions, the Company completed several strategic acquisitions to enhance its presence in certain markets and businesses.

The following table summarizes acquisitions by the Company completed since January 1, 2000, treating Firstar as the original acquiring company:

                                                         
Goodwill
and Other Cash Paid/ Accounting
(Dollars and Shares in Millions) Date Assets (a) Deposits Intangibles (Received) Shares Issued Method

Corporate Trust business of State Street Bank and Trust Company
    December 2002     $ 13     $     $ 669     $ 642             Purchase  
Bay View Bank branches
    November 2002       362       3,305       483       (2,483 )           Purchase  
The Leader Mortgage Company, LLC
    April 2002       517             190       85             Purchase  
Pacific Century Bank
    September 2001       570       712       134       (43 )           Purchase  
NOVA Corporation
    July 2001       949             2,231       842       57.0       Purchase  
U.S. Bancorp
    February 2001       86,602       51,335                   952.4       Pooling  
First Union branches
    December 2000       450       1,779       347       (1,123 )           Purchase  
Scripps Financial Corporation
    October 2000       650       618       113             9.4       Purchase  
Lyon Financial Services, Inc. 
    September 2000       1,289             124       307             Purchase  
Oliver-Allen Corporation, Inc.
    April 2000       280             68             4.5       Purchase  
Peninsula Bank
    January 2000       491       452       71             5.1       Purchase  

(a) Assets acquired do not include purchase accounting adjustments.

     Separate results of operations as originally reported on a condensed basis of Firstar and USBM, for the period prior to the merger, were as follows:

             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2000

Net interest income
       
 
Firstar
  $ 2,699  
 
USBM
    3,471  
     
 
   
Total
  $ 6,170  
     
 
Net income
       
 
Firstar
  $ 1,284  
 
USBM
    1,592  
     
 
   
Total
  $ 2,876  
     
 
Total assets at period end
       
 
Firstar
  $ 77,585  
 
USBM
    87,336  
     
 
   
Total
  $ 164,921  

     Refer to Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding goodwill and other intangible assets.
 
 Note 5   Merger and Restructuring-Related Items

The Company recorded pre-tax merger and restructuring-related charges of $324.1 million, $1,266.4 million, and $348.7 million in 2002, 2001, and 2000, respectively. In 2002, merger-related items were primarily incurred in connection with the Firstar/USBM merger, the NOVA acquisition and the Company’s various other acquisitions primarily including BayView and State Street Corporate Trust. In 2001, merger-related items included costs associated with integrating USBM, NOVA, Mercantile and other smaller acquisitions noted below and in Note 4 — Business Combinations. In response to significant changes in the securities markets during 2001, including increased volatility, declines in equity valuations and the increasingly competitive environment for the securities industry, the Company incurred a charge to restructure its subsidiary, U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. (“Piper”).

 
72 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The components of the merger and restructuring-related items are shown below:

                                                   
Piper
(Dollars in Millions) USBM NOVA Restructuring Mercantile Other (a) Total

2002
                                               
Severance and employee-related
  $ 4.1     $ (3.8 )   $     $     $ 9.1     $ 9.4  
Systems conversions and integration
    197.0       29.4                   18.1       244.5  
Asset write-downs and lease terminations
    104.0       14.2                   6.0       124.2  
Balance sheet restructurings
    (38.8 )                             (38.8 )
Other merger-related items
    4.8       (1.1 )                 3.5       7.2  
   
Total 2002
  $ 271.1     $ 38.7     $     $     $ 36.7     $ 346.5  
   
Non-interest expense
    271.1       34.9                   18.1       324.1  
Balance sheet recognition
          3.8                   18.6       22.4  
   
 
Merger-related items — 2002
  $ 271.1     $ 38.7     $     $     $ 36.7     $ 346.5  
   
2001
                                               
Severance and employee-related
  $ 268.2     $ 23.3     $ 28.8     $ 13.2     $ 4.6     $ 338.1  
Systems conversions and integration
    208.1       1.6             7.3       18.7       235.7  
Asset write-downs and lease terminations
    130.4       34.7       11.9       (.3 )     6.0       182.7  
Charitable contributions
    76.0                               76.0  
Balance sheet restructurings
    457.6                               457.6  
Branch sale gain
    (62.2 )                             (62.2 )
Branch consolidations
    20.0                               20.0  
Other merger-related charges
    69.1       24.2       10.0       2.5       2.3       108.1  
   
Total 2001
  $ 1,167.2     $ 83.8     $ 50.7     $ 22.7     $ 31.6     $ 1,356.0  
   
Provision for credit losses
  $ 382.2     $     $     $     $     $ 382.2  
Non-interest income
    (62.2 )                             (62.2 )
Non-interest expense
    847.2       1.6       50.7       22.7       24.2       946.4  
   
 
Merger-related charges
    1,167.2       1.6       50.7       22.7       24.2       1,266.4  
Balance sheet recognition
          82.2                   7.4       89.6  
   
 
Merger-related items — 2001
  $ 1,167.2     $ 83.8     $ 50.7     $ 22.7     $ 31.6     $ 1,356.0  
   
2000
                                               
Severance and employee-related
                          $ 43.0     $ 16.4     $ 59.4  
Systems conversions
                            115.2       78.3       193.5  
Asset write-downs and lease terminations
                            42.7       4.6       47.3  
Charitable contributions
                                  2.5       2.5  
Other merger-related charges
                            26.1       19.9       46.0  
                           
Total 2000
                          $ 227.0     $ 121.7     $ 348.7  

(a)  In 2002, “Other” primarily included merger and restructuring-related items pertaining to the Bay View acquisition, State Street Corporate Trust and the Lyon Financial acquisition. In 2001 and 2000, “Other” primarily included the 1998 acquisition of the former Firstar Corporation by Star Banc. Star Banc was renamed Firstar Corporation.

     The Company determines merger and restructuring-related items and related accruals based on its integration strategy and formulated plans. These plans are established as of the acquisition date and are regularly evaluated during the integration process.

     Severance and employee-related charges include the cost of severance, other benefits and outplacement costs associated with the termination of employees primarily in branch offices and centralized corporate support and data processing functions. The severance amounts are determined based on the Company’s existing severance pay programs and are paid out over a benefit period of up to two years from the time of termination. The total number of employees included in severance amounts were approximately 2,860 for USBM, 400 for NOVA, 300 for the Piper Restructuring and 2,400 for Mercantile (expense primarily recognized in 1999 and 2000). In 2002, the Company recognized additional severance costs of $13.1 million in connection with the USBM merger offset by net curtailment and settlement gains of $9.0 million related to changes in certain nonqualified pension plans. Changes in severance costs for USBM and NOVA primarily reflected a change in estimate in the liability given the mix of employees terminated. Severance and employee-related costs for identified groups of acquired employees are included in the determination of goodwill at closing. Severance and employee-related costs are recorded as incurred for groups of employees not specifically identified at the time of closing or acquired in business combinations accounted for as “poolings.”
     Systems conversion and integration costs are recorded as incurred and are associated with the preparation and mailing of numerous customer communications for the acquisitions and conversion of customer accounts, printing and distribution of training materials and policy and procedure manuals, outside consulting fees, and other
 
U.S. Bancorp  73


Table of Contents

expenses related to systems conversions and the integration of acquired branches and operations.
     Asset write-downs and lease terminations represent lease termination costs and impairment of assets for redundant office space, branches that will be vacated and equipment disposed of as part of the integration plan. These costs are recognized in the accounting period that contract terminations occur or the asset becomes impaired and is abandoned. In 2002, this category included $38.2 million of signage write-offs, $26.9 million of software and equipment write-offs, $32.0 million of lease and contract cancellations and $6.9 million of leasehold and other related items associated with the Firstar/USBM merger. In 2001, asset write-downs and lease terminations included $45.7 million of lease and contract cancellation costs, $36.2 million of software and equipment write-offs and $48.5 million of other assets deemed to be worthless due to integration decisions in connection with the merger.
     In connection with certain mergers, the Company has made charitable contributions to reaffirm a commitment to its markets or as part of specific conditions necessary to achieve regulatory approval. These contributions were funded up front and represent costs that would not have been incurred had the merger not occurred. Charitable contributions are charged to merger and restructuring expenses or considered in determining the acquisition cost at the applicable closing date.
     Balance sheet restructurings primarily represent gains or losses incurred by the Company related to the disposal of certain businesses, products, or customer and business relationships that no longer align with the long-term strategy of the Company. It may also include charges to realign risk management practices related to certain credit portfolios. During 2002, the Company recognized asset gains related to the sale of a non-strategic investment in a sub-prime lending business of $28.7 million and a mark-to-market recovery of $10.1 million associated with the liquidation of U.S. Bancorp Libra’s investment portfolio. During 2001, balance sheet restructuring costs incurred in connection with the Firstar/USBM merger of $457.6 million were comprised of a $201.3 million provision associated with the Company’s integration of certain small business products and management’s decision to discontinue an unsecured small business product of USBM; $90.0 million of charge-offs to align risk management practices, align charge-off policies and to expedite the Company’s transition out of a specific segment of the health care industry; and $76.6 million of losses related to the sales of two higher credit risk retail loan portfolios of USBM. Also, the amount included $89.7 million related to the Company’s decision to discontinue a high-yield investment banking business, to restructure a co-branding credit card relationship of USBM, and for the planned disposition of certain equity investments that no longer aligned with the long-term strategy of the Company. The alignment of risk management practices included a write-down of several large commercial loans originally held separately by both Firstar and USBM, primarily to allow the Company to exit or reduce these credits to conform with the credit risk exposure policy of the combined entity.
     Other merger-related items in 2002 of $7.2 million primarily represents changes to conform accounting policies implemented at the time of systems conversions related to the Firstar/USBM merger and other acquired entities. In 2001, other merger-related charges of $108.1 million primarily included $69.1 million and $24.2 million of investment banking fees, legal fees and stock registration fees associated with the Firstar/USBM merger and the acquisition of NOVA, respectively. Also, it included $10.0 million of goodwill impairment related to the Piper Restructuring and $4.8 million of other costs.

 
74 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The following table presents a summary of activity with respect to the merger and restructuring-related accruals:

                                                   
Piper
(Dollars in Millions) USBM NOVA Restructuring Mercantile Other (a) Total

Balance at December 31, 1999
  $     $     $     $ 21.2     $ 82.0     $ 103.2  
 
Provision charged to operating expense
                      227.0       121.7       348.7  
 
Additions related to purchase acquisitions
                            46.0       46.0  
 
Cash outlays
                      (197.9 )     (169.7 )     (367.6 )
 
Noncash write-downs and other
                      (50.3 )     (30.2 )     (80.5 )
   
Balance at December 31, 2000
                            49.8       49.8  
 
Provision charged to operating expense
    1,167.2       1.6       50.7       22.7       24.2       1,266.4  
 
Additions related to purchase acquisitions
          82.2                   7.4       89.6  
 
Cash outlays
    (532.5 )     (32.4 )     (22.3 )     (23.8 )     (53.8 )     (664.8 )
 
Noncash write-downs and other
    (510.4 )     (3.0 )     (10.3 )     1.1       (13.0 )     (535.6 )
   
Balance at December 31, 2001
    124.3       48.4       18.1             14.6       205.4  
 
Provision charged to operating expense
    271.1       34.9                   18.1       324.1  
 
Additions related to purchase acquisitions
          3.8                   18.6       22.4  
 
Cash outlays
    (327.9 )     (36.2 )     (10.8 )           (27.2 )     (402.1 )
 
Noncash write-downs and others
    (48.9 )     (35.8 )     (7.3 )           (5.7 )     (97.7 )
   
Balance at December 31, 2002
  $ 18.6     $ 15.1     $     $     $ 18.4     $ 52.1  

(a)  In 2002, “Other” primarily included merger and restructuring-related items pertaining to the Bay View acquisition, State Street Corporate Trust and the Lyon Financial acquisition. In 2001 and 2000, “Other” primarily included the 1998 acquisition of the former Firstar Corporation by Star Banc. Star Banc was renamed Firstar Corporation.

     The adequacy of the accrued liabilities is reviewed regularly taking into consideration actual and projected payments. Adjustments are made to increase or decrease these accruals as needed. Reversals of expenses can reflect a lower utilization of benefits by affected staff, changes in initial assumptions as a result of subsequent mergers and alterations of business plans.

The following table presents a summary of activity with respect to the Firstar/USBM merger:

                                                   
Severance Systems Asset
and Conversions Write-downs Balance
Employee- and and Lease Sheet
(Dollars in Millions) Related Integration Terminations Restructurings Other Total

Balance at December 31, 2001
  $ 88.3     $     $ 33.1     $ 2.1     $ .8     $ 124.3  
 
Provision charged to operating expense
    4.1       197.0       104.0       (38.8 )     4.8       271.1  
 
Cash outlays
    (83.5 )     (197.0 )     (47.3 )           (.1 )     (327.9 )
 
Noncash write-downs and other
    9.7             (89.8 )     36.7       (5.5 )     (48.9 )
   
Balance at December 31, 2002
  $ 18.6     $     $     $     $     $ 18.6  

The components of the merger and restructuring-related accruals for all acquisitions were as follows:

                   
December 31,

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Severance
  $ 30.2     $ 106.3  
Other employee-related costs
    3.1       4.7  
Lease termination and facility costs
    17.2       64.3  
Contracts and system write-offs
    .5       18.3  
Other
    1.1       11.8  
   
 
Total
  $ 52.1     $ 205.4  

 
U.S. Bancorp  75


Table of Contents

The merger and restructuring-related accrual by significant acquisition or business restructuring was as follows:

                   
December 31,

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

USBM
  $ 18.6     $ 124.3  
NOVA
    15.1       48.4  
State Street Corporate Trust
    7.8        
Bay View
    5.8        
Piper Restructuring
          18.1  
Other acquisitions
    4.8       14.6  
   
 
Total
  $ 52.1     $ 205.4  

     At December 31, 2002, the integration of Firstar and USBM was substantially completed, and no additional merger and restructuring related charges are expected going forward. Severance costs will continue to be paid through the period provided for in the Company’s severance plans. The integration of merchant processing platforms and business processes of U.S. Bank National Association and NOVA will continue through late 2003. In connection with the NOVA acquisition, management estimates the Company will incur pre-tax merger-related charges of approximately $36.9 million in 2003. In addition, the Company anticipates additional pre-tax merger-related expenses in 2003 of $14.7 million related to the Bay View acquisition, $8.6 million related to the State Street Corporate Trust acquisition, and $7.2 million as a result of other smaller acquisitions.
     At December 31, 2001, the business unit restructuring of Piper was substantially completed, with lease cancellation liabilities to be paid through 2003.
 
 Note 6   Restrictions on Cash and Due from Banks

Bank subsidiaries are required to maintain minimum average reserve balances with the Federal Reserve Bank. The amount of those reserve balances was approximately $157 million at December 31, 2002.

 
 Note 7   Investment Securities

The detail of the amortized cost, gross unrealized holding gains and losses, and fair value of held-to-maturity and available-for-sale securities at December 31 was as follows:

                                                                   
2002 2001

Gross Gross Gross Gross
Unrealized Unrealized Unrealized Unrealized
Amortized Holding Holding Fair Amortized Holding Holding Fair
(Dollars in Millions) Cost Gains Losses Value Cost Gains Losses Value

Held-to-maturity (a)
                                                               
 
Mortgage-backed securities
  $ 20     $     $     $ 20     $ 28     $     $     $ 28  
 
Obligations of state and political subdivisions
    213       14       (7 )     220       271       9       (2 )     278  
   
 
Total held-to-maturity securities
  $ 233     $ 14     $ (7 )   $ 240     $ 299     $ 9     $ (2 )   $ 306  

Available-for-sale (b)
                                                               
 
U.S. Treasuries and agencies
  $ 421     $ 15     $     $ 436     $ 439     $ 10     $     $ 449  
 
Mortgage-backed securities
    24,967       699             25,666       21,937       111       (84 )     21,964  
 
Other asset-backed securities
    646       28       (4 )     670       2,091       3       (30 )     2,064  
 
Obligations of state and political subdivisions
    558       22       (1 )     579       877       16       (2 )     891  
 
Other
    949       2       (47 )     904       950       35       (44 )     941  
   
 
Total available-for-sale securities
  $ 27,541     $ 766     $ (52 )   $ 28,255     $ 26,294     $ 175     $ (160 )   $ 26,309  

(a)  Held-to-maturity securities are carried at historical cost adjusted for amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts.
(b)  Available-for-sale securities are carried at fair value with unrealized net gains or losses reported within other comprehensive income in shareholders’ equity.

     Securities carried at $20.2 billion at December 31, 2002, and $18.1 billion at December 31, 2001, were pledged to secure public, private and trust deposits and for other purposes required by law. Securities sold under agreements to repurchase were collateralized by securities and securities purchased under agreements to resell with an amortized cost of $2.9 billion and $3.0 billion at December 31, 2002, and 2001, respectively.

 
76 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The following table provides information as to the amount of gross gains and losses realized through the sales of available-for-sale investment securities.

                           
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Realized gains
  $ 316.5     $ 333.0     $ 23.1  
Realized losses
    (16.6 )     (3.9 )     (15.0 )
   
 
Net realized gains (losses)
  $ 299.9     $ 329.1     $ 8.1  
   
Income tax (benefit) on realized gains (losses)
  $ 114.0     $ 115.2     $ 2.8  

     For amortized cost, fair value and yield by maturity date of held-to-maturity and available-for-sale securities outstanding as of December 31, 2002, see Table 11 included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis which is incorporated by reference into these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
 Note 8   Loans and Allowance for Credit Losses

The composition of the loan portfolio at December 31 was as follows:

                       
(Dollars in millions) 2002 2001

Commercial
               
 
Commercial
  $ 36,584     $ 40,472  
 
Lease financing
    5,360       5,858  
   
   
Total commercial
    41,944       46,330  
 
Commercial real estate
               
 
Commercial mortgages
    20,325       18,765  
 
Construction and development
    6,542       6,608  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    26,867       25,373  
 
Residential mortgages
    9,746       7,829  
 
Retail
               
 
Credit card
    5,665       5,889  
 
Retail leasing
    5,680       4,906  
 
Home equity and second mortgage
    13,572       12,235  
 
Other retail
               
   
Revolving Credit
    2,650       2,673  
   
Installment
    2,258       2,292  
   
Automobile
    6,343       5,660  
   
Student
    1,526       1,218  
   
     
Total other retail
    12,777       11,843  
   
   
Total retail
    37,694       34,873  
   
     
Total loans
  $ 116,251     $ 114,405  

     During the third quarter of 2002, reclassifications between loan categories occurred in connection with conforming loan classifications at the time of system conversions. Prior quarters were not restated, as it was impractical to determine the extent of reclassification for all periods presented. Reclassifications included approximately $1.2 billion from the commercial loans category to the commercial real estate loan category ($.5 billion) and the residential mortgages category ($.7 billion).

     Loans are presented net of unearned interest and deferred fees and costs which amounted to $1.8 billion and $2.1 billion at December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively. The Company had loans of $26.1 billion at December 31, 2002, and $28.0 billion at December 31, 2001, pledged at the Federal Home Loan Bank. Loans of $12.7 billion at December 31, 2002, and $7.2 billion at December 31, 2001, were pledged at the Federal Reserve Bank.
     The Company primarily lends to borrowers in the 24 states where it has banking offices. Collateral for commercial loans may include marketable securities, accounts receivable, inventory and equipment. For details of the Company’s commercial portfolio by industry group and geography as of December 31, 2002, and 2001, see Table 8 included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis which is incorporated by reference into these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
     For detail of the Company’s commercial real estate portfolio by property type and geography as of December 31, 2002, and 2001, see Table 9 included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis which is incorporated by reference into these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Such loans are collateralized by the related property.
    
 
U.S. Bancorp  77


Table of Contents

The following table lists information related to nonperforming loans as of December 31:

                 
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Loans on nonaccrual status
  $ 1,188.7     $ 983.1  
Restructured loans
    48.6       18.2  
   
Total nonperforming loans
  $ 1,237.3     $ 1,001.3  

Interest income that would have been recognized at original contractual terms
  $ 102.1     $ 109.2  
Amount recognized as interest income
    36.7       46.2  
   
Forgone revenue
  $ 65.4     $ 63.0  

Activity in the allowance for credit losses was as follows:

                           
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Balance at beginning of year
  $ 2,457.3     $ 1,786.9     $ 1,710.3  
Add
                       
 
Provision charged to operating expense (a)
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0  
Deduct
                       
 
Loans charged off
    1,590.7       1,771.4       1,017.6  
 
Less recoveries of loans charged off
    217.7       224.9       192.2  
   
 
Net loans charged off
    1,373.0       1,546.5       825.4  
Losses from loan sales/transfers
          (329.3 )      
Acquisitions and other changes
    (11.3 )     17.4       74.0  
   
Balance at end of year
  $ 2,422.0     $ 2,457.3     $ 1,786.9  

(a)  In 2001, $382.2 million of the provision for credit losses was incurred in connection with the Firstar/USBM merger.

     A portion of the allowance for credit losses is allocated to loans deemed impaired. All impaired loans are included in non-performing assets. A summary of these loans and their related allowance for loan losses is as follows:

                                                   
2002   2001   2000

Recorded Valuation Recorded Valuation Recorded Valuation
(Dollars in Millions) Investment Allowance Investment Allowance Investment Allowance

Impaired Loans
                                               
 
Valuation allowance required
  $ 992     $ 157     $ 694     $ 125     $ 487     $ 57  
 
No valuation allowance required
                            127        
   
Total impaired loans
  $ 992     $ 157     $ 694     $ 125     $ 614     $ 57  
   
Average balance of impaired loans during the year
  $ 839             $ 780             $ 526          
Interest income recognized on impaired loans during the year
                                7.8          

     Commitments to lend additional funds to customers whose loans were classified as nonaccrual or restructured at December 31, 2002, totaled $123.9 million. During 2002 there were $1.4 million of loans that were restructured at market interest rates and returned to an accruing status.

     The allowance for credit losses includes credit loss liability related to off-balance sheet loan commitments. At December 31, 2002, the allowance for credit losses includes an estimated $131.4 million credit loss liability related to the Company’s $58.3 billion of commercial off-balance sheet loan commitments and letters of credit.
 
 Note 9   Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities

FINANCIAL ASSET SALES

When the Company sells financial assets, it may retain interest-only strips, servicing rights, residual rights to a cash reserve account and/or other retained interests in the sold financial assets. The gain or loss on sale depends in part on the previous carrying amount of the financial assets involved in the transfer and is allocated between the assets sold and the retained interests based on their relative fair values at the date of transfer. Quoted market prices are used to determine retained interest fair values when readily available. Since quotes are generally not available for retained interests, the Company estimates fair value based

 
78 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

on the present value of future expected cash flows using management’s best estimates of the key assumptions including credit losses, prepayment speeds, forward yield curves and discount rates commensurate with the risks involved. Retained interests and liabilities are recorded at fair value using a discounted cash flow methodology at inception and are evaluated at least quarterly thereafter.

Conduits and Securitizations The Company sponsors two off-balance sheet conduits to which it transfers high-grade assets: a commercial loan conduit and an investment securities conduit. These conduits are funded by issuing commercial paper. The commercial loan conduit holds primarily high credit quality commercial loans and held assets of $4.2 billion at December 31, 2002, and $6.9 billion in assets at December 31, 2001. The investment securities conduit holds high-grade investment securities and held assets of $9.5 billion at December 31, 2002, and $9.8 billion in assets at December 31, 2001. These investment securities include primarily (i) private label asset-backed securities, which are insurance “wrapped” by AAA/ Aaa-rated mono-line insurance companies and (ii) government agency mortgage-backed securities and collateralized mortgage obligations. The commercial loan conduit had commercial paper liabilities of $4.2 billion at December 31, 2002, and $6.9 billion at December 31, 2001. The investment securities conduit had commercial paper liabilities of $9.5 billion at December 31, 2002, and $9.8 billion at December 31, 2001. The Company benefits by transferring commercial loans and investment securities into conduits that provide diversification of funding sources in a capital-efficient manner and generate income.

     The Company provides liquidity facilities to both conduits. In addition, the Company retains the credit risk of the loans transferred to the commercial loan conduit through a credit enhancement agreement. Utilization of the liquidity facilities would be triggered by the conduits’ inability to issue commercial paper to fund their assets. The credit enhancement provided to the commercial loan conduit represents a recourse obligation under which the Company would be required to repurchase loans sold to the conduit if certain credit-related events of the underlying assets occur. The recorded fair value of the Company’s liability for the recourse obligation and for both liquidity facilities was $56.1 million at December 31, 2002, and was included in other liabilities. Changes in fair value of these liabilities are recorded in the income statement as other income or expense. In addition, the Company recorded at fair value its retained residual interest in both the commercial loan and investment securities conduits of $28.6 million and of $93.4 million, respectively, at December 31, 2002. The Company recorded revenue of $132.2 million from the conduits in 2002 and $132.7 million in 2001, including fees for servicing, management, administration and accretion income from retained interests.
     At December 31, 2002, the Company had two asset-backed securitizations to fund indirect automobile loans and an unsecured small business credit product. The indirect automobile securitization held $156.1 million in assets at December 31, 2002, compared with $431.5 million at December 31, 2001. The Company recognized income from an interest-only strip and servicing fees from this securitization of $2.8 million during 2002 and $6.1 million during 2001. The indirect automobile securitization held average assets of $276.9 million in 2002 and $655.3 million in 2001. In January 2003, the Company exercised a cleanup call option on the indirect automobile loan securitization. The remaining assets from the securitization were recorded on the Company’s balance sheet at fair value.
     The unsecured small business credit securitization held $652.4 million in assets at December 31, 2002, of which the Company retained $150.1 million of subordinated securities, transferor’s interests of $16.3 million and a residual interest-only strip of $53.3 million. This compared with $750.0 million in assets at December 31, 2001, of which the Company retained $175.3 million of subordinated securities, transferor’s interests of $18.8 million and a residual interest-only strip of $57.3 million. The qualifying special purpose entity issued asset-backed variable funding notes in various tranches in November 2001 which generated a loss on sale of $64.7 million. The Company provides credit enhancement in the form of subordinated securities and reserve accounts. The Company’s risk, primarily from losses in the underlying assets, was considered in determining the fair value of the Company’s retained interests in this securitization. The Company recognized income from subordinated securities, an interest-only strip and servicing fees from this securitization of $52.8 million in 2002 and $5.2 million in 2001. The unsecured small business credit securitization held average assets of $700.6 million in 2002 and $122.1 million in 2001.
     The corporate and purchasing card securitization matured in February 2002. At maturity, $420.0 million of receivables were transferred from the trust to the Company and recorded at fair value at that time. The Company recognized servicing income of $.5 million in 2002 and $4.2 million in 2001 from this securitization.
     During 2002, the Company securitized $144.4 million of highly rated fixed rate municipal bonds. Each municipal bond was sold into a separate trust that was funded by variable rate certificates that reprice weekly. The Company retained a residual interest in each structure that was accounted for as a trading asset and is recorded at fair value. The purpose of the arrangements was to meet our
 
U.S. Bancorp  79


Table of Contents

customer demands for variable rate tax-free investments. Income and cash flows from these structures were not significant in 2002.

Small Business Administration Programs For the year ended December 31, 2002, the Company did not sell any U.S. government guaranteed portions of loans originated under Small Business Administration (“SBA”) programs. For the year ended December 31, 2001, the Company sold $147.5 million of these loans recognizing a pre-tax gain on sale of $6.3 million. Generally, these loans are sold with recourse; however, the SBA guaranty substantially eliminates the Company’s risk. The Company continues to own the non-guaranteed portion of these loans. The Company continues to service the loans and is required under the SBA programs to retain specified yield amounts. A portion of the yield is recognized as servicing fee income as it occurs and the remainder is capitalized as an excess servicing asset and is included in the gain on sale calculation.

Servicing Asset Position

                 
SBA Loans
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Servicing assets at beginning of year
  $ 7.5     $ 6.9  
Assets recognized during the year
          2.8  
Amortization
    (2.3 )     (2.2 )
   
Servicing assets at end of year
  $ 5.2     $ 7.5  

     No valuation allowances were required during 2002 or 2001 on servicing assets. Servicing assets are reported in aggregate but measured on a transaction specific basis. Market values were determined using discounted cash flows, utilizing the assumptions noted in the table below.
     Key economic assumptions used in measuring servicing assets at the date of securitization resulting from securitizations completed during the year were as follows:
                 
SBA Loans
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Fair value of assets recognized
  $ 8.9     $ 9.1  
Prepayment speed (a)
    17 CPR       21 CPR  
Weighted average life (years)
    4.4       3.7  
Expected credit losses
    NA       NA  
Discount rate
    12 %     12 %

(a)  The Company uses a prepayment vector based on loan seasoning for valuation. The given speed is the effective prepayment speed that yields the same weighted average life calculated using the prepayment vector.

Sensitivity Analysis At December 31, 2002, key economic assumptions and the sensitivity of the current fair value of residual cash flows to immediate 10 percent and 20 percent adverse changes in those assumptions were as follows:

                                           
Unsecured
Indirect Small
Commercial Automobile SBA Business Investment
December 31, 2002 (Dollars in Millions) Loans Loans (i) Loans Receivables Securities

Current Economic Assumptions Sensitivity Analysis
                                       
 
Carrying value (fair value) of retained interests
  $ 28.6     $ 22.9       $2.8       $203.4     $ 98.4  
 
Weighted average life (in years)
    .5       NA       4.4       .8       2.3  
Expected remaining life(a)(b)
    2.0       NA     17 CPR       2.5       4.5  
 
Impact of 10% adverse change
  $ (2.7 )   $       $(.2 )     $(2.2 )   $ (8.5 )
 
Impact of 20% adverse change
    (5.0 )           (.3 )     (4.9 )     (17.7 )
Expected credit losses (annual)(c)(d)(e)
          NA       NA       8.4%-9.6 %      
 
Impact of 10% adverse change
                      $(5.1 )      
 
Impact of 20% adverse change
                      (16.4 )      
Residual cash flow discount rate
    6.0 %     NA       12.0 %     11.0 %     6.6 %
 
Impact of 10% adverse change
  $ (.1 )   $       $(.1 )     $(2.0 )   $ (1.1 )
 
Impact of 20% adverse change
    (.2 )           (.2 )     (4.0 )     (2.2 )


Interest rate on variable rate loans and bonds(f)(g)(h)
  1M LIBOR+    
avg spread    
157 bps    
    NA       NA     Prime/    
1M LIBOR    
  1M LIBOR+    
avg spread    
69 bps      
 
Impact of 10% adverse change
  $     $       $—       $(1.6 )   $ (.4 )
 
Impact of 20% adverse change
                      (3.2 )     (.9 )

(a)  For the SBA loans, the Company uses prepayment vectors based on loan seasoning for valuation. The given speed is the effective prepayment speed that yields the same weighted average life calculated using the prepayment vector.
(b)  For the small business receivables a monthly principal payment rate assumption is used to value the residual interests.
(c)  Credit losses are zero for the commercial loan conduit as removal of assets provisions are designed to cause the removal of assets from the conduit prior to losses being incurred.
(d)  Credit losses are zero for the investment securities conduit as the investments are all AAA rated or insured investments.
(e)  SBA loan credit losses are covered by the appropriate SBA loan program and are not included in retained interests. Principal reductions caused by defaults are included in the prepayment assumption.
(f)  The commercial loan conduit is match funded. Therefore, interest rate movements create no material impact to the value of the residual interest.
(g)  For the small business receivables interest income is based on Prime+ contractual spread. Obligations are based on LIBOR.
(h)  The investment securities conduit is mostly match funded. Therefore, interest rate movements create no material impact to the value of the residual interest.
(i)  The Company exercised a cleanup call option on the indirect automobile securitization in January 2003.

     These sensitivities are hypothetical and should be used with caution. As the figures indicate, changes in fair value based on a 10 percent variation in assumptions generally cannot be extrapolated because the relationship of the change in the assumptions to the change in fair value may not be linear. Also, in this table the effect of a variation in a particular assumption on the fair value of the retained interest is calculated without changing any other
 
80 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

assumptions; in reality, changes in one factor may result in changes in another (for example, increases in market interest rates may result in lower prepayments and increased credit losses), which might magnify or counteract the sensitivities.

Cash Flow Information The table below summarizes certain cash flows received from and paid to conduit or structured entities for the loan sales described above:

                                                     
Unsecured
Indirect Corporate Small
Commercial Automobile Card Business Investment
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Loans (a) Loans SBA Loans Receivables (b) Receivables (b) Securities

2002
                                               
 
Proceeds from
New sales and securitizations
  $     $     $     $     $     $ 1,825.1  
    Collections used by trust to purchase new receivables in revolving securitizations                             610.3        
 
Servicing and other fees received and cash flows on retained interests
    83.0       4.0       6.1       .5       115.0       72.7  

2001
                                               
 
Proceeds from
New sales and securitizations
  $     $     $ 147.5     $     $ 518.7     $ 2,356.7  
    Collections used by trust to purchase new receivables in revolving securitizations                       6,487.0       60.8        
 
Servicing and other fees received and cash flows on retained interests
    57.6       26.0       7.3       4.2       8.6       75.0  

(a)  Current system constraints make it impractical to collect information on gross cash flows between the Company and the commercial loan conduit for 2002 and 2001.
(b)  The corporate card and small business credit securitizations are revolving transactions where proceeds are reinvested until their legal terminations.

Other Information Quantitative information related to loan sales and managed assets was as follows:

                                                                       
At December 31 Year Ended December 31

Total Principal   Principal Amount
Balance   90 Days or More Past Due (c) Average Balance Net Credit Losses 

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2002 2001 2002 2001 2002 2001

Commercial
                                                               
 
Commercial
  $ 41,861     $ 48,878     $ 819     $ 590     $ 45,195     $ 50,584     $ 543     $ 724  
 
Lease financing
    5,360       5,858       172       207       5,573       5,852       149       114  
   
   
Total commercial
    47,221       54,736       991       797       50,768       56,436       692       838  
 
Commercial real estate
                                                               
 
Commercial mortgages
    20,325       18,765       181       136       19,212       19,004       32       40  
 
Construction and development
    6,542       6,608       62       37       6,511       7,077       7       12  
   
   
Total commercial real estate
    26,867       25,373       243       173       25,723       26,081       39       52  
 
Residential mortgages
    9,746       7,829       140       140       8,412       8,576       19       13  
 
Retail
                                                               
 
Credit card
    5,665       5,889       118       128       5,633       5,645       280       271  
 
Retail leasing
    5,680       4,906       12       12       5,389       4,553       39       30  
 
Other retail
    26,505       24,510       167       224       25,756       23,905       360       360  
   
   
Total retail
    37,850       35,305       297       364       36,778       34,103       679       661  
   
     
Total managed loans
  $ 121,684     $ 123,243     $ 1,671     $ 1,474     $ 121,681     $ 125,196     $ 1,429     $ 1,564  
 
Investment Securities
    38,143       36,368                   38,754       31,743              
   
 
Total managed assets
  $ 159,827     $ 159,611     $ 1,671     $ 1,474     $ 160,435     $ 156,939     $ 1,429     $ 1,564  
Less:
                                                               
 
Assets sold or securitized
    15,088       18,598                       17,150       16,846                  
   
                 
               
     
Total assets held
  $ 144,739     $ 141,013                     $ 143,285     $ 140,093                  
   
                 
               
Sold or securitized assets
                                                               
 
Commercial loans
  $ 4,151     $ 6,879     $     $     $ 5,715     $ 5,210     $     $  
 
Indirect automobile loans
    156       432       1       4       277       655       5       11  
 
Guaranteed SBA loans
    490       582             2       532       629              
 
Corporate card receivables
          214             1             403             3  
 
Small business credit lines
    636       731       6       4       701       122       51       3  
 
Investment securities
    9,655       9,760                   9,925       9,827              
   
   
Total securitized assets
  $ 15,088     $ 18,598     $ 7     $ 11     $ 17,150     $ 16,846     $ 56     $ 17  

 
U.S. Bancorp  81


Table of Contents

 
 Note 10   Premises and Equipment

Premises and equipment at December 31 consisted of the following:

                   
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Land
  $ 275     $ 274  
Buildings and improvements
    1,844       1,854  
Furniture, fixtures and equipment
    2,152       2,012  
Capitalized building and equipment leases
    173       173  
Construction in progress
    4       8  
   
      4,448       4,321  
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization
    2,751       2,580  
   
 
Total
  $ 1,697     $ 1,741  

 
 Note 11   Mortgage Servicing Rights

Changes in mortgage servicing rights are summarized as follows:

                 
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Balance at beginning of period
  $ 360     $ 229  
Rights purchased
    229       25  
Rights capitalized
    357       315  
Amortization
    (94 )     (45 )
Rights sold
    (24 )     (103 )
Impairment
    (186 )     (61 )
   
Balance at end of period
  $ 642     $ 360  

     The Company serviced $43.1 billion and $22.0 billion of mortgage loans for other investors as of December 31, 2002, and December 31, 2001, respectively.

     The fair value of mortgage servicing rights (“MSRs”) was $655 million at December 31, 2002, and $360 million at December 31, 2001. At December 31, 2002, the reduction in the current fair value of MSRs to immediate 25 and 50 basis point adverse interest rate changes would be approximately $81 million and $145 million, respectively. An upward movement in interest rates of 25 and 50 basis points would increase the value of MSRs by approximately $88 million and $169 million, respectively. The Company utilizes the investment portfolio as an economic hedge to this possible adverse interest rate change. The Company also, from time to time, purchases principal-only securities that act as a partial economic hedge.
 
 Note 12   Intangible Assets

The Company adopted SFAS 142 on January 1, 2002. The most significant changes made by SFAS 142 are that goodwill and other indefinite lived intangible assets are no longer amortized and will be tested for impairment at least annually. The amortization provisions of SFAS 142 apply to goodwill and intangible assets acquired after June 30, 2001. With respect to goodwill and intangible assets acquired prior to July 1, 2001, the amortization provisions of SFAS 142 were effective upon adoption of SFAS 142.

     Prior to the adoption of SFAS 142, the Company evaluated goodwill for impairment under a projected undiscounted cash flow model. As a result of the initial impairment test from the adoption of SFAS 142, the Company recognized an impairment loss of $58.8 million resulting in an after-tax loss of $37.2 million in the first quarter of 2002. The impairment was primarily related to the purchase of a transportation leasing company in 1998 by the equipment leasing business. This charge was recognized as a “cumulative effect of change in accounting principles” in the income statement. The fair value of that reporting unit was estimated using the present value of future expected cash flows.
 
82 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Net income and earnings per share adjusted for the exclusion of amortization expense (net of tax) and asset impairments related to goodwill are as follows:

                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001 2000

Reported net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
 
Goodwill amortization, net of tax
          242.8       230.1  
 
Asset impairments, net of tax
    37.2              
   
 
Adjusted net income
  $ 3,326.4     $ 1,949.3     $ 3,105.7  
   
Earnings per share
                       
 
Reported net income
  $ 1.72     $ .89     $ 1.51  
 
Goodwill amortization, net of tax
          .12       .12  
 
Asset impairments, net of tax
    .02              
   
   
Adjusted net income
  $ 1.74     $ 1.01     $ 1.63  
   
Diluted earnings per share
                       
 
Reported net income
  $ 1.71     $ .88     $ 1.50  
 
Goodwill amortization, net of tax
          .13       .12  
 
Asset impairments, net of tax
    .02              
   
   
Adjusted net income
  $ 1.73     $ 1.01     $ 1.62  

     Applying the provisions of SFAS 141 to recent acquisitions and the provisions of SFAS 142 to purchase acquisitions completed prior to July 1, 2001, increased after-tax income for the year ending December 31, 2002, by $205.6 million, or $.11 per diluted share.

The following table reflects the changes in the carrying value of goodwill for the year ended December 31, 2002:

                                                 
Private Client,
Wholesale Consumer Trust and Asset Payment Capital Consolidated
(Dollars in Millions) Banking Banking Management Services Markets Company

Balance at December 31, 2001
  $ 1,348     $ 1,706     $ 289     $ 1,811     $ 305     $ 5,459  
Goodwill acquired
    43       433       447       2             925  
Impairment losses
    (59 )                             (59 )
   
Balance at December 31, 2002
  $ 1,332     $ 2,139     $ 736     $ 1,813     $ 305     $ 6,325  
   
     Goodwill acquired in 2002 in Wholesale Banking included $25 million from an earn-out provision related to the acquisition of Oliver-Allen Corporation. The Company recorded $427 million of goodwill related to the Bay View acquisition in November of 2002, $15 million related to Wholesale Banking and $412 million related to Consumer Banking. Also included in the goodwill acquired in Consumer Banking was $17 million related to the purchase of Leader in April of 2002. Private Client, Trust and Asset Management acquired $444 million of goodwill related to the acquisition of State Street Bank Corporate Trust in December of 2002.

Amortizable intangible assets consisted of the following:

                                   
Estimated Amortization   Balance
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Life (b) Method (c) 2002 2001

Goodwill (a)
              $ 6,325     $ 5,459  
Merchant processing contracts
    8 years       AC       596       680  
Core deposit benefits
    10 years/6 years       SL/AC       505       530  
Mortgage servicing rights
    5 years       AC       642       360  
Trust relationships
    15 years/10 years       SL/AC       371       169  
Other identified intangibles
    8 years/8 years       SL/AC       207       214  
                   
 
Total
                  $ 8,646     $ 7,412  

(a) The Company adopted SFAS 142 on January 1, 2002, resulting in the elimination of amortization of goodwill and other indefinite lived intangible assets. Prior to adoption, goodwill was amortized over periods ranging up to 25 years.
(b) Estimated life represents the amortization period for assets subject to the straight line method and the weighted average amortization period for intangibles subject to accelerated methods. If more than one amortization method is used for a category, the estimated life for each method is calculated and reported separately.
(c) Amortization methods: SL = straight line method
AC = accelerated methods generally based on cash flows

 
U.S. Bancorp  83


Table of Contents

Aggregate amortization expense consisted of the following:

                           
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Goodwill (a)
  $     $ 251.1     $ 235.0  
Merchant processing contracts
    135.1       15.3       2.4  
Core deposit benefits
    80.9       80.9       57.7  
Mortgage servicing rights
    280.1       106.1       35.0  
Trust relationships
    19.3       19.3       19.6  
Other identified intangibles
    37.6       56.8       42.6  
   
 
Total
  $ 553.0     $ 529.5     $ 392.3  

(a) The Company adopted SFAS 142 on January 1, 2002, resulting in the elimination of amortization of goodwill and other indefinite lived intangible assets.

Below is the estimated amortization expense for the years ended:

         
(Dollars in Millions)

2003
  $ 425.1  
2004
    357.7  
2005
    305.8  
2006
    256.2  
2007
    222.3  

 
 Note 13   Short-Term Borrowings

The following table is a summary of short-term borrowings for the last three years:

                                                     
  2002   2001   2000

(Dollars in Millions) Amount Rate Amount Rate Amount Rate

At year-end
                                               
 
Federal funds purchased
  $ 3,025       .98 %   $ 1,146       1.08 %   $ 2,849       5.80 %
 
Securities sold under agreements to repurchase
    2,950       .97       3,001       1.10       3,347       4.60  
 
Commercial paper
    380       1.20       452       1.85       223       6.40  
 
Treasury, tax and loan notes
    102       .91       4,038       1.27       776       5.20  
 
Other short-term borrowings
    1,349       1.26       6,033       2.54       4,638       6.09  
   
   
Total
  $ 7,806       1.03 %   $ 14,670       1.75 %   $ 11,833       5.60 %

Average for the year
                                               
 
Federal funds purchased
  $ 4,145       2.94 %   $ 4,997       5.02 %   $ 5,690       6.22 %
 
Securities sold under agreements to repurchase
    2,496       1.15       2,657       2.93       3,028       4.83  
 
Commercial paper
    391       1.74       390       3.85       215       6.27  
 
Treasury, tax and loan notes
    707       1.50       1,321       3.53       912       6.06  
 
Other short-term borrowings
    3,565       2.29       3,615       3.98       2,741       7.69  
   
   
Total
  $ 11,304       2.21 %   $ 12,980       4.11 %   $ 12,586       6.21 %

Maximum month-end balance
                                               
 
Federal funds purchased
  $ 7,009             $ 7,829             $ 7,807          
 
Securities sold under agreements to repurchase
    2,950               3,001               3,415          
 
Commercial paper
    452               590               300          
 
Treasury, tax and loan notes
    4,164               6,618               3,578          
 
Other short-term borrowings
    6,172               7,149               4,920          

 
84 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Note 14   Long-Term Debt

Long-term debt (debt with original maturities of more than one year) at December 31 consisted of the following:

                     
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

U.S. Bancorp (Parent Company)
               
Fixed-rate subordinated notes
               
 
7.625% due 2002
  $     $ 150  
 
8.125% due 2002
          150  
 
7.00% due 2003
    150       150  
 
6.625% due 2003
    100       100  
 
7.25% due 2003
    32       32  
 
8.00% due 2004
    73       73  
 
7.625% due 2005
    121       121  
 
6.75% due 2005
    191       191  
 
6.875% due 2007
    220       250  
 
7.30% due 2007
    200       200  
 
7.50% due 2026
    200       200  
Senior contingent convertible debt 1.50% due 2021
    57       1,100  
Medium-term notes
    4,127       3,215  
Capitalized lease obligations, mortgage indebtedness and other
    224       142  
   
   
Subtotal
    5,695       6,074  
 
Subsidiaries
               
Fixed-rate subordinated notes
               
 
6.00% due 2003
    79       79  
 
6.375% due 2004
    75       75  
 
6.375% due 2004
    150       150  
 
7.55% due 2004
    100       100  
 
8.35% due 2004
    100       100  
 
7.30% due 2005
    100       100  
 
6.875% due 2006
    70       125  
 
6.625% due 2006
    100       100  
 
6.50% due 2008
    300       300  
 
6.30% due 2008
    300       300  
 
5.70% due 2008
    400       400  
 
7.125% due 2009
    500       500  
 
7.80% due 2010
    300       300  
 
6.375% due 2011
    1,500       1,500  
 
6.30% due 2014
    1,000        
Federal Home Loan Bank advances
    9,255       7,196  
Bank notes
    7,302       7,550  
Euro medium-term notes due 2004
    400       400  
Capitalized lease obligations, mortgage indebtedness and other
    862       367  
   
   
Subtotal
    22,893       19,642  
   
   
Total
  $ 28,588     $ 25,716  

     In August 2002, the Company repurchased for cash approximately $1.1 billion accreted value of its convertible senior notes due in 2021 (the “CZARS”), in accordance with the terms of the indenture governing the CZARS. Approximately $57 million in accreted value of the CZARS remains outstanding.
     In February 2002, the Company’s subsidiary U.S. Bank National Association issued $1.0 billion of fixed-rate subordinated notes due August 4, 2014. The interest rate is 6.30% per annum.
     Medium-term notes (“MTNs”) outstanding at December 31, 2002, mature from February 2003 through August 2007. The MTNs bear fixed or floating interest rates ranging from 1.55 percent to 7.50 percent. The weighted-average interest rate of MTNs at December 31, 2002, was 3.69 percent.
     Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) advances outstanding at December 31, 2002, mature from January 2003 through October 2026. The advances bear fixed or floating interest rates ranging from .50 percent to 8.25 percent. The Company has an arrangement with the FHLB whereby based on collateral available (residential and commercial mortgages), the Company could have borrowed an additional $5.5 billion at December 31, 2002. The weighted-average interest rate of FHLB advances at December 31, 2002, was 2.65 percent.
     Bank notes outstanding at December 31, 2002, mature from January 2003 through November 2005. The Bank
 
U.S. Bancorp  85


Table of Contents

notes bear fixed or floating interest rates ranging from 1.30 percent to 5.63 percent. The weighted-average interest rate of Bank notes at December 31, 2002, was 1.59 percent. Euro medium-term notes outstanding at December 31, 2002, bear floating rate interest at three-month LIBOR plus 15 basis points. The interest rate at December 31, 2002, was 1.93 percent.

Maturities of long-term debt outstanding at December 31, 2002, were:

                 
Parent
(Dollars in Millions) Consolidated Company

2003
    7,937       1,539  
2004
    5,577       909  
2005
    7,654       1,364  
2006
    194       3  
2007
    1,585       1,572  
Thereafter
    5,641       308  
   
Total
  $ 28,588     $ 5,695  

 
 Note 15   Company-obligated Mandatorily Redeemable Preferred Securities of Subsidiary Trusts Holding Solely the Junior Subordinated Debentures of the Parent Company

The Company has issued $2.9 billion of company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company (“Trust Preferred Securities”) through nine separate issuances by nine wholly owned subsidiary grantor trusts (“Trusts”). The Trust Preferred Securities accrue and pay distributions periodically at specified rates as provided in the indentures. The Trusts used the net proceeds from the offerings to purchase a like amount of junior subordinated deferrable interest debentures (the “Debentures”) of the Company. The Debentures are the sole assets of the Trusts and are eliminated, along with the related income statement effects, in the consolidated financial statements.

     The Company’s obligations under the Debentures and related documents, taken together, constitute a full and unconditional guarantee by the Company of the obligations of the Trusts. The guarantee covers the distributions and payments on liquidation or redemption of the Trust Preferred Securities, but only to the extent of funds held by the Trusts.
     The Trust Preferred Securities are mandatorily redeemable upon the maturity of the Debentures, or upon earlier redemption as provided in the indentures. The Company has the right to redeem retail Debentures in whole or in part on or after specific dates, at a redemption price specified in the indentures plus any accrued but unpaid interest to the redemption date. The Company has the right to redeem institutional Debentures in whole, (but not in part), on or after specific dates, at a redemption price specified in the indentures plus any accrued but unpaid interest to the redemption date. The Trust Preferred Securities are redeemable in whole or in part in 2003, 2006 and 2007 in the amounts of $350 million, $2,250 million and $300 million, respectively.
     The Trust Preferred Securities qualify as tier I capital of the Company for regulatory capital purposes. The Company used the proceeds from the sales of the Debentures for general corporate purposes.

The following table is a summary of the Trust Preferred Securities as of December 31, 2002:

                                                           
Trust
Preferred
Issuance Securities Debentures Rate Maturity Redemption
Issuance Trust (Dollars in Millions) Date Amount Amount Type (a) Rate Date Date (b)

Retail
                                                       
 
USB Capital V
    December 2001     $ 300     $ 309       Fixed       7.25 %   December 2031   December 7, 2006
 
USB Capital IV
    November 2001       500       515       Fixed       7.35     November 2031   November 1, 2006
 
USB Capital III
    May 2001       700       722       Fixed       7.75     May 2031   May 4, 2006
 
USB Capital II
    April 1998       350       361       Fixed       7.20     April 2028   April 1, 2003
Institutional
                                                       
 
Star Capital I
    June 1997       150       155       Variable       2.18 (c)   June 2027   June 15, 2007
 
Mercantile Capital Trust I
    February 1997       150       155       Variable       2.56 (d)   February 2027   February 1, 2007
 
USB Capital I
    December 1996       300       309       Fixed       8.27     December 2026   December 15, 2006
 
Firstar Capital Trust I
    December 1996       150       155       Fixed       8.32     December 2026   December 15, 2006
 
FBS Capital I
    November 1996       300       309       Fixed       8.09     November 2026   November 15, 2006

(a) The variable-rate Trust Preferred Securities reprice quarterly.
(b) Earliest date of redemption.
(c) Three-month LIBOR +76.5 basis points
(d) Three-month LIBOR +85.0 basis points

 
86 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Note 16   Shareholders’ Equity

At December 31, 2002 and 2001, the Company had authority to issue 4 billion shares of common stock and 10 million shares of preferred stock. The Company had 1,917.0 million and 1,951.7 million shares of common stock outstanding at December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively. At December 31, 2002, the Company had 272.9 million shares of common stock reserved for future issuances. These shares are primarily reserved for stock option plans, dividend reinvestment plans and deferred compensation plans.

     The Company has a Preferred Share Purchase Rights Plan intended to preserve the long-term value of the Company by discouraging a hostile takeover of the Company. Under the plan, each share of common stock carries a right to purchase one one-thousandth of a share of preferred stock. The rights become exercisable in certain limited circumstances involving a potential business combination transaction or an acquisition of shares of the Company and are exercisable at a price of $100 per right, subject to adjustment. Following certain other events, each right entitles its holder to purchase for $100 an amount of common stock of the Company, or, in certain circumstances, securities of the acquirer, having a then-current market value of twice the exercise price of the right. The dilutive effect of the rights on the acquiring company is intended to encourage it to negotiate with the Company’s Board of Directors prior to attempting a takeover. If the Board of Directors believes a proposed acquisition is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders, the Board may amend the plan or redeem the rights for a nominal amount in order to permit the acquisition to be completed without interference from the plan. Until a right is exercised, the holder of a right has no rights as a shareholder of the Company. The rights expire on February 27, 2011.
     The Company issued 1.0 million shares and 57.2 million shares of common stock with an aggregate value of $21.6 million and $1.9 billion in connection with purchase acquisitions during 2002 and 2001, respectively.
     On July 17, 2001, the Company’s Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of up to 56.4 million shares of the Company’s common stock to replace shares issued in connection with the acquisition of NOVA. On December 18, 2001, the Board of Directors approved an authorization to repurchase an additional 100 million shares of outstanding common stock throughout 2003. Under these programs the Company has repurchased 45.3 million and 19.7 million shares of common stock for $1,040.4 million and $467.9 million in 2002 and 2001, respectively. The July 17, 2001, authorization has been effectively completed.

The following table summarizes the Company’s common stock repurchased in each of the last three years:

                 
(Dollars and Shares in Millions) Shares Value

2002
    45.3     $ 1,040.4  
2001
    19.7       467.9  
2000
    58.6       1,182.2  

 
U.S. Bancorp  87


Table of Contents

Shareholders’ equity is affected by transactions and valuations of asset and liability positions that require adjustments to Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income. The reconciliation of the transactions affecting Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income included in shareholders’ equity for the years ended December 31, is as follows:

                           
(Dollars in Millions) Pre-tax Tax-effect Net-of-tax

2002
                       
Unrealized gain on securities available-for-sale
  $ 1,048.0     $ (398.0 )   $ 650.0  
Unrealized gain on derivatives
    323.5       (122.9 )     200.6  
Realized gain on derivatives
    63.4       (24.1 )     39.3  
Reclassification adjustment for gains
                       
 
realized in net income
    (331.6 )     126.0       (205.6 )
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    6.9       (2.6 )     4.3  
   
 
Total
  $ 1,110.2     $ (421.6 )   $ 688.6  
   
2001
                       
Unrealized gain on securities available-for-sale
  $ 194.5     $ (77.6 )   $ 116.9  
Unrealized gain on derivatives
    106.0       (40.3 )     65.7  
Realized gain on derivatives
    42.4       (16.1 )     26.3  
Reclassification adjustment for gains
                       
 
realized in net income
    (333.1 )     126.6       (206.5 )
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    (4.0 )     1.5       (2.5 )
   
 
Total
  $ 5.8     $ (5.9 )   $ (.1 )
   
2000
                       
Unrealized loss on securities available-for-sale
  $ 436.0     $ (157.8 )   $ 278.2  
Reclassification adjustment for gains
                       
 
realized in net income
    (41.6 )     15.8       (25.8 )
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    (.5 )     .2       (.3 )
   
 
Total
  $ 393.9     $ (141.8 )   $ 252.1  

 
 Note 17   Earnings Per Share

The components of earnings per share were:

                           
(Dollars and Shares in Millions, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001 2000

Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 3,326.4     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (37.2 )            
   
 
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
   
 
Weighted-average common shares outstanding
    1,916.0       1,927.9       1,906.0  
Net effect of the assumed purchase of stock based on the treasury stock method for options and stock plans
    10.1       11.6       12.5  
   
Weighted-average diluted common shares outstanding
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5  
   
Earnings per share
                       
 
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.74     $ .89     $ 1.51  
 
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )            
   
 
Net income
  $ 1.72     $ .89     $ 1.51  
   
Diluted earnings per share
                       
 
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.73     $ .88     $ 1.50  
 
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )            
   
 
Net income
  $ 1.71     $ .88     $ 1.50  

  For the years ended December 31, 2002, 2001 and 2000, options to purchase 140 million, 111 million and 107 million shares, respectively, were outstanding but not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because they were antidilutive.

 
88 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Note 18   Employee Benefits

Retirement Plans Pension benefits are provided to substantially all employees based on years of service and employees’ compensation while employed with the Company. Employees are fully vested after five years of service. The Company’s funding policy is to contribute amounts to its plans sufficient to meet the minimum funding requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, plus such additional amounts as the Company determines to be appropriate. During 2002, the Company made a $150 million dollar contribution to the qualified pension plan, in accordance with this policy. The actuarial cost method used to compute the pension liabilities and expense is the projected unit credit method. Prior to their acquisition dates, employees of certain acquired companies were covered by separate, noncontributory pension plans that provided benefits based on years of service and compensation. Generally, the Company merges plans of acquired companies into its existing pension plans when it becomes practicable.

     As a result of the Firstar/USBM merger, the Company maintained two different qualified pension plans, with three different pension benefit structures during 2001: the former USBM’s cash balance pension benefit structure, a final average pay benefit structure for the former Firstar organization, and a cash balance pension benefit structure related to the Mercantile acquisition. The two pension plans were merged as of January 1, 2002 under a new final average pay benefit structure; however, the benefit structure of the new plan does not become effective for the Mercantile acquisition until January 1, 2003. Under the new plan’s benefit structure, a participant’s future retirement benefits are based on a participant’s highest five year average annual compensation during his or her last 10 years before retirement or termination from the Company. Generally, under the two previous cash balance pension benefit structures the participant’s earned retirement benefits based on their average compensation over their career. Retirement benefits under the former Firstar benefit structure were earned based on final average pay and years of service, similar to the new plan. Plan assets primarily consist of various equity mutual funds and other miscellaneous assets.
     In light of continued deterioration of the equity market conditions during the second quarter and third quarter of 2002, the company decided to remeasure its pension plan assets and liabilities effective July 1, 2002, using current, updated information with respect to the estimated long-term rate of return on pension assets, the discount rate, participant census data and other relevant factors.
     During 2002, the Company also maintained several unfunded, nonqualified, supplemental executive retirement programs that provided additional defined pension benefits for senior managers and executive employees. Effective January 1, 2002, substantially all of these programs were merged into one nonqualified retirement plan. Because the non-qualified plan was unfunded, the aggregate accumulated benefit obligation exceeded the assets. A supplemental executive retirement plan of USBM was frozen for substantially all participants as of September 30, 2001 but with service credit running through December 31, 2001. The assumptions used in computing the present value of the accumulated benefit obligation, the projected benefit obligation and net pension expense are substantially consistent with those assumptions used for the funded qualified plans. The Company has recognized curtailment gains of $11.7 million in 2002 in connection with changes to nonqualified pension plans.

Post-Retirement Medical Plans In addition to providing pension benefits, the Company provides health care and death benefits to certain retired employees through several retiree medical programs. As a result of the Firstar/USBM merger, there were three major retiree medical programs in place during 2001 with various terms and subsidy schedules. Effective January 1, 2002, the Company adopted one retiree medical program for all future retirees. For certain eligible employees, the provisions of the USBM retiree medical plan and the Mercantile retiree medical plan will remain in place until December 31, 2002. Generally, all employees may become eligible for retiree health care benefits by meeting defined age and service requirements. The Company may also subsidize the cost of coverage for employees meeting certain age and service requirements. The medical plan contains other cost-sharing features such as deductibles and coinsurance. The estimated cost of these retiree benefit payments is accrued during the employees’ active service.

 
 
U.S. Bancorp  89


Table of Contents

     The Company uses a measurement date of September 30 for its retirement plans. At the measurement date, plan assets are determined based on the fair value generally representing observable market prices. The projected benefit obligation is determined based on the present value of projected benefit distributions at an assumed discount rate. Information presented in the four tables below reflects a measurement date of September 30.

The following table sets forth the components of net periodic benefit cost for the retirement plans:

                                                   
Pension Plans Post-Retirement Medical Plans

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 2002 2001 2000

Components of net periodic benefit cost
                                               
 
Service cost
  $ 49.9     $ 61.0     $ 65.4     $ 3.3     $ 2.1     $ 2.0  
 
Interest cost
    115.1       118.7       117.3       19.1       17.9       16.3  
 
Expected return on plan assets
    (214.1 )     (232.6 )     (201.6 )     (1.6 )     (1.0 )     (.6 )
 
Net amortization and deferral
    (6.5 )     (10.7 )     (13.2 )     (.1 )     .2       .2  
 
Recognized actuarial (gain) loss
    .8       (1.2 )     .7             (.1 )     (1.4 )
   
Net periodic benefit cost
    (54.8 )     (64.8 )     (31.4 )     20.7       19.1       16.5  
 
Curtailment and settlement (gain) loss
    (11.7 )           (17.0 )                 10.3  
 
Cost of special or contractual termination benefits recognized
    2.7                                
   
Net periodic benefit cost after curtailment and settlement (gain) loss, and cost of special or contractual termination benefits recognized
  $ (63.8 )   $ (64.8 )   $ (48.4 )   $ 20.7     $ 19.1     $ 26.8  

The following table summarizes benefit obligation and plan asset activity for the retirement plans:

                                   
Pension Plans Post-Retirement Medical Plans

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2002 2001

Projected benefit obligation
                               
 
Benefit obligation at beginning of measurement period
  $ 1,656.4     $ 1,595.4     $ 265.1     $ 244.1  
 
Service cost
    49.9       61.0       3.3       2.1  
 
Interest cost
    115.1       118.7       19.1       17.9  
 
Plan participants’ contributions
                10.4       10.3  
 
Plan amendments
          4.0             (2.4 )
 
Actuarial loss
          47.7       18.1       24.9  
 
Benefit payments
    (147.3 )     (170.4 )     (33.5 )     (31.8 )
 
Curtailments
    (.7 )                  
 
Settlements
    (5.0 )                  
 
Termination benefits
    2.7                    
   
 
Benefit obligation at end of measurement period (a)
  $ 1,671.1     $ 1,656.4     $ 282.5     $ 265.1  

Fair value of plan assets
                               
 
Fair value at beginning of measurement period
  $ 1,611.1     $ 2,283.2     $ 35.4     $ 21.8  
 
Actual return on plan assets
    (193.2 )     (531.8 )     .7       1.8  
 
Employer contributions
    172.1       30.1       17.2       33.3  
 
Plan participants’ contributions
                10.4       10.3  
 
Acquisition/divestitures
                       
 
Settlements
                       
 
Benefit payments
    (147.3 )     (170.4 )     (33.5 )     (31.8 )
   
 
Fair value at end of measurement period
  $ 1,442.7     $ 1,611.1     $ 30.2     $ 35.4  

Funded status
                               
 
Funded status at end of measurement period
  $ (228.4 )   $ (45.3 )   $ (252.3 )   $ (229.7 )
 
Unrecognized transition (asset) obligation
    (.1 )           7.4       8.1  
 
Unrecognized prior service cost
    (59.0 )     (74.8 )     (8.6 )     (9.5 )
 
Unrecognized net (gain) loss
    867.8       473.2       41.0       16.6  
 
Fourth quarter contribution
    4.3       6.7       13.7       5.7  
   
 
Net amount recognized
  $ 584.6     $ 359.8     $ (198.8 )   $ (208.8 )

Components of statement of financial position
                               
 
Prepaid benefit cost
  $ 763.9     $ 531.6     $     $  
 
Accrued benefit liability
    (179.3 )     (171.8 )     (198.8 )     (208.8 )
   
 
Net amount recognized
  $ 584.6     $ 359.8     $ (198.8 )   $ (208.8 )

(a)  At December 31, 2002 and 2001, the accumulated benefit obligation for all funded qualified pension plans was $1.4 billion.

 
90 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the weighted-average plan assumptions and other data:

                                             
Company USBM Firstar

(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 2001 2000

Pension plan actuarial computations
                                       
 
Expected long-term return on plan assets (a)
    10.9 %     11.0 %     9.5 %     12.2 %     12.2 %
 
Discount rate in determining benefit obligations
    6.8       7.5       7.8       7.5       8.0  
 
Rate of increase in future compensation
    3.5       3.5       5.6       3.5       4.0  
Post-retirement medical plan actuarial computations
                                       
 
Expected long-term return on plan assets
    5.0 %     5.0 %     5.0 %     * %     * %
 
Discount rate in determining benefit obligations
    6.8       7.5       7.8       7.5       8.0  
 
Health care cost trend rate (b)
                                       
   
Prior to age 65
    12.0 %     10.5 %     7.7 %     10.5 %     7.5 %
   
After age 65
    14.0       13.0       7.7       13.0       7.5  
Effect of one percent increase in health care cost trend rate
                                       
 
Service and interest costs
  $ 1.3     $ 1.2     $ 1.0     $ .4     $ .4  
 
Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation
    19.7       13.1       13.1       6.0       5.2  
Effect of one percent decrease in health care cost trend rate
                                       
 
Service and interest costs
  $ (1.2 )   $ (1.0 )   $ (.9 )   $ (.4 )   $ (.4 )
 
Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation
    (17.5 )     (13.6 )     (11.6 )     (5.7 )     (4.6 )

(a)  In connection with the Firstar/USBM merger, the asset management practices and investment strategies of the plan were conformed. At December 31, 2001, the investment asset allocation was weighted toward equities and diversified by industry and companies with varying market capitalization levels. This allocation is still in place at December 31, 2002.
(b)  The pre-65 and post-65 rates are assumed to decrease gradually to 5.5% and 6.0% respectively by 2011 and remain at these levels thereafter.
 *   The Firstar plan had no assets as of December 31, 2002, 2001 and 2000.

The following table provides information for pension plans with benefit obligations in excess of plan assets:

                 
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Benefit obligation
  $ 218.6     $ 227.5  
Accumulated benefit obligation
    210.6       220.6  
Fair value of plan assets
           

Employee Investment Plan The Company has defined contribution retirement savings plans which allow qualified employees, at their option, to make contributions up to certain percentages of pre-tax base salary through salary deductions under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Employee contributions are invested, at the employees’ direction, among a variety of investment alternatives. Employee contributions are 100 percent matched by the Company, up to the first four percent of an employee’s compensation. The Company’s matching contribution vests immediately; however, a participant must be employed on December 31st to receive that year’s matching contribution. Although the matching contribution is initially invested in the Company’s common stock, effective in 2002 an employee will be allowed to reinvest the matching contributions among various investment alternatives. Total expense was $59.5 million, $53.7 million and $53.6 million in 2002, 2001 and 2000, respectively.

 
 Note 19   Stock Options and Compensation Plans

As part of its employee and director compensation programs, the Company may grant certain stock awards under the provisions of the existing stock option and compensation plans. The Company has stock options outstanding under various plans at December 31, 2002, including plans assumed in acquisitions. The plans provide for grants of options to purchase shares of common stock generally at the stock’s fair market value at the date of grant. In addition, the plans provide for grants of shares of common stock which are subject to restriction on transfer and to forfeiture if certain vesting requirements are not met.

     With respect to stock option and stock compensation plans, the Company has elected to follow APB 25 in accounting for its employee stock incentive and purchase plans. Under APB 25, because the exercise price of the Company’s employee stock options equals the market price of the underlying stock on the date of grant, no compensation expense is recognized. On the date exercised, if new shares are issued, the option proceeds equal to the par value of the shares are credited to common stock and additional proceeds are credited to capital surplus. If treasury shares are issued, the option proceeds equal to the average treasury share price are credited to treasury stock and additional proceeds are credited to capital surplus.
     Option grants are generally exercisable up to ten years from the date of grant and vest over three to five years. Restricted shares vest over three to seven years. Compensation expense for restricted stock is based on the market price of the Company stock at the time of the grant and amortized on a straight-line basis over the vesting
 
U.S. Bancorp  91


Table of Contents

period. Compensation expense related to the restricted stock was $18.7 million, $71.9 million and $43.4 million in 2002, 2001, and 2000, respectively.
     Stock incentive plans of acquired companies are generally terminated at the merger closing dates. Option holders under such plans receive the Company’s common stock, or options to buy the Company’s stock, based on the conversion terms of the various merger agreements. The historical option information presented below has been restated to reflect the options originally granted under acquired companies’ plans.
     At December 31, 2002, there were 36.4 million shares (subject to adjustment for forfeitures) available for grant under various plans.

The following is a summary of stock options outstanding and exercised under various stock options plans of the Company:

                                                   
2002 2001 2000

Weighted-Average Weighted-Average Weighted-Average
Year Ended December 31 Stock Options Exercise Price Stock Options Exercise Price Stock Options Exercise Price

Stock option plans
                                               
Number outstanding at beginning of year
    201,610,265     $ 22.58       153,396,226     $ 22.80       153,163,030     $ 22.74  
 
Granted
    29,742,189       21.81       65,144,310       21.25       22,633,170       19.64  
 
Assumed/converted
                8,669,285       16.40       447,341       6.85  
 
Exercised
    (9,594,213 )     13.26       (12,775,067 )     13.44       (10,017,357 )     11.02  
 
Cancelled
    (15,505,651 )     24.18       (12,824,489 )     23.29       (12,829,958 )     19.91  
   
Number outstanding at end of year
    206,252,590     $ 22.77       201,610,265     $ 22.58       153,396,226     $ 22.80  
Exercisable at end of year
    123,195,273     $ 23.63       117,534,343     $ 22.36       68,870,745     $ 19.78  

Restricted share plans
                                               
Number outstanding at beginning of year
    2,177,588               6,377,137               4,212,954          
 
Granted
    806,355               1,021,887               4,110,440          
 
Assumed/converted
                  298,988                        
 
Cancelled/vested
    (703,886 )             (5,520,424 )             (1,946,257 )        
   
Number outstanding at end of year
    2,280,057               2,177,588               6,377,137          

Weighted-average fair value of shares granted
          $ 7.03             $ 6.76             $ 6.32  

Additional information regarding options outstanding as of December 31, 2002, is as follows:

                                         
Options Outstanding Exercisable Options


Weighted-
Average Weighted- Weighted-
Remaining Average Average
Contractual Exercise Exercise
Range of Exercise Prices Shares Life (Years) Price Shares Price

$.84 — $10.00
    5,408,016       1.9     $ 6.19       5,395,464     $ 6.18  
$10.01 — $15.00
    6,161,409       4.6       11.84       5,138,594       11.62  
$15.01 — $20.00
    45,564,059       7.8       18.73       21,752,900       18.23  
$20.01 — $25.00
    87,344,126       8.1       22.49       32,845,987       22.79  
$25.01 — $30.00
    54,953,364       6.0       28.17       51,325,867       28.26  
$30.01 — $35.00
    6,005,278       5.4       32.56       5,920,123       32.56  
$35.01 — $37.20
    816,338       5.5       35.79       816,338       35.79  
   
      206,252,590       7.1     $ 22.77       123,195,273     $ 23.63  

  Pro forma information regarding net income and earnings per share is required under Statement of Financial Accounting Standard No. 123 (“SFAS 123”), “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” and has been determined as if the Company accounted for its employee stock option plans under the fair value method of SFAS 123. The fair value of options was estimated at the grant date using a Black-Scholes option pricing model. Option valuation models require use of highly subjective assumptions. Also, employee stock options have characteristics that are significantly different from those of traded options, including vesting provisions and trading limitations that impact their liquidity. Because employee stock options have differing characteristics and changes in the subjective input assumptions can materially affect the fair value estimate, the Black-Scholes valuation model does not necessarily provide a reliable measure of the fair value of employee stock options.

 
92 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

     The pro forma disclosures include options granted through December 31, 2002, and are not likely to be representative of the pro forma disclosures for future years. The estimated fair value of the options is amortized to expense over the options’ respective vesting periods.

The following table shows proforma compensation expense, net income and earnings per share adjusted for the impact of following SFAS 123 for stock-based compensation.

                             
Year Ended December 31,

(Dollars in Million, Except Per Share Data) 2002 2001(a) 2000

Reported compensation expense
  $ 2,776.9     $ 2,713.3     $ 2,826.9  
   
Stock-based compensation
    198.5       361.4       193.5  
   
 
Proforma compensation expense
  $ 2,975.4     $ 3,074.7     $ 3,020.4  

Reported net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
   
Stock-based compensation, net of tax
    (121.1 )     (227.6 )     (123.5 )
   
 
Proforma net income
  $ 3,168.1     $ 1,478.9     $ 2,752.1  

Earnings per share
                       
 
Reported net income
  $ 1.72     $ .89     $ 1.51  
   
Stock-based compensation, net of tax
    (.07 )     (.12 )     (.07 )
   
 
Proforma net income
  $ 1.65     $ .77     $ 1.44  

Diluted earnings per share
                       
 
Reported net income
  $ 1.71     $ .88     $ 1.50  
   
Stock-based compensation, net of tax
    (.07 )     (.12 )     (.07 )
   
 
Proforma net income
  $ 1.64     $ .76     $ 1.43  

(a)  Pro forma earnings per share for 2001 was impacted by changes in control provisions that accelerated the vesting of stock options granted to USBM employees.

                                 
  2000

Weighted-average assumptions in option valuation 2002 2001 Firstar USBM

Risk-free interest rates
    3.3 %     4.6 %     5.4 %     6.1 %
Dividend yields
    3.0 %     3.0 %     2.5 %     3.0 %
Stock volatility factor
    .41       .42       .37       .37  
Expected life of options (in years)
    6.0       4.5       2.5-5.5       4.7  

 
U.S. Bancorp  93


Table of Contents

 
 Note 20   Income Taxes

The components of income tax expense were:

                           
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Federal
                       
Current
  $ 1,273.5     $ 979.9     $ 996.1  
Deferred
    316.6       (164.5 )     324.5  
   
 
Federal income tax
    1,590.1       815.4       1,320.6  
 
State
                       
Current
    144.9       131.8       159.0  
Deferred
    41.3       (19.5 )     32.6  
   
 
State income tax
    186.2       112.3       191.6  
   
 
Total income tax provision
  $ 1,776.3     $ 927.7     $ 1,512.2  

A reconciliation of expected income tax expense at the federal statutory rate of 35% to the Company’s applicable income tax expense follows:

                           
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Tax at statutory rate (35%)
  $ 1,785.9     $ 922.0     $ 1,535.8  
State income tax, at statutory rates, net of federal tax benefit
    121.0       73.0       124.5  
Tax effect of
                       
 
Tax-exempt interest, net
    (28.6 )     (38.9 )     (56.0 )
 
Amortization of nondeductible goodwill
          88.1       91.6  
 
Tax credits
    (85.5 )     (69.4 )     (62.7 )
 
Nondeductible merger charges
    5.0       52.5       4.9  
 
Sale of preferred minority interest
                (50.0 )
 
Other items
    (21.5 )     (99.6 )     (75.9 )
   
Applicable income taxes
  $ 1,776.3     $ 927.7     $ 1,512.2  

     The tax effects of fair value adjustments on securities available-for-sale, derivative instruments in cash flow hedges and certain tax benefits related to stock options are recorded directly to shareholders’ equity as part of other comprehensive income.
     Deferred income tax assets and liabilities reflect the tax effect of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for the same items for income tax reporting purposes.

The components of the Company’s net deferred tax liability as of December 31 were:


                   
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Deferred tax assets
               
Allowance for credit losses
  $ 961.0     $ 1,043.9  
Pension and postretirement benefits
    62.8       59.5  
Federal AMT credits and capital losses
    48.6       22.0  
Real estate and other asset basis differences
    39.1       32.6  
State and federal operating loss carryforwards
    34.9       24.4  
Other deferred tax assets, net
    487.4       234.0  
   
 
Gross deferred tax assets
    1,633.8       1,416.4  
 
Deferred tax liabilities
               
Leasing activities
    (2,292.2 )     (1,642.5 )
Securities available-for-sale and financial instruments
    (478.8 )     (59.7 )
Accelerated depreciation
    (104.4 )     (117.7 )
Deferred fees
    (70.6 )     (49.2 )
Accrued severance, pension and retirement benefits
    (65.0 )     2.2  
Other investment basis differences
    (37.2 )     (32.5 )
Other deferred tax liabilities, net
    (248.7 )     (73.6 )
   
 
Gross deferred tax liabilities
    (3,296.9 )     (1,973.0 )
Valuation allowance
    (1.0 )     (16.6 )
   
Net deferred tax liability
  $ (1,664.1 )   $ (573.2 )

 
94 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The Company has established a valuation allowance to offset deferred tax assets related to state net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $553 million, which expire at various times through 2016.

     Certain events covered by Internal Revenue Code section 593(e), which was not repealed, will trigger a recapture of base year reserves of acquired thrift institutions. The base year reserves of acquired thrift institutions would be recaptured if an entity ceases to
qualify as a bank for federal income tax purposes. The base year reserves of thrift institutions also remain subject to income tax penalty provisions that, in general, require recapture upon certain stock redemptions of, and excess distributions to, stockholders. At December 31, 2002, retained earnings included approximately $101.8 million of base year reserves for which no deferred federal income tax liability has been recognized.

 
 Note 21   Derivative Instruments

In the ordinary course of business, the Company enters into derivative transactions to manage its interest rate and prepayment risk and to accommodate the business requirements of its customers. The Company does not enter into derivative transactions for speculative purposes. Refer to Note 1 “Significant Accounting Policies” in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for a discussion of the Company’s accounting policies for derivative instruments. For information related to derivative positions held for asset and liability management purposes and customer-related derivative positions, see Table 17 “Derivative Positions,” included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis, which is incorporated by reference in these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

ASSET AND LIABILITY MANAGEMENT POSITIONS

Cash Flow Hedges The Company has $15.9 billion of designated cash flow hedges at December 31, 2002. These derivatives are interest rate swaps that are hedges of the forecasted cash flows from the underlying variable-rate LIBOR loans and floating-rate debt. All cash flow hedges are highly effective for the year ended December 31, 2002, and the change in fair value attributed to hedge ineffectiveness was not material.

     At December 31, 2002 and 2001, accumulated other comprehensive income included a deferred after-tax net gain of $309.9 million and $98.3 million, respectively, related to derivatives used to hedge cash flows. The unrealized gain will be reflected in earnings when the related cash flows or hedged transactions occur and will offset the related performance of the hedged items. The occurrence of these related cash flows and hedged transactions remains probable. The estimated amount of after-tax gain to be reclassified from accumulated other comprehensive income into earnings during 2003 is $61.0 million, which includes gains related to hedges that were terminated early when the forecasted transactions are still probable.

Fair Value Hedges The Company has $12.3 billion of designated fair value hedges at December 31, 2002. These derivatives are primarily interest rate contracts that hedge the change in fair value related to interest rate changes of underlying fixed-rate debt, trust preferred stock, and deposit obligations. In addition, the Company uses forward commitments to sell residential mortgages loans to hedge its interest rate risk related to residential mortgage loans held for sale. The Company commits to sell the loans at specified prices in a future period, typically within 90 days. The Company is exposed to interest rate risk during the period between issuing a loan commitment and the sale of the loan into the secondary market.

     All fair value hedges are considered highly effective for the year ended December 31, 2002. The change in fair value attributed to hedge ineffectiveness was a gain of $39.4 million related to the Company’s mortgage loans held for sale and its 2002 production volume of $23.2 billion.

Other Asset and Liability Management Derivative Positions The Company has derivative positions that are used for interest rate risk and other risk management purposes but are not designated as cash flow hedges or fair value hedges in accordance with the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedge Activities.” At December 31, 2002, the Company had $3.0 billion forward commitments to sell residential mortgage loans to hedge the Company’s interest rate risk related to $2.9 billion of unfunded residential mortgage loan commitments. Gains and losses on mortgage banking derivatives and the unfunded loan commitments are included in mortgage banking revenue on the income statement.

CUSTOMER-RELATED POSITIONS

The Company acts as a seller and buyer of interest rate contracts and foreign exchange rate contracts on behalf of customers. At December 31, 2002, the Company had $15.9 billion of aggregate customer derivative positions, including $8.9 billion of interest rate swaps, caps and floors and $7.0 billion of foreign exchange rate contracts. The Company minimizes its market and liquidity risks by taking substantially similar offsetting positions. Gains or losses on customer-related transactions were not significant for the year ended December 31, 2002.

 
U.S. Bancorp  95


Table of Contents

 
 Note 22   Fair Values of Financial Instruments

Due to the nature of its business and its customers’ needs, the Company offers a large number of financial instruments, most of which are not actively traded. When market quotes are unavailable, valuation techniques including discounted cash flow calculations and pricing models or services are used. The Company also uses various aggregation methods and assumptions, such as the discount rate and cash flow timing and amounts. As a result, the fair value estimates can neither be substantiated by independent market comparisons, nor realized by the immediate sale or settlement of the financial instrument. Also, the estimates reflect a point in time and could change significantly based on changes in economic factors, such as interest rates. Furthermore, the disclosure of certain financial and nonfinancial assets and liabilities are not required. Finally, the fair value disclosure is not intended to estimate a market value of the Company as a whole. A summary of the Company’s valuation techniques and assumptions follows.

Cash and Cash Equivalents The carrying value of cash, amounts due from banks, federal funds sold and securities purchased under resale agreements was assumed to approximate fair value.

Securities Generally, trading securities and investment securities were valued using available market quotes. In some instances, for securities that are not widely traded, market quotes for comparable securities were used.

Loans The loan portfolio consists of both floating and fixed-rate loans, the fair value of which was estimated using discounted cash flow analyses and other valuation techniques. To calculate discounted cash flows, the loans were aggregated into pools of similar types and expected repayment terms. The expected cash flows of loans considered historical prepayment experiences and estimated credit losses for nonperforming loans and were discounted using current rates offered to borrowers of similar credit characteristics.

Deposit Liabilities The fair value of demand deposits, savings accounts and certain money market deposits is equal to the amount payable on demand at year-end. The fair value of fixed-rate certificates of deposit was estimated by discounting the contractual cash flow using the discount rates implied by the high-grade corporate bond yield curve.

Short-term Borrowings Federal funds purchased, securities sold under agreements to repurchase and other short-term funds borrowed are at floating rates or have short-term maturities. Their carrying value is assumed to approximate their fair value.

Long-term Debt and Company-obligated Mandatorily Redeemable Preferred Securities of Subsidiary Trusts Holding Solely the Junior Subordinated Debentures of the Parent Company The estimated fair value of medium-term notes, bank notes, Federal Home Loan Bank advances, capital lease obligations and mortgage note obligations estimated fair value was determined using a discounted cash flow analysis based on current market rates of similar maturity debt securities to discount cash flows. Other long-term debt instruments and company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company were valued using available market quotes.

Interest Rate Swaps, Basis Swaps and Options The interest rate options and swap cash flows were estimated using a third-party pricing model and discounted based on appropriate LIBOR, eurodollar futures, swap and treasury note yield curves.

Loan Commitments, Letters of Credit and Guarantees The fair value of commitments, letters of credit and guarantees represents the estimated costs to terminate or otherwise settle the obligations with a third-party. Residential mortgage commitments are actively traded and the fair value is estimated using available market quotes. Other loan commitments, letters of credit and guarantees are not actively traded. Substantially all of these commitments have floating rates and do not expose the Company to interest rate risk assuming no premium or discount was ascribed to loan commitments because funding could occur at market rates. The Company estimates the fair value of loan commitments, letters of credit and guarantees based on the related amount of unamortized deferred commitment fees adjusted for the probable losses for these arrangements.

 
96 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

The estimated fair values of the Company’s financial instruments at December 31 are shown in the table below.

                                         
2002 2001

Carrying Fair Carrying Fair
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) Amount Value Amount Value

Financial Assets
                               
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 11,192     $ 11,192     $ 9,745     $ 9,745  
 
Trading securities
    898       898       982       982  
 
Investment securities
    28,488       28,495       26,608       26,615  
 
Loans held for sale
    4,159       4,159       2,820       2,820  
 
Loans
    113,829       115,341       111,948       112,236  
   
   
Total financial assets
    158,566     $ 160,085       152,103     $ 152,398  
             
             
 
     
Nonfinancial assets
    21,461               19,287          
     
             
         
       
Total assets
  $ 180,027             $ 171,390          
     
             
         
Financial Liabilities
                               
 
Deposits
  $ 115,534     $ 116,039     $ 105,219     $ 105,561  
 
Short-term borrowings
    7,806       7,806       14,670       14,670  
 
Long-term debt
    28,588       29,161       25,716       25,801  
 
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities of subsidiary trusts holding solely the junior subordinated debentures of the parent company
    2,994       3,055       2,826       2,915  
   
   
Total financial liabilities
    154,922     $ 156,061       148,431     $ 148,947  
             
             
 
     
Nonfinancial liabilities
    7,004               6,498          
     
Shareholders’ equity
    18,101               16,461          
     
             
         
       
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 180,027             $ 171,390          

Derivative Positions
                               
 
Asset and liability management positions
                               
     
Interest Rate Swaps
  $ 1,438     $ 1,438     $ 328     $ 328  
     
Forward commitments to sell residential mortgages
    (80 )     (80 )     72       72  
 
Customer-related positions
                               
     
Interest rate contracts
    22       22       10       10  
     
Foreign exchange contracts
    1       1       2       2  

     The fair value of unfunded commitments, standby letters of credit and other guarantees is approximately equal to their carrying value. The carrying value of unfunded commitments and standby letters of credit is $240 million. The carrying value of other guarantees is $162 million.

 
 Note 23   Commitments and Contingent Liabilities

COMMITMENTS TO EXTEND CREDIT

Commitments to extend credit are legally binding and generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses. The contractual amount represents the Company’s exposure to credit loss, in the event of default by the borrower. The Company manages this credit risk by using the same credit policies it applies to loans. Collateral is obtained to secure commitments based on management’s credit assessment of the borrower. The collateral may include marketable securities, receivables, inventory, equipment and real estate. Since the Company expects many of the commitments to expire without being drawn, total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent the Company’s future liquidity requirements. In addition, the commitments include consumer credit lines that are cancelable upon notification to the consumer.

LETTERS OF CREDIT

Standby letters of credit are conditional commitments the Company issues to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third-party. The guarantees frequently support public and private borrowing arrangements, including commercial paper issuances, bond financings and other similar transactions. The Company issues commercial letters of credit on behalf of customers to ensure payment or collection in connection with trade transactions. In the event of a customer’s nonperformance, the Company’s credit loss exposure is the same as in any extension of credit, up to the letter’s contractual amount. Management assesses the borrower’s credit to determine the necessary collateral, which may include marketable securities, real estate, accounts receivable and inventory. Since the conditions requiring the Company to fund letters of credit may not occur, the Company expects its liquidity requirements to be less than the total outstanding

 
U.S. Bancorp  97


Table of Contents

commitments. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under standby letter of credit arrangements at December 31, 2002, is approximately $9.1 billion with a weighted average term of approximately 25 months.

The contract or notional amounts of commitments to extend credit and letters of credit at December 31, 2002, were as follows:

                           
Less Than After
(Dollars in Millions) One Year One Year Total

Commitments to extend credit
                       
 
Commercial
  $ 19,798     $ 28,957     $ 48,755  
 
Corporate and purchasing cards
    20,538       2,946       23,484  
 
Consumer credit cards
    22,002             22,002  
 
Other consumer
    2,099       8,176       10,275  
Letters of credit
                       
 
Standby
    4,277       4,834       9,111  
 
Commercial
    436       23       459  

LEASE COMMITMENTS

Rental expense for operating leases amounted to $148.0 million in 2002, $165.2 million in 2001 and $219.3 million in 2000. Future minimum payments, net of sublease rentals, under capitalized leases and noncancelable operating leases with initial or remaining terms of one year or more, consisted of the following at December 31, 2002:

                 
Capitalized Operating
(Dollars in Millions) Leases Leases

2003
  $ 9.2     $ 357.6  
2004
    8.1       206.5  
2005
    6.9       142.8  
2006
    6.3       319.7  
2007
    6.3       101.8  
Thereafter
    44.9       502.7  
     
     
 
Total minimum lease payments
  $ 81.7     $ 1,631.1  
             
 
Less amount representing interest
    33.1          
     
         
Present value of net minimum lease payments
  $ 48.6          

GUARANTEES

Guarantees are contingent commitments issued by the Company to customers or other third parties. The Company’s guarantees primarily include parent guarantees related to subsidiaries’ third-party borrowing arrangements; third-party performance guarantees inherent in the Company’s business operations such as indemnified securities lending programs and merchant charge-backs guarantees; indemnification or buy-back provisions related to certain asset sales; synthetic lease guarantees; and contingent consideration arrangements related to acquisitions. For certain guarantees, the Company has recorded a liability related to the potential obligation, or has access to collateral to support the guarantee or through the exercise of other recourse provisions can offset some or all of the maximum potential future payments made under these guarantees.

Third-Party Borrowing Arrangements The Company provides guarantees to third parties as a part of certain subsidiaries’ borrowing arrangements, primarily representing guaranteed operating or capital lease payments or other debt obligations with maturity dates extending through 2014. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is approximately $1.5 billion at December 31, 2002. The Company’s recorded liabilities as of December 31, 2002 include $32.4 million representing outstanding amounts owed to these third parties and required to be recorded on balance sheet in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. The guaranteed operating lease payments are also included in the disclosed minimum lease obligations.

Commitments from Securities Lending The Company participates in securities lending activities by acting as the customer’s agent involving the loan or sale of securities. The Company indemnifies customers for the difference between the market value of the securities lent and the market value of the collateral received. Cash collateralizes these transactions. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is approximately $9.7 billion at December 31, 2002, and represents the market value of the securities lent to third parties. At December 31, 2002, the Company held assets with a market value of $10.0 billion as collateral for these arrangements.

Asset Sales The Company has provided guarantees to certain third parties in connection with the sale of certain assets, primarily loan portfolios and low income housing tax credits. These guarantees are generally in the form of asset buy-back or make-whole provisions that are triggered upon a credit event or a change in the tax-qualifying status of the related projects, as applicable, and remain in effect until the loans are collected or final tax credits are realized, respectively. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is

 
98 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

approximately $1.4 billion at December 31, 2002 and represents the total proceeds received from the buyer in these transactions where the buy-back or make-whole provisions have not yet expired. Recourse available to the Company includes guarantees from the Small Business Administration (for SBA loans sold), recourse to the correspondent that originated the loan or to the private mortgage issuer, the right to collect payments from the debtors, and/or the right to liquidate the underlying collateral, if any, and retain the proceeds. Based on its established loan-to-value guidelines, the Company believes the recourse available is sufficient to recover future payments, if any, under the loan buy back guarantees.

Synthetic Leases Certain of the Company’s operating lease arrangements involve third party lessors that acquire business assets through leveraged financing structures commonly referred to as “synthetic leases.” The Company provides guarantees to the lender in the event of default by the leveraged financing structures or in the event that the Company does not exercise its option to purchase the property at the end of the lease term and the fair value of the assets is less than the purchase price. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements was approximately $403.0 million at December 31, 2002. Based on the estimated fair value of assets held by the structures, the liability for this guarantee was not significant at December 31, 2002. The minimum lease payments under these operating leases are included in the Company’s disclosure of minimum lease payment obligations.

Merchant Processing The Company, through its subsidiary NOVA Information Systems, Inc., provides merchant processing services. Under the rules of credit card associations, a merchant processor retains a contingent liability for credit card transactions processed. This contingent liability arises in the event of a billing dispute between the merchant and a cardholder that is ultimately resolved in the cardholder’s favor. In this situation, the transaction is “charged back” to the merchant and the disputed amount is credited or otherwise refunded to the cardholder. If the Company is unable to collect this amount from the merchant, it bears the loss for the amount of the refund paid to the cardholder.

     A cardholder, through its issuing bank, generally has until the later of up to four months after the date the transaction is processed or the receipt of the product or service to present a chargeback to the Company as the merchant processor. The absolute maximum potential liability is estimated to be the total volume of credit card transactions that meet the associations’ requirements to be valid chargeback transactions at any given time. Management estimates that the maximum potential exposure for chargebacks would approximate the total amount of merchant transactions processed through the credit card associations for the last four months. For the last four months of 2002, this amount totaled approximately $34.2 billion. In most cases, this contingent liability is unlikely to arise, as most products and services are delivered when purchased and amounts are refunded when items are returned to merchants. However, where the product or service is not provided until a future date (“future delivery”), the potential for this contingent liability increases. To mitigate this risk, the Company may require the merchant to make an escrow deposit, may place maximum volume limitations on future delivery transactions processed by the merchant at any point in time, or may require various credit policy enhancements (including letters of credit and bank guarantees). Also, merchant processing contracts may include event triggers to provide the Company more financial and operational control in the event of financial deterioration of the merchant. At December 31, 2002, the Company held as collateral $24.3 million of merchant escrow deposits.
     The Company currently processes card transactions for several of the largest airlines in the United States. In the event of liquidation of these airlines, the Company could become financially liable for refunding tickets purchased through the credit card associations under the chargeback provisions. Chargeback risk related to an airline is evaluated in a manner similar to credit risk assessments and merchant processing contracts consider the potential risk of default. At December 31, 2002, the value of future delivery airline tickets purchased was approximately $1.0 billion and the Company held collateral of $144.3 million in escrow deposits and lines of credit related to airline customer transactions.
     In the normal course of business, the Company has unresolved chargebacks that are in process of resolution. The Company assesses the likelihood of its potential liability based on the extent and nature of unresolved chargebacks and its historical experience loss experience. At December 31, 2002, the Company recorded a liability for potential losses of $16.0 million.

Contingent Consideration Arrangements The Company has contingent payment obligations related to certain business combination transactions. Payments are guaranteed as long as certain post-acquisition performance-based criteria are met. At December 31, 2002, the maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is approximately $78.7 million and primarily represents contingent payments related to the acquisition of the Corporate Trust business of State Street Bank on December 31, 2002 and are payable within 12 to 18 months.

 
U.S. Bancorp  99


Table of Contents

Other Guarantees The Company provides liquidity and credit enhancement facilities to two Company-sponsored conduits, as more fully described in Note 9 — Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities. Although management believes a draw against these facilities is remote, the maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is approximately $13.7 billion. The recorded fair value of the Company’s liability for the credit enhancement recourse obligation and liquidity facilities was $56.1 million at December 31, 2002 and is included in other liabilities.

     The Company guarantees payments to certain certificate holders of Company-sponsored investment trusts with varying termination dates extending through September 1, 2004. The maximum potential future payments guaranteed by the Company under these arrangements is approximately $61.1 million. The Company has a recorded liability of $56.0 million at December 31, 2002, holds $17.3 million in cash collateral and has other contractual sources of recourse available to it including guarantees from third parties and the underlying assets held by the investment trusts.

OTHER CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

In connection with the industry-wide investigations of research analyst independence issues, the Company’s brokerage and investment banking business line recognized a $50.0 million litigation charge in 2002 which included a settlement with certain governmental and regulatory agencies of $25.0 million for investment banking regulatory matters and $7.5 million for funding independent analyst research for its customers.

     The Company is subject to various other litigation, investigations and legal and administrative cases and proceedings that arise in the ordinary course of its businesses. Due to their complex nature, it may be years before some matters are resolved. While it is impossible to ascertain the ultimate resolution or range of financial liability with respect to these contingent matters, the Company believes that the aggregate amount of such liabilities, will not have a material adverse effect on the financial condition, results of operations or cash flows of the Company.
 
100 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Note 24   U.S. Bancorp (Parent Company)

Condensed Balance Sheet

                     
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Assets
               
Deposits with subsidiary banks, principally interest-bearing
  $ 5,869     $ 3,184  
Available-for-sale securities
    118       189  
Investments in
               
 
Bank affiliates
    17,954       17,907  
 
Nonbank affiliates
    1,598       1,291  
Advances to
               
 
Bank affiliates
    100       1,214  
 
Nonbank affiliates
    266       928  
Other assets
    2,294       2,258  
   
   
Total assets
  $ 28,199     $ 26,971  
   
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
               
Short-term funds borrowed
  $ 380     $ 452  
Advances from subsidiaries
    117       69  
Long-term debt
    5,695       6,074  
Junior subordinated debentures issued to subsidiary trusts
    2,990       2,990  
Other liabilities
    916       925  
Shareholders’ equity
    18,101       16,461  
   
   
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 28,199     $ 26,971  

Condensed Statement of Income

                           
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Income
                       
Dividends from bank subsidiaries
  $ 3,140.0     $ 1,300.1     $ 3,010.5  
Dividends from nonbank subsidiaries
    15.2       10.1       17.3  
Interest from subsidiaries
    96.9       272.8       234.8  
Service and management fees from subsidiaries
    38.5       221.8       246.0  
Other income
    16.0       21.0       217.0  
   
 
Total income
    3,306.6       1,825.8       3,725.6  
 
Expenses
                       
Interest on short-term funds borrowed
    8.9       18.5       19.3  
Interest on long-term debt
    126.8       318.5       441.7  
Interest on junior subordinated debentures issued to subsidiary trusts
    214.1       141.7       111.3  
Merger and restructuring-related charges
    6.7       49.5       21.3  
Other expenses
    76.0       322.5       225.2  
   
 
Total expenses
    432.5       850.7       818.8  
   
Income before income taxes and equity in undistributed income of subsidiaries
    2,874.1       975.1       2,906.8  
Income tax credit
    (84.6 )     (102.4 )     (34.0 )
   
Income of parent company
    2,958.7       1,077.5       2,940.8  
Equity (deficiency) in undistributed income of subsidiaries
    330.5       629.0       (65.2 )
   
 
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  

 
U.S. Bancorp  101


Table of Contents

Condensed Statement of Cash Flows

                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Operating Activities
                       
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities
                       
  (Equity) deficiency in undistributed income of subsidiaries     (330.5 )     (629.0 )     65.2  
  (Gain) loss on sales of securities, net     (8.6 )     (8.2 )     4.1  
  Depreciation and amortization of premises and equipment     8.4       8.7       51.7  
  Other, net     44.0       71.2       (386.8 )
   
    Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities     3,002.5       1,149.2       2,609.8  
 
Investing Activities
                       
Proceeds from sales and maturities of investment securities
    113.1       254.9       92.2  
Purchases of investment securities
    (52.9 )     (73.5 )     (59.4 )
Investments in subsidiaries
    (536.4 )     (1,941.0 )     (4.6 )
Equity distributions from subsidiaries
    1,200.0       600.0        
Net (increase) decrease in short-term advances to affiliates
    415.1       190.4       122.8  
Long-term advances to affiliates
    (410.0 )     (1,144.0 )     (1,314.8 )
Principal collected on long-term advances to affiliates
    1,770.0       2,713.2       203.0  
Other, net
    44.5       34.7       46.3  
   
    Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities     2,543.4       634.7       (914.5 )
 
Financing Activities
                       
Net increase (decrease) in short-term advances from subsidiaries
    48.4       (10.6 )     (15.6 )
Net increase (decrease) in short-term borrowings
    (72.3 )     228.9       53.3  
Principal payments on long-term debt
    (2,537.5 )     (1,612.8 )     (613.1 )
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
    2,075.0       1,100.0       1,792.5  
Proceeds from issuance of junior subordinated debentures to subsidiary trusts
          1,546.4        
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
    147.0       136.4       210.0  
Repurchase of common stock
    (1,040.4 )     (467.9 )     (1,182.2 )
Cash dividends paid
    (1,480.7 )     (1,235.1 )     (1,271.3 )
   
    Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities     (2,860.5 )     (314.7 )     (1,026.4 )
   
    Change in cash and cash equivalents     2,685.4       1,469.2       668.9  
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
    3,183.6       1,714.4       1,045.5  
   
    Cash and cash equivalents at end of year   $ 5,869.0     $ 3,183.6     $ 1,714.4  

     Transfer of funds (dividends, loans or advances) from bank subsidiaries to the Company is restricted. Federal law prohibits loans unless they are secured and generally limits any loan to the Company or individual affiliate to 10 percent of the bank’s equity. In aggregate, loans to the Company and all affiliates cannot exceed 20 percent of the bank’s equity.

     Dividend payments to the Company by its subsidiary banks are subject to regulatory review and statutory limitations and, in some instances, regulatory approval. The approval of the Comptroller of the Currency is required if total dividends by a national bank in any calendar year exceed the bank’s net income for that year combined with its retained net income for the preceding two calendar years or if the bank’s retained earnings are less than zero. Furthermore, dividends are restricted by the Comptroller of the Currency’s minimum capital constraints for all national banks. Within these guidelines, all bank subsidiaries have the ability to pay dividends without prior regulatory approval. The amount of dividends available to the parent company from the bank subsidiaries at December 31, 2002, was approximately $614 million.
 
102 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

 
 Note 25   Supplemental Disclosures to the Consolidated Financial Statements

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows Listed below are supplemental disclosures to the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows:

                             
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000

Income taxes paid
  $ 1,129.5     $ 658.1     $ 1,046.5  
Interest paid
    2,890.1       5,092.2       5,686.3  
Net noncash transfers to foreclosed property
    89.5       59.9       94.3  
   
Acquisitions and divestitures
                       
 
Assets acquired
  $ 2,068.9     $ 1,150.8     $ 3,314.6  
 
Liabilities assumed
    (3,821.9 )     (509.0 )     (3,755.9 )
   
   
Net
  $ (1,753.0 )   $ 641.8     $ (441.3 )

Money Market Investments are included with cash and due from banks as part of cash and cash equivalents. Money market investments were comprised of the following components at December 31:

                   
(Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001

Interest-bearing deposits
  $ 102     $ 104  
Federal funds sold
    61       123  
Securities purchased under agreements to resell
    271       398  
   
 
Total money market investments
  $ 434     $ 625  

Regulatory Capital The measures used to assess capital include the capital ratios established by bank regulatory agencies, including the specific ratios for the “well capitalized” designation. For a description of the regulatory capital requirements and the actual ratios as of December 31, 2002 and 2001, for the Company and its bank subsidiaries, see Table 20 included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis which is incorporated by reference into these Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 
U.S. Bancorp  103


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Balance Sheet — Five-Year Summary
                                                       
% Change
December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998 2001-2002

Assets
                                               
Cash and due from banks
  $ 10,758     $ 9,120     $ 8,475     $ 7,324     $ 8,882       18.0 %
Money market investments
    434       625       657       1,934       1,039       (30.6 )
Trading securities
    898       982       753       617       666       (8.6 )
Held-to-maturity securities
    233       299       252       194       233       (22.1 )
Available-for-sale securities
    28,255       26,309       17,390       17,255       20,732       7.4  
Loans held for sale
    4,159       2,820       764       670       1,794       47.5  
Loans
    116,251       114,405       122,365       113,229       106,958       1.6  
     
Less allowance for credit losses
    2,422       2,457       1,787       1,710       1,706       (1.4 )
   
       
     
Net loans
    113,829       111,948       120,578       111,519       105,252       1.7  
Other assets
    21,461       19,287       16,052       14,805       12,116       11.3  
   
       
   
Total assets
  $ 180,027     $ 171,390     $ 164,921     $ 154,318     $ 150,714       5.0 %
   
       
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
                                               
Deposits
                                               
 
Noninterest-bearing
  $ 35,106     $ 31,212     $ 26,633     $ 26,350     $ 27,479       12.5 %
 
Interest-bearing
    80,428       74,007       82,902       77,067       76,867       8.7  
   
       
   
Total deposits
    115,534       105,219       109,535       103,417       104,346       9.8  
Short-term borrowings
    7,806       14,670       11,833       10,558       10,011       (46.8 )
Long-term debt
    28,588       25,716       21,876       21,027       18,679       11.2  
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities
    2,994       2,826       1,400       1,400       1,400       5.9  
Other liabilities
    7,004       6,498       5,109       3,969       3,704       7.8  
   
       
   
Total liabilities
    161,926       154,929       149,753       140,371       138,140       4.5  
Shareholders’ equity
    18,101       16,461       15,168       13,947       12,574       10.0  
   
       
   
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 180,027     $ 171,390     $ 164,921     $ 154,318     $ 150,714       5.0 %

 
104 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Statement of Income — Five-Year Summary
                                                     
% Change
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions) 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998 2001-2002

Interest Income
                                               
Loans
  $ 7,743.6     $ 9,413.7     $ 10,519.3     $ 9,078.0     $ 8,802.0       (17.7 )%
Loans held for sale
    170.6       146.9       102.1       103.9       91.9       16.1  
Investment securities
                                               
 
Taxable
    1,438.2       1,206.1       1,008.3       1,047.1       1,179.5       19.2  
 
Non-taxable
    46.1       89.5       140.6       150.1       158.2       (48.5 )
Money market investments
    10.6       26.6       53.9       44.9       63.0       (60.2 )
Trading securities
    37.1       57.5       53.7       45.0       25.6       (35.5 )
Other interest income
    107.5       101.6       151.4       113.0       88.2       5.8  
   
       
   
Total interest income
    9,553.7       11,041.9       12,029.3       10,582.0       10,408.4       (13.5 )
 
Interest Expense
                                               
Deposits
    1,485.3       2,828.1       3,618.8       2,970.0       3,234.7       (47.5 )
Short-term borrowings
    249.4       534.1       781.7       582.4       594.7       (53.3 )
Long-term debt
    842.7       1,184.8       1,511.7       1,126.9       926.5       (28.9 )
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities
    136.6       127.8       110.7       111.0       103.8       6.9  
   
       
   
Total interest expense
    2,714.0       4,674.8       6,022.9       4,790.3       4,859.7       (41.9 )
   
       
Net interest income
    6,839.7       6,367.1       6,006.4       5,791.7       5,548.7       7.4  
Provision for credit losses
    1,349.0       2,528.8       828.0       646.0       491.3       (46.7 )
   
       
Net interest income after provision for credit losses
    5,490.7       3,838.3       5,178.4       5,145.7       5,057.4       43.1  
 
Noninterest Income
                                               
Credit and debit card revenue
    517.0       465.9       431.0       *       *       11.0  
Corporate payment products revenue
    325.7       297.7       299.2       *       *       9.4  
ATM processing services
    136.9       130.6       141.9       *       *       4.8  
Merchant processing services
    567.3       308.9       120.0       *       *       83.7  
Credit card and payment processing revenue
    *       *       *       837.8       748.0       *  
Trust and investment management fees
    899.1       894.4       926.2       887.1       788.3       .5  
Deposit service charges
    714.0       667.3       555.6       501.1       470.3       7.0  
Cash management fees
    416.9       347.3       292.4       280.6       242.0       20.0  
Commercial products revenue
    479.2       437.4       350.0       260.7       138.5       9.6  
Mortgage banking revenue
    330.2       234.0       189.9       190.4       244.6       41.1  
Trading account profits and commissions
    206.5       221.6       258.4       222.4       130.3       (6.8 )
Investment products fees and commissions
    428.9       460.1       466.6       450.8       306.9       (6.8 )
Investment banking revenue
    207.4       258.2       360.3       246.6       100.4       (19.7 )
Securities gains, net
    299.9       329.1       8.1       13.2       29.1       (8.9 )
Merger and restructuring-related gains
          62.2                   48.1       **  
Other
    339.6       286.4       526.8       398.9       419.8       18.6  
   
       
   
Total noninterest income
    5,868.6       5,401.1       4,926.4       4,289.6       3,666.3       8.7  
 
Noninterest Expense
                                               
Salaries
    2,409.2       2,347.1       2,427.1       2,355.3       2,196.7       2.6  
Employee benefits
    367.7       366.2       399.8       410.1       424.9       .4  
Net occupancy
    409.3       417.9       396.9       371.8       356.9       (2.1 )
Furniture and equipment
    306.0       305.5       308.2       307.9       314.1       .2  
Communication
    183.8       181.4       138.8       123.4       114.2       1.3  
Postage
    178.4       179.8       174.5       170.7       155.4       (.8 )
Goodwill
          251.1       235.0       175.8       176.0       **  
Other intangible assets
    553.0       278.4       157.3       154.0       125.8       98.6  
Merger and restructuring-related charges
    324.1       946.4       348.7       532.8       593.8       (65.8 )
Other
    1,525.1       1,331.4       1,130.7       1,059.5       965.6       14.5  
   
       
   
Total noninterest expense
    6,256.6       6,605.2       5,717.0       5,661.3       5,423.4       (5.3 )
   
       
Income before income taxes and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    5,102.7       2,634.2       4,387.8       3,774.0       3,300.3       93.7  
Applicable income taxes
    1,776.3       927.7       1,512.2       1,392.2       1,167.4       91.5  
   
       
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    3,326.4       1,706.5       2,875.6       2,381.8       2,132.9       94.9  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (37.2 )                             **  
   
       
Net income
  $ 3,289.2     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6     $ 2,381.8     $ 2,132.9       92.7%  

 * Information for 1999 and 1998 was classified as credit card and payment processing revenue. The current classifications are not available.
** Not meaningful

 
U.S. Bancorp  105


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Quarterly Consolidated Financial Data
                                                                     
2002 2001

First Second Third Fourth First Second Third Fourth
(Dollars in Millions, Except Per Share Data) Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter

Interest Income
                                                               
Loans
  $ 1,931.9     $ 1,936.9     $ 1,961.2     $ 1,913.6     $ 2,651.1     $ 2,426.7     $ 2,275.5     $ 2,060.4  
Loans held for sale
    39.2       36.6       37.3       57.5       16.6       25.9       53.9       50.5  
Investment securities
                                                               
 
Taxable
    347.8       346.1       372.2       372.1       253.3       287.8       321.2       343.8  
 
Non-taxable
    13.2       11.7       10.9       10.3       31.2       27.8       15.9       14.6  
Money market investments
    3.3       2.2       3.3       1.8       8.9       7.4       6.3       4.0  
Trading securities
    8.2       9.4       9.7       9.8       15.9       14.1       11.2       16.3  
Other interest income
    19.0       32.7       25.4       30.4       32.0       26.1       24.3       19.2  
   
   
Total interest income
    2,362.6       2,375.6       2,420.0       2,395.5       3,009.0       2,815.8       2,708.3       2,508.8  
 
Interest Expense
                                                               
Deposits
    395.5       375.8       370.3       343.7       883.7       783.0       670.0       491.4  
Short-term borrowings
    78.9       68.3       56.4       45.8       186.2       124.4       122.9       100.6  
Long-term debt
    192.1       216.8       226.8       207.0       366.1       318.0       282.8       217.9  
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities
    34.8       33.9       34.7       33.2       27.2       32.4       33.6       34.6  
   
   
Total interest expense
    701.3       694.8       688.2       629.7       1,463.2       1,257.8       1,109.3       844.5  
   
Net interest income
    1,661.3       1,680.8       1,731.8       1,765.8       1,545.8       1,558.0       1,599.0       1,664.3  
Provision for credit losses
    335.0       335.0       330.0       349.0       532.4       441.3       1,289.3       265.8  
   
Net interest income after provision for credit losses
    1,326.3       1,345.8       1,401.8       1,416.8       1,013.4       1,116.7       309.7       1,398.5  
 
Noninterest Income
                                                               
Credit and debit card revenue
    109.3       131.2       132.8       143.7       109.0       118.8       116.8       121.3  
Corporate payment products revenue
    75.2       82.5       87.6       80.4       78.8       77.4       73.1       68.4  
ATM processing services
    30.9       33.5       36.7       35.8       31.6       33.0       32.8       33.2  
Merchant processing services
    133.6       144.4       147.3       142.0       30.3       31.4       108.0       139.2  
Trust and investment management fees
    224.3       234.9       225.2       214.7       225.0       228.0       226.2       215.2  
Deposit service charges
    155.7       173.3       192.7       192.3       147.7       177.9       170.1       171.6  
Cash management fees
    104.2       104.3       105.8       102.6       76.8       84.9       89.7       95.9  
Commercial products revenue
    122.2       123.7       125.0       108.3       88.2       107.4       108.7       133.1  
Mortgage banking revenue
    52.0       78.0       111.8       88.4       48.2       57.0       60.3       68.5  
Trading account profits and commissions
    49.9       49.5       52.6       54.5       71.9       55.8       43.6       50.3  
Investment products fees and commissions
    111.1       107.4       105.0       105.4       125.7       114.2       108.0       112.2  
Investment banking revenue
    53.2       70.5       35.7       48.0       60.2       71.1       56.9       70.0  
Securities gains, net
    44.1       30.6       119.0       106.2       216.0       31.3       59.8       22.0  
Merger and restructuring-related gains
                                  62.2              
Other
    61.2       73.5       81.1       123.8       101.3       87.4       64.4       33.3  
   
   
Total noninterest income
    1,326.9       1,437.3       1,558.3       1,546.1       1,410.7       1,337.8       1,318.4       1,334.2  
 
Noninterest Expense
                                                               
Salaries
    588.3       607.6       606.0       607.3       590.5       570.5       580.3       605.8  
Employee benefits
    96.4       91.1       93.8       86.4       108.1       90.7       85.4       82.0  
Net occupancy
    100.1       101.8       103.2       104.2       110.1       101.4       102.5       103.9  
Furniture and equipment
    76.9       77.0       75.7       76.4       76.9       74.9       74.9       78.8  
Communication
    45.7       44.1       46.6       47.4       38.7       50.3       49.4       43.0  
Postage
    46.6       44.4       44.3       43.1       46.9       43.8       44.7       44.4  
Goodwill
                            67.8       58.6       62.3       62.4  
Other intangible assets
    80.2       104.7       211.4       156.7       46.6       54.0       84.8       93.0  
Merger and restructuring-related charges
    74.2       71.6       70.4       107.9       404.2       252.8       148.8       140.6  
Other
    328.4       378.1       388.9       429.7       308.7       297.7       334.4       390.6  
   
   
Total noninterest expense
    1,436.8       1,520.4       1,640.3       1,659.1       1,798.5       1,594.7       1,567.5       1,644.5  
   
Income before income taxes and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    1,216.4       1,262.7       1,319.8       1,303.8       625.6       859.8       60.6       1,088.2  
Applicable income taxes
    423.2       439.6       459.5       454.0       215.5       297.5       21.9       392.8  
   
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    793.2       823.1       860.3       849.8       410.1       562.3       38.7       695.4  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (37.2 )                                          
   
Net income
  $ 756.0     $ 823.1     $ 860.3     $ 849.8     $ 410.1     $ 562.3     $ 38.7     $ 695.4  
   
Earnings per share
  $ .39     $ .43     $ .45     $ .44     $ .22     $ .30     $ .02     $ .36  
Diluted earnings per share
  $ .39     $ .43     $ .45     $ .44     $ .21     $ .29     $ .02     $ .36  

 
106 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Supplemental Financial Data
                                         
Earnings Per Share Summary 2002 2001 2000 1999 1998

Earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.74     $ .89     $ 1.51     $ 1.25     $ 1.12  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )                        
   
Earnings per share
  $ 1.72     $ .89     $ 1.51     $ 1.25     $ 1.12  
   
Diluted earnings per share before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 1.73     $ .88     $ 1.50     $ 1.23     $ 1.10  
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
    (.02 )                        
   
Diluted earnings per share
  $ 1.71     $ .88     $ 1.50     $ 1.23     $ 1.10  

Ratios
                                       

Return on average assets
    1.91 %     1.03 %     1.81 %     1.59 %     1.49 %
Return on average equity
    19.4       10.5       20.0       18.0       17.2  
Average total equity to average assets
    9.9       9.8       9.1       8.8       8.7  
Dividends per share to net income per share
    45.3       84.3       43.0       36.8       29.5  

Other Statistics (Dollars and Shares in Millions)
                                       

Common shares outstanding (a)
    1,917.0       1,951.7       1,902.1       1,928.5       1,903.5  
Average common shares outstanding and common stock equivalents
                                       
       Earnings per share
    1,916.0       1,927.9       1,906.0       1,907.8       1,898.8  
       Diluted earnings per share
    1,926.1       1,939.5       1,918.5       1,930.0       1,930.5  
Number of shareholders (b)
    74,805       76,395       46,052       45,966       17,523  
Common dividends declared
  $ 1,488.6     $ 1,446.5     $ 1,267.0     $ 1,090.8     $ 977.6  

(a) Defined as total common shares less common stock held in treasury at December 31.
(b) Based on number of common stock shareholders of record at December 31.

Stock Price Range and Dividends

                                                                 
2002 2001

Sales Price Sales Price


Closing Dividends Closing Dividends
High Low Price Declared High Low Price Declared

First quarter
  $ 23.07     $ 19.02     $ 22.57     $ .195     $ 26.06     $ 18.49     $ 23.20     $ .1875  
Second quarter
    24.50       22.08       23.35       .195       23.60       20.71       22.79       .1875  
Third quarter
    23.29       17.09       18.58       .195       25.24       18.25       22.18       .1875  
Fourth quarter
    22.38       16.05       21.22       .195       22.95       16.50       20.93       .1875  

The common stock of U.S. Bancorp is traded on the New York Stock Exchange, under the ticker symbol “USB.”

 
U.S. Bancorp  107


Table of Contents

U.S. Bancorp
Consolidated Daily Average Balance Sheet and Related Yields and Rates (a)
                                                           
Year Ended December 31 2002 2001

Average Yields Average Yields
(Dollars in Millions) Balances Interest and Rates Balances Interest and Rates

Assets
                                                   
Money market investments
  $ 665     $ 10.6       1.60 %   $ 712     $ 26.6       3.74 %    
Trading securities
    935       40.9       4.38       771       59.3       7.69      
Taxable securities
    27,892       1,438.2       5.16       20,129       1,206.1       5.99      
Non-taxable securities
    937       65.3       6.97       1,787       128.9       7.21      
Loans held for sale
    2,644       170.6       6.45       1,911       146.9       7.69      
Loans (b)
                                                   
   
Commercial
    43,820       2,622.8       5.99       50,072       3,609.3       7.21      
   
Commercial real estate
    25,723       1,636.3       6.36       26,081       2,002.7       7.68      
   
Residential mortgages
    8,412       595.3       7.08       8,576       658.2       7.67      
   
Retail
    36,501       2,902.8       7.95       33,448       3,158.2       9.44      
   
         
           
     
Total loans
    114,456       7,757.2       6.78       118,177       9,428.4       7.98      
     
                     
                     
Other earning assets
    1,614       107.5       6.66       1,678       101.6       6.05      
 
Allowance for credit losses
    2,542                       1,979                      
   
         
           
     
Total earning assets (c)
    149,143       9,590.3       6.43       145,165       11,097.8       7.64      
Other assets
    25,347                       22,758                      
     
                     
                     
     
Total assets
  $ 171,948                     $ 165,944                      
     
                     
                     
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
                                                   
Noninterest-bearing deposits
  $ 28,715                     $ 25,109                      
Interest-bearing deposits
                                                   
 
Interest checking
    15,631       102.3       .65       13,962       203.6       1.46      
 
Money market accounts
    25,237       312.8       1.24       24,932       711.0       2.85      
 
Savings accounts
    4,928       25.1       .51       4,571       42.5       .93      
 
Time certificates of deposit less than $100,000
    19,283       743.4       3.86       23,328       1,241.4       5.32      
 
Time deposits greater than $100,000
    11,330       301.7       2.66       13,054       629.6       4.82      
   
         
           
     
Total interest-bearing deposits
    76,409       1,485.3       1.94       79,847       2,828.1       3.54      
Short-term borrowings
    11,304       249.4       2.21       12,980       534.1       4.11      
Long-term debt
    29,604       842.7       2.85       24,608       1,184.8       4.81      
Company-obligated mandatorily redeemable preferred securities
    2,904       136.6       4.70       1,955       127.8       6.54      
   
         
           
     
Total interest-bearing liabilities
    120,221       2,714.0       2.26       119,390       4,674.8       3.92      
Other liabilities
    6,049                       5,244                      
Shareholders’ equity
    16,963                       16,201                      
     
                     
                     
     
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 171,948                     $ 165,944                      
     
                     
                     
Net interest income
          $ 6,876.3                     $ 6,423.0              
             
                     
             
Gross interest margin
                    4.17 %                     3.72 %    
                     
                     
     
Gross interest margin without taxable-equivalent increments
                    4.15                       3.68      
                     
                     
     
Percent of Earning Assets
                                                   
Interest income
                    6.43 %                     7.64 %    
Interest expense
                    1.82                       3.22      
                     
                     
     
Net interest margin
                    4.61                       4.42      
                     
                     
     
Net interest margin without taxable-equivalent increments
                    4.59 %                     4.38 %    

(a) Interest and rates are presented on a fully taxable-equivalent basis under a tax rate of 35 percent.
(b) Interest income and rates on loans include loan fees. Nonaccrual loans are included in average loan balances.
(c) Before deducting the allowance for credit losses and excluding the unrealized gain (loss) on available-for-sale securities.

 
108 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Consolidated Daily Average Balance Sheet and Related Yields and Rates (a)
                                                                                     
2000 1999 1998 2001-2002

% Change
Average Yields Average Yields Average Yields Average
Balances Interest and Rates Balances Interest and Rates Balances Interest and Rates Balances

    $ 931     $ 53.9       5.79 %   $ 1,082     $ 44.9       4.15 %   $ 1,170     $ 63.0       5.38 %     (6.6 )%    
      779       57.6       7.39       630       47.8       7.59       428       27.6       6.45       21.3      
      14,567       1,008.3       6.92       16,301       1,047.1       6.42       17,977       1,179.5       6.56       38.6      
      2,744       203.1       7.40       2,970       220.6       7.43       3,137       238.2       7.59       (47.6 )    
      1,303       102.1       7.84       1,450       103.9       7.17       1,264       91.9       7.27       38.4      
      50,062       4,222.6       8.43       43,328       3,261.1       7.53       38,983       3,093.8       7.94       (12.5 )    
      26,040       2,296.9       8.82       23,076       1,922.8       8.33       20,458       1,784.4       8.72       (1.4 )    
      11,207       863.7       7.71       13,890       1,056.3       7.60       15,604       1,208.7       7.75       (1.9 )    
      31,008       3,155.1       10.18       29,344       2,860.8       9.75       27,406       2,744.3       10.01       9.1      
   
         
         
                   
      118,317       10,538.3       8.91       109,638       9,101.0       8.30       102,451       8,831.2       8.62       (3.1 )    
     
                     
                     
                             
      1,965       151.4       7.70       1,686       113.0       6.70       1,311       88.2       6.73       (3.8 )    
      1,781                       1,709                       1,688                       28.4      
   
         
         
                   
      140,606       12,114.7       8.62       133,757       10,678.3       7.98       127,738       10,519.6       8.24       2.7      
      19,656                       18,119                       16,837                       11.4      
     
                     
                     
                             
    $ 158,481                     $ 150,167                     $ 142,887                       3.6      
     
                     
                     
                             
    $ 23,820                     $ 23,556                     $ 23,011                       14.4      
      13,035       270.4       2.07       12,898       231.0       1.79       12,263       230.9       1.88       12.0      
      22,774       1,000.0       4.39       22,534       842.2       3.74       20,337       825.1       4.06       1.2      
      5,027       74.0       1.47       5,961       111.9       1.88       6,504       146.7       2.26       7.8      
      25,861       1,458.3       5.64       26,296       1,322.6       5.03       29,583       1,622.7       5.49       (17.3 )    
      12,909       816.1       6.32       8,675       462.3       5.33       7,242       409.3       5.65       (13.2 )    
   
         
         
                   
      79,606       3,618.8       4.55       76,364       2,970.0       3.89       75,929       3,234.7       4.26       (4.3 )    
      12,586       781.7       6.21       11,707       582.4       4.97       11,102       594.7       5.36       (12.9 )    
      22,410       1,511.7       6.75       20,248       1,126.9       5.57       15,732       926.5       5.89       20.3      
                                                                                     
      1,400       110.7       7.91       1,400       111.0       7.93       1,314       103.8       7.90       48.5      
   
         
         
                   
      116,002       6,022.9       5.19       109,719       4,790.3       4.37       104,077       4,859.7       4.67       .7      
      4,294                       3,671                       3,416                       15.4      
      14,365                       13,221                       12,383                       4.7      
     
                     
                     
                             
    $ 158,481                     $ 150,167                     $ 142,887                       3.6 %    
     
                     
                     
                   
            $ 6,091.8                     $ 5,888.0                     $ 5,659.9                      
             
                     
                     
                     
                      3.43 %                     3.61 %                     3.57 %            
                     
                     
                     
             
                      3.37                       3.54                       3.48              
                     
                     
                     
             
                      8.62 %                     7.98 %                     8.24 %            
                      4.29                       3.58                       3.81              
                     
                     
                     
             
                      4.33                       4.40                       4.43              
                     
                     
                     
             
                      4.27 %                     4.33 %                     4.34 %            

           
 
U.S. Bancorp  109


Table of Contents

Annual Report on Form 10-K

Securities and Exchange Commission
Washington, D.C. 20549

Annual Report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2002

Commission File Number 1-6880

U.S. Bancorp
Incorporated in the State of Delaware
IRS Employer Identification #41-0255900
Address: 800 Nicollet Mall
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402-7014
Telephone: (612) 973-1111

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act (and listed on the New York Stock Exchange): Common Stock, par value $.01.

     Securities registered pursuant to section 12(g) of the Act: None.
     As of January 31, 2003, U.S. Bancorp had 1,918,338,766 shares of common stock outstanding and 74,980 registered holders of its common stock. The aggregate market value of common stock held by non-affiliates as of June 30, 2002, was approximately $44.3 billion.
     U.S. Bancorp (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
     Disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is contained in the registrant’s definitive proxy statement incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K and any amendment to this Form 10-K.
     This Annual Report and Form 10-K incorporates into a single document the requirements of the accounting profession and the Securities and Exchange Commission. Only those sections of the Annual Report referenced in the following cross-reference index and the information under the caption “Forward-Looking Statements” are incorporated in the Form 10-K.
     The registrant is an accelerated filer (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 12b-2).
         
Index Page

Part I
       
Item 1
 
Business
   
   
General Business Description
  111-112
   
Line of Business Financial Performance
  53-58
   
Website Access to SEC Reports
  113
Item 2
 
Properties
  112
Item 3
 
Legal Proceedings
  none
Item 4
 
Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders
  none
 
Part II
       
Item 5
 
Market Price and Dividends for the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters
  3, 50-51,
86-88, 91-93, 107, 110
Item 6
 
Selected Financial Data
  17-18
Item 7
 
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
  16-60
Item 7A
 
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk
  43-50
Item 8
 
Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
  62-109
Item 9
 
Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure
  113
 
Part III
       
Item 10
 
Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant
  118-120*
Item 11
 
Executive Compensation
  *
Item 12
 
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters
  112-113*
Item 13
 
Certain Relationships and Related Transactions
  *
Item 14
 
Controls and Procedures
  60
 
Part IV
       
Item 15
 
Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules and Reports on Form 8-K
  113-114
Signatures
      115
Certifications
      116-117

* U.S. Bancorp’s definitive proxy statement for the 2003 Annual Meeting of Shareholders is incorporated herein by reference, other than the sections entitled “Report of the Compensation Committee” and “Stock Performance Chart.”

 
110 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

General Business Description U.S. Bancorp is a multi-state financial services holding company headquartered in Minneapolis, Minnesota and was created by the acquisition by Firstar Corporation of the former U.S. Bancorp of Minneapolis, Minnesota. The merger was completed on February 27, 2001, and the combined company retained the U.S. Bancorp name. U.S. Bancorp was incorporated in Delaware in 1929 and operates as a financial holding company and a bank holding company under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956. U.S. Bancorp provides a full range of financial services, including lending and depository services, cash management, foreign exchange and trust and investment management services. It also engages in credit card services, merchant and automated teller machine (“ATM”) processing, mortgage banking, insurance, brokerage, leasing and investment banking.

     U.S. Bancorp’s banking subsidiaries are engaged in the general banking business, principally in domestic markets. The subsidiaries range in size from $376 million to $122 billion in deposits and provide a wide range of products and services to individuals, businesses, institutional organizations, governmental entities and other financial institutions. Commercial and consumer lending services are principally offered to customers within the Company’s domestic markets, to domestic customers with foreign operations and within certain niche national venues. Lending services include traditional credit products as well as credit card services, financing and import/export trade, asset-backed lending, agricultural finance and other products. Leasing products are offered through non-bank subsidiaries. Depository services include checking accounts, savings accounts and time certificate contracts. Ancillary services such as foreign exchange, treasury management and receivable lock-box collection are provided to corporate customers. U.S. Bancorp’s bank and trust subsidiaries provide a full range of fiduciary services for individuals, estates, foundations, business corporations and charitable organizations.
     Banking and investment services are provided through a network of 2,142 banking offices principally operating in 24 states in the Midwest and West. The Company operates a network of 4,604 branded ATMs and provides 24-hour, seven days-a-week telephone customer service. Mortgage banking services are provided through banking offices and loan production offices throughout the Company’s markets.
     The Company is one of the largest providers of Visa® corporate and purchasing card services and corporate trust services in the United States. Its wholly owned subsidiary NOVA Information Systems, Inc. provides merchant processing services directly to merchants and through a network of banking affiliations.
     U.S. Bancorp’s other non-banking subsidiaries offer a variety of products and services to the Company’s customers. Its wholly owned subsidiary U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. engages in equity and fixed income trading activities and offers investment banking and underwriting services to corporate and public sector customers. This non-bank subsidiary also provides brokerage products, including securities, mutual funds and annuities, and insurance products to consumers and regionally based businesses through a network of 109 brokerage offices.
     On a full-time equivalent basis, employment during 2002 averaged a total of 51,673 employees.

Competition The commercial banking business is highly competitive. Subsidiary banks compete with other commercial banks and with other financial institutions, including savings and loan associations, mutual savings banks, finance companies, mortgage banking companies, credit unions and investment companies. In recent years, competition has increased from institutions not subject to the same regulatory restrictions as domestic banks and bank holding companies.

Government Policies The operations of the Company’s various operating units are affected by state and federal legislative changes and by policies of various regulatory authorities, including those of the numerous states in which they operate, the United States and foreign governments. These policies include, for example, statutory maximum legal lending rates, domestic monetary policies of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, United States fiscal policy, international currency regulations and monetary policies, U.S. Patriot Act and capital adequacy and liquidity constraints imposed by bank regulatory agencies.

Supervision and Regulation As a registered bank holding company and financial holding company under the Bank Holding Company Act, as amended by the Graham-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999, U.S. Bancorp is subject to the supervision of, and regulation by, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.

     Under the Bank Holding Company Act, a financial holding company may engage in banking, managing or controlling banks, furnishing or performing services for banks it controls, and conducting other financial activities. U.S. Bancorp must obtain the prior approval of the Federal Reserve Board before acquiring more than 5 percent of the outstanding shares of another bank or bank holding company, and must provide notice to, and in some situations obtain the prior approval of, the Federal Reserve Board in connection with engaging in, or acquiring more than 5 percent of the outstanding shares of a company engaged in, a new financial activity.
     Under the Bank Holding Company Act, as amended by the Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching Efficiency Act of 1994, U.S. Bancorp may acquire banks throughout
 
U.S. Bancorp  111


Table of Contents

the United States, subject only to state or federal deposit caps and state minimum age requirements.
     National banks are subject to the supervision of, and are examined by, the Comptroller of the Currency. All subsidiary banks of the Company are members of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and are subject to examination by the FDIC. In practice, the primary federal regulator makes regular examinations of each subsidiary bank subject to its regulatory review or participates in joint examinations with other federal regulators. Areas subject to regulation by federal authorities include the allowance for credit losses, investments, loans, mergers, issuance of securities, payment of dividends, establishment of branches and other aspects of operations.

Properties U.S. Bancorp and its significant subsidiaries occupy headquarter offices under a long-term lease in Minneapolis, Minnesota. The Company also leases seven freestanding operations centers in St. Paul, Portland, Milwaukee and Denver. The Company owns five principal operations centers in Cincinnati, St. Louis, Fargo and Milwaukee. At December 31, 2002, the Company’s subsidiaries owned and operated a total of 1,385 facilities and leased an additional 1,478 facilities, all of which are well maintained. The Company believes its current facilities are adequate to meet its needs. Additional information with respect to premises and equipment is presented in Notes 10 and 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Equity Compensation Plan Information The following table summarizes information regarding equity compensation plans in effect as of December 31, 2002.

                           
Number of securities remaining
Number of securities to be issued Weighted-average exercise available for future issuance under
upon exercise of outstanding options, price of outstanding options, equity compensation plans (excluding
Plan Category warrants and rights warrants and rights securities reflected in the first column) (c)

Equity compensation plans approved by security holders (a)
    103,657,787       $20.66       36,441,843  
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders (b)
    16,311,199       $22.66       0  
     
     
     
 
 
Total
    119,968,986       $20.93       36,441,843  

(a) Includes shares underlying stock options and restricted stock units (convertible into shares of the Company’s common stock on a one-for-one basis) under the U.S. Bancorp 2001 Stock Incentive Plan, the U.S. Bancorp 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan and the U.S. Bancorp 1991 Executive Stock Incentive Plan. Excludes 87,093,223 shares underlying outstanding stock options and warrants assumed by U.S. Bancorp in connection with acquisitions by U.S. Bancorp. Of the excluded shares, 73,117,792 underlie stock options granted under equity compensation plans of the former U.S. Bancorp that were approved by the shareholders of the former U.S. Bancorp.
(b) All of the identified shares underlie stock options granted to a broad-based employee population pursuant to the U.S. Bancorp 2001 Employee Stock Incentive plan, the Firstar Corporation 1999 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, the Firstar Corporation 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, the Star Banc Corporation 1996 Starshare Stock Incentive Plan for Employees and the Star Banc Corporation Starshare 1993 Stock Option Plan for Employees. Under the terms of the Starshare 1993 Stock Option Plan for Employees, any options outstanding under that plan as of January 28, 2003 terminated on that date, and no future options will be granted under that plan.
(c) No shares are available for the granting of future awards under the U.S. Bancorp 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan or the U.S. Bancorp 1991 Executive Stock Incentive plan. The 36,441,843 shares available under the U.S. Bancorp 2001 Stock Incentive Plan may become the subject of future awards in the form of stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, restricted stock units, performance awards or other stock-based awards, except that only 8,746,029 of these shares are available for future grants of awards other than stock options or stock appreciation rights.

     Under the U.S. Bancorp 2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (“2001 Plan”), 11,600,000 shares have been authorized for issuance pursuant to the grant of nonqualified stock options to any full-time or part-time employee actively employed by U.S. Bancorp on the grant date, other than individuals eligible to participate in any of the Company’s executive stock incentive plans or in U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc.’s annual option plan. As of December 31, 2002, options to purchase an aggregate of 8,054,500 were outstanding under the plan. All options under the plan were granted on February 27, 2001.
     As of December 31, 2002, options to purchase an aggregate of 3,250,230 shares of the Company’s common stock were outstanding under the Firstar Corporation 1999 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (“1999 Plan”). Under this plan, stock options were granted to each full-time or part-time employee actively employed by Firstar Corporation on the grant date, other than managers who participated in an executive stock incentive plan.
     As of December 31, 2002, options to purchase an aggregate of 4,377,150 shares of the Company’s common stock were outstanding under the Firstar Corporation 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (“1998 Plan”). Under this plan, stock options were granted to each full-time or part-time employee actively employed by Firstar Corporation on the grant date, other than managers who participated in an executive stock incentive plan.
     As of December 31, 2002, options to purchase an aggregate of 601,086 shares of the Company’s common stock were outstanding under the Star Banc Corporation 1996 Starshare Stock Incentive Plan for Employees (“1996 Plan”). Under the plan, stock options were granted to each employee of Star Banc Corporation, a predecessor company, other than managers who participated in an executive stock incentive plan.
     No future options will be granted under any of these plans. Under all of the plans, the exercise price of the options equals the fair market value of the underlying common stock on the grant date. All options granted under
 
112 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

the plan have a term of 10 years from the grant date and become exercisable over a period of time set forth in the plan or determined by the committee administering the plan. Options granted under the plan are nontransferable and, during the optionee’s lifetime, are exercisable only by the optionee.
     If an optionee is terminated as a result of his or her gross misconduct or offense, all options terminate immediately, whether or not vested. Under the 2001 Plan, the 1999 Plan and the 1998 Plan, in the event an optionee is terminated immediately following a change in control (as defined in the plans) of U.S. Bancorp, and the termination is due to business needs resulting from the change in control and not as a result of the optionee’s performance or conduct, all of the optionee’s outstanding options will become immediately vested and exercisable as of the date of such termination. Under the 1996 Plan, all outstanding options vest and become exercisable immediately following a change in control.
     If the outstanding shares of common stock of U.S. Bancorp are changed into or exchanged for a different number or kind of shares of stock or other securities as a result of a reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares, reclassification, merger, consolidation or similar event, the number of shares underlying outstanding options also may be adjusted. The plans may be terminated, amended or modified by the Board of Directors at any time.

Change in Certifying Accountants In response to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Audit Committee determined on November 8, 2002, to segregate the internal and external auditing functions performed for U.S. Bancorp in fiscal year 2002 by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and appointed Ernst & Young LLP to become the Company’s external auditors following the filing of the Company’s 2002 Annual Report on Form 10-K during the first quarter of 2003. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP completed the audit of the Company’s financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2002, and will continue to provide internal audit services under the direction of the Company’s internal audit team.

     No report of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP on the financial statements of U.S. Bancorp for the past two fiscal years contained an adverse opinion or a disclaimer of opinion, or was qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles. During the Company’s two most recent fiscal years, there were no disagreements with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP on any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure or auditing scope or procedure which, if not resolved to the satisfaction of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, would have caused it to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with its reports on the financial statements for such years. U.S. Bancorp believes that during the most two recent fiscal years, there were no “reportable events,” as defined in Item 304(a)(1)(v) of Regulation S-K of the Securities and Exchange Commission.
     During the Company’s two most recent fiscal years, the Company did not consult with Ernst & Young LLP on any items regarding the application of accounting principles, the type of audit opinion that might be rendered on the Company’s financial statements, or the subject matter of a disagreement or reportable event (as described in Regulation S-K Item 304(a)(2)).
     U.S. Bancorp reported the change in accountants on Form 8-K on November 14, 2002. The Form 8-K contained a letter from PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission, stating that it agreed with the statements concerning PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in such Form 8-K.

Website Access to SEC Reports U.S. Bancorp’s Internet website can be found at www.usbank.com. U.S. Bancorp makes available free of charge on its website its annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 159(d) of the Exchange Act, as well as all other reports filed by U.S. Bancorp with the SEC, as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file them with, or furnish them to, the SEC.

Exhibits

     
Financial Statements Filed Page

U.S. Bancorp and Subsidiaries Consolidated Financial Statements
  62-65
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
  66-103
Report of Independent Accountants
  61

     Schedules to the consolidated financial statements required by Regulation S-X are omitted since the required information is included in the footnotes or is not applicable.

     During the three months ended December 31, 2002, and through the date of this report, the Company filed the following Current Reports on Form 8-K:
     Form 8-K filed October 16, 2002, relating to third quarter 2002 and anticipated full year 2002 earnings.
     Form 8-K filed November 14, 2002, announcing a change in U.S. Bancorp’s certifying accountants.
 
U.S. Bancorp  113


Table of Contents

     The Company furnished to the SEC on a Form 8-K dated November 14, 2002, certifications by the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the third quarter of 2002.
     Form 8-K dated January 21, 2003, relating to the Company’s fourth quarter 2002 financial results.
     Form 8-K dated February 19, 2003, announcing the planned spin-off of U.S. Bancorp’s capital markets business unit.
     The following Exhibit Index lists the Exhibits to the Annual Report on Form 10-K.
           
  (1) 3.1     Restated Certificate of Incorporation, as amended. Filed as Exhibit 3.1 to Form 10-K  
      for the year ended December 31, 2000.  
  (1) 3.2     Restated bylaws, as amended. Filed as Exhibit 3.2 to Form 10-K
      for the year ended December 31, 2001.
 
  4.1     [Pursuant to Item 601(b)(4)(iii)(A) of Regulation S-K, copies of instruments defining the
      rights of holders of long-term debt are not filed. U.S. Bancorp agrees to furnish a copy
thereof to the Securities and Exchange Commission upon request.]
 
  (1) 4.2     Warrant Agreement, dated as of October 2, 1995, between U.S. Bancorp and
      First Chicago Trust Company of New York, as Warrant Agent and Form of Warrant.
Filed as Exhibits 4.18 and 4.19 to Registration Statement on
Form S-3, File No. 33-61667.
  (1)(2) 10.1     U.S. Bancorp 2001 Stock Incentive Plan. Filed as Exhibit 10.1
      to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (2) 10.2     Amendment No. 1 to U.S. Bancorp 2001 Stock Incentive Plan.
  (2) 10.3     U.S. Bancorp 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan
  (2) 10.4     Summary of U.S. Bancorp 1991 Executive Stock Incentive Plan.
  (2) 10.5     U.S. Bancorp 2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan.
  (2) 10.6     Firstar Corporation 1999 Employee Stock Incentive Plan.
  (2) 10.7     Firstar Corporation 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan.
  (2) 10.8     Star Banc Corporation 1996 Starshare Stock Incentive Plan for Employees.
  (1)(2) 10.9     U.S. Bancorp Executive Incentive Plan. Filed as Exhibit 10.2 to Form 10-K
      for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (1)(2) 10.10     U.S. Bancorp Executive Deferral Plan, as amended. Filed as Exhibit 10.7
      to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999.
  (1)(2) 10.11     Summary of Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan, as amended,
      of the former U.S. Bancorp. Filed as Exhibit 10.4 to Form 10-K
for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (1)(2) 10.12     1991 Performance and Equity Incentive Plan of the former U.S. Bancorp.
      Filed as Exhibit 10.13 to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997.
  (1)(2) 10.13     Form of Director Indemnification Agreement entered into with former directors of the former U.S. Bancorp.
      Filed as Exhibit 10.15 to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997.
  (1)(2) 10.14     U.S. Bancorp Independent Director Retirement and Death Benefit Plan, as amended.
      Filed as Exhibit 10.17 to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999.
  (1)(2) 10.15     U.S. Bancorp Deferred Compensation Plan for Directors, as amended. Filed as Exhibit 10.18
      to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999.
  (2) 10.16     U.S. Bancorp Non Qualified Executive Retirement Plan.
  (1)(2) 10.17     U.S. Bancorp Deferred Compensation Plan. Filed as Exhibit 10.11 to Form 10-K
      for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (2) 10.18     Amendment No. 1 to U.S. Bancorp Deferred Compensation Plan.
 
  (1)(2) 10.19     Form of Change in Control Agreement, effective November 16, 2001, between
      U.S. Bancorp and certain executive officers of U.S. Bancorp. Filed as
Exhibit 10.12 to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (1)(2) 10.20     Employment Agreement with Jerry A. Grundhofer. Filed as Exhibit 10.13
      to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2001.
  (1)(2) 10.21     Employment Agreement with John F. Grundhofer. Filed as Exhibit 10.14
      to Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2001.
 
  (2) 10.22     Employment Agreement with Edward Grzedzinski.
 
  12     Statement re: Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges.
 
  21     Subsidiaries of the Registrant.
 
  23     Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.

(1)  Exhibit has previously been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and is incorporated herein as an exhibit by reference to the prior filing.
(2)  Management contracts or compensatory plans or arrangements.

 
114 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Signatures

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on February 28, 2003, on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

U.S. Bancorp

By: Jerry A. Grundhofer
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below on February 28, 2003, by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities indicated.

Jerry A. Grundhofer
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
(principal executive officer)

David M. Moffett
Vice Chairman and Chief Financial Officer
(principal financial officer)

Terrance R. Dolan
Executive Vice President and Controller
(principal accounting officer)

Linda L. Ahlers
Director

Victoria Buyniski Gluckman
Director

Arthur D. Collins, Jr.
Director

Peter H. Coors
Director

John C. Dannemiller
Director

John F. Grundhofer
Director

Roger L. Howe
Director

Delbert W. Johnson
Director

Joel W. Johnson
Director

Jerry W. Levin
Director

Frank Lyon, Jr.
Director

Daniel F. McKeithan, Jr.
Director

David B. O’Maley
Director

O’dell M. Owens, M.D., M.P.H.
Director

Thomas E. Petry
Director

Richard G. Reiten
Director

Craig D. Schnuck
Director

Warren R. Staley
Director

Patrick T. Stokes
Director

John J. Stollenwerk
Director

 
U.S. Bancorp  115


Table of Contents

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

I, Jerry A. Grundhofer, Chief Executive Officer of U.S. Bancorp, a Delaware corporation, certify that:

(1)  I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K (this “Form 10-K”) of U.S. Bancorp;
 
(2)  Based on my knowledge, this Form 10-K does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this Form 10-K;
 
(3)  Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this Form 10-K, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this
Form 10-K;
 
(4)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-14 and 15d-14) for the registrant and have:

  (a)  designed such disclosure controls and procedures to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this Form 10-K is being prepared;
  (b)  evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures as of a date within 90 days prior to the filing date of this Form 10-K (the “Evaluation Date”); and
  (c)  presented in this Form 10-K our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures based on our evaluation as of the Evaluation Date;

(5)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons fulfilling the equivalent function):

  (a)  all significant deficiencies in the design or operation of internal controls which could adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial data and have identified for the registrant’s auditors any material weaknesses in internal controls; and
  (b)  any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal controls; and

(6)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have indicated in this Form 10-K whether there were significant changes in internal controls or in other factors that could significantly affect internal controls subsequent to the date of our most recent evaluation, including any corrective actions with regard to significant deficiencies and material weaknesses.

  /s/ JERRY A. GRUNDHOFER
 
  Jerry A. Grundhofer
  Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer

Dated: February 28, 2003

 
116 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

SECTION 302 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

I, David M. Moffett, Chief Financial Officer of U.S. Bancorp, a Delaware corporation, certify that:

(1)  I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K (this “Form 10-K”) of U.S. Bancorp;
 
(2)  Based on my knowledge, this Form 10-K does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this Form 10-K;
 
(3)  Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this Form 10-K, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this
Form 10-K;
 
(4)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-14 and 15d-14) for the registrant and have:

  (a)  designed such disclosure controls and procedures to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this Form 10-K is being prepared;
  (b)  evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures as of a date within 90 days prior to the filing date of this Form 10-K (the “Evaluation Date”); and
  (c)  presented in this Form 10-K our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures based on our evaluation as of the Evaluation Date;

(5)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons fulfilling the equivalent function):

  (a)  all significant deficiencies in the design or operation of internal controls which could adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial data and have identified for the registrant’s auditors any material weaknesses in internal controls; and
  (b)  any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal controls; and

(6)  The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have indicated in this Form 10-K whether there were significant changes in internal controls or in other factors that could significantly affect internal controls subsequent to the date of our most recent evaluation, including any corrective actions with regard to significant deficiencies and material weaknesses.

  /s/ DAVID M. MOFFETT
 
  David M. Moffett
  Chief Financial Officer

Dated: February 28, 2003

 
U.S. Bancorp  117


Table of Contents

Executive Officers
Jerry A. Grundhofer
Mr. Grundhofer, 58, has served as President and Chief Executive Officer of U.S. Bancorp and Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of U.S. Bank National Association since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. Mr. Grundhofer assumed the additional title of Chairman of U.S. Bancorp on December 30, 2002. Prior to the merger, Mr. Grundhofer was President and Chief Executive Officer of Firstar Corporation, having served as Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of Star Banc Corporation from 1993 until its merger with Firstar Corporation in 1998.

Jennie P. Carlson

Ms. Carlson, 42, has served as Executive Vice President, Human Resources since January 2002. Until that time, she served as Executive Vice President, Deputy General Counsel and Corporate Secretary of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. From 1995 until the merger, she was General Counsel and Secretary of Firstar Corporation and Star Banc Corporation, a predecessor company, as well as Senior Vice President from 1994 to 1999 and Executive Vice President from 1999 to 2001.

Andrew Cecere

Mr. Cecere, 42, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. He assumed responsibility for Private Client and Trust Services in February 2001 and U.S. Bancorp Asset Management in November 2001. Previously, he had served as Chief Financial Officer of U.S. Bancorp from May 2000 through February 2001. Additionally, he served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bank with responsibility for Commercial Services from 1999 to 2001, having been a Senior Vice President of Finance since 1992.

William L. Chenevich

Mr. Chenevich, 59, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001, when he assumed responsibility for Technology and Operations Services. Previously, he served as Vice Chairman of Technology and Operations Services of Firstar Corporation from 1999 to 2001. Prior to joining Firstar he was Group Executive Vice President at Visa International from 1994 to 1999.

Richard K. Davis

Mr. Davis, 45, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001, when he assumed responsibility for Consumer Banking and Payment Services. Previously, he had been Vice Chairman of Consumer Banking of Firstar Corporation from 1998 until 2001 and Executive Vice President, Consumer Banking of Star Banc Corporation from 1993 until its merger with Firstar Corporation in 1998.

Michael J. Doyle

Mr. Doyle, 46, has served as Executive Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of U.S. Bancorp since January 2003. Until that time, he served as Executive Vice President and Senior Credit Officer of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. From 1999 until the merger, he was Executive Vice President and Chief Approval Officer of Firstar Corporation, and had served as Senior Vice President of Firstar Corporation and Star Banc Corporation, a predecessor company, since 1994.
 
118 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

Andrew S. Duff
Mr. Duff, 45, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp, responsible for Private Advisory Services, Equity Capital Markets and Fixed Income Capital Markets, since November 2001, and until that time as Vice Chairman responsible for Wealth Management and Capital Markets since 1999. He has served as President and Chief Executive Officer of U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. since January 2000. Prior to that time, he had served as President of Piper Jaffray Inc., the broker-dealer subsidiary of Piper Jaffray Companies, since January 1996.

Edward Grzedzinski

Mr. Grzedzinski, 47, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp since July 2001. He is President and Chief Executive Officer of NOVA Information Systems, Inc., which he co-founded in 1991 and which became a wholly owned subsidiary of U.S. Bancorp in connection with the acquisition of NOVA Corporation in July 2001. Mr. Grzedzinski served as Chairman of NOVA Corporation from 1995 until July 2001.

Joseph E. Hasten

Mr. Hasten, 51, has served as Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001, when he assumed responsibility for Corporate Banking. Previously, he had been Vice Chairman of Wholesale Banking of Firstar Corporation, after joining Mercantile Bancorporation, a predecessor company, as President of its St. Louis bank and of Corporate Banking in 1995.

Lee R. Mitau

Mr. Mitau, 54, has served as Executive Vice President and General Counsel of U.S. Bancorp since 1995. Mr. Mitau also serves as Corporate Secretary. Prior to 1995 he was a partner at the law firm of Dorsey & Whitney LLP.

David M. Moffett

Mr. Moffett, 51, has served as Vice Chairman and Chief Financial Officer of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. Prior to the merger, he was Vice Chairman and Chief Financial Officer of Firstar Corporation, and had served as Chief Financial Officer of Star Banc Corporation from 1993 until its merger with Firstar Corporation in 1998.

Daniel M. Quinn

Mr. Quinn, 46, Vice Chairman of U.S. Bancorp, assumed responsibility for Commercial Banking in April 1999 and for Regional Commercial Real Estate in August 1999. Previously, he had been President of U.S. Bank in Colorado (formerly Colorado National Bank) since 1996.

Stephen E. Smith

Mr. Smith, 55, has served as Executive Vice President and Director of Human Resources of U.S. Bancorp since the merger of Firstar Corporation and U.S. Bancorp in February 2001. Prior to the merger, he was Executive Vice President and Corporate Director of Human Resources of Firstar Corporation and Star Banc Corporation, a predecessor company, since 1995, having served as Director of Human Resources of Star Banc Corporation since 1993.
 
U.S. Bancorp  119


Table of Contents

Directors

Jerry A. Grundhofer 1
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
U.S. Bancorp

Linda L. Ahlers 3,4
President
Marshall Field’s
Minneapolis, Minnesota

Victoria Buyniski Gluckman 3,4
President and Chief Executive Officer
United Medical Resources, Inc.
Cincinnati, Ohio

Arthur D. Collins, Jr. 1,2
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
Medtronic, Inc.
Minneapolis, Minnesota

Peter H. Coors 2,4
Chairman
Coors Brewing Company
Golden, Colorado

John C. Dannemiller 4,5
Retired Chairman
Applied Industrial Technologies
Cleveland, Ohio

John F. Grundhofer 1
Chairman Emeritus
U.S. Bancorp

Roger L. Howe 1,3
Chairman Emeritus
U.S. Precision Lens, Inc.
Cincinnati, Ohio

Delbert W. Johnson 1,3
Vice President
Safeguard Scientifics, Inc.
Wayne, Pennsylvania

Joel W. Johnson 4,5
Chairman, President and
Chief Executive Officer

Hormel Foods Corporation
Austin, Minnesota

Jerry W. Levin 2,5
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
American Household, Inc.
Boca Raton, Florida

Frank Lyon, Jr. 2,4
President
Wingmead Farms
North Little Rock, Arkansas

Daniel F. McKeithan, Jr. 1,5
President and Chief Executive Officer
Tamarack Petroleum Company, Inc.
Milwaukee, Wisconsin

David B. O’Maley 1,2
Chairman, President and
Chief Executive Officer

Ohio National Financial Services
Cincinnati, Ohio

O’dell M. Owens, M.D., M.P.H. 3,4
President and Chief Executive Officer
RISE Learning Solutions
Cincinnati, Ohio

Thomas E. Petry 1,2,3
Retired Chairman and
Chief Executive Officer

Eagle-Picher Industries, Inc.
Cincinnati, Ohio

Richard G. Reiten 1,3
Chairman
Northwest Natural Gas Company
Portland, Oregon

Craig D. Schnuck 3,4
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
Schnuck Markets, Inc.
St. Louis, Missouri

Warren R. Staley 1,3
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
Cargill, Inc.
Minneapolis, Minnesota

Patrick T. Stokes 1,5
President and Chief Executive Officer
Anheuser-Busch Companies, Inc.
St. Louis, Missouri

John J. Stollenwerk 2,3
President and Chief Executive Officer
Allen-Edmonds Shoe Corporation
Port Washington, Wisconsin

1.  Executive Committee
2.  Compensation Committee
3.  Audit Committee
4.  Community Outreach and Fair Lending Committee
5.  Governance Committee

 
120 U.S. Bancorp


Table of Contents

(LOGO)

Corporate Information

Executive Offices
U.S. Bancorp
800 Nicollet Mall
Minneapolis, MN 55402

Common Stock Transfer Agent and Registrar
Mellon Investor Services acts as our transfer agent and registrar, dividend paying agent and dividend reinvestment plan administrator, and maintains all shareholder records for the corporation. Inquiries related to shareholder records, stock transfers, changes of ownership, lost stock certificates, changes of address and dividend payment should be directed to the transfer agent at:

Mellon Investor Services
P.O. Box 3315
South Hackensack, NJ 07606-1915
Phone: 888-778-1311 or 201-329-8660
Internet: melloninvestor.com

For Registered or Certified Mail:
Mellon Investor Services
85 Challenger Road
Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660

Telephone representatives are available weekdays from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Central Time, and automated support is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Specific information about your account is available on Mellon’s Internet site by clicking on the “Investor ServiceDirect SM ” link.

Independent Accountants
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP served as the independent auditors for the U.S. Bancorp 2002 financial statements. Ernst & Young LLP will serve as the independent auditors for the U.S. Bancorp 2003 financial statements.

Common Stock Listing and Trading
U.S. Bancorp common stock is listed and traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol USB.

Dividends and Reinvestment Plan
U.S. Bancorp currently pays quarterly dividends on our common stock on or about the 15th day of January, April, July and October, subject to prior approval by our Board of Directors. U.S. Bancorp shareholders can choose to participate in a plan that provides automatic reinvestment of dividends and/or optional cash purchase of additional shares of U.S. Bancorp common stock. For more information, please contact our transfer agent, Mellon Investor Services. See above.

Investment Community Contacts
Howell D. McCullough   Judith T. Murphy
Senior Vice President,   Vice President,
Investor Relations   Investor Relations
howell.mccullough@usbank.com   judith.murphy@usbank.com
Phone: 612-303-0786   Phone: 612-303-0783

Financial Information
U.S. Bancorp news and financial results are available through our web site and by mail.

Web site . For information about U.S. Bancorp, including news, financial results, annual reports and other documents filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, access our home page on the Internet at usbank.com and click on Investor/Shareholder Information.

Mail . At your request, we will mail to you our quarterly earnings news releases, quarterly financial data reported on Form 10-Q and additional copies of our annual reports. Please contact:

U.S. Bancorp Investor Relations
800 Nicollet Mall
Minneapolis, MN 55402
corporaterelations@usbank.com
Phone: 612-303-0799

Media Requests
Steven W. Dale
Senior Vice President, Media Relations
steve.dale@usbank.com
Phone: 612-303-0784

Privacy
U.S. Bancorp is committed to respecting the privacy of our customers and safeguarding the financial and personal information provided to us. To learn more about the U.S. Bancorp commitment to protecting privacy, visit usbank.com and click on Privacy Pledge.

Code of Ethics
U.S. Bancorp places the highest importance on honesty and integrity. Each year, every U.S. Bancorp employee certifies compliance with the letter and spirit of our Code of Ethics and Business Conduct, the guiding ethical standards of our organization. For details about our Code of Ethics and Business Conduct, visit usbank.com and click on About U.S. Bancorp, then Ethics at U.S. Bank.

Diversity
U.S. Bancorp and our subsidiaries are committed to developing and maintaining a workplace that reflects the diversity of the communities we serve. We support a work environment where individual differences are valued and respected and where each individual who shares the fundamental values of the company has an opportunity to contribute and grow based on individual merit.

Equal Employment Opportunity/Affirmative Action
U.S. Bancorp and our subsidiaries are committed to providing Equal Employment Opportunity to all employees and applicants for employment. In keeping with this commitment, employment decisions are made based upon performance, skill and abilities, rather than race, color, religion, national origin or ancestry, gender, age, disability, veteran status, sexual orientation or any other factors protected by law. The corporation complies with municipal, state and federal fair employment laws, including regulations applying to federal contractors.

U.S. Bancorp, including each of our subsidiaries, is an Equal Opportunity Employer committed to creating a diverse workforce.

 
   
(FDIC LOGO) U.S. Bank Member FDIC
This report is printed on recycled paper containing a minimum 10 percent post-consumer waste.


Table of Contents

      BANCORP LOGO

U.S. Bancorp
800 Nicollet Mall
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402

usbank.com

 

 

Exhibit 10.2

Amendment No. 1 dated January 15, 2002,
to U.S. Bancorp 2001 Stock Incentive Plan

Section 2(h) Fair Market Value

     “Fair Market Value” shall mean, with respect to any property (including, without limitation, any Shares or other securities), the fair market value of such property determined by such methods or procedures as shall be established from time to time by the Committee.

 

Exhibit 10.3

U.S. BANCORP
1998 EXECUTIVE STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN
(ADOPTED ORIGINALLY IN DECEMBER 1996
AND AS AMENDED THROUGH DECEMBER 1998)

     1.     Name and Purpose. This Plan was adopted originally by Star Banc Corporation in December 1996, adopted and amended through December 1998 by its successor, Firstar Corporation, and assumed by U.S. Bancorp (the “Corporation”) as of February 27, 2001 and shall be known hereafter as the U.S. Bancorp 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan (the “Plan”). The purpose of the Plan is to advance the interests of the Corporation by providing material incentive for the continued services of directors, advisory directors and key employees and by attracting able individuals to serve as directors and advisory directors of the Corporation and by attracting able personnel to employment with the Corporation and its Subsidiaries. The term “Subsidiary” as used herein means a subsidiary corporation of the Corporation as the term is defined in Section 424(f) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 as amended (the “Code”).

     2.     1986 and 1991 Stock Incentive Plans. The 1986 Stock Incentive Plan (the 1986 Plan) and the 1991 Stock Incentive Plan (the 1991 Plan) adopted by the Corporation’s successor, Star Banc Corporation, are hereby amended and restated in their entirety so that their terms and conditions match exactly as the terms and conditions of this Plan, with the exception that the number of shares authorized under each such Plan and the termination date of each such Plan, shall remain unchanged. Grants of remaining authorized shares under the 1986 Plan and the 1991 Plan, and administration of awards made under those Plans, shall be governed by the terms and conditions set forth therein. In the event of a conflict between the terms and conditions of the 1986 and 1991 Plans, and those set forth herein, this document shall govern.

     3.     Administration. The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation Committee (the “Committee”) of the Board of Directors of the Corporation. The Committee shall consist of at least two members of the Board of Directors, each of whom is a “Non-Employee Director” as defined in Rule 16b-3 promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “1934 Act”), as such Rule may be amended from time to time or any successor rule thereto. To the extent that it is desired that compensation resulting from the grant of a particular Option be excluded from the deduction limitation of Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), all directors comprising the Committee granting such Option also shall be “outside directors” within the meaning of Code Section 162(m). The Committee may establish, subject to the provisions of the Plan, such rules and regulations as it deems necessary for the proper administration of the Plan, and make such determinations and take such action in connection therewith, or in relation to the Plan as it deems necessary or advisable, consistent with the Plan.

     4.     Eligibility. Directors of the Corporation and its Subsidiaries, and advisory directors of the Regional Advisory Boards established by the Corporation (collectively, “Directors”), and regular employees of the Corporation and its Subsidiaries who are key employees, including officers, whether or not Directors (collectively, “Eligible Employees”) shall be eligible to participate in the Plan.

 


 

     5.     Shares Subject to the Plan.

               (a) The shares to be issued and delivered by the Corporation under the Plan are the Corporation’s common shares, $0.01 par value, which may be either authorized but unissued shares or treasury shares.

               (b) The aggregate number of common shares of the Corporation which may be issued under the Plan (excluding those previously authorized under the 1986 and 1991 Plans) shall not exceed forty-five million (45,00,000) shares; subject, however, to the adjustment provided in Paragraph 14 in the event of stock splits, stock dividends, exchanges of shares or the like occurring after the effective date of this Plan. No option may be granted under this Plan, no Restricted Shares may be allocated under this Plan and no Performance Awards payable in common stock can be paid under this Plan which could cause such maximum limit to be exceeded.

               (c) The maximum number of shares with respect to which options may be granted to any individual during any one year period is 5,400,000.

               (d) Common shares covered by an option which is no longer exercisable with respect to such shares shall again be available for issuance in connection with other options granted under this Plan. Common shares repurchased by the Corporation as provided in Paragraph 12, in respect of which no benefits of ownership have been received, shall again be available for issuance in connection with other allocations of Restricted Shares under this Plan.

     6.     Grant of Options. The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, grant options to any or all Directors and Eligible Employees. With respect to Eligible Employees who are not subject to the provisions of Section 16 of the 1934 Act or Section 162(m) of the Code, options may be so granted by the Chief Executive Officer of the Corporation as the designee of the Committee. Directors and Employees to whom options have been granted are herein referred to as “Optionees”. Each option shall be embodied in an “Option Agreement” signed by the Optionee and the Corporation providing that the option shall be subject to the provisions of this Plan and containing such other provisions as the Committee may prescribe not inconsistent with the Plan. Option grants shall specify whether the grant is made in the Optionee’s capacity as a Director or as an Eligible Employee.

     7.     Terms and Conditions of Option. All options granted under the Plan shall contain such terms and conditions as the Committee from time to time determines, subject to the foregoing and following limitations and requirements.

               (a) Form of Option: Incentive Options and Non-Qualified Options may be granted under this Plan. An “Incentive Option” shall mean an option granted under this Plan which is designated to be an incentive stock option under the provisions of Code Section 422; and any provisions elsewhere in this Plan or in any such Incentive Option which would prevent such options from being an incentive stock option may be deleted and/or voided retroactively to the date of the granting of such option, by action of the Committee. A “Non-Qualified Option” shall mean an option granted under this Plan which is not an incentive stock option under the provisions of Code

-2-


 

Section 422, and which is exercisable even though there is outstanding an Incentive Option which was granted before the granting of the Non-Qualified Option to the same Options. Such Non-Qualified Option shall not be affected by any actions taken retroactively as provided above with respect to Incentive Options.

               (b) Option Price: The option price per share of an Incentive Option and of a Non-Qualified Option granted to a Director shall not be less than 100% of the fair market value of the Corporation’s common shares, as determined by the Committee in a manner consistent with the requirements of the Code for incentive stock options.

               (c) Period within which Options May Be Exercised: The period of each option shall be fixed by the Committee, but no Incentive Option may be exercised prior to the expiration of one year after the date of granting the Incentive Option, and no option, whether an Incentive Option or a Non-Qualified Option, may be exercised after the expiration of ten years from the date the option is granted.

               (d) Termination of Option by Reason of Termination of Employment: Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 15, or by the Committee, either by Committee action or by provision in any option or other agreement to which an Optionee is party, if an Optionee’s employment with the Corporation and its Subsidiaries terminates for any reason regardless of whether by action of the Optionee or the Corporation or Subsidiary, all options granted under this Plan to such Optionee which are not exercisable on the date of such termination of employment shall terminate immediately. Any remaining options shall terminate if not exercised before the expiration of the following periods, or at such earlier time as may be applicable under Paragraph 7(c) above:

                         (i) if the option is a Non-Qualified Option, three (3) months immediately following such termination of employment (unless the Corporation deems the termination is for gross misconduct or offense, in which case the options shall terminate immediately upon termination of employment), if such termination was not a result of early or normal retirement (as determined by the chief executive officer of the Corporation), death or if the Optionee is disabled (as defined in Code Section 422(c)(6) — hereinafter “Disability”) of the Optionee; or

                         (ii) if the option is an Incentive Option, three (3) months immediately following such termination of employment (unless the Corporation deems the termination is for gross misconduct or offense, in which case the options shall terminate immediately upon termination of employment), if such termination was not a result of early or normal retirement (as determined by the chief executive officer of the Corporation), death or Disability of the Optionee; or

                         (iii) for all options, one (1) year immediately following the date of early or normal retirement (as determined by the chief executive officer of the Corporation), death or commencement of Disability, if the Optionee was an employee of the Corporation and/or any Subsidiary at the time of his death or the commencement of Disability or for Non-Qualified Options

-3-


 

at such later time as the Committee deems appropriate.

               (e) Termination of Option by Reason of Termination of Directorship: Upon termination of status as a Director, each Optionee shall have one (1) year following the date of termination or such later time as the Committee deems appropriate to exercise options granted and fully vested under this Plan. Except as provided in Paragraphs 15 and 16 of this Plan, no unvested option will vest after the date on which Director status terminates.

               (f) Non-transferability; Exceptions: Each option and all rights thereunder shall be exercisable during the Optionee’s lifetime only by the Optionee and shall be non-assignable and non-transferable by the Optionee, except that a Non-Qualified Option may be transferred pursuant to a “domestic relations order” as defined in Section 414(p)(1)(B) of the Code. In the event of the Optionee’s death, such options and rights thereunder are transferable by his will or by the laws of descent and distribution. In the event the death of an Optionee occurs, the representative or representatives of the Optionee’s estate, or the person or persons who acquired (by bequest or inheritance) the rights to exercise his stock options granted under this Plan, may exercise any of the unexercised options in whole or in part prior to the expiration of the applicable exercise period, as specified in Paragraph 7(d) above.

               (g) More than One Option Granted to an Optionee: More than one option, and more than one form of option, may be granted to an Optionee under this Plan; provided, however, that the aggregate fair market value (determined as of the time the option is granted) of the shares for which Incentive Options are exercisable for the first time by any Optionee during any calendar year (under the Plan and all such plans of the Corporation and any parent or subsidiary corporation) shall not exceed $100,000 or any other limit established by the Code. A single option grant may include both an Incentive Option and a Non-Qualified Option.

     8.     Method of Exercise of Options. An Optionee may exercise a stock option by delivering an option exercise form to the Committee, and arranging for the satisfaction of the exercise price and any tax withholding obligation (as provided in Paragraph 20). The exercise price and tax withholding obligation may be satisfied (i) by check; (ii) by delivery of common shares of the Corporation previously owned by the Optionee, valued at fair market value when the option is exercised, subject to the limits described below, or (iii) through a broker cashless exercise procedure. Common shares of the Corporation may be delivered to satisfy the exercise price only if the shares have been held by the Optionee for at least six months before delivery, and have not been used for another option exercise during this period. Shares held by an Optionee which formerly were Restricted Shares may not be used for this purpose until six months have elapsed after the restrictions under Paragraph 10 have terminated with respect to such shares. Use of previously owned shares may be effected by actual delivery of the stock certificates to the Corporation, or by completing an affidavit available from the Committee affirming that the Optionee owns the necessary shares and that any applicable holding period has been satisfied. Upon receipt of the exercise price, the Corporation shall deliver a certificate representing the common shares acquired upon exercise to the Optionee or, in the case of a Non-Qualified Option, to such other recipient as directed by the Optionee. An Optionee wishing to use the cashless exercise procedure is required to elect to have a broker sell a sufficient number of common shares of the Corporation to satisfy the

-4-


 

option exercise price. The Optionee may elect to have the broker sell additional shares to satisfy the tax withholding amount, or sell up to the full number of shares subject to the option exercise. Following the broker’s delivery to the Corporation of the proceeds necessary to satisfy the exercise price and the tax withholding obligation, the Corporation will deliver to the broker the number of shares previously sold by the broker at the Optionee’s direction, and will deliver any remaining amount of cash or shares to the Optionee or, in the case of a Non-Qualified Option, to such other recipient as directed by the Optionee.

     9.     Allocation and Purchase of Restricted Shares.

               (a) The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, allocate common shares to any or all Directors and Eligible Employees. Common shares allocated under this Paragraph 9 of the Plan are referred to herein as “Restricted Shares.” Directors and Employees to whom Restricted Shares have been allocated are herein referred to as “Participants.” Each Participant to whom an allocation of Restricted Shares has been made shall have the right to purchase such Restricted Shares as herein provided. Each allocation shall specify whether the Participant has received such allocation in the Participant’s capacity as a Director or as an Eligible Employee.

               (b) The Committee shall advise each Participant to whom an allocation of Restricted Shares has been made in writing of the terms of the offer, including the number of shares which such person shall be entitled to purchase, the purchase price per share, and any other terms, conditions and restrictions relating thereto. The Participant shall have ten (10) days from the date of the offer to accept such offer. The Committee may, in the exercise of its discretion, extend the term of any offer. Subject to the express provisions of the Plan, the Committee shall have the power to make such offer subject to any terms and conditions it may establish and the offers made to different persons, or to the same person at different times, may be subject to terms, conditions and restrictions which differ from each other. Each allocation shall be embodied in a “Restricted Share Agreement” signed by the Participant and the Corporation providing that the Restricted Shares shall be subject to the provisions of this Plan and containing such other provisions the Committee may prescribe not inconsistent with the Plan.

               (c) The purchase price of the shares offered under this Plan shall be any lawful consideration established by the Committee in its discretion. If a Participant elects to purchase Restricted Shares, he shall pay the purchase price in full, at the principal office of the Corporation, prior to expiration of the offer. Upon payment of the purchase price, certificates representing the shares shall be issued to the Participant, which certificates shall bear an appropriate legend reflecting that such shares are subject to the restrictions contained in this Plan.

     10.     Restrictions Applicable to Restricted Shares. By purchasing the Restricted Shares allocated to a Participant under this Plan, the Participant agrees and consents to the restrictions described in this Plan for a period determined by the Committee at the time of such allocation, said period referred to herein as the “Restricted Period.” For the duration of the Restricted Period (unless the restrictions earlier lapse or are removed by the Committee), Restricted Shares issued under this Plan shall be held in escrow by Firstar Bank, N.A., and shall not be transferred,

-5-


 

delivered, assigned, sold, or disposed of in any manner, nor pledged or otherwise hypothecated. On the last day of the Restricted Period, or upon the earlier lapse or removal of restrictions, such Restricted Shares shall cease to be subject to the restrictions under this Paragraph 10 of the Plan.

     11.     Termination of Directorship or Employment During Restricted Period.

               (a) Except as provided in Paragraphs 15 and 16 of this Plan, if a Director ceases to serve as a Director, the restrictions of Paragraph 10 of this Plan shall automatically terminate as to that number of the Restricted Shares owned by the Director which is equal to the total number of such Restricted Shares multiplied by fraction, the numerator of which is the number of full months which have elapsed from the date of allocation and the denominator of which is the number of total months during the Restricted Period. The Director (or his or her estate, heirs, or legatees) shall be required to resell the remaining Restricted Shares to the Corporation at a price per share equal to the original purchase price paid by the Director for such shares, unless the Committee shall, in its discretion, waive the restrictions under Paragraph 10 as to any part or all of such remaining Restricted Shares.

               (b) If an Eligible Employee’s employment with the Corporation and its Subsidiaries terminates because of death, Disability, or retirement after attaining normal retirement age under the provisions of any retirement plan of the Corporation or any Subsidiary, the restrictions under Paragraph 10 of this Plan shall automatically terminate as to that number of the Restricted Shares owned by such Participant which is equal to the total number of such Restricted Shares multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of full months which have elapsed from the date of allocation and the denominator of which is the total number of months during the Restricted Period. The Participant (or his or her estate, heirs, or legatees) shall be required to resell the remaining Restricted Shares to the Corporation at a price per share equal to the original purchase price paid by the Participant for such shares, unless the Committee shall, in its discretion, waive the restrictions under Paragraph 10 as to any part or all of such remaining Restricted Shares.

               (c) If employment with the Corporation and its Subsidiaries terminates during the Restricted Period for any reason regardless of whether by action of the Eligible Employee or the Corporation or Subsidiary other than by reason of death, Disability, or retirement after attaining normal retirement age under the provisions of any retirement plan of the Corporation or its Subsidiaries, such Participant shall be required to resell all of the Restricted Shares to the Corporation at a price per share equal to the original purchase price paid by the Participant for such shares, unless the Committee shall, in its discretion, waive the restrictions under Paragraph 8 as to any part or all of the Restricted Shares.

     12.     Resale of Restricted Shares. In the event a Participant is required to resell Restricted Shares to the Corporation as the result of the termination of the Participant’s directorship or employment as described in Paragraph 11, the Corporation by written notice to the Participant shall specify a date not less than five nor more than ten days from the date of such notice to consummate the purchase and sale of such Restricted Shares at the principal office of the Corporation. The Participant shall deliver to the Corporation certificates representing such Restricted Shares, duly

-6-


 

endorsed and in proper form for transfer, and upon the receipt of such share certificates, the Corporation shall deliver to the Participant a check in the amount of the purchase price. If the Participant fails to deliver the share certificates to the Corporation at the time specified in such notice, the Corporation may deposit the purchase price with the Treasurer of the Corporation, and thereafter the shares shall be deemed to have been transferred to the Corporation and the Participant, despite his failure to deliver the share certificates, shall have no further rights as a stockholder of the Corporation. In such event, the Treasurer of the Corporation shall continue to hold the purchase price for such shares and shall make payment thereof, without interest, upon delivery of the share certificates to the Corporation.

     13.     Performance Awards. The Committee may, from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, provide an incentive opportunity (“Performance Awards”) to any or all Directors and Eligible Employees based on achievement by the Corporation for any calendar year or other period chosen by the Committee. Each Performance Award shall be embodied in a “Performance Award Agreement” signed by the Participant and the Corporation providing that the Performance Award shall be subject to the provisions of this Plan and containing such other provisions as the Committee may prescribe not inconsistent with the Plan. The Committee will determine, in its sole discretion, the performance targets and whether Performance Awards should be payable in the form of the Corporation’s common shares or cash. If the Eligible Employee requests, prior to the date on which payment of the Performance Award is to be made, that such payment not be made until termination of employment by such Eligible Employee, then the Committee shall consider and act upon such request promptly. If no request is made by such Eligible Employee, the payment shall be made in the time period chosen by the Committee.

     14.     Share Adjustments. In the event there is any change in the Corporation’s common shares resulting from stock splits, stock dividends, combinations or exchange of shares, or other similar capital adjustments, equitable proportionate adjustments shall be made by the Committee in (a) the number of shares available for option and issuance under this Plan, (b) the number of shares subject to options granted under this Plan, and (c) the option price of optioned shares.

     15.     Merger, Consolidation, or Sale of Assets or Change of Control. Except as otherwise provided in any Option Agreement, Restricted Share Agreement, Performance Award Agreement or other agreement approved by the Committee to which any Director or Eligible Employee is a party, in the event the Corporation shall engage in a Change of Control, as defined in this Paragraph 15, each option, Restricted Share and Performance Award held by (a) a Director; or (b) an Eligible Employee if the employment of the Eligible Employee is terminated by the Corporation immediately following such Change of Control due to business needs resulting from the Change of Control, and not for documented performance or conduct reasons, consistent with written policies of the Corporation: shall, without regard to any vesting schedule, restriction or performance target, automatically become fully exercisable or payable, as the case may be, immediately prior to such Change of Control in the case of a Director and as of the date of such termination in the case of an Eligible Employee. Options and restricted shares granted under this Plan shall continue as provided in Paragraph 17.

-7-


 

     For purposes of this Agreement, a Change of Control of the Corporation shall mean:

               (a) The acquisition by any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act” a (“Person”) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 35% or more of either (i) the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation (the “outstanding Corporation Common Stock”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities”); provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (a), the following acquisitions shall not constitute a Change of Control: (i) any acquisition directly from the Corporation, (ii) any acquisition by the Corporation, (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Corporation or any corporation controlled by the company, or (iv) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a transaction which complies with clauses (i),(ii), and (iii) of subsection (c) of this Paragraph 15; or

               (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Corporation’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or

               (c) Consummation of a reorganization, merger or consolidation or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation (a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i), all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, as the case may be, of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction owns the Corporation or all or substantially all of the Corporation’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries) in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Corporation or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 35% or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation except to the extent that such ownership existed prior to the Business Combination and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board

-8-


 

of directors of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board, providing for such Business Combination; or

               (d) Approval by the shareholders of the Corporation of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation.

     16.     Termination of Directorship with 10 years of Service. Except as otherwise provided in any Option Agreement, or other Agreement approved by the Committee to which a Director is a party, in the event a Director ceases to serve as a Director with the Corporation, after having served as a Director for at least ten (10) years, each option and/or performance award shall, without regard to any vesting schedule, restriction or performance target, automatically and immediately become fully exercisable or payable, as the case may be, and any remaining restrictions under Paragraph 10 shall cease, immediately prior to such termination.

     17.     Amendment or Termination. The Board of Directors of the Corporation may terminate this Plan at any time, and may amend the Plan at any time or from time to time, without obtaining any approval of the Corporation’s stockholders, except that the Plan may not be amended (a) to increase the aggregate number of shares issuable under the Plan for incentive stock options (but not nonqualified stock options and excepting proportionate adjustments made under Paragraph 14 to give effect to stock splits, etc); (b) to change the option price of optioned stock (excepting proportionate adjustments made under Paragraph 14); (c) to change the requirement that the option price per share of common stock covered by an incentive stock option (but not a nonqualified stock option) granted under this plan not be less than 100% of the fair market value of the Corporation’s common stock on the date such option is granted; (d) to extend the time within which options may be granted or the time without which a granted option may be exercised; or (e) to change, without the consent of the Optionee (or the Optionee’s, or the Optionee’s estate’s, legal representative), any option previously granted to him or her under the plan. If the Plan is terminated following a Change in Control as defined in Paragraph 15 of this Agreement or for any other reason, any unexercised option shall continue to be exercisable in accordance with its terms and the terms of this Plan, consistently with Section 424(a) of the Internal Revenue Code, which provides for a conversion of an existing option to an option to acquire stock in the Business Combination at the ratio of fair market price to option price immediately before the Change in Control and Restricted Shares shall continue to be subject to the terms of this Plan (subject to conversion to Restricted Shares of the Business Combination at the same ratio of fair market price to option price immediately before the Change in Control) for the duration of the Restricted Period.

     18.     Corporation Responsibility. All expenses of this Plan, including the cost of maintaining records, shall be borne by the Corporation. The Corporation shall have no responsibility or liability (other than under applicable Securities Acts) for any act or thing done or left undone with respect to the price, time, quantity, or other conditions and circumstances of the purchase of shares under the terms of the Plan, so long as the Corporation acts in good faith.

     19.     Implied Consent of Optionees and Participants. Every Optionee, by his or her acceptance of an option under this Plan, and every Participant, by his or her acceptance of an

-9-


 

allocation of Restricted Shares under this Plan, and every Director and Eligible Employee, by his or her acceptance of a Performance Award under this Plan, shall be deemed to have consented to be bound, on his or her own behalf and on behalf of his or her heirs, assigns, and legal representatives, by all of the terms and conditions of this Plan.

     20.     No Effect on Director or Employment Status. The fact that a Director or Eligible Employee has been granted an option, has been allocated Restricted Shares or awarded a Performance Award under this Plan shall not limit or otherwise qualify the right of the Corporation or any Subsidiary to terminate such person’s directorship or employment at any time.

     21.     Tax Withholding. The Corporation shall be entitled to deduct from any payment to be made by it under this Plan, or to otherwise require, prior to the issuance or delivery of any shares or the payment of any cash to a Director or Eligible Employee, payment by the Director or Eligible Employee of all applicable Federal, state, local or other taxes required by law to be withheld. The Committee may permit, in accordance with any applicable administrative rules established by it, a Director or Eligible Employee to satisfy this withholding obligation by (i) directing the withholding from any payment of common shares by the Corporation, or (ii) delivering to the Corporation, common shares having a fair market value, on the date of payment, equal to the amount of such taxes. Any fraction of a share required to satisfy such tax obligation shall be disregarded and the amount due shall be paid instead in cash by the Director or Eligible Employee.

     22.     Compliance with Securities Laws. Options granted and shares issued by the Corporation pursuant to this Plan shall be granted and issued only in full compliance with all applicable securities laws, including laws, rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and applicable state Blue Sky laws. With respect thereto, the Committee may impose such conditions on transfer, restrictions and limitations as it may deem necessary and appropriate to assure compliance with such applicable securities laws.

     23.     Duration and Termination of the Plan. The Plan became effective as of December 10, 1996, was amended effective as of December 8, 1998 and was assumed by the Corporation as of February 27, 2001. No option shall be granted and no allocation of Restricted Shares shall be made under the Plan subsequent to December 9, 2006.

U.S. Bancorp. .SIP

-10-

 

Exhibit 10.4

Summary of U.S. Bancorp 1991 Executive Stock Incentive Plan

The 1991 Executive Stock Incentive Plan (the “1991 Plan”) adopted by Star Banc Corporation, a predecessor company to U.S. Bancorp, was amended in 1998 so that the terms and conditions of that plan exactly match the terms and conditions of the U.S. Bancorp 1998 Executive Stock Incentive Plan (the “1998 Plan”), with the exception that the number of shares authorized for issuance under the 1991 Plan and the termination date of the plan (January 7, 2001) remained unchanged. The 1998 Plan is filed as Exhibit 10.3 to U.S. Bancorp’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2002. As of December 31, 2002, options to purchase 6,344,857 shares of U.S. Bancorp common stock remained outstanding under the 1991 Plan. No additional awards may be granted under the 1991 Plan.

 

Exhibit 10.5

U.S. BANCORP

2001 EMPLOYEE STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

     Section 1. Purpose U.S. Bancorp’s (the “Corporation’s”) 2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), has the following purposes: (1) to help employees of the Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively, “U.S. Bancorp”) purchase the Corporation’s stock and benefit from U.S. Bancorp’s long-term growth; (2) to create common interests between U.S. Bancorp employees and the Corporation’s shareholders; and (3) to help U.S. Bancorp attract, retain and motivate experienced, capable employees. The Plan achieves these goals by granting non-qualified stock options to U.S. Bancorp employees. Non-qualified stock options do not qualify for favorable tax treatment under Internal Revenue Code S 422.

     Section 2. Available Shares for Options. The aggregate number of shares of the Corporation’s Common Stock (“Common Stock”) which may be issued and sold pursuant to options granted under the Plan shall not exceed 11,600,000 shares, subject to adjustment or substitution as provided in Section 13 of this Plan, which shares may be either authorized but unissued or treasury shares.

     Section 3. Plan Administration. A Committee (the “Committee”) of not less than three members selected by the Corporation’s Human Resources Department and responsible to the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “Board”) shall be responsible for administering the Plan, including determining all matters relating to the exercise of options. The Committee members shall serve at the will of the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and shall serve terms of indefinite duration. The Committee shall have all powers necessary to allow it properly to carry out its duties under the Plan. The Committee shall have conferred upon it such other and further specified duties, power, authority and discretion as are contemplated by the Plan either expressly or by necessary implication. The Committee may appoint agents, who need not be members of the Committee, as it deems reasonable and necessary to effectively perform its duties, and may delegate to such agents such powers and duties, whether ministerial or discretionary, as the Committee in its sole discretion may deem expedient or appropriate. The decision of the Committee upon all matters within the scope of its authority shall be final and conclusive on all persons, except to the extent otherwise provided by law. In the alternative, any authority assigned by this Plan to the Committee may be exercised by either of the Board of Directors of the Corporation or its Compensation Committee.

     Section 4. Eligibility. Options may be granted to any Eligible Employee. An Eligible Employee is any full or part-time employee who is actively employed by U.S. Bancorp on the date of an option grant. The Committee’s shall have final authority to determine an Eligible Employee. An employee who on a grant date is on an authorized short-term leave of absence from U.S. Bancorp, including, without limitation, a leave of absence due to a short-term disability, shall be considered an Eligible Employee for purposes of this plan.

     Except as specifically determined by the Committee, an Eligible Employee shall not include (i) any person who is employed on a seasonal or temporary basis; (ii) any employee who is entitled to receive benefits under a long-term disability plan maintained by U.S. Bancorp and (iii) individuals eligible to participate in any of the Corporation’s Executive Stock Incentive Plans or in Piper Jaffray’s annual option plan.

     Section 5. Granting of Options. The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, grant options on a grant date (the “Grant Date”) to any or all employees who are Eligible Employees on the Grant Date. The Committee shall have final authority to determine the number of shares to be covered by employees’ options and the decision of the Committee shall be final.

     Section 6. Option Exercise Price. The exercise price for the shares of Common Stock covered by options issued pursuant to this Plan shall be the “fair market value” on the applicable Grant Date as determined by the Committee.

     Section 7. Term of Options. All options shall have a term of ten (10) years from the applicable Grant Date. In the event an option is not exercised prior to the expiration of ten years from the applicable Grant Date, the option shall lapse and all rights of the option holder shall terminate.

2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan

 


 

     Section 8. Vesting and Exercisability of Options. Except as provided under Section 18 or otherwise in this Plan, options shall vest and become exercisable in such manner and over such period of time as the Committee shall determine at the applicable Grant Date. From and after the applicable Grant Date and subject to subsection (b) of this Section 8, vested options shall be exercised in the manner set forth in Paragraph 9 below.

    (a) If an option holder’s employment with U.S. Bancorp shall terminate for any reason regardless of whether by action of the option holder or U.S. Bancorp other than such option holder’s early or normal retirement under the provisions of any U.S. Bancorp retirement plan or death, all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment (unless the Corporation deems the termination is for gross misconduct or offense, in which case the options shall terminate immediately upon termination of employment), and which are not exercised within thirty (30) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
    (b) If an option holder’s employment with U.S. Bancorp shall terminate by reason of such holder’s early or normal retirement or death, all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment and which are not exercised within one hundred eighty (180) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
    (c) If an option holder is placed on Disability (as defined in U.S. Bancorp’s Long Term Disability Plan), the option holder shall be deemed to be terminated from the Plan. All unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s placement on Disability and which are not exercised within one hundred eighty (180) days of such placement shall terminate.
 
    (d) Without limitation, any employee who is not on an authorized short-term leave of absence and who does not work during a calendar quarter shall be deemed to have been terminated (from the Plan) as of the end of such calendar quarter.
 
    (e) In the event an option holder’s unexercised options terminate under the provisions of subsection (a) , (b), (c) or (d) above, such holder’s options, and all rights of the holder under this Plan, shall not be restored for any reason.
 
    (f) For purposes of the Plan and notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, an option holder shall not be deemed to have terminated employment with U.S. Bancorp (i) during the period such option holder is on an authorized short term leave of absence granted by U.S. Bancorp; or (ii) as the result of such option holder’s transfer of employment between or among the Corporation and its subsidiaries or such holder’s change of position or responsibilities within U.S. Bancorp.

     Section 9. Method of Exercise. Options shall be exercised pursuant to the terms of the options and the Plan by delivering notice to the Committee or its designee and on such forms or in such manner as shall be designated by the Committee or its designee from time to time.

    (a) Options shall be exercised by either a “cash exercise method” or a “cashless exercise method”. For purposes of this Plan, a “cash exercise method” means a method in which the option holder pays the option exercise price in cash or by personal check for the shares subject to option (along with any required withholding taxes) simultaneously with the delivery of the notice of exercise described above, and such option holder is then issued the number of shares so purchased. For purposes of this Plan, a “cashless exercise method” means a method permitted under the provision of Regulation T issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and under which an option holder may direct that a portion of the shares to be issued upon exercise of the option be sold to pay the option’s exercise price, required withholding taxes, broker’s commissions and other related expenses, if any. The Committee shall have the authority to establish procedures under either method and establish procedures under additional exercise methods, including without limitation, the designation of the brokerage firm or firms through which cash and cashless exercises shall be effected.
 
    (b) Under either method, the option exercise price shall be paid in full at the time of exercise in U.S. dollars, and the Corporation shall require the option holder to pay the Corporation in U.S. dollars at the time of exercise the amount of tax required to be withheld by the Corporation under applicable foreign, federal, state and local withholding tax laws.

2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan

-2-


 

    (c) Except as provided in Section 8, an option holder must be an employee of U.S. Bancorp at the time of exercise of options.

     Section 10. Tax Effects of Plan Participation. Employees may be subject to income, capital gains, and/or other federal, state and/or local taxes as a result of exercising options issued pursuant to the Plan. Employees may wish to consult their tax advisor before exercising options issued pursuant to the Plan.

     Section 11. Nontransferability. No option shall be transferable by an option holder. During an option holder’s lifetime, the options shall be exercisable only by the option holder, provided that in the event an option holder is incapacitated and unable to exercise such option holder’s options, such option holder’s legal guardian or legal representative whom the Committee deems appropriate based on all applicable facts and circumstances may exercise such option holder’s options in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. In the event of an option holder’s death, the option holder’s options shall be transferable pursuant to the option holder’s will or by the laws of descent and distribution and may thereafter be exercised by the transferee(s) as provided in Sections 8 and 9. Any purported transfer of any option shall be null and void except as otherwise provided by this Section 11.

     Section 12. No Rights. An option holder shall have no rights or interests in any option except as set forth in the Plan. The Plan does not confer upon any person any right with respect to the continuation of employment by U.S. Bancorp, nor does it limit in any way the right of U.S. Bancorp to terminate employment at any time. An option holder shall have no rights as a shareholder of U.S. Bancorp with respect to the shares of Common Stock covered by options except to the extent that shares are issued to such option holder upon the due exercise of options.

     Section 13. Adjustment Upon Changes In Capitalization. In the event that the outstanding shares of Common Stock shall be changed into or exchanged for a different number or kind of shares of stock or other securities of U.S. Bancorp or any other corporation, whether through reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares, reclassification of the Common Stock, merger or consolidation, then the option rights (as to the number and kind of shares and the option exercise price) shall be appropriately adjusted by the Committee. Comparable adjustments shall be made for each subsequent such change or exchange of Common Stock or any stock or other securities into which such Common Stock shall have been changed or exchanged.

     Section 14. Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan. The Board of Directors of the Corporation may terminate, amend or modify the Plan any time, provided that no amendment, modification or termination of the Plan shall in any manner adversely affect an option outstanding under the Plan without the consent of the option holder, or such option holder’s successors as described in Section11.

     Section 15. Additional Conditions of the Options. If at any time the Committee shall determine that listing, registration or qualification of the Common Shares covered by an option pursuant to any securities exchange rule or under any state or federal law or the consent or the approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition of or in connection with the purchase of the shares of Common Stock under the option, the option may not be exercised unless and until such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to the Committee. Any person exercising an option shall make such representations and agreements and furnish such information as the Committee may request to assure compliance with the foregoing or any other applicable legal requirements.

     Section 16. Effective Date of the Plan. The Plan shall become effective on February 27, 2001.

     Section 17. Governing Law. This Plan shall be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of Minnesota.

     Section 18. Change of Control. In the event the Corporation shall engage in a Change of Control as defined in this Section 18, and if the employment of an Eligible Employee is terminated by the Corporation, immediately following such Change of Control due to business needs resulting from the Change of Control and not for documented performance or conduct reasons, consistent with written policies of the Corporation all such person’s outstanding options granted under the Plan shall automatically become fully vested and exercisable as of the date of such termination notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary. The surviving corporation or entity shall continue to be bound by the terms and provisions of the Plan and all unexercised options shall remain fully vested and exercisable in accordance with the provisions of the Plan subject to any adjustment described in Section 13.

2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan

-3-


 

     For purposes of this Agreement, a Change of Control of the Corporation shall mean:

    (a) The acquisition by any individual, entity or group (“Person”) within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act” of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 35% or more of either (i) the then outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Corporation (the “Outstanding Corporation Common Stock”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities”); provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (a), the following acquisitions shall not constitute a Change of Control: (i) any acquisition directly from the Corporation, (ii) any acquisition by the Corporation, (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Corporation or any corporation controlled by the Corporation, or (iv) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a transaction which complies with clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of subsection (c) of this Section 18; or
 
    (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Corporation’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or
 
    (c) Consummation of a reorganization, merger or consolidation or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation (a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i), all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors as the case may be, of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction owns the Corporation or all or substantially all of the Corporation’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries) in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Corporation or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 35% or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation except to the extent that such ownership existed prior to the Business Combination and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board, providing for such Business Combination; or
 
    (d) Approval by the shareholders of the Corporation of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation.

     This document constitutes the entire Plan.

2001 Employee Stock Incentive Plan

-4-

 

Exhibit 10.6

FIRSTAR CORPORATION

1999 EMPLOYEE STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

     Section 1. Purpose. Firstar Corporation’s (the “Corporation’s”) 1999 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), has the following purposes: (1) to help employees of the Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively, “Firstar”) purchase the Corporation’s stock and benefit from Firstar’s long-term growth; (2) to create common interests between Firstar’s employees and the Corporation’s shareholders; and (3) to help Firstar attract, retain and motivate experienced, capable employees. The Plan achieves these goals by granting non-qualified stock options to Firstar employees. Non-qualified stock options do not qualify for favorable tax treatment under IRC S 422.

     Section 2. Available Shares for Options. The aggregate number of shares of the Corporation’s Common Stock (“Common Stock”) which may be issued and sold pursuant to options granted under the Plan (the “Options”) shall not exceed 9,000,000 shares, subject to adjustment or substitution as provided in Section 13 of this Plan, which shares may be either authorized but unissued or treasury shares.

     Section 3. Plan Administration. A Committee (the “Committee”) of not less than three members selected by the Corporation’s Human Resources Department and responsible to the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors shall be responsible for administering the Plan, including determining all matters relating to the exercise of Options. The Committee members shall serve at the will of the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and shall serve terms of indefinite duration. The Committee shall have all powers necessary to allow it properly to carry out its duties under the Plan. The Committee shall have conferred upon it such other and further specified duties, power, authority and discretion as are contemplated by the Plan either expressly or by necessary implication. The Committee may appoint agents, who need not be members of the Committee, as it deems reasonable and necessary to effectively perform its duties, and may delegate to such agents such powers and duties, whether ministerial or discretionary, as the Committee in its sole discretion may deem expedient or appropriate. The decision of the Committee upon all matters within the scope of its authority shall be final and conclusive on all persons, except to the extent otherwise provided by law. In the alternative, any authority assigned by this Plan to the Committee may be exercised by either of the Board of Directors of the Corporation or its Compensation Committee.

     Section 4. Eligibility. Options may be granted to any Eligible Employee. An Eligible Employee is any full or part-time employee who is actively employed by Firstar on the date of an option grant. The Committee’s decision regarding eligibility shall be final. An employee who on a grant date is on an authorized short-term leave of absence from Firstar, including, without limitation, a leave of absence due to a short-term disability, shall be considered an Eligible Employee for purposes of this plan.

     Except, as specifically determined by the Committee, an Eligible Employee shall not include (i) any person who is employed on a seasonal or temporary basis; and (ii) any employee who is entitled to receive benefits under a long-term disability plan maintained by Firstar.

     Section 5. Granting of Options.

     The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, grant options on a grant date (the “Grant Date”) to any or all employees who are Eligible Employees on the Grant Date. The Committee shall have final authority to determine the number of shares to be covered by employees’ options and the decision of the Committee shall be final.

     Section 6. Option Exercise Price. The exercise price for the shares of Common Stock covered by options issued pursuant to this Plan shall be the “fair market value” on the applicable Grant Date as determined by the Committee.

     Section 7. Term of Options. All options shall have a term of ten (10) years from the applicable Grant Date. In the event an option is not exercised prior to the expiration of ten years from the applicable Grant Date, the option shall lapse and all rights of the option holder shall terminate.

     Section 8. Vesting and Exercisability of Options. Except as provided under Section 13 or Section 18 or otherwise in this Plan, options shall vest and become exercisable in such manner and over such period of time as the Committee shall determine at the applicable Grant Date. From and after the applicable Grant Date and subject to subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph 8, vested options shall be exercised in the manner set forth in Paragraph 9 below.

 


 

     (a) If an option holder’s employment with Firstar shall terminate for any reason regardless of whether by action of the option holder or Firstar other than such option holder’s early or normal retirement under the provisions of any Firstar retirement plan, death, or Disability (as defined in Firstar’s Long Term Disability Plan), all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment (unless the Corporation deems the termination is for gross misconduct or offense, in which case the options shall terminate immediately upon termination of employment), and which are not exercised within thirty (30) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
     (b) If an option holder’s employment with Firstar shall terminate by reason of such holder’s early or normal retirement, death, or Disability, all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment and which are not exercised within one hundred eighty (180) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
     (c) Without limitation, any employee who is not on an authorized short-term leave of absence and who does not work during a calendar quarter shall be deemed to have been terminated as of the end of such calendar quarter.
 
     (d) In the event an option holder’s unexercised options terminate under the provisions of subparagraph (a) or (b) above, such holder’s options, and all rights of the holder under this Plan, shall not be restored for any reason.
 
     (e) For purposes of the Plan and notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, an option holder shall not be deemed to have terminated employment with Firstar (i) during the period such option holder is on an authorized leave of absence granted by Firstar; or (ii) as the result of such option holder’s transfer of employment between or among the Corporation and its subsidiaries or such holder’s change of position or responsibilities within Firstar.

     Section 9. Method of Exercise. Options shall be exercised pursuant to the terms of the options and the Plan by delivering written notice to the Committee or its designee and on such forms as shall be designated by the Committee or its designee from time to time. Securities purchased pursuant to the Plan may be purchased on the open market or from the Corporation, depending on business circumstances at the time of exercise.

     (a) Options shall be exercised by either a “cash exercise method” or a “cashless exercise method”. For purposes of this Plan, a “cash exercise method” means a method in which the option holder pays the option exercise price in cash or by personal check for the shares subject to option (along with any required withholding taxes) simultaneously with the delivery of the notice of exercise described above, and such option holder is then issued the number of shares so purchased. For purposes of this Plan, a “cashless exercise method” means a method permitted under the provision of Regulation T issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and under which an option holder may direct that a portion of the shares to be issued upon exercise of the option be withheld by the Corporation as payment, to the extent permitted by law, less required withholding taxes, broker’s commissions and other related expenses, if any. The Committee shall have the authority to establish procedures under either method, including without limitation, the designation of the brokerage firm or firms through which cashless exercises shall be effected.
 
     (b) Under either method, the option exercise price shall be paid in full at the time of exercise in U.S. dollars, and the Corporation shall require the option holder to pay the Corporation in U.S. dollars at the time of exercise the amount of tax required to be withheld by the Corporation under applicable foreign, federal, state and local withholding tax laws.
 
     (c) Except as provided in Section 8, an option holder must be an employee of Firstar at the time of exercise of options.

     Section 10. Tax Effects of Plan Participation. Employees may be subject to income, capital gains, and/or other federal, state and/or local taxes as a result of exercising options issued pursuant to the Plan. Employees may wish to consult their tax advisor before exercising options issued pursuant to the plan.

     Section 11. Nontransferability. No option shall be transferable by an option holder. During an option holder’s lifetime, the options shall be exercisable only by the option holder, provided that in the event an option holder is incapacitated and unable to exercise such option holder’s options, such option holder’s legal guardian or legal representative whom the Committee deems appropriate based on all applicable facts and circumstances may exercise such option holder’s options in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. Any purported transfer of any option shall be null and void except as otherwise provided by this Section 11.

-2-


 

     Section 12. No Rights. An option holder shall have no rights or interests in any option except as set forth in the Plan. The Plan does not confer upon any person any right with respect to the continuation of employment by Firstar, nor does it limit in any way the right of Firstar to terminate employment at any time. An option holder shall have no rights as a shareholder of Firstar Corporation with respect to the shares of Common Stock covered by options except to the extent that shares are issued to such option holder upon the due exercise of options.

     Section 13. Adjustment Upon Changes In Capitalization. In the event that the outstanding shares of Common Stock shall be changed into or exchanged for a different number or kind of shares of stock or other securities of Firstar or any other corporation, whether through reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares, reclassification of the Common Stock, merger or consolidation, then the option rights (as to the number and kind of shares and the option exercise price) shall be appropriately adjusted by the Committee. Comparable adjustments shall be made for each subsequent such change or exchange of Common Stock or any stock or other securities into which such Common Stock shall have been changed or exchanged.

     Section 14. Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan. The Board of Directors of the Corporation may terminate, amend or modify the Plan any time, provided that no amendment, modification or termination of the Plan shall in any manner adversely affect an option outstanding under the Plan without the consent of the option holder, or such option holder’s successors as described in Section 8.

     Section 15. Additional Conditions of the Options. If at any time the Committee shall determine that listing, registration or qualification of the Common Shares covered by an option pursuant to any securities exchange rule or under any state or federal law or the consent or the approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition of or in connection with the purchase of Common Shares under the option, the options may not be exercised unless and until such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to the Committee. Any person exercising an option shall make such representations and agreements and furnish such information as the Committee may request to assure compliance with the foregoing or any other applicable legal requirements.

     Section 16. Effective Date of the Plan. The Plan shall become effective on December 14, 1999.

     Section 17. Governing Law. This Plan shall be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of Ohio.

     Section 18. Change of Control. In the event the Corporation shall engage in a Change of Control as defined in this Section 18, and if the employment of an Eligible Employee is terminated by the Corporation, immediately following such Change of Control due to business needs resulting from the Change of Control, and not for documented performance or conduct reasons, consistent with written policies of the Corporation, prior to the various vesting dates described in Section 8, all outstanding Options shall automatically become fully vested and exercisable as of the date of such termination notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary. The surviving corporation or entity shall continue to be bound by the terms and provisions of the Plan and all unexercised options shall remain fully vested and exercisable in accordance with the provisions of the Plan subject to any adjustment described in Section 12.

     For purposes of this Agreement, a Change of Control of the Corporation shall mean:

       (a) The acquisition by any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “exchange Act” a (“Person”) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 35% or more of either (i) the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation (the “outstanding Corporation Common Stock”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities”); provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (a), the following acquisitions shall not constitute a Change of Control: (i) any acquisition directly from the Corporation, (ii) any acquisition by the Corporation, (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Corporation or any corporation controlled by the company, or (iv) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a transaction which complies with clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of subsection (c) of this Section 18; or
 
       (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Corporation’s shareholders,

-3-


 

      was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or
 
       (c) Consummation of a reorganization, merger or consolidation or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation (a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i), all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors as the case may be, of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction owns the Corporation or all or substantially all of the Corporation’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries) in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Corporation or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 35% or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation except to the extent that such ownership existed prior to the Business Combination and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board, providing for such Business Combination; or
 
       (d) Approval by the shareholders of the Corporation of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation.

     This document constitutes the entire Plan.

-4-

 

Exhibit 10.7

FIRSTAR CORPORATION

1998 EMPLOYEE STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

     Section 1. Purpose. Firstar Corporation’s (the “Corporation’s”) 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), has the following purposes: (1) to help employees of the Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively, “Firstar”) purchase the Corporation’s stock and benefit from Firstar’s long-term growth; (2) to create common interests between Firstar’s employees and the Corporation’s shareholders; and (3) to help Firstar attract, retain and motivate experienced, capable employees. The Plan achieves these goals by granting non-qualified stock options to Firstar employees. Non-qualified stock options do not qualify for favorable tax treatment under IRC S 422.

     Section 2. Available Shares for Options. The aggregate number of shares of the Corporation’s Common Stock (“Common Stock”) which may be issued and sold pursuant to options granted under the Plan (the “Options”) shall not exceed 4,000,000 shares, subject to adjustment or substitution as provided in Section 13 of this Plan.

     Section 3. Plan Administration. A Committee (the “Committee”) of not less than three members selected by the Corporation’s Human Resources Department and responsible to the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors shall be responsible for administering the Plan, including the exercise of Options. The Committee members shall serve at the will of the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and shall serve terms of indefinite duration. The Committee shall have all powers necessary to allow it properly to carry out its duties under the Plan. The Committee shall have conferred upon it such other and further specified duties, power, authority and discretion as are contemplated by the Plan either expressly or by necessary implication. The Committee may appoint agents, who need not be members of the Committee, as it deems reasonable and necessary to effectively perform its duties, and may delegate to such agents such powers and duties, whether ministerial or discretionary, as the Committee in its sole discretion may deem expedient or appropriate. The decision of the Committee upon all matters within the scope of its authority shall be final and conclusive on all persons, except to the extent otherwise provided by law.

     Section 4. Eligibility. Options may be granted to any Eligible Employee. An Eligible Employee is any full or part-time employee who is actively employed by Firstar on December 8, 1998 (the “Original Grant Date”). The Committee’s decision regarding eligibility shall be final. An employee who on the Original Grant Date was on an authorized short-term leave of absence from Firstar, including, without limitation, a leave of absence due to a short-term disability, shall be considered an Eligible Employee for purposes of this plan.

     Except, as specifically determined by the Committee, an Eligible Employee shall not include (i) any person who on the Original Grant Date was employed on a seasonal or temporary basis; and (ii) any employee who on the Original Grant Date was entitled to receive benefits under a long-term disability plan maintained by Firstar; and (iii) any employee who on the Original Grant Date was scheduled to be displaced.

     Section 5. Granting of Options. Effective on the Original Grant Date, options shall be granted to all Eligible Employees. Each Eligible Employee who is exempt from the overtime compensation provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act (“FLSA”) will receive options for 400 shares. Each Eligible Employee who works for Firstar full time and is not exempt from overtime compensation provisions of the FLSA will receive options for 200 shares. Each Eligible Employee who works for Firstar part time and is not exempt from the overtime compensation of the FLSA will receive options for 100 shares.

     The Committee shall have final authority to determine the number of shares to be covered by employees’ options in accordance with the foregoing and the decision to the Committee shall be final.

     The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion and subject to the provisions of the Plan, grant options on a subsequent grant date (the “Subsequent Grant Date”) to any or all employees who are Eligible Employees. The “Original Grant Date” and any “Subsequent Grant Date” are referred to together in this Plan as the “Grant Date”.

     Section 6. Option Exercise Price. The exercise price for the shares of Common Stock covered by options issued pursuant to this Plan shall be the “fair market value” on the applicable Grant Date.

Page 1


 

     Section 7. Term of Options. All options shall have a term of ten (10) years from the applicable Grant Date. In the event an option is not exercised prior to the expiration of ten years from the applicable Grant Date, the option shall lapse and all rights of the option holder shall terminate.

     Section 8. Vesting and Exercisability of Options. Except as provided under Section 13 or Section 18 or otherwise in this Plan, twenty five percent (25%) of the shares covered by an Option may be exercised after the expiration of one full year after the applicable Grant Date, fifty percent (50%) of the shares covered by an Option may be exercised after the expiration of two full years after the applicable Grant Date, seventy five (75%) of the shares covered by an Option may be exercised after the expiration of three full years after the applicable Grant Date and one hundred (100%) of the shares covered by an Option may be exercised after four full years after the applicable Grant Date. From and after the applicable Grant Date and subject to subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph 8, vested options shall be exercised in the manner set forth in Paragraph 9 below.

    (a) If an option holder’s employment with Firstar shall terminate for any reason regardless of whether by action of the option holder or Firstar other than such option holder’s early or normal retirement under the provisions of any Firstar retirement plan, death, or Disability (as defined in Firstar’s Long Term Disability Plan), all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment (unless the Corporation deems the termination is for gross misconduct or offense, in which case the options shall terminate immediately upon termination of employment), and which are not exercised within thirty (30) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
    (b) If an option holder’s employment with Firstar shall terminate by reason of such holder’s early or normal retirement, death, or Disability, all unvested options will terminate immediately. All options which are fully vested and exercisable at the time of such option holder’s termination of employment and which are not exercised within one hundred eighty (180) days of such termination of employment shall terminate.
 
    (c) Without limitation, any employee who is not on an authorized short-term leave of absence and who does not work during a calendar quarter shall be deemed to have been terminated as of the end of such calendar quarter.
 
    (d) In the event an option holder’s unexercised options terminate under the provisions of subparagraph (a) or (b) above, such holder’s options, and all rights of the holder under this Plan, shall not be restored for any reason.
 
    (e) For purposes of the Plan and notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, an option holder shall not be deemed to have terminated employment with Firstar (i) during the period such option holder is on an authorized leave of absence granted by Firstar; or (ii) as the result of such option holder’s transfer of employment between or among the Corporation and its subsidiaries or such holder’s change of position or responsibilities within Firstar.

     Section 9. Method of Exercise. Options shall be exercised pursuant to the terms of the options and the Plan by delivering written notice to the Committee or its designee at the principal place of business of Firstar and on such forms as shall be designated by the Committee from time to time. Securities purchased pursuant to the Plan may be purchased on the open market or from the Corporation, depending on business circumstances at the time of exercise.

    (a) Options shall be exercised by either a “cash exercise method” or a “cashless exercise method”. For purposes of this Plan, a “cash exercise method” means a method in which the option holder pays the option exercise price in cash or by personal check for the shares subject to option (along with any required withholding taxes) simultaneously with the delivery of the notice of exercise described above, and such option holder is then issued the number of shares so purchased. For purposes of this Plan, a “cashless exercise method” means a method permitted under the provision of Regulation T issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and under which an option holder may direct that a portion of the shares to be issued upon exercise of the option be withheld by the Corporation as payment, to the extent permitted by law, less required withholding taxes, broker’s commissions and other related expenses, if any. The Committee shall have the authority to establish procedures under either method, including without limitation, the designation of the brokerage firm or firms through which cashless exercises shall be effected.
 
    (b) Under either method, the option exercise price shall be paid in full at the time of exercise in U.S. dollars, and the Corporation shall require the option holder to pay the Corporation in U.S. dollars at the time of exercise the amount of tax required to be withheld by the Corporation under applicable foreign, federal, state and local withholding tax laws.

Page 2


 

    (c) Except as provided in Section 8, an option holder must be an employee of Firstar at the time of exercise of options.

     Section 10. Tax Effects of Plan Participation. Employees may be subject to income, capital gains, and/or other federal, state and/or local taxes as a result of exercising options issued pursuant to the Plan. Employees may wish to consult their tax advisor before exercising options issued pursuant to the plan.

     Section 11. Nontransferability. No option shall be transferable by an option holder. During an option holder’s lifetime, the options shall be exercisable only by the option holder, provided that in the event an option holder is incapacitated and unable to exercise such option holder’s options, such option holder’s legal guardian or legal representative whom the Committee deems appropriate based on all applicable facts and circumstances may exercise such option holder’s options in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. Any purported transfer of any option shall be null and void except as otherwise provided by this Section 11.

     Section 12. No Rights. An option holder shall have no rights or interests in any option except as set forth in the Plan. The Plan does not confer upon any person any right with respect to the continuation of employment by Firstar, nor does it limit in any way the right of Firstar to terminate employment at any time. An option holder shall have no rights as a shareholder of Firstar Corporation with respect to the shares of Common Stock covered by options except to the extent that shares are issued to such option holder upon the due exercise of options.

     Section 13. Adjustment Upon Changes In Capitalization. In the event that the outstanding shares of Common Stock shall be changed into or exchanged for a different number or kind of shares of stock or other securities of Firstar or any other corporation, whether through reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares, reclassification of the Common Stock, merger or consolidation, then the option rights (as to the number and kind of shares and the option exercise price) shall be appropriately adjusted by the Committee. Comparable adjustments shall be made for each subsequent such change or exchange of Common Stock or any stock or other securities into which such Common Stock shall have been changed or exchanged.

     Section 14. Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan. The Board of Directors of the Corporation may terminate, amend or modify the Plan any time, provided that no amendment, modification or termination of the Plan shall in any manner adversely affect an option outstanding under the Plan without the consent of the option holder, or such option holder’s successors as described in Section 8.

     Section 15. Additional Conditions of the Options. If at any time the Committee shall determine that listing, registration or qualification of the Common Shares covered by an option pursuant to any securities exchange rule or under any state or federal law or the consent or the approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition of or in connection with the purchase of Common Shares under the option, the options may not be exercised unless and until such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to the Committee. Any person exercising an option shall make such representations and agreements and furnish such information as the Committee may request to assure compliance with the foregoing or any other applicable legal requirements.

     Section 16. Effective Date of the Plan. The Plan shall become effective the Original Grant Date.

     Section 17. Governing Law. This Plan shall be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of Ohio.

     Section 18. Merger, Consolidation, Sale of Assets or Change of Control. In the event the Corporation shall engage in a Change of Control as defined in this Section 18, and if the employment of an Eligible Employee is terminated by the Corporation, immediately following such Change of Control due to business needs resulting from the Change of Control, and not for documented performance or conduct reasons, consistent with written policies of the Corporation, prior to the various vesting dates described in Section 8, all outstanding Options shall automatically become fully vested and exercisable as of the date of such termination notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary. The surviving corporation or entity shall continue to be bound by the terms and provisions of the Plan and all unexercised options shall remain fully vested and exercisable in accordance with the provisions of the Plan subject to any adjustment described in Section 12.

     For purposes of this Agreement, a Change of Control of the Corporation shall mean:

    (a) The acquisition by any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “exchange Act” a (“Person”) of beneficial ownership

Page 3


 

    (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 35% or more of either (i) the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation (the “outstanding Corporation Common Stock”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities”); provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (a), the following acquisitions shall not constitute a Change of Control: (i) any acquisition directly from the Corporation, (ii) any acquisition by the Corporation, (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Corporation or any corporation controlled by the company, or (iv) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a transaction which complies with clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of subsection (c) of this Section 18; or
 
    (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Corporation’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or
 
    (c) Consummation of a reorganization, merger or consolidation or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation (a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i), all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors as the case may be, of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction owns the Corporation or all or substantially all of the Corporation’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries) in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Corporation or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 35% or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation except to the extent that such ownership existed prior to the Business Combination and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board, providing for such Business Combination; or
 
    (d) Approval by the shareholders of the Corporation of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation.

     This document constitutes the entire Plan.

Page 4

 

Exhibit 10.8

STAR BANC CORPORATION

1996 STARSHARE STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN FOR EMPLOYEES

     Section 1. Purpose. Star Banc Corporation’s (the “Corporation’s”) 1996 Starshare Stock Incentive Plan for Employees (the “Plan”), has the following purposes: (1) to help employees of the Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively, “Star”) purchase the Corporation’s stock and benefit from Star’s long-term growth; (2) to create common interests between Star’s employees and the Corporation’s shareholders; and (3) to help Star attract, retain and motivate experienced, capable employees. The Plan achieves these goals by granting non-qualified stock options to Star employees. Non-qualified stock options do not qualify for favorable tax treatment under IRC §422.

     Section 2. Available Shares for Options. The aggregate number of shares of the Corporation’s Common Stock (“Common Stock”) which may be issued and sold pursuant to options granted under the Plan (the “Options”) shall not exceed 1,420,875 shares, subject to adjustment or substitution as provided in Section 12 of this Plan.

     Section 3. Plan Administration. A Committee (the “Committee”) of not less than three members selected by the Corporation’s Human Resources Department and responsible to the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors shall be responsible for administering the Plan, including the exercise of Options. The Committee members shall serve at the will of the Compensation Committee of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and shall serve terms of indefinite duration. The Committee shall have all powers necessary to allow it properly to carry out its duties under the Plan. The Committee shall have conferred upon it such other and further specified duties, power, authority and discretion as are contemplated by the Plan either expressly or by necessary implication. The Committee may appoint agents, who need not be members of the Committee, as it deems reasonable and necessary to effectively perform its duties, and may delegate to such agents such powers and duties, whether ministerial or discretionary, as the Committee in its sole discretion may deem expedient or appropriate. The decision of the Committee upon all matters within the scope of its authority shall be final and conclusive on all persons, except to the extent otherwise provided by law.

     Section 4. Eligibility. Options may be granted to any Eligible Employee. An Eligible Employee is any employee who is actively employed on December 10, 1996, except that Eligible Employees do not include: (1) employees who were granted options during 1996 pursuant to the Star Banc Corporation 1991 or 1996 Stock Incentive Plan, as amended, (“Executive Option Plan”); and (2) employees who participated in the 1996 Executive Bonus Plan. An Eligible Employee shall not include any person who on December 10, 1996 is employed on a temporary basis. An employee who on December 10, 1996 is on an authorized leave of absence from Star, including, without limitation, a leave of absence due to a short-term disability, shall be considered an Eligible Employee for purposes of this Plan, assuming that employee did not participate in the Executive Option or Bonus Plans identified above. An employee who on December 10, 1996 is entitled to receive benefits under a long-term disability plan maintained by Star shall not be an Eligible Employee for purposes of this Plan. However, employees who were employed by Star in 1996 and began receiving benefits under a long-term disability plan

 


 

maintained by Star prior to December 10, 1996 will be considered Eligible Employees if they return to work at Star before December 10, 1997 and did not participate in the Executive Option and Bonus Plans identified above. The Committee’s decision regarding eligibility shall be final.

     Section 5. Granting of Options. Options shall be granted to all Eligible Employees on December 10, 1996 (the “Grant Date”). Each Eligible Employee who is exempt from the overtime compensation provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act (“FLSA”) will receive options for 525 post-split shares. Each Eligible Employee who works for Star full time and is not exempt from the overtime compensation provisions of the FLSA will receive options for 300 post-split shares, and each Eligible Employee who works for Star part time and is not exempt from the overtime compensation provisions of the FLSA will receive options for 150 post-split shares. “Post-split shares” means shares of Star Banc Corporation stock after the January 15, 1997 3 for 1 stock split.

     The Committee shall have final authority to determine the number of shares to be covered by employees’ options in accordance with the foregoing and the decision of the Committee shall be final.

     Section 6. Option Exercise Price. The exercise price for the shares of Common Stock covered by options issued pursuant to this Plan shall be the “fair market value” on the date of the grant of the options. “Fair market value” shall be the closing price at which common shares traded on the New York Stock Exchange, Inc., on December 10, 1996. ($30.33 for post-split shares.)

     Section 7. Term of Options. All options shall have a term of ten (10) years from the date of the grant of the option, that is, until December 8, 2006. In the event an option is not exercised prior to December 8, 2006, the option shall lapse and all rights of the option holder shall terminate.

     Section 8. Vesting and Exercisability of Options. Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, twenty five percent (25%) of the options awarded pursuant to this Plan may be exercised on or after December 10, 1997, with an additional twenty five percent (25%) vesting each December 10 thereafter until December 10, 2001, when all may be exercised so long as the option holder is employed by Star on each respective vesting date. Options awarded pursuant to this Plan shall not become one hundred percent (100%) vested prior to December 10, 2001, except as provided in Section 12 or Section 17 of this Plan. From and after December 10, 1997, and subject to subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph 8, all vested options shall be exercised in full in the manner set forth in Paragraph 9 below.

     (a)  If an option holder’s employment with Star shall terminate for any reason other than such option holder’s early or normal retirement under the provisions of any Star retirement plan, death, or “Disability” (as defined in Star’s Long Term Disability Plan), then any options held by such option holder at the time of such termination of employment, and all rights of the option holder under this Plan shall terminate, effective as of the date of such option holder’s termination of employment.

2


 

     (b)  If, on or after the grant date, an option holder’s employment with Star shall terminate by reason of such holder’s early or normal retirement, death, or Disability, then any options held by such option holder on the date of termination of employment shall be vested and exercisable in full in the manner described in Paragraph 9, below, at any time during the period beginning on the date of termination of employment and ending 180 days thereafter. If the options are not exercised by such option holder before the end of said period, the options, and all rights of the holder under this Plan, shall terminate effective as of the end of said period.

     (c)  In the event an option holder’s unexercised options terminate under the provisions of subparagraph (a) or (b) above, such holder’s options, and all rights of the holder under this Plan, shall not be restored for any reason.

     (d)  For purposes of the Plan and notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, an option holder shall not be deemed to have terminated employment with Star (i) during the period such option holder is on an authorized leave of absence granted by Star; or (ii) as the result of such option holder’s transfer of employment between or among the Corporation and its subsidiaries or such holder’s change of position or responsibilities within Star.

     Section 9. Method of Exercise. Options shall be exercised pursuant to the terms of the options and the Plan by delivering written notice to the Committee or its designee at the principal place of business of Star and on such forms as shall be designated by the Committee from time to time. Securities purchased pursuant to the Plan may be purchased on the open market or from the Corporation, depending on business circumstances at the time of exercise. In the event that such securities are purchased from the Corporation, the Corporation will not charge any fees, charges or commissions to complete the transactions.

     (a)  Options shall be exercised by either a “cash exercise method” or a “cashless exercise method”. For purposes of this Plan, a “cash exercise method” means a method in which the option holder pays the option exercise price in cash or by personal check for the shares subject to option (along with any required withholding taxes) simultaneously with the delivery of the notice of exercise described above, and such option holder is then issued the number of shares so purchased. For purposes of this Plan, a “cashless exercise method” means a method permitted under the provision of Regulation T issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and under which an option holder may direct that a portion of the shares to be issued upon exercise of the option be withheld by the Corporation as payment, to the extent permitted by law, less required withholding taxes, broker’s commissions and other related expenses, if any. The Committee shall have the authority to establish procedures under either method, including without limitation, the designation of the brokerage firm or firms through which cashless exercises shall be effected.

     (b)  Under either method, the option exercise price shall be paid in full at the time of exercise in U.S. dollars, and the Corporation shall require the option holder to pay the Corporation in U.S. dollars at the time of exercise the amount of tax required to be withheld by the Corporation under applicable foreign, federal, state and local withholding tax laws.

     (c)  Except as provided in Section 8 above, an option holder must be an employee of Star at the time of exercise of options.

3


 

     Section 10. Tax Effects of Plan Participation. Employees may be subject to income, capital gains, and/or other federal, state and/or local taxes as a result of exercising options issued pursuant to the Plan. Employees may wish to consult their tax advisor before exercising options issued pursuant to the plan. The Corporation’s tax liabilities will not be affected by employees exercising options pursuant to the Plan.

     Section 11. Nontransferability. No option shall be transferable by an option holder. During an option holder’s lifetime, the options shall be exercisable only by the option holder, provided that in the event an option holder is incapacitated and unable to exercise such option holder’s options, such option holder’s legal guardian or legal representative whom the Committee deems appropriate based on all applicable facts and circumstances may exercise such option holder’s options in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. Any purported transfer of any option shall be null and void except as otherwise provided by this Section 10.

     Section 12. No Rights. An option holder shall have no rights or interests in any option except as set forth in the Plan. The Plan does not confer upon any person any right with respect to the continuation of employment by Star, nor does it limit in any way the right of Star to terminate employment at any time. An option holder shall have no rights as a shareholder of Star Banc Corporation with respect to the shares of Common Stock covered by options except to the extent that shares are issued to such option holder upon the due exercise of options.

     Section 13. Adjustment Upon Changes In Capitalization. In the event that the outstanding shares of Common Stock shall be changed into or exchanged for a different number or kind of shares of stock or other securities of Star or any other corporation, whether through reorganization, recapitalization, stock dividend, stock split, combination of shares, reclassification of the Common Stock, merger or consolidation, then the option rights (as to the number and kind of shares and the option exercise price) shall be appropriately adjusted by the Committee. Comparable adjustments shall be made for each subsequent such change or exchange of Common Stock or any stock or other securities into which such Common Stock shall have been changed or exchanged.

     Section 14. Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan. The Board of Directors of the Corporation may terminate, amend or modify the Plan any time, provided that no amendment, modification or termination of the Plan shall in any manner adversely affect an option outstanding under the Plan without the consent of the option holder, or such option holder’s successors as described in Section 8.

     Section 15. Additional Conditions of the Options. If at any time the Committee shall determine that listing, registration or qualification of the Common Shares covered by an option pursuant to any securities exchange rule or under any state or federal law or the consent or the approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition of or in connection with the purchase of Common Shares under the option, the options may not be exercised unless and until such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to the Committee. Any person exercising an option shall make such representations and agreements and furnish such information as the Committee may request to assure compliance with the foregoing or any other applicable legal requirements.

4


 

     Section 16. Effective Date of the Plan. The Plan shall become effective December 10, 1996.

     Section 17. Governing Law. This Plan shall be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of Ohio.

     Section 18. Change of Control. In the event of a Change of Control of the Corporation prior to the various vesting dates described in Paragraph 8, above, all outstanding Options shall become immediately fully vested and exercisable notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary. Following a Change of Control at anytime while an option is outstanding, (i) the surviving corporation or entity shall continue to be bound by the terms and provisions of the Plan and (ii) all unexercised options shall remain fully vested and exercisable in accordance with the provisions of the Plan subject to any adjustment described in Section 12.

     For purposes of this Agreement, a Change of Control of the Corporation shall mean:

     (a)  The acquisition by any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act” a (“Person”) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 35% or more of either (i) the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation (the “outstanding Corporation Common Stock”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities”); provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (a), the following acquisitions shall not constitute a Change of Control: (i) any acquisition directly from the Corporation, (ii) any acquisition by the Corporation, (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Corporation or any corporation controlled by the company, or (iv) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a transaction which complies with clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of subsection (c) of this Section 17; or

     (b)  Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Corporation’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board; or

     (c)  Consummation of a reorganization, merger or consolidation or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation (a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i), all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the

5


 

then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, as the case may be, of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction owns the Corporation or all or substantially all of the Corporation’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries) in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination of the Outstanding Corporation Common Stock and Outstanding Corporation Voting Securities, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Corporation or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 35% or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation except to the extent that such ownership existed prior to the Business Combination and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Corporation resulting from such Business Combination were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board, providing for such Business Combination; or

     (d)  Approval by the shareholders of the Corporation of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Corporation.

     This document constitutes the entire Plan.

6

 

U.S. BANCORP
NON-QUALIFIED RETIREMENT PLAN

 


 

U.S. BANCORP
NON-QUALIFIED RETIREMENT PLAN

ARTICLE I

INTRODUCTION

1.01. History . Effective January 1, 1987, the Star Banc Corporation (formerly First National Cincinnati Corporation) adopted the Star Banc Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan. Effective January 1, 1983, Firstar Corporation (formerly First Wisconsin Corporation) adopted the Firstar Corporation Pension Benefits Equalization Plan. Firstar Corporation also maintained the Firstar Corporation Supplemental Retirement Plan for Key Executives and had liabilities for deferred compensation under certain other plans and arrangements established by entities acquired by Firstar Corporation prior to November 20, 1998.

Effective November 20, 1998, Star Banc Corporation and Firstar Corporation merged through an exchange of shares to form a new Firstar Corporation. On September 20, 1999, Firstar Corporation acquired substantially all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of Mercantile Bancorporation Inc., which maintained the Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Retirement Plan.

Effective January 1, 1984, First Bank System, Inc. established the First Bank System, Inc. Excess Benefit Plan. Effective January 1, 1992, First Bank System, Inc. established the First Bank System, Inc. Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan. In 1997 First Bank System changed its name to U.S. Bancorp and thereafter, the plans, as amended and restated, became known as the U.S. Bancorp Defined Benefit Excess Plan and the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan, respectively.

Firstar Corporation merged into U.S. Bancorp effective February 27, 2001.

On October 16, 2001, the Board of Directors of U.S. Bancorp ratified and approved actions taken on July 17, 2001 by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors freezing certain benefits under the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan, modifying the Company’s various excess benefits to reflect changes in the underlying tax-qualified pension plans, and consolidating the Company’s various nonqualified deferred compensation plans into a single combined plan.

1.02. Plan Mergers . This Plan reflects the following plan mergers, effective as of the date specified, except where an earlier or later effective date is specified in this plan document (or an amendment hereto):

 


 

  (a)   effective as of January 1, 1999, the Star Banc Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan merged with the Firstar Corporation Pension Benefits Equalization Plan, the Firstar Corporation Supplemental Retirement Plan for Key Executives and certain other plans and arrangements to form a single, combined plan known as the “Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan”;
 
  (b)   effective as of January 1, 2000, the Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Retirement Plan merged into the Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan; and
 
  (c)   effective as of January 1, 2002, the U.S. Bancorp Defined Benefit Excess Plan and the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan merged into the Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan which, effective on and after January 1, 2002, shall be known as the “U.S. Bancorp Non-Qualified Retirement Plan” (“Plan”).

1.03. Purpose . The primary purpose of this Plan is to restore retirement benefit payments to those eligible employees whose retirement benefits under the Qualified Plan will be reduced by the limitations imposed by Sections 401(a)(17) and 415 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), and the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”), or by reason of their election to defer receipt of income that would otherwise have been taken into account for purposes of calculating benefits under the Qualified Plan. The Plan is also intended to provide supplemental retirement benefits to selected executives, and to provide for payment of certain other liabilities for deferred compensation as described in the Appendices hereto.

1.04. Separate Excess Benefit Plan . Notwithstanding anything in this plan document to the contrary, the separable part of this Plan that is maintained solely for the purpose of providing benefits in excess of the limitations on contributions and benefits imposed by Section 415 of the Code to persons who do not qualify as members of “a select group of management or highly compensated employees” (as that phrase is used in ERISA) shall be treated as a separate plan that is an excess benefit plan. Such separate excess benefit plan shall be referred to as the “U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan”.

1.05. Relation to Qualified Plan . This Plan is completely separate from any tax-qualified retirement plan.

1.06. No Effect on Former Employees . Except as may be otherwise required by law or hereinafter specifically provided, this amended and restated plan document shall not affect the rights of or benefits payable to, or with respect to:

-2-


 

  (a)   any person who was a participant in a plan that merged to form the Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan, or any predecessor to such a plan, who died or otherwise terminated employment before January 1, 1999;
 
  (b)   any person who was a participant in the Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Retirement Plan or any predecessor to that plan, who died or otherwise terminated employment before January 1, 2000; and
 
  (c)   any person who was a participant in the U.S. Bancorp Defined Benefit Excess Plan or the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan, or any predecessor to those plans, who died or otherwise terminated employment before January 1, 2002.

Except as may be otherwise required by law or hereinafter specifically provided, the rights of, and benefits payable to, or with respect to, all such persons shall be governed by the applicable plan documents as in effect at the time of such person’s death or other termination of employment. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 1.06 to the contrary, this amended and restated plan document shall affect any Other Benefit payable to or with respect to any person named in Appendix A.

-3-


 

ARTICLE II

DEFINITIONS

As used herein with initial capital letters, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings specified below unless a different meaning is clearly required by the context:

2.01. Actuarially Equal — equal value determined as follows:

  (a)   Lump Sum Payment of Excess Benefits (Optional or Small Amounts). For purposes of calculating the single lump sum cash payment that is Actuarially Equal to a Participant’s Excess Benefit under Article IV:

  (i)   any portion of the Participant’s Excess Benefit that is attributable to a “Cash Balance Benefit” or a “Mercantile Benefit” (as those terms are defined in the Qualified Plan) shall be converted from its normal form to its single lump sum value in the same manner as the applicable “Cash Balance Benefit” or “Mercantile Benefit” would be so converted; and
 
  (ii)   the remainder of the Participant’s Excess Benefit shall be converted from its normal form to its single lump sum value using the interest and mortality assumptions for the calculation of pension liabilities in the Company’s audited financial statements that were last adopted by the Committee prior to the date on which the single lump sum cash payment calculation under this Plan is performed, subject, however, to any applicable conditions and limitations that may be established by the Committee.

  (b)   Excess Benefits Paid in Forms That Are Available for the Participant’s Entire Qualified Plan Benefit. For purposes of calculating the amount of payments in any optional payment form permitted under Section 4.03, other than a single lump sum, that is available for payment of a Participant’s entire Qualified Plan benefit, the Excess Benefit shall be converted from its normal form to the optional form elected by the Participant using the same interest and mortality assumptions as would be used under the Qualified Plan to perform the same conversion.
 
  (c)   Excess Benefits Paid in Forms That Are Not Available for the Participant’s Entire Qualified Plan Benefit. For purposes of calculating the amount of payments in any optional payment form permitted under Section 4.03, other than a single lump sum, that is not available for payment of a Participant’s entire Qualified Plan benefit, the Participant’s

-4-


 

      entire Excess Benefit shall be converted from its normal form to the optional form elected by the Participant using the same interest and mortality assumptions as would be used by the Qualified Plan to perform the same conversion with respect to the portion of the Qualified Plan benefit that could be paid in the same form as the form in which the Excess Benefit will be paid.
 
  (d)   Supplemental and Death Benefits. Unless otherwise provided in the applicable Appendix B, for purposes of calculating the amount of any Supplemental Benefit or Death Benefit:

  (i)   any conversion to a single lump sum cash payment of equal value, other than a conversion that uses the assumptions described in item (iv) below, shall be calculated using the interest and mortality assumptions for the calculation of pension liabilities in the Company’s audited financial statements that were last adopted by the Committee prior to the date on which the single lump sum cash payment calculation under this Plan is performed, subject, however, to any applicable conditions and limitations that may be established by the Committee;
 
  (ii)   any conversion from the normal form of payment to an optional annuity form other than an estate protection annuity form shall be calculated using the applicable factors (the “Firstar Factors”) set forth in Appendix A of the Firstar Employees’ Pension Plan (as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 1999), and any conversion from the normal form of payment to an optional estate protection annuity form shall be calculated by first using the Firstar Factors to determine the applicable annuity without estate protection, and by then applying the applicable estate protection factor described in Section 2 of Appendix C of the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan;
 
  (iii)   any conversion of an “offsetting benefit” required by Section 6.02(b), 6.03(b), or 6.04(b) shall be calculated using an interest rate per annum of 8% and the UP-1984 Table of Mortality set back two years unless the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, concludes that it has complete and accurate information regarding the actuarial equivalent factors that would be applied for a similar conversion by the plan providing the “offsetting benefit”, in which case such applicable factors shall be used; and

-5-


 

  (iv)   for purposes of calculating (1) the present value of the applicable benefit at the time of the Participant’s death (but not the present value of any survivor annuity payable to the Participant’s surviving spouse, which shall be calculated using the assumptions described in item (i) above) under Section 8.01(c), (2) any single lump sum payment due under an estate protection annuity form of payment, and (3) for any other conversion not described in items (i) through (iii) above, an interest rate per annum of 8% and the UP-1984 Table of Mortality, set back two years.

2.02. Beneficiary — a person, persons, trust or estate designated by a Participant (or automatically by operation of law or this plan statement) to receive a benefit payable under this Plan upon the death of the Participant. A person, trust or estate so designated shall not be considered a Beneficiary until the death of the Participant.

2.03. Board of Directors — the Board of Directors of the Company.

2.04. Chief Executive Officer — the Chief Executive Officer of the Company.

2.05. Code — the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

2.05A. Company — from the Effective Date through February 26, 2001, Firstar Corporation; on and after February 27, 2001, U.S. Bancorp.

2.06. Committee — the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the Company.

2.07. Death Benefit — any benefit paid to a Beneficiary upon the death of a Participant as provided under the terms of Article VIII of this Plan.

2.08. Disability or Disabled — a physical or mental condition arising after the Effective Date which prevents the Participant from performing the responsibilities of his or her position, as determined by the Committee.

2.09 Disability Benefit — a benefit payable under Article VII of this Plan to a Disabled Participant.

2.10. Disability Commencement Date — except as otherwise determined by the Committee, the first day of the month coincident with or immediately following the date a Disabled Participant becomes eligible to receive long-term disability income loss benefits under a plan of the Employer providing such benefits.

2.11. Disabled Participant — a Participant who is Disabled and who is eligible for Supplemental Retirement Benefits under Article VI.

-6-


 

2.12. Early Retirement Date — the first day of the month after the day the Participant terminates employment with the Employer after attaining age 55 and completing at least five (5) years of Service; provided that, with respect to Supplemental and Other Benefits, a different Early Retirement Date may be prescribed in the relevant Appendix.

2.13. Effective Date — the date as of which the plans identified in Section 1.02(a) combined to form the Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified Retirement Plan, i.e., January 1, 1999.

2.14. Employee — a person who is employed by the Employer.

2.15. Employer — the Company, its successors and assigns, any of its subsidiary or affiliated organizations authorized to participate in the Qualified Plan with respect to their Employees, and any organization or person into which the Employer may be merged or consolidated or to which all or substantially all of its assets may be transferred which is required to assume the obligations of the Employer under Section 13.06 hereof. In addition to the foregoing entities, the Committee may, to the extent it deems necessary or appropriate to provide benefits under this Plan other than Excess Benefits, designate any other subsidiary or affiliate of the Company as included in the term “Employer.”

2.16. Excess Benefit — a benefit payable to a Participant under Article IV of this Plan.

2.17. Final Average Monthly Earnings or FAE — the average of a Participant’s Monthly Earnings for the five consecutive calendar years of service with the Employer during which the Participant’s Monthly Earnings were the highest. For purposes of any Supplemental Benefit provided under Article VI, Final Average Monthly Earnings shall be subject to any modifications set forth in the applicable Appendix B.

2.18. Monthly Earnings — one-twelfth of the Participant’s annual base pay for employment with the Employer during any calendar year commencing after 1985, modified as follows:

  (a)   Included Items . In determining a Participant’s Monthly Earnings there shall be included: (i) vacation and holiday pay, (ii) short-term disability pay, (iii) elective contributions made by the Employer on behalf of the Participant that are no includible in gross income under sections 125, 132(f), 402(e)(3), 402(h), 403(b), 414(h)(2) and 457 of the Code, including elective contributions authorized by the Participant under a cafeteria plan, a qualified transportation fringe benefit, or any qualified cash or deferred arrangement under section 401(k) of the Code; (iv) amounts earned during the calendar year that are deferred under a nonqualified deferred compensation arrangement (regardless of when paid), (v) amounts earned for the calendar year under an executive annual incentive plan (regardless of when paid), (vi) the portion of any retention bonus attributable to the calendar year, determined by prorating the bonus

-7-


 

      over the period for which it is earned), (vii) ordinary income attributable to the calendar year due to the vesting of restricted stock in the calendar year or a later calendar, determined by prorating the income recognized at vesting over the calendar years in the vesting period.
 
  (b)   Excluded Items . In determining a Participant’s Monthly Earnings, the following shall be excluded: (i) expense reimbursements, car allowances and other similar payments, including foreign service allowances, station allowances, foreign tax equalization payments and other similar payments, (ii) welfare and fringe benefits (cash and noncash), including tuition reimbursements, payments under an adoption assistance program, disability payments (but not continued payment of a Participant’s normal compensation under the Employer’s policy regarding short-term absences for medical reasons), payments for vacation or sick leave accrued but not taken, financial planning assistance and final payments on account of termination of employment ( e.g. , severance payments), (iii) all noncash remuneration including income imputed from below-market loans and from insurance coverages and premiums, (iv) employee discounts and other similar amounts, (v) moving expenses (and any tax or “gross-up” payments on account of moving expense reimbursements or payments), (vi) nonqualified deferred compensation (when received), (vii) the value of all stock options and stock appreciation rights (whether or not exercised) and other similar amounts, (viii) change in control payments, (ix) commissions, and (x) bonus payments other than those correctly classified as and attributable to an executive annual incentive plan.
 
  (c)   Code Limitations Not Applicable . Monthly Earnings shall be determined without regard to any limitation imposed by the Code.

2.19. Normal Retirement Date — the first day of the month coincident with or immediately following the Participant’s sixty-fifth (65th) birthday.

2.20. Other Benefit — a benefit payable under Article V of this Plan to a Participant who is identified in Appendix A as a person who is entitled to an Other Benefit.

2.21. Participant — any Employee of the Employer who becomes eligible to receive a benefit under this Plan as provided in Article III hereof. A person who becomes a Participant shall remain a Participant until he or she dies, ceases to be eligible for a benefit under this Plan, is paid the entire benefit to which he or she is entitled, or is removed from the Plan as provided in Section 3.03, whichever happens first.

2.22. Plan — this nonqualified deferred compensation plan which from January 1, 1999 through December 31, 2001 shall be referred to as the “Firstar Corporation Non-Qualified

-8-


 

Retirement Plan”, and which after December 31, 2001 shall be referred to as the “U.S. Bancorp Non-Qualified Retirement Plan”.

2.23. Plan Administrator — the Committee.

2.24. Qualified Plan — for the period commencing on January 1, 1999 and ending on December 31, 2001, inclusive, the Firstar Employees’ Pension Plan, as amended; on and after January 1, 2002, but only with respect to Participants who are employed by the Employer on or after January 1, 2002, the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan.

2.25. Retired Participant — any Participant in the Plan whose employment with the Employer has terminated and who is eligible to receive or is then receiving Excess Benefits, Supplemental Benefits or Other Benefits.

2.26. Service — the Participant’s “Vesting Service” determined as provided under the Qualified Plan. The Committee, in its sole discretion, may credit any or all of a Participant’s prior service with another employer toward Service under this Plan.

2.27. Supplemental Benefit — a benefit payable under Article VI of this Plan to a Participant who has been specifically designated by the Committee to receive a Supplemental Benefit. The special terms and conditions of the Supplemental Benefit payable to each Participant who has been designated to receive a Supplemental Benefit shall be set forth in the applicable Appendix B.

-9-


 

ARTICLE III

PARTICIPATION IN THE PLAN

3.01. Eligibility .

  (a)   Excess Benefit . Eligibility for Excess Benefits under Article IV shall be determined as follows:

  (1)   Prior to 2002. For the period commencing January 1, 1999 and ending December 31, 2001 any participant in the Qualified Plan in salary grade 50 or above (or the corresponding pay grade of any revised salary administration program) shall be eligible for Excess Benefits if the benefits to which such Employee is entitled from the Qualified Plan are less than they would have been if (a) the limitations imposed by Code Section 401(a)(17) and/or 415 did not apply, or (b) the Employee had not elected to defer receipt of a portion of his pay under a deferred compensation plan or program of the Employer. The Committee may extend eligibility for Excess Benefits to other Employees on an individual basis.
 
  (2)   After 2001. After December 31, 2001, a person shall be eligible for Excess Benefits if such person (i) is a participant in the Qualified Plan, (ii) would be entitled to a benefit greater than zero if Article IV applied, and (iii) is a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees as that expression is used in ERISA. A person who satisfies (i) and (ii) of the preceding sentence, but fails requirement (iii), shall be eligible only for Excess Benefits based solely on the limitations imposed by Section 415 of the Code and only from the separable part of this Plan referred to as the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan.
 
  (3)   Former Employees. Notwithstanding anything in (1) or (2) above to the contrary, no former employee described in Section 1.06 of this Plan shall be entitled to any Excess Benefit under this Plan. (This does not preclude such a former employee from receiving an Other Benefit to which the former employee may be entitled under the terms of Article V and Appendix A, even if that Other Benefit is substantially similar to Excess Benefits that would have been provided under Article IV.)

  (b)   Supplemental Benefits . Eligibility for Supplemental Benefits under Article VI shall be determined by the Committee in its sole discretion.

-10-


 

      The Committee shall also determine, in its sole discretion, the amount of any Participant’s Supplemental Benefit or the formula by which the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit shall be determined. Such amount or formula, and any other special terms and conditions applicable to a Participant in the Supplemental Benefits portion of the Plan shall be set forth in the applicable Appendix B to this Plan.
 
  (c)   Other Benefits . Article V lists and describes certain other plans, contracts or arrangements that have been incorporated into this Plan that provide deferred compensation to specified Participants. Eligibility and benefits under those plans, contracts and arrangements are determined in accordance with the documents that governed them prior to their incorporation into this Plan, subject to any modifications set forth in the applicable Appendix A.
 
  (d)   Disability and Death Benefits . Only persons who are eligible to receive Supplemental Benefits shall be eligible for the Disability Benefits under Article VII of this Plan. Only the Beneficiaries of Participants who are Participants in either the Supplemental Benefits or the Excess Benefits portion of this Plan shall be entitled to Death Benefits under Article VIII of this Plan.
 
  (e)   U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan . Participants in the separable part of this Plan referred to as the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan are those Participants in this Plan whose Excess Benefits, as determined under Section 4.01, derive solely from the limitations in the Qualified Plan imposed under Section 415 of the Code (i.e., such Participants’ Excess Benefits are determined under Section 4.01 without the application of Sections 4.01(a)(2),(3) and(4)).

3.02. Specific Exclusions . Notwithstanding anything apparently to the contrary in this Plan or in any written communication, summary, resolution or document or oral communication, no individual shall be a Participant in this Plan, develop benefits under this Plan or be entitled to receive benefits under this Plan (either for the individual or the individual’s survivors) other than benefits under the separable part of this Plan known as the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan, unless such individual is a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees (as that expression is used in ERISA). If a court of competent jurisdiction, any representative of the U.S. Department of Labor or any other governmental, regulatory or similar body makes any direct or indirect, formal or informal, determination that an individual is not a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees (as that expression is used in ERISA), such individual shall not be (and shall not have ever been) a Participant in this Plan (other than the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan portion of this Plan) at any time. If any person not so defined has been erroneously treated as a Participant in this Plan, upon

-11-


 

discovery of such error such person’s erroneous participation shall immediately terminate ab initio and upon demand such person shall be obligated to reimburse the Employer for all amounts erroneously paid to him or her. Further, if and to the extent any court of competent jurisdiction or representative of the U.S. Department of Labor or any other governmental, regulatory or similar body makes any direct or indirect, formal or informal, determination that the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan is not a excess benefit plan, as defined in Section 3(36) of ERISA, then Participants in such Plan who are not members of a select group of management or highly compensated employees (as that expression is used in ERISA) shall not be (and shall not have ever been) Participants in that portion of this Plan at any time. If any such person participating in the U.S. Bancorp 415 Excess Benefit Plan has been erroneously treated as a Participant in this Plan, upon discovery of such error such person’ s erroneous participation shall immediately terminate ab initio and upon demand such person shall be obligated to reimburse the Employer for all amounts erroneously paid to him or her.

3.03. Forfeiture .

  (a)   Due to Competition . The Committee retains the right to remove a Participant, a Retired Participant, or a Disabled Participant from participation in the Plan, with the consequences described in subsection (b) below, if at any time prior to the third anniversary of the date on which the person’s employment with the Employer last terminated such person (i) engages in any manner in any business which is competitive with the Employer; or (ii) becomes financially interested in any such competitive business or service, directly or indirectly, as an individual, partner, shareholder, director, officer, principal, agent, employee, consultant or in any other relationship or capacity; provided that the purchase of a publicly traded security in such business or service shall not in itself be cause for removing a Participant, a Retired Participant, or a Disabled Participant from participation in the Plan.
 
  (b)   Effect of Removal . In the event a person is removed from the Plan pursuant to Section 3.03(a) above, the Employer shall thereafter have no liability to the person or to the person’s Beneficiary for benefits under this Plan, other than (i) Excess Benefits and (ii) any Other Benefits which by their terms cannot be subject to forfeiture.

-12-


 

ARTICLE IV

EXCESS RETIREMENT BENEFITS

4.01. Calculation of Excess Benefit . A Participant’s Excess Benefit shall be the excess of:

  (a)   The benefit that would have been payable to the Participant under the Qualified Plan, commencing on the date as of which Excess Benefits are to commence under this Plan, if such Qualified Plan benefit were paid in the same form as the Excess Benefit and were determined:

  (1)   without regard to the benefit limitations under Section 415 of the Code;
 
  (2)   without regard to the compensation limitation of section 401(a)(17) of the Code;
 
  (3)   taking into account compensation voluntarily deferred under a nonqualified deferred compensation plan maintained by the Employer; and
 
  (4)   taking into account any actual or deemed service or compensation, or any other modification of the Participant’s benefits under this Plan that is explicitly required by any employment, severance or other agreement applicable to the Participant, or by any severance or other plan or program applicable to the Participant, over

  (b)   the benefit that would have been payable to the Participant commencing on the same date and in the same form from the Qualified Plan.

The Excess Benefit described in this Section 4.01 shall be calculated as if the Participant had not received any previous distributions from the Qualified Plan and as if the Qualified Plan permitted distribution of the Participant’s entire Qualified Plan benefit to commence on the date as of which Excess Benefits are to commence. If distribution of the Excess Benefit is to commence in the form of an annuity prior to the date on which a portion of the Participant’s Qualified Plan benefit would first become payable under the Qualified Plan, and as a result the Qualified Plan does not provide an early reduction factor for payment of that portion of the Qualified Plan benefit at that time, the benefit payable at the earliest date as of which that portion would first become payable under the Qualified Plan will be further reduced to an amount payable on the date as of which payment of the Excess Benefit will commence using the general interest and mortality assumptions under the Qualified Plan. (If distribution of the Excess Benefit is to be made in the form of a single lump sum cash payment, the benefit shall be calculated using the factors described in Section 2.01(a) of this Plan.)

-13-


 

4.02. Normal Form of Benefit – When Payable . The normal form of payment for Excess Benefits payable to a Participant who is not married on the date as of which Excess Benefits commence will be a level annuity payable monthly to and for the lifetime of the Participant. The normal form of payment for Excess Benefits payable to a Participant who is married on the date as of which Excess Benefits commence will be a 50% joint and survivor annuity with the Participant’s spouse on the commencement date as the joint annuitant. The first payment to the Participant shall be due within thirty days after the earliest date on which the Participant could begin receiving any benefits under the Qualified Plan on account of retirement or other termination of employment. The last payment to the Participant shall be due on the first day of the calendar month in which the Participant’s death occurs. The first payment to a Participant’s spouse as joint annuitant shall be due on the first day of the calendar month next following the calendar month in which the Participant’s death occurs. The last payment to the Participant’s spouse as joint annuitant shall be due on the first day of the calendar month in which the spouse’s death occurs. Except for the limited purpose of determining the date when benefit payments under this Plan normally commence, the rules governing the payment of benefits under the Qualified Plan, and any elections and optional forms of payment in effect under the Qualified Plan, shall be given no effect under this Plan in determining the time or form in which Excess Benefits are paid.

4.03. Optional Payment Forms . In lieu of payment in the normal form described in Section 4.02 above, a Participant may elect to receive his or her Excess Benefit in any of the following forms:

  (a)   single life annuity;
 
  (b)   single life annuity with 5, 10, 15 or 20 year period certain;
 
  (c)   50%, 75% or 100% joint and survivor annuity;
 
  (d)   Estate Protection Survivor Annuity (as described in Section 6.1(d) of the Qualified Plan); or
 
  (e)   Estate Protection Single Life Annuity (as described in Section 6.1(e) of the Qualified Plan).

Payment in any of the foregoing forms shall be in an amount that is Actuarially Equal to the Excess Benefit payable in the applicable normal form described in Section 4.02.

In addition to the foregoing forms, a Participant may also elect to receive his or her Excess Benefit in the form of a single lump sum cash payment; provided, however, that the single lump sum cash payment option shall not be available for distributions to any Participant whose termination of employment occurs prior to 2003 and whose Qualified Plan benefit prior to 2002 did not offer the option to receive payment of the entire Qualified Plan benefit in a single lump

-14-


 

sum cash payment without regard to the amount payable. Payment in the form of a single lump sum cash payment shall be in an amount that is Actuarially Equal to the Excess Benefit payable in the applicable normal form described in Section 4.02; provided, however, that such Excess Benefit shall be calculated using the benefits that would have been payable to the Participant commencing on the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date (or at the time of the Participant’s actual termination of employment, if later), rather than using the benefits that would have been payable to the Participant commencing on the date as of which Excess Benefits are to commence under this Plan.

An election of an optional payment form permitted under this Section 4.03 must be made by the Participant in writing on an election form approved by the Committee and filed with the Committee or its designated agent for this purpose not less than twelve full months prior to the Participant’s termination of employment. A Participant may change his or her election at any time by filing another election form; provided, however, that any election form that does not satisfy the advance filing requirements of the preceding sentence shall be void and shall be disregarded. An election form shall not be considered filed until the completed form is actually received by the Committee or its designated agent.

No optional payment election form filed by a married participant shall be effective unless it includes the written consent of the Participant’s spouse and such spousal consent has been witnessed by a notary public. The consent of the spouse shall be irrevocable. If the last optional payment election form filed by a Participant at least twelve full months prior to the Participant’s termination of employment required spousal consent because the Participant was married at the time that election was filed and either (a) the Participant is married to a different spouse on the date the Participant’s benefit commences, or (b) the consenting spouse was named as a joint annuitant on such last optional payment election form and the consenting spouse dies before the date the Participant’s benefit commences, then (in either case) the Participant’s optional payment election shall be void and have no effect, and the Participant’s benefit shall be paid in the applicable normal form described in Section 4.02.

If a Participant elects an optional payment election form that requires the designation of a joint annuitant and such joint annuitant dies prior to the date the Participant’s benefit commences, the Participant’s optional payment election shall be void and the Participant’s benefit shall be paid in the applicable normal form described in Section 4.02.

Payment in any optional form pursuant to this Section 4.03 shall commence at the same time as the Participant’s benefit would have commenced if it had been paid in the normal form of payment unless the Participant specifies a later date in his or her last effective optional payment election form.

Notwithstanding anything in this Article IV to the contrary: (i) if as of December 31, 2001, the Participant was a participant in the U.S. Bancorp Defined Benefit Excess Plan and the Participant’s termination of employment occurs prior to April 1, 2004, the normal form of

-15-


 

payment for that Participant shall be a single lump sum cash payment and not the otherwise applicable normal form described in Section 4.02; (ii) if a Participant’s termination of employment occurs prior to April 1, 2004, the Committee in its sole discretion may require that the Participant accept payment in a form of payment described in this Section 4.03 and selected by the Committee, regardless of any optional payment election filed by the Participant; (iii) the Committee in its sole discretion may elect to pay any or all of the amounts due to a joint annuitant in the form of an Actuarially Equal single lump sum; and (iv) if the Company reasonably concludes that the size of a single lump sum cash payment would (taking into account any other payments due to the Participant) adversely affect the financial statements of the Company, then the Participant shall be paid instead in a series of at least three and not more than five annual installments, commencing on the date as of which the single lump sum cash payment would have been paid. The first such installment shall be in an amount equal to the maximum amount that the Company reasonably concludes can be paid without triggering the adverse financial statement impact, and each remaining installment shall equal the sum of (x) interest from the date of the most recent previous payment on the unpaid balance of the original amount that would (but for the adverse financial statement impact) have been paid in a single lump sum, and (y) the maximum amount of such unpaid balance that can be paid without causing the combined amount (x plus y) to trigger an adverse financial statement impact; provided, however, that if the foregoing method of calculating the installment amounts would result in the payment of only two installments, the amounts payable in each installment shall be adjusted so that payment of the entire amount that would otherwise have been paid in a single lump sum payment, plus interest thereon, shall be made in three substantially equal installments; and provided further, that if a fifth installment is required, it shall include the entire unpaid balance, without regard to whether that amount will trigger an adverse financial statement impact. In the event installment payments are made pursuant to the preceding sentence, the rate at which interest shall accrue on the unpaid balance of the original amount that would (but for the adverse financial statement impact) have been paid in a single lump sum shall be the same as the rate of interest used to determine the original Actuarially Equal single lump sum payment amount.

4.04 Small Amounts . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article IV, if on the date of his or her termination of employment the Actuarially Equal single lump value of a Participant’s Excess Benefit is $10,000.00 or less, the Participant’s Excess Benefit shall be paid in a single lump sum payment as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant’s termination of employment.

4.05. Accelerated Distributions .

  (a)   Following Termination of Employment . Subject to the penalties under Section 4.05(b), at any time following the Participant’s termination of employment, the Participant or the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant may elect to receive an accelerated distribution of his accrued Excess Benefit (or if benefit payments have already commenced, the Actuarially Equal single lump sum present value of the Participant’s remaining

-16-


 

      benefit) in a lump sum payment, payable sixty (60) days after giving written notice of the election on a form furnished by and filed with the Committee.
 
  (b)   Forfeitures . Any lump sum payment under this Section 4.05 shall be reduced by a penalty equal to ten percent (10%) of such payment which shall be forfeited to the Company. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Plan, no penalty shall apply if the Committee determines, based on the advice of counsel or a final determination by the Internal Revenue Service or any court of competent jurisdiction, that by reason of the elective provisions of this Section 4.05, any Participant or Beneficiary has recognized or will recognize gross income for federal income tax purposes under this Plan in advance of payment to him or her of the Excess Benefit. The Committee may also reduce or eliminate the penalty if it determines that this action will not cause any Participant or Beneficiary to recognize gross income for federal income tax purposes under this Plan in advance of payment of the Excess Benefit.

4.06. Termination for Cause . Notwithstanding any provision in this Plan to the contrary, no Excess Benefit under this Article IV shall be paid to an employee who is terminated for cause. For purposes of this provision, “for cause” shall be defined as conviction for the commission of a felony or removal from office by order of the Comptroller of the Currency, Federal Reserve Board, or other appropriate agency.

-17-


 

ARTICLE V

OTHER BENEFITS

5.01. Firstar Corporation Supplemental Retirement Plan . The Firstar Corporation Supplemental Retirement Plan as in effect immediately prior to November 20, 1998, the terms of which are incorporated herein by this reference, shall be continued as a part of this Plan solely for the benefit of the individuals identified in Appendix A-1, and any other participants in such Plan who terminated employment before November 20, 1999 with a right to receive benefits under such Plan.

5.02. U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan . The U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan as in effect on September 30, 2001, the terms of which are incorporated herein by this reference, shall be continued as a part of this Plan solely for the benefit of the individuals identified in Appendices A-2 and A-3, and any other participants in such Plan who terminated employment before September 30, 2001, with a right to receive benefits under such Plan. With respect to any individual identified in Appendix A-2, the amount of the individual’s benefit shall be the benefit the individual had earned as of September 30, 2001, but calculated taking into account service through December 31, 2001, as explained more fully in Appendix A-2. With respect to the individuals listed in Appendix A-3, the amount of the individual’s benefit shall be determined at the time of the individual’s termination of employment. For purposes of calculating the benefit payable to one of the individuals listed on Appendix A-3, the special rules set forth in Appendix A-3 shall apply, notwithstanding anything in the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan document as in effect on September 30, 2001 to the contrary.

5.03. Firstar Benefits Equalization Plan . The Firstar Corporation Pension Benefits Equalization Plan as in effect immediately prior to November 20, 1998, the terms of which are incorporated herein by this reference, shall be continued as a part of this Plan solely for the benefit of the individuals identified in Appendix A-4, and any other participants in such Plan who terminated employment before November 20, 1999 with a right to receive benefits under such Plan.

5.04. Other Plans . The benefits earned by participants in several non-qualified supplemental retirement plans or arrangements established and maintained by Firstar Corporation, Star Bank Corp., Mercantile Bancorp, and/or entities acquired by such organizations have been consolidated under this Plan. The following is a list of such plans and arrangements, the terms of which are incorporated by reference into this Plan, subject to any modifications set forth in the applicable Appendix A. The participants who are or may become entitled to benefits under each such plan or arrangement are listed in the indicated Appendix:

-18-


 

     
Name of Plan   Appendix

 
Firstar Financial Corp. Supplemental Retirement Plan   A-5
     
American Bank Supplemental Pension and Executive Deferred Corporation Plans   A-6
     
Banks of Iowa Supplemental Pension Agreements   A-7
     
Firstar Special Supplemental Pension Agreements   A-8
     
Minnesota Special Supplemental Pension Arrangements   A-9
     
Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Retirement Plan   A-10

5.05. Form of Payment . Other Benefits which are payable pursuant to the various plans, contracts or arrangements set forth in this Article V and related Appendices shall be paid in the form or forms of payment authorized under such plan, contract or arrangement.

-19-


 

ARTICLE VI

SUPPLEMENTAL RETIREMENT BENEFITS

6.01. Participation Limited . This Article VI and the benefits hereunder apply only to those individuals who have been designated by the Committee as eligible to receive a Supplemental Benefit and who are listed on an Appendix B.

6.02. Normal Retirement . A Participant who is entitled to a Supplemental Benefit whose employment terminates on or after his or her Normal Retirement Date shall be entitled to a benefit commencing at the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date (or, if later, upon the Participant’s termination of employment) in the normal form of payment specified in the applicable Appendix B, in an amount calculated as follows:

  (a)   First, the formula specified in the applicable Appendix B shall be applied to the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings and Credited Service, subject to any special terms, conditions or modifications (other than the reductions referred to in (b) below) specified in the applicable Appendix B.
 
  (b)   Second, the amount determined in (a) above shall be reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit”): (i) any benefits paid or payable to the Participant from the Qualified Plan, (ii) any Excess Benefits paid or payable to the Participant from this Plan, (iii) any other retirement benefits (qualified or not) paid or payable by the Employer (or any related employer) to the Participant, and (iv) if so specified in the applicable Appendix B, any benefits paid or payable to the Participant under a plan of, or pursuant to an agreement with, a prior employer of the Participant. If payment of an offsetting benefit has not commenced on or before the date as of which the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit payable (but not actually commenced) on the date the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences or, if the offsetting benefit could not by its terms actually be commenced until a later date, the offsetting benefit payable on the earliest permitted commencement date. If payment of an offsetting benefit has commenced on or before the date as of which the Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit that actually commenced.

-20-


 

The excess, if any, of (a) over (b) shall be the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit at or after Normal Retirement (or at termination of employment, if later).

6.03. Early Retirement . A Participant who is entitled to a Supplemental Benefit whose employment terminates on or after his or her Early Retirement Date and before his or her Normal Retirement Date shall be entitled to a benefit commencing as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant’s termination of employment in the normal form of payment specified in the applicable Appendix B, in an amount calculated as follows:

  (a)   First, the amount determined in Section 6.01(a) is calculated based on the formula and reductions (including reductions for early commencement) specified in the applicable Appendix B.
 
  (b)   Second, the amount determined in (a) above shall be reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit”): (i) any benefits paid or payable to the Participant from the Qualified Plan, (ii) any Excess Benefits paid or payable from this Plan to the Participant, (iii) any other retirement benefits (qualified or not) paid or payable by the Employer (or any related employer) to the Participant, and (iv) if so specified in Appendix B, any benefits paid or payable under a plan of a prior employer of the Participant. If payment of an offsetting benefit has not commenced on or before the date as of which the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit payable (but not actually commenced) on the date the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences or, if the offsetting benefit could not by its terms actually be commenced until a later date, the offsetting benefit payable on the earliest permitted commencement date. If payment of an offsetting benefit has commenced on or before the date as of which the Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit that actually commenced.

The excess, if any, of (a) over (b) shall be the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit at Early Retirement.

6.04. Vested Termination Benefits . A Participant who is entitled to a Supplemental Benefit whose employment terminates before his or her Early Retirement Date shall be entitled to a benefit, commencing as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant’s termination of employment, in the normal form of payment specified in the applicable Appendix B, in an amount calculated as follows:

-21-


 

  (a)   First, the amount determined in Section 6.01(a) is calculated based on the formula and reductions (including reductions for early commencement and reductions attributable to vesting restrictions) specified in the applicable Appendix B.
 
  (b)   Second, the amount determined in (a) above shall be reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit”): (i) any benefits paid or payable to the Participant from the Qualified Plan, (ii) any Excess Benefits paid or payable from this Plan to the Participant, (iii) any other retirement benefits (qualified or not) paid or payable by the Employer (or any related employer) to the Participant, and (iv) if so specified in Appendix A, any benefits paid or payable under a plan of a prior employer of the Participant. If payment of an offsetting benefit has not commenced on or before the date as of which the Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit payable (but not actually commenced) on the date the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences or, if the offsetting benefit could not by its terms actually be commenced until a later date, the offsetting benefit payable on the earliest permitted commencement date. If payment of an offsetting benefit has commenced on or before the date as of which the Supplemental Benefit commences, the reduction attributable to such offsetting benefit shall be Actuarially Equal to the offsetting benefit that actually commenced.

The excess, if any, of (a) over (b) shall be the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit at Vested Termination.

6.05. Documentation and Assumptions . Notwithstanding anything in this Article VI to the contrary:

  (a)   No Supplemental Benefits shall be due to a Participant until after the Participant has provided the Plan Administrator with such documentation of any benefits payable under the plan of a prior employer of the Participant as the Plan Administrator reasonably determines is necessary to calculate any applicable offset based on such benefits.
 
  (b)   The Plan Administrator may use whatever assumptions or methods it deems reasonable to determine the appropriate prior employer benefit or other benefit that is to be offset against the benefits provided by this Plan and to convert that offsetting benefit to a comparable form when calculating a Participant’s Supplemental Benefit.

-22-


 

  (c)   A Participant who is Disabled and who is entitled to receive a Disability Benefit as provided in Article VII shall not be treated for purposes of this Article VI as having terminated his or her employment prior to the date on which such Disability Benefit ceases. If a Participant’s Disability Benefit ceases due to the Participant’s death or attainment of his or her Normal Retirement Date, the Participant shall be treated as having terminated employment on the date the Disability Benefit ends. If the Participant’s Disability Benefit ceases because the Participant ceased to be Disabled, the Participant shall be treated as terminated on the date the Disability Benefit ends only if the Participant fails to return immediately to active employment.
 
  (d)   As applied to any particular Participant, the terms and conditions of this Article VI, including the foregoing subsections of this Section 6.05, shall be subject to any modifications or limitations set forth in the Appendix B for that Participant.

6.06. Optional Payment Forms . In lieu of payment in the normal form described in the applicable Appendix B, a Participant may elect to receive his or her Supplemental Benefit in any of the optional forms of payment described in Section 4.03 of this Plan (subject to any limitations on their availability set forth therein), by making an election in writing on an election form approved by the Committee and filed with the Committee or its designated agent for this purpose not less than twelve full months prior to the Participant’s termination of employment. A Participant may change his or her election at any time by filing another election form; provided, however, that any election form that does not satisfy the advance filing requirements of the preceding sentence shall be void and shall be disregarded. An election form shall not be considered filed until the completed form is actually received by the Committee or its designated agent.

No optional payment election form filed by a married participant shall be effective unless it includes the written consent of the Participant’s spouse and such spousal consent has been witnessed by a notary public. The consent of the spouse shall be irrevocable. If the last optional payment election form filed by a Participant at least twelve full months prior to the Participant’s termination of employment required spousal consent because the Participant was married at the time that election was filed and either (a) the Participant is married to a different spouse on the date the Participant’s benefit commences, or (b) the consenting spouse was named as a joint annuitant on such last optional payment election form and the consenting spouse dies before the date the Participant’s benefit commences, then (in either case) the Participant’s optional payment election shall be void and have no effect, and the Participant’s benefit shall be paid in the normal form described in the applicable Appendix B.

If a Participant elects an optional payment election form that requires the designation of a joint annuitant and such joint annuitant dies prior to the date the Participant’s benefit commences, the Participant’s optional payment election shall be void and the Participant’s benefit shall be paid in the normal form described in the applicable Appendix B.

-23-


 

Payment in any available optional form other than a single lump sum cash payment shall be in an amount that is Actuarially Equal to the Supplemental Benefit payable in the normal form of payment specified in the applicable Appendix B. Payment in the form of a single lump sum cash payment shall be in an amount that is Actuarially Equal to the Supplemental Benefit payable in the normal form of payment specified in the applicable Appendix B; provided, however, that if the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit was subject to an early retirement reduction, such reduced Supplemental Benefit shall be converted to a benefit as of the earliest time the Participant could have received an unreduced benefit by dividing the reduced Supplemental Benefit by the early reduction factor specified in the applicable Appendix B, and the Participant’s single lump sum shall be calculated based on that converted amount.

Payment in any optional form timely elected pursuant to this Section 6.06 shall commence at the same time as the Participant’s benefit would have commenced if it had been paid in the normal form of payment unless the Participant specifies a later date in his or her last effective optional payment election form.

Election of an optional form of payment with respect to a Participant’s Supplemental Benefit shall not affect payment of the Participant’s Excess Benefit, and election of an optional form of payment with respect to a Participant’s Excess Benefit shall not affect payment of the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit, unless the Participant’s last effective optional payment election form expressly provides that it applies to both benefits.

Notwithstanding anything in this Article VI to the contrary: (i) if a Participant’s termination of employment occurs prior to April 1, 2004, the Committee in its sole discretion may require that the Participant accept payment of his or her Supplemental Benefit in the form of a single lump sum cash payment, regardless of any optional payment election filed by the Participant and regardless of the manner in which any other benefits under this Plan are actually paid to the Participant; (ii) the Committee in its sole discretion may elect to pay any or all of the amounts due to a joint annuitant in the form of an Actuarially Equal single lump sum; and (iii) if the Committee exercises its discretion to require payment in the form of a single lump sum cash payment or a Participant timely elects a single lump sum cash payment, and the Company reasonably concludes that the size of such payment would (taking into account any other payments due to the Participant) adversely affect the financial statements of the Company, then the Participant shall be paid instead in a series of at least three and not more than five annual installments, commencing on the date as of which the single lump sum cash payment would have been paid. The first such installment shall be in an amount equal to the maximum amount that the Company reasonably concludes can be paid without triggering the adverse financial statement impact, and each remaining installment shall equal the sum of (x) interest from the date of the most recent previous payment on the unpaid balance of the original amount that would (but for the adverse financial statement impact) have been paid in a single lump sum, and (y) the

-24-


 

maximum amount of such unpaid balance that can be paid without causing the combined amount (x plus y) to trigger an adverse financial statement impact; provided, however, that if the foregoing method of calculating the installment amounts would result in the payment of only two installments, the amounts payable in each installment shall be adjusted so that payment of the entire amount that would otherwise have been paid in a single lump sum payment, plus interest thereon, shall be made in three substantially equal installments; and provided further, that if a fifth installment is required, it shall include the entire unpaid balance, without regard to whether that amount will trigger an adverse financial statement impact. In the event installment payments are made pursuant to the preceding sentence, the rate at which interest shall accrue on the unpaid balance of the original amount that would (but for the adverse financial statement impact) have been paid in a single lump sum shall be the same as the rate of interest used to determine the original Actuarially Equal single lump sum payment amount.

-25-


 

ARTICLE VII

DISABILITY BENEFITS

7.01. Eligibility, Commencement . Except as otherwise provided in the applicable Appendix B, if a Participant who is eligible for Supplemental Benefits or named in Appendix A-3 is determined to be Disabled prior to termination of his or her employment with the Employer, the Participant shall be entitled to receive a Disability Benefit as provided in this Article VII. Such benefit shall commence on the Participant’s Disability Commencement Date and shall continue until the Participant dies, ceases to have a Disability, or attains his or her Normal Retirement Date, whichever happens first.

7.02. Amount . The benefit payable to the Disabled Participant shall be sixty percent (60%) of his or her current Monthly Earnings reduced by any benefits payable to such Participant from the Qualified Plan, Social Security, Workers’ Compensation or any long-term disability plan sponsored by the Employer. The amount by which each monthly Disability Benefit payment shall be reduced on account of benefits payable under the Qualified Plan shall be the monthly benefit payable under the Qualified Plan to the Disabled Participant in the single life annuity form, whether or not the Participant’s Qualified Plan benefit is actually paid in that form.

7.03. Cessation of Disability . If the Disabled Participant ceases to be Disabled prior to his Normal Retirement Date, Disability Benefits hereunder shall cease. Upon subsequent termination of the Disabled Participant’s employment with the Employer, the Disabled Participant’s Excess and Supplemental Benefits shall be calculated including service credit for the period of Disability.

7.04. Normal Retirement . If the Disabled Participant’s Disability continues until his or her Normal Retirement Date, Disability benefits hereunder shall cease and the Participant shall be treated as having terminated employment with the Employer at his or her Normal Retirement Date. The Disabled Participant’s Excess or Supplemental Benefit at Normal Retirement Date shall be calculated by assuming that his or her “Benefit Service” (as defined in the Qualified Plan) and Monthly Earnings continued uninterrupted from his or her date of Disability until his or her Normal Retirement Date.

-26-


 

ARTICLE VIII

DEATH BENEFITS

8.01. Death Before Benefit Commencement .

  (a)   Supplemental Benefits. Upon the death of a Participant who died:

  (i)   before his or her Supplemental Benefit commenced; and
 
  (ii)   after becoming at least partially vested in his or her Supplemental Benefit;

      the vested portion of the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit shall be payable to the Participant’s Beneficiary. If, at the time of the Participant’s death, payment of the Supplemental Benefit to the Participant was due or pending but had not yet actually commenced, such payment shall not be made and commencement of the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit shall be deemed to have not occurred. The survivor benefit payable under this subsection (a) shall be subject to any modifications specified in the applicable Appendix B.
 
  (b)   Excess Benefits. Upon the death of a Participant who died before his or her Excess Benefit commenced, the Participant’s Excess Benefit shall be payable to the Participant’s Beneficiary. If, at the time of the Participant’s death, payment of the Excess Benefit to the Participant was due or pending but had not yet actually commenced, such payment shall not be made and commencement of the Participant’s Excess Benefit shall be deemed to have not occurred.
 
  (c)   Form of Benefit – When Payable. Any survivor benefit payable under subsections (a) or (b) of this Section 8.01 to a Beneficiary other than the Participant’s surviving spouse shall be paid in the form of a single lump sum payment equal to that portion of the Actuarially Equal present value of the applicable benefit (Supplemental Benefit or Excess Benefit) at the time of the Participant’s death that the Beneficiary was designated to receive.
 
      Any survivor benefit payable under subsections (a) or (b) of Section 8.01 to the Participant’s surviving spouse shall consist of the monthly survivor annuity described in subsection (d) of this Section 8.01 and a single lump sum payment equal to the excess of the Actuarially Equal present value of the portion of the survivor benefit at the time of the Participant’s death that

-27-


 

      the surviving spouse was designated to receive over the Actuarially Equal present value at the time of the Participant’s death of the monthly survivor annuity described in subsection (d) of this Section 8.01; provided, however, that if the portion of the survivor benefit at the time of the Participant’s death that is payable to the Participant’s surviving spouse is less than the value of the monthly survivor annuity described in subsection (d) below, then the surviving spouse shall be paid only a pro rata portion of such monthly survivor annuity and no lump sum payment.
 
      Any lump sum payment due to a Beneficiary shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible after the Employer is provided evidence of the Participant’s death. The first payment of a surviving spouse’s monthly survivor annuity described in subsection (d) below shall be due after the death of the Participant on the first day of the calendar month after the calendar month in which the Participant died or, if later, the first day of the calendar month in which the Participant’s “Earliest Commencement Date” (as defined in the Qualified Plan) would have occurred. The last payment of this survivor annuity shall be due to the surviving spouse on the first day of the calendar month in which the surviving spouse dies. No election, rescission or other action taken by the Participant under Section 4.03 (optional forms for Excess Benefits) or Section 6.06 (optional forms for Supplemental Benefits) shall be effective to modify the survivor annuity hereinbefore described. No other death benefit shall be payable with respect to a Participant who dies under these circumstances.
 
  (d)   Spouse’s Annuity. The amount of any survivor benefit payable under subsections (a) or (b) of this Section 8.01 that is payable in the form of a monthly survivor annuity to the Participant’s spouse shall be:

  (i)   if the Participant dies before the Participant’s termination of employment, the amount which the surviving spouse would have received if the Participant had a termination of employment on the date of the Participant’s death for reasons other than the Participant’s death and had lived to and had elected to commence receipt of the applicable benefit (Supplemental Benefit or Excess Benefit) on the date as of which the surviving spouse’s monthly survivor annuity is to commence and had elected to receive the applicable benefit in the form of a 50% joint and survivor annuity form and had immediately died, or
 
  (ii)   if the Participant dies after the Participant’s termination of employment, the amount which the surviving spouse would have received if the Participant had lived to and had elected to

-28-


 

      commence receipt of the applicable benefit (Supplemental Benefit or Excess Benefit) on the date as of which the surviving spouse’s monthly survivor annuity is to commence and had elected to receive the applicable benefit in the 50% joint and survivor annuity form and had immediately died.

8.02. Death After Benefit Commencement . Any benefits payable after the death of a Retired Participant with respect to a benefit under this Plan that commenced to a Retired Participant prior to the Retired Participant’s death shall be determined in accordance with the payment form applicable to that benefit.

8.03. Designation of Beneficiaries .

  (a)   Right to Designate . Each Participant may designate, upon forms to be furnished by and filed with the Committee, one or more primary Beneficiaries or alternate Beneficiaries to receive all or a specified part of the Death Benefits payable pursuant to this Article VIII. Such Participant may change or revoke any such designation from time to time before commencement of payment of the Participant’s Excess and/or Supplemental Benefits without notice to or consent from any Beneficiary or spouse. No such designation, change or revocation shall be effective unless executed by the Participant eligible to make such designation and received by the Committee during such employee’s lifetime and prior to commencement of payment of such benefits. Any payments made by the Employer to a Beneficiary in good faith and under the terms of the Plan shall fully discharge the Employer from all further obligations with respect to such payments.
 
  (b)   Spousal Consent. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a designation will not be valid for the purpose of paying benefits from the Plan to anyone other than a surviving spouse of the Participant (if there is a surviving spouse) unless that surviving spouse consents in writing to the designation of another person as Beneficiary. To be valid, the consent of such spouse must be in writing, must acknowledge the effect of the designation of the Beneficiary and must be witnessed by a notary public. The consent of the spouse must be to the designation of a specific named Beneficiary which may not be changed without further spousal consent, or alternatively, the consent of the spouse must expressly permit the Participant to make and to change the designation of Beneficiaries without any requirement of further spousal consent. The consent of the surviving spouse need not be given at the time the designation is made. The consent of the surviving spouse need not be given before the death of the Participant. The consent of the surviving spouse will be required, however, before benefits can be paid to

-29-


 

      any person other than the surviving spouse. The consent of a spouse shall be irrevocable and shall be effective only with respect to that spouse.
 
  (c)   Failure of Designation . If a Participant:

  (1)   fails to designate a Beneficiary,
 
  (2)   designates a Beneficiary and thereafter revokes such designation without naming another Beneficiary, or
 
  (3)   designates one or more Beneficiaries and all such Beneficiaries so designated fail to survive the Participant,

      such Participant’s Death Benefit, or the part thereof as to which such Participant’s designation fails, as the case may be, shall be payable to the Participant’s surviving spouse, or if there is no surviving spouse, then in equal proportions to the Participant’s surviving children. If the Participant is not survived by a spouse or children, then such amounts will be paid to the estate of the Participant.
 
  (d)   Definitions . When used herein and, unless the Participant has otherwise specified in the Participant’s Beneficiary designation, when used in a Beneficiary designation, “issue” means all persons who are lineal descendants of the person whose issue are referred to, including legally adopted descendants and their descendants but not including illegitimate descendants and their descendants; “child” means an issue of the first generation; “per stirpes” means in equal shares among living children of the person whose issue are referred to and the issue (taken collectively) of each deceased child of such person, with such issue taking by right of representation of such deceased child; and “survive” and “surviving” mean living after the death of the Participant.
 
  (e)   Special Rules . Unless the Participant has otherwise specified in the Participant’s Beneficiary designation, the following rules shall apply:

  (1)   If there is not sufficient evidence that a Beneficiary was living at the time of the death of the Participant, it shall be deemed that the Beneficiary was not living at the time of the death of the Participant.
 
  (2)   The automatic Beneficiaries specified in Section 8.03(c) and the Beneficiaries designated by the Participant shall become fixed at the time of the Participant’s death so that, if a Beneficiary survives the Participant but dies before the receipt of all payments due such

-30-


 

      Beneficiary hereunder, such remaining payments shall be payable to the representative of such Beneficiary’s estate.
 
  (3)   If the Participant designates as a Beneficiary the person who is the Participant’s spouse on the date of the designation, either by name or by relationship, or both, the dissolution, annulment or other legal termination of the marriage between the Participant and such person shall automatically revoke such designation. (The foregoing shall not prevent the Participant from designating a former spouse as a Beneficiary on a form executed by the Participant and received by the Committee after the date of the legal termination of the marriage between the Participant and such former spouse, and during the Participant’s lifetime.)
 
  (4)   Any designation of a nonspouse Beneficiary by name that is accompanied by a description of relationship to the Participant shall be given effect without regard to whether the relationship to the Participant exists either then or at the Participant’s death.
 
  (5)   Any designation of a Beneficiary only by statement of relationship to the Participant shall be effective only to designate the person or persons standing in such relationship to the Participant at the Participant’s death.

      A Beneficiary designation is permanently void if it either is executed or is filed by a Participant who, at the time of such execution or filing, is then a minor under the law of the state of the Participant’s legal residence. The Committee shall be the sole judge of the content, interpretation and validity of a purported Beneficiary designation.
 
  (f)   No Spousal Rights . Except as otherwise provided in subsection (b) above, no spouse or surviving spouse of a Participant and no person designated to be a Beneficiary shall have any rights or interest in the benefits accumulated under this Plan.

-31-


 

ARTICLE IX

FUNDING

9.01. Unfunded Plan . The obligation of the Employer to make payments under this Plan constitutes only the unsecured promise of the Employer to make such payments. The Participant shall have no lien, prior claim or other security interest in any property of the Employer. If a fund is established by the Employer in connection with this Plan, the property therein shall remain subject to the claims of the creditors of the Employer in the event the Employer is (i) is unable to pay its debts as they become due, or (ii) is subject to a pending proceeding as a debtor under the United States Bankruptcy Code, or (iii) is determined to be insolvent by a federal or state regulatory agency having the authority to do so.

9.02. Insurance . If the Employer elects to finance all or a portion of its costs in connection with this Plan through the purchase of life insurance or other investments, the Participant agrees, as a condition of participation in this Plan, to cooperate with the Employer in the purchase of such investment to any extent reasonably required by the Employer and relinquishes any claim he or she may have either for himself or herself or any beneficiary to the proceeds of any such investment or any other rights or interests in such investment. If a Participant fails or refuses to cooperate, then notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan all benefits payable to or with respect to the Participant under the Plan shall be immediately and irrevocably terminated and forfeited, and the person shall cease to be a Participant.

9.03. Limitation on Liability . Neither the Employer’s officers nor any member of its Board of Directors in any way secures or guarantees the payment of any benefit or amount which may become due and payable hereunder to or with respect to any Participant. Each Participant and other person entitled at any time to payments hereunder shall look solely to the assets of the Employer for such payments as an unsecured, general creditor. After benefits shall have been paid to or with respect to a Participant and such payment purports to cover in full the benefit hereunder, such former Participant or other person or persons, as the case may be, shall have no further right or interest in the other assets of the Employer in connection with this Plan. Neither the Employer nor any of its officers nor any member of its Boards of Directors shall be under any liability or responsibility for failure to effect any of the objectives or purposes of the Plan by reason of the insolvency of the Employer.

-32-


 

ARTICLE X

PLAN ADMINISTRATION

10.01. Plan Administrator . The Committee shall be the Plan Administrator.

10.02. Powers . The Plan Administrator shall have the following duties, powers, and responsibilities:

  (a)   The Plan Administrator shall have the discretionary authority and responsibility to interpret and construe the Plan, to adopt and review rules relating to the Plan and to make any other determinations for the administration of the Plan, including but not limited to the entitlement of Participants and Beneficiaries, and the amounts of their respective interests.
 
  (b)   The Plan Administrator may employ such counsel, accountants, actuaries, and other agents as they shall deem advisable. The Employer shall pay the compensation of such counsel, accountants, actuaries, and other agents and any other expenses incurred by the Plan Administrator in the administration of the Plan.
 
  (c)   The Plan Administrator may delegate all or part of its authority hereunder to the Chief Executive Officer or to any other appropriate officer of the Employer, or to the Benefits Administration Committee of U.S. Bancorp, provided that, in the case of delegation to an officer, such delegation shall not include authority to make determinations affecting the benefits payable to the Chief Executive Officer or such other officer and, in the case of delegation to the Benefits Administration Committee of U.S. Bancorp, such delegation shall not include authority to make determinations with respect to any senior executive officer.

-33-


 

ARTICLE XI

AMENDMENT OR TERMINATION

11.01. Amendment . The Company, by action of its Board of Directors, reserves the right at any time and from time to time, whether prospectively, retroactively, or both, to terminate, modify or amend, in whole or in part, any or all provisions of the Plan, without notice to any person affected by this Plan. This power includes the right at any time and for any reason deemed sufficient by it to terminate or curtail the benefits of this Plan with regard to persons expecting to receive benefits in the future and/or persons already receiving benefits at the time of such action. No modification of the terms of this Plan shall be effective unless it is adopted or ratified by the Board or set forth in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of the Company. No oral representation concerning the interpretation or effect of this Plan shall be effective to amend the Plan. All of the power and authority granted to the Company pursuant to this Section may also be exercised by the Benefits Administration Committee of U.S. Bancorp, except to the extent any action would relate to the benefits of any senior executive officer of the Company.

11.02. No Reduction of Accrued Benefits . Notwithstanding Section 11.01, no termination, modification or amendment, other than a change in the interest or mortality assumptions used to determine whether benefits are Actuarially Equal, may have the effect of reducing the Excess Benefits, Supplemental Benefits or Other Benefits accrued prior to January 1, 2002, by any Participant or any Retired or Disabled Participant, without the consent of such Participant, Retired Participant or Disabled Participant, if such consent would have been required for a similar reduction under the predecessor plan (i.e., the plan that merged into this Plan) in which the Participant, Retired Participant or Disabled Participant participated. Similarly, no termination, modification or amendment, other than a change in the interest or mortality assumptions used to determine whether benefit are Actuarially Equal, may have the effect of reducing the benefits accrued prior to January 1, 2002, that are payable to the Beneficiary of a deceased Participant without the consent of the Beneficiary if such consent would have been required for a similar reduction under the predecessor plan (i.e., the plan that merged into this Plan) in which the Participant participated.

-34-


 

ARTICLE XII

CLAIMS PROCEDURE

12.01. Claims . Benefits shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of this Plan. The Participant, or his Beneficiary (hereinafter referred to as the “Claimant”) shall make a written request for the benefits provided under this Plan. This written claim shall be mailed or delivered to the Plan Administrator.

12.02. Claim Denials . If the claim is denied, either wholly or partially, notice of the decision shall be mailed to the Claimant within a reasonable time period. This time period shall not exceed more than ninety (90) days after the receipt of the claim by the Plan Administrator.

12.03. Notice of Claim Denials . The Plan Administrator shall provide such written notice to every Claimant who is denied a claim for benefits under this Plan. The notice shall set forth the following information:

  (a)   the specific reasons for denial;
 
  (b)   the specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;
 
  (c)   a description of any additional material or information necessary for the Claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and
 
  (d)   appropriate information and explanation of the claims procedure under this Plan to permit the Claimant to submit his claim for review.

12.04. Appeals . The claims procedure under this Plan shall allow the Claimant a reasonable opportunity to appeal a denied claim and to get a full and fair review of that decision from the Plan Administrator.

  (a)   The Claimant shall exercise his right of appeal by submitting a written request for a review of the denied claim to the Plan Administrator. This written request for review must be submitted to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receipt by the Claimant of the written notice of denial.
 
  (b)   The Claimant shall have the following rights under this appeal procedure:

  (1)   to request a review by the Plan Administrator upon written application;

-35-


 

  (2)   to review pertinent documents created under this Plan with respect to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;
 
  (3)   to submit issues and comments in writing;
 
  (4)   to request an extension of time to make a written submission of issues and comments; and
 
  (5)   to request that a hearing be held to consider Claimant’s appeal.

12.05. Appeal Process . The decision on the review of the denied claim shall promptly be made by the Plan Administrator:

  (a)   within forty-five (45) days after the receipt of the request for review if no hearing is held; or
 
  (b)   within ninety (90) days after the receipt of the request for review, if an extension of time is necessary in order to hold a hearing.

  (1)   If an extension of time is necessary in order to hold a hearing, the Plan Administrator shall give the Claimant written notice of the extension of time and of the hearing. This notice shall be given prior to any extension.
 
  (2)   The written notice of extension shall indicate that an extension of time will occur in order to hold a hearing on Claimant’s appeal. The notice shall also specify the place, date, and time of that hearing and the Claimant’s opportunity to participate in the hearing. It may also include any other information the Plan Administrator believes may be important or useful to the claimant in connection with the appeal.

12.06. Hearings . The decision to hold a hearing to consider the Claimant’s appeal of the denied claim shall be within the sole discretion of the Plan Administrator, whether or not the Claimant requests such a hearing.

12.07. Decisions on Appeal . The Plan Administrator’s decision on review shall be made in writing and provided to the Claimant within the specified time periods. This written decision on review shall contain the following information:

  (a)   the decision(s);
 
  (b)   the reasons for the decision(s); and

-36-


 

  (c)   specific references to the provisions of the Plan on which the decision(s) is/are based.

All of this information shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant.

-37-


 

ARTICLE XIII

MISCELLANEOUS

13.01. No Employment Contract . Nothing contained in this Plan shall be deemed to give any Participant or Employee the right to be retained in the service of the Employer or to limit the right of the Employer to discharge any Participant or Employee at any time regardless of the effect which such discharge shall have upon him as a Participant of the Plan.

13.02 Effect on Other Plans . This Plan shall not alter, enlarge or diminish any person’s employment rights or obligations or rights or obligations under the Qualified Plan or any other plan. It is specifically contemplated that the Qualified Plan will, from time to time, be amended and possibly terminated. All such amendments and termination shall be given effect under this Plan (it being expressly intended that this Plan shall not lock in the benefit structures of the Qualified Plan as they exist at the adoption of this Plan or upon the commencement of participation, or commencement of benefits by any Participant).

13.02. Errors in Computations . Neither the Company, the Employer, or the Plan Administrator shall be liable or responsible for any error in the computation of any benefit payable to or with respect to any Participant resulting from any misstatement of fact made by the Participant or by or on behalf of any survivor to whom such benefit shall be payable, directly or indirectly, to the Company, the Employer or the Plan Administrator and used in determining the benefit. Neither the Company, the Employer or the Plan Administrator shall be obligated or required to increase the benefit payable to or with respect to such Participant which, on discovery of the misstatement, is found to be understated as a result of such misstatement of the Participant. However, the benefit of any Participant which is overstated by reason of any such misstatement or any other reason shall be reduced to the amount appropriate in view of the truth (and to recover any prior overpayment).

13.03. No Salary Reduction . This Plan does not involve a reduction in salary for the Participants or a foregoing of an increase in future salary by the Participant.

13.04. Payments to Minors, Incompetents . In making any distribution to or for the benefit of any minor or incompetent Beneficiary, the Plan Administrator, in his sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion, may, but need not, make such distribution to a legal or natural guardian or other relative of such minor or court appointed committee of such incompetent, or to any adult with whom such minor or incompetent temporarily or permanently resides, and any such authority and discretion to expend such distribution for the use and benefit of such minor or incompetent. The receipt of such guardian, committee, relative or other person shall be a complete discharge to the Employer, without any responsibility on its part or on the part of the Plan Administrator to see to the application thereof.

-38-


 

13.05. Non-Alienability . No Participant, surviving spouse, joint or contingent annuitant or beneficiary shall have the power to transmit, assign, alienate, dispose of, pledge or encumber any benefit payable under this Plan before its actual payment to such person. The Employer shall not recognize any such effort to convey any interest under this Plan. No benefit payable under this Plan shall be subject to attachment, garnishment, execution following judgment or other legal process before actual payment to such person. This Plan is not required to and shall not permit the payment of benefits in accordance with a qualified domestic relations order. (This Plan is exempt from Part 2 of Subtitle B of Title I of ERISA.)

13.06. Successors . This Plan shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Employer, its successors and assigns and each Participant and his heirs, executors, administrators and legal representatives.

13.07. Taxes . The Employer shall have the right to withhold such federal, state or local taxes, including without limitation, FICA and FUTA taxes, as it may be required to withhold by applicable laws. Such taxes may be withheld from any benefits due hereunder or from any other compensation to which the Participant is entitled from the Employer.

13.08. Governing Law . This Plan shall be governed by the laws of Minnesota. This Plan is solely between the Employer and the Participant. The Participant, his Beneficiary or other persons claiming through the Participant shall only have recourse against the Employer for enforcement of the Plan.

13.09. Rules of Construction . An individual shall be considered to have attained a given age on the individual’s birthday for that age (and not on the day before). The birthday of any individual born on a February 29 shall be deemed to be February 28 in any year that is not a leap year. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan Statement or any election or designation made under the Plan, any individual who feloniously and intentionally kills a Participant shall be deemed for all purposes of this Plan and all elections and designations made under this Plan to have died before such Participant. A final judgment of conviction of felonious and intentional killing is conclusive for the purposes of this Section. In the absence of a conviction of felonious and intentional killing, the Principal Sponsor shall determine whether the killing was felonious and intentional for the purposes of this Section. Whenever appropriate, words used herein in the singular may be read in the plural, or words used herein in the plural may be read in the singular; the masculine may include the feminine; and the words “hereof,” “herein” or “hereunder” or other similar compounds of the word “here” shall mean and refer to the entire Plan and not to any particular paragraph or Section of this Plan unless the context clearly indicates to the contrary. The titles given to the various Sections of this Plan are inserted for convenience of reference only and are not part of this Plan, and they shall not be considered in determining the purpose, meaning or intent of any provision hereof. Any reference in this Plan to a statute or regulation shall be considered also to mean and refer to any subsequent amendment or replacement of that statute or regulation.

-39-


 

APPENDIX A-2

Except as otherwise provided in Appendix A-3 to this Plan, benefits under the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (the “SERP”) ceased to accrue for all SERP participants effective as of September 30, 2001. After that date and notwithstanding anything in the SERP to the contrary, the “SERP Benefit” payable to each person who was a participant in the SERP on September 30, 2001, shall equal the dollar amount of that person’s SERP Benefit calculated as of September 30, 2001, but taking into account service through December 31, 2001 when determining “total years of continuous and full-time service” for purposes of the definition of a participant’s “Accrued SERP Benefit” in Section 1.2.2(c) of the SERP. The accrued SERP Benefit (as adjusted for any minimum benefits in excess of the cash balance benefit) shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the SERP, and shall not increase or decrease due to any subsequent changes in service, compensation, projected pension benefits, or any other factor affecting the calculation of the SERP Benefit.

 


 

APPENDIX A-3

The following persons are entitled to benefits pursuant to the terms of the U.S. Bancorp Nonqualified Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (the “SERP”) as in effect on September 30, 2001, subject to the modifications set forth in this Appendix A-3.

NAME

J. Robert Hoffman
Andrew Cecere
Lee R. Mitau
Daniel M. Quinn
Daniel W. Yohannes

The persons named in this Appendix A-3 were Participants in the U.S. Bancorp Cash Balance Pension Plan as of December 31, 2001. After that date, the tax-qualified pension benefits of these Participants are being provided under the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan. Their benefits under the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan will be the sum of two parts: 1) an Accrued Benefit as determined under the U.S. Bancorp Cash Balance Pension Plan as it existed immediately prior to January 1, 2002 for service prior to that date, and 2) an Accrued Benefit determined under Section 2.1.1 of the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan (2002 Restatement) for service on and after January 1, 2002.

Notwithstanding anything in the SERP document as in effect on September 30, 2001 to the contrary, in calculating the amount of the Other Benefit payable to the persons named in this Appendix A-3, the following modifications shall apply effective January 1, 2002 to take into account the changes to their underlying pension benefits:

Section 1.2.1.

The term “Projected Cash Balance Annuity” in subsection (a)(i) of Section 1.2.1 of the SERP (which defines the Accrual Percentage) is replaced by the term “Projected Pension Plan Annuity”.

Section 1.2.3 .

The reference in Section 1.2.3 of the SERP to the “Cash Balance Plan” is replaced by a reference to the “U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan as in effect on and after January 1, 2002”.

Section 1.2.18.

Section 1.2.18 of the SERP is replaced in its entirety with the following:

 


 

     1.2.18. Prior Plans’ Offset — a dollar amount equal to the product of the Participant’s Projected Average Compensation multiplied by the factor for that Participant determined from Schedule II to this Plan Statement. The factor for the participant shall be determined by reference to the Participant’s age at his or her most recent date of hire by the Employer; provided, however, that in the event the Projected Pension Plan Benefit is reduced as provided in the last sentence of Section 1.2.20(a)(5), the factor shall be determined by reference to the Participant’s age as of the applicable “conversion date” referred to in Section 1.2.20(a)(5). To the same extent that the Committee determines under Section 1.2.12 of the Plan Statement that a business entity was an Employer prior to the date on which the business entity first became an Employer, the business entity shall be considered an Employer for the purposes of this paragraph.

Section 1.2.20.

Section 1.2.20 of the SERP is replaced in its entirety with the following:

     1.2.20 Projected Pension Plan Benefit – a dollar amount equal to the single lump sum present value of the total benefit the Participant would be expected to have accrued under the U. S. Bancorp Pension Plan at his or her Normal Retirement Age based on the following assumptions.

  (a)   In determining the portion of a Participant’s Pension Plan Benefit for service prior to January 1, 2002 (the “Cash Balance Portion”), the following assumptions apply:

  (1)   The initial account balance shall be the Participant’s Account Balance as of the last day of the Plan Year immediately preceding the date as of which the Projected Pension Benefit is determined.
 
  (2)   The Cash Balance Portion shall be based solely on the Participant’s Account Balance and without regard to the Minimum Benefit described in Section 1.4 of the Cash Balance Pension Plan or to any grandfathered benefit described in Section 1.5 of the Cash Balance Pension Plan;
 
  (3)   The Cash Balance Portion shall include such amounts as would have been included as of December 31, 2001, if there were never any limitations on benefits under Section 415 of the Internal Revenue Code or limitations on compensation under section 401(a)(17) of the Internal Revenue Code;
 
  (4)   Interest Credits under the Cash Balance Portion shall be made at an annual rate that is 3 percentage points greater than the rate at which

 


 

      Projected Compensation is deemed to increase under this Plan Statement;
 
  (5)   Interest Credits shall be made as if there were no limitations on benefits under Section 415 of the Internal Revenue Code; and
 
  (6)   Subject to the following, the Participant’s Account Balance shall not include any amounts attributable to service with a business entity prior to the date the business entity first became an Employer. To the same extent that the Committee determines that a business entity was an Employer prior to the date on which the business entity first became an Employer, amounts attributable to service with the business entity shall be included in the Participant’s Account Balance. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this subsection (a)(6), unless the Committee determines otherwise, in lieu of adjusting the Account Balance of a Participant to exclude amounts attributable to service with a business entity prior to the date the business entity first became an Employer, the Projected Pension Plan Benefit of any Participant whose prior employer pension was merged into the Cash Balance Plan on or after December 31, 1998, shall be reduced by the amount of the single life annuity benefit payable at Normal Retirement Age under the defined benefit pension plans of the prior employer which were converted into a lump sum amount and included in the Account Balance, such single life annuity to be calculated as of the conversion date (and to be determined without regard to the limitations on benefits under section 415 of the Internal Revenue Code and the limitation on compensation under section 401(a)(17) of the Internal Revenue Code to the extent the prior employer maintained a plan or plans to provide such excess benefits).

  (b)   In determining the portion of a Participant’s Pension Plan Benefit for service on and after January 1, 2002 (a Participant’s Accrued Benefit under Section 2.1.1 of the U. S Bancorp Pension Plan), the following assumptions apply:

  (1)   The Participant remains in Recognized Employment through Normal Retirement Age;
 
  (2)   The Participant receives future increases in Base Pension Pay and Total Pension Pay at the rate Projected Compensation is deemed to increase under this Plan Statement;

 


 

  (3)   The Participant’s Base Pension Pay and Total Pension Pay are not limited by Section 401(a)(17) of the Internal Revenue Code; and
 
  (4)   The Participant’s benefit is not limited by Section 415 of the Internal Revenue Code.

Section 1.2.21.

Section 1.2.21 of the SERP is replaced in its entirety by the following:

     1.2.21 Projected Pension Plan Annuity - the annual amount payable in the form of a single life annuity at Normal Retirement Age for the life of the Participant which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Projected Pension Plan Benefit, calculated using the assumptions set forth in Appendix C of the U.S. Bancorp Pension Plan.

 


 

APPENDIX B-2

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-2 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to named Participant from the Plan. It replaces the similar benefits provided pursuant to an agreement dated December 30, 1994 between the Participant and Star Banc Corporation (a predecessor of the Company).

         
Participant   :   Richard K. Davis
         
Formula   :   Sixty percent (60%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-2): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan and any retirement benefit paid or payable to the Participant under the BankAmerica Corporation Retirement Income Plan.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting   :   Five (5) years of Service (as defined in Section 2.26 of the Plan)
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus
1/360 per month prior to age 60
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Age 55 with 5 years of Service (as defined in Section 2.26 of the Plan)

 


 

APPENDIX B-3

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-3 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant from the Plan in accordance with the Participant’s employment agreement with the Company effective as of October 16, 2001 (the “Employment Agreement”). The Employment Agreement supersedes the Participant’s agreement, dated as of December 30, 1994, with Star Banc Corporation (a predecessor of the Company) (the “Prior Agreement”) and replaces all similar benefits provided pursuant to the Prior Agreement. The following terms, when used in this Appendix B-3 with initial capitals, shall be defined as set forth in the Employment Agreement: “Annual Base Salary”, “Cause”, “Disability”, “Good Reason”, “Restricted Stock Units” and “Severance Period.”

         
Participant   :   Jerry A. Grundhofer
         
Formula   :   Sixty percent (60%) of the Participant’s “Final Average Monthly Earnings” as defined in this Appendix B-3 (and not as defined in Section 2.17), reduced for all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-3): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under Article IV of this Plan and the Participant’s benefit under the qualified and nonqualified pension plans of BankAmerica Corporation, Security Pacific Corporation and Wells Fargo N.A.
         
Final Average Monthly
Earnings
  :   Augmented Final Average Monthly Base Salary plus Final Average Bonus Salary.
         
Augmented Final Average
Monthly Base Salary
  :   Final Average Monthly Base Salary; provided, however, that if the Participant terminates employment with the Company on or after December 31, 2006, or prior to that date he becomes Disabled, dies, is terminated by the Company without Cause or terminates his employment with the Company for Good Reason, solely for the purposes of determining the Augmented Final Average Monthly Base Salary the final calendar year Annual Base Salary shall be increased by $5,600,000.
         
Final Average Monthly
Base Salary
  :   The average of the Participant’s Monthly Earnings for the five consecutive calendar years of Service during which the Participant’s Monthly Earnings were the highest.

 


 

         
         
Monthly Earnings   :   Monthly Earnings shall be one-twelfth of the Participant’s Annual Base Salary.
         
Final Average Bonus Salary   :   Shall equal the greater of (i) 175% of Final Average Monthly Base Salary or (ii) one-twelfth of the average of the annual bonuses actually earned during the five complete calendar years prior to termination of employment, provided, however, that if the Participant should terminate employment prior to December 31, 2006 for any reason other than termination by the Company without Cause, his Disability, termination by the Participant for Good Reason, or his death, clause (i) above shall be modified to be the average of 175% of Monthly Earnings for applicable calendar years commencing with 2002 and 100% of Monthly Earnings for applicable calendar years prior to 2002.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting   :   Fully vested
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus 1/360 per month prior to age 60, provided however, that if a Severance Period has been completed, there shall be no Early Retirement Reduction.
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Immediately upon the Participant’s termination of employment, regardless of age, provided however, that such payout date may be no sooner than the last day of the Participant’s Severance Period.
         
Disability   :   No benefits described in Article VII of this Plan shall be paid. In lieu of such benefits, the Supplemental Benefit described in this Appendix shall commence on the first day of the month coincident with or next following the Participant’s Disability.
         
        Should the Participant recover from his Disability prior to his Normal Retirement Date, benefits under this Appendix

 


 

         
        shall cease. Upon subsequent termination of employment, the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit shall be the greater of his Supplemental Benefit determined at his subsequent termination of employment based on the terms of this Appendix applied at such subsequent termination date or the Supplemental Benefit previously paid under this Disability provision.
         
Additional Purchased
Benefit
  :   The Participant, or upon the Participant’s death prior to termination of his employment, the Participant’s spouse shall have the right to convert some or all of certain Restricted Stock Units into additional Supplemental Benefits. The timing and amount of any such Additional Purchased Benefit shall be as provided in the Employment Agreement.

 


 

APPENDIX B-4

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-4 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant from the Plan. It replaces the similar benefits provided pursuant to an agreement dated December 30, 1994 between the Participant and Star Banc Corporation (a predecessor of the Company).

         
Participant   :   David M. Moffett
         
Formula   :   Sixty percent (60%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-4): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan and any retirement benefit paid or payable to the Participant under the BankAmerica Corporation Retirement Income Plan.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting   :   Five (5) years of Service (as defined in Section 2.26 of the Plan)
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus
1/360 per month prior to age 60
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   As soon as administratively feasible after the Participant’s termination of employment, regardless of age

 


 

APPENDIX B-5

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-5 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant from the Plan. It replaces the similar benefits provided pursuant to an agreement dated December 30, 1994 between the Participant and Star Banc Corporation (a predecessor of the Company).

         
Participant   :   Stephen E. Smith
         
Formula   :   Sixty percent (60%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-5): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan and any retirement benefit paid or payable to the Participant under the Ameritrust Retirement Income Plan.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting   :   Five (5) years of Service (as defined in Section 2.26 of the Plan)
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus
1/360 per month prior to age 60
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Age 55 with 5 years of Service (as defined in Section 2.26 of the Plan)

 


 

APPENDIX B-7

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-7 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant under the Plan.

         
Participant   :   William L. Chenevich
         
Formula   :   Fifty-five percent (55%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-7) : the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan, all retirement benefits earned by the Participant for his service with VISA International, Home Savings of America, and Security Pacific Bank, and an amount that is Actuarially Equal at the commencement of the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit to 17,627 Restricted Stock Rights times the closing stock price of U.S. Bancorp common stock on December 18, 2001 (deemed to be $19.58), increased by 11.9% per annum on a compound basis (i.e., increased by multiplying the initial aggregate value of the Rights by a number equal to 1.119 raised to the nth power, where n is the number of years (and partial years) from December 18, 2001 to the date the Participant’s Supplemental Benefit commences).
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain.
         
Vesting Service Start Date   :   From date of hire.
         
Vesting   :   50% at age 63;
75% at age 64;
100% at age 65
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   65
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   No early retirement reduction.
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Age 63
         
Death Benefit   :   If death occurs after the Participant’s attainment of age 63, the Death Benefit under Article VIII shall be determined as if the Participant was 100% vested.

 


 

APPENDIX B-8

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-8 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant under the Plan.

         
Participant   :   Edward Grzedzinski
         
Formula   :   Fifty-five percent (55%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-8): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan and the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting Service Start Date   :   From December 18, 2001
         
Vesting   :   100% vested at December 17, 2011, if continuously employed by U.S. Bancorp from the Vesting Service Start Date through December 17, 2011
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus
1/360 per month prior to age 60
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Age 55 and 100% vested

 


 

APPENDIX B-9

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-9 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant under the Plan.

         
Participant   :   Joseph E. Hasten
         
Formula   :   Fifty-five percent (55%) of the Participant’s Final Average Monthly Earnings (as defined in Section 2.17 of the Plan) reduced by all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-9): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under this Plan, the Participant’s benefit under the Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Retirement Plan (consolidated under this Plan by Section 5.04 and Appendix A-10), the employer-provided portion of the Participant’s benefit under the Mercantile Bancorporation Inc. Supplemental Savings Plan and the Participant’s qualified and nonqualified benefits earned for service with Standard Charter Bank, PLC.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Life annuity with ten (10) years certain
         
Vesting Service Start Date   :   From December 18, 2001
         
Vesting   :   100% vested at December 17, 2011, if continuously employed by U.S. Bancorp from the Vesting Service Start Date through December 17, 2011
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   62
         
Early Retirement Reduction   :   1/180 per month prior to age 62, plus
1/360 per month prior to age 60
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   Age 55 and 100% vested

 


 

APPENDIX B-11

SUPPLEMENTAL BENEFITS

This Appendix B-11 summarizes the supplemental benefits payable to the named Participant from the Plan in accordance with the Participant’s employment agreement with the Company effective as of October 16, 2001 (the “Employment Agreement”). The Employment Agreement supersedes any other employment, severance or change in control agreements between the Participant and the Company (“Prior Agreements”) except as explicitly provided in the Employment Agreement, and replaces all similar benefits provided pursuant to such Prior Agreements.

         
Participant   :   John F. Grundhofer
         
Formula   :   $2,920,000 per annum, reduced for all of the following (each of which shall be considered an “offsetting benefit” for purposes of this Appendix B-11): the Participant’s benefit under the Qualified Plan, the Participant’s Excess Benefit under Article IV of this Plan and the Participant’s benefit under any other nonqualified pension plan of the Company.
         
Normal Form of Payment   :   Joint and 50% contingent annuity with the Participant’s spouse as of the date the Employment Agreement was signed as the beneficiary
         
Vesting   :   100% vested
         
Unreduced Retirement Age   :   December 31, 2002
         
Early Retirement   :   N/A
         
Earliest Payout Date   :   January 1, 2003
         
Other Provisions   :   In the event of the Participant’s “Disability” (as defined in the Employment Agreement), death or termination of employment prior to December 31, 2002 the provisions of the Employment Agreement shall apply and override any other provisions of this Plan. No benefits described in Article VII of this Plan shall be paid to the Participant.

 

 

EXHIBIT 10.18

AMENDMENT NO. 1
TO THE
FIRSTAR CORPORATION
DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN

     WHEREAS, effective as of December 1, 1999, Firstar Corporation amended and restated the Firstar Corporation Deferred Compensation Plan (formerly known as the Star Banc Corporation Deferred Compensation Plan (the “Plan”)); and

     WHEREAS, Firstar Corporation merged with U.S. Bancorp on February 27, 2001, to form a combined entity known as U.S. Bancorp (the “Corporation”); and

     WHEREAS, the Corporation desires to amend the title of the Plan to reflect the Corporation’s current name; and

     WHEREAS, the Corporation desires to amend the Plan to allow for the deferral of profit shares realized upon the exercise of stock options as approved by its Board of Directors;

     NOW, THEREFORE, effective as of June 18, 2002, the Plan is amended as follows.

1.     The title of the Plan is hereby amended to be the “U.S. Bancorp Deferred Compensation Plan.”

2.     Section 4 of the Plan is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following language:

       Section 4. Deferral Election. (a) Each eligible officer, employee and Director may elect, in writing, no later than the applicable date set forth in the table below, to defer under the Plan: (i) any portion up to 100% of his annual salary or Director’s fees to be earned in any calendar year; (ii) any portion up to 100% of his incentive compensation to be earned in any calendar year; and (iii) the receipt of profit shares realized upon the exercise of stock options granted under a stock incentive compensation plan maintained by the Corporation (“Option Gains”). “Profit shares” represent the pre-tax gain upon exercise of a stock option divided by the fair market value of U.S. Bancorp stock on the date of exercise.

       
Type of Compensation Deferred   Applicable Date  

Annual Salary or Director’s Fees   On or before December 31 of the preceding  
    calendar year, or with respect to a newly  
    designated Participant, the end of the  
    two-week period following such  
    designation.  
 
Incentive Compensation   On or before December 31 of the preceding
    calendar year, or with respect to a newly
    designated Participant, the end of the
    two-week period following such
    designation.
     
Option Gains   Six months plus 1 day prior to the
    exercise date of a stock option granted
    to the Participant under a stock
    incentive plan of the Corporation.

 


 

  In no event shall the deferrals of a Participant for any calendar year be less than $1,000.00.

       (b) A Participant’s deferral election under Section 4(a) with respect to his annual salary, Director’s fees, incentive compensation or Option Gains shall be effective and irrevocable upon delivery of an applicable written election to the Plan Administrator or the Corporation. In addition, at the time of making a deferral election under Section 4(a), the Participant shall elect, consistent with procedures adopted by the Plan Administrator, to have the amount of deferrals attributable to salary, Director’s fees, or incentive compensation deemed to be invested in shares of the Corporation (a “Share Election”), certain mutual funds (the “Mutual Funds Portion”) or interest bearing assets (the “Cash Portion”). Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, in no event may a Participant elect to transfer Option Gains to the Cash Portion, the Mutual Fund Portion, or the Share Election Account. Option Gains shall be credited with dividends that would otherwise be payable on Corporation shares, which shall be deemed reinvested in additional shares of the common stock of the Corporation. Option Gains credited to a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be appropriately adjusted for all stock dividends, stock splits or other changes in the Corporation’s common shares, and shall be distributed only in shares of the Corporation’s common stock.

3.     Sections 11 (a) and (b) are each hereby amended to add the following language as the final sentence:

  Notwithstanding the foregoing, Option Gains credited to a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be distributed to the Participant only in shares of the Corporation’s common stock and shall not be included in any lump-sum payment.

2


 

4.  Section 11(c) is hereby amended to add the following language as the final sentence:

  Option Gains credited to a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be distributed to the Participant in shares of the Corporation’s common stock under the applicable stock incentive compensation plan of the Corporation.
 
Executed this 21st day of February, 2003.

         
    U.S. BANCORP
         
         
    By:   /s/ Jennie P. Carlson
       
        Jennie P. Carlson
        Executive Vice President

3

 

Exhibit 10.22

EDWARD GRZEDZINSKI
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

      THIS EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is made this 7th day of May, 2001 by and among EDWARD GRZEDZINSKI (hereinafter referred to as “Employee”), NOVA CORPORATION , a Georgia corporation (“NOVA Corp”), NOVA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC., a Georgia corporation (“NOVA”) and U.S. BANCORP , a Delaware corporation (“Parent”).

WITNESSETH:

      WHEREAS , NOVA Corp, through its direct and indirect subsidiaries, and Parent are in the business of providing credit card and debit card transaction processing services and settlement services (including the related products and services of automated teller machines and check guarantee services) to merchants, financial institutions, independent sales organizations (“ISOs”), and other similar customers (collectively, the “Business”) throughout the United States and in Europe;

      WHEREAS , Employee currently serves as Chairman of the Board of Directors, President and Chief Executive Officer of NOVA Corp pursuant to an Employment Agreement between Employee and NOVA Corp effective February 22, 2001 (the “Prior Agreement”);

      WHEREAS , Parent and NOVA Corp have entered into the Agreement and Plan of Merger dated as of May 7, 2001 (the “Merger Agreement”), pursuant to which NOVA Corp will merge with and into Parent (the “Merger”) on the terms and subject to the conditions of the Merger Agreement;

      WHEREAS , NOVA and Parent, or their assigns, will continue to engage in the Business throughout the United States and Europe (the “Territory”);

      WHEREAS , NOVA Corp and Employee desire to terminate the Prior Agreement, which termination shall be contemporaneous with the effectiveness of this Agreement;

      WHEREAS , Parent desires to retain the services of Employee on the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, and Employee desires to be employed by Parent on such terms and conditions;

      NOW, THEREFORE , for and in consideration of the Confidential Information and Trade Secrets (as hereafter defined) furnished to Employee by NOVA and Parent in order that he may perform his duties under this Agreement, the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, and other valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

     1.      Employment of Employee. Parent hereby employs Employee for a period beginning as of the effective date of the Merger (the “Effective Date”) and ending five (5) years thereafter (the “Initial Term”), unless Employee’s employment by Parent is sooner terminated or automatically renewed pursuant to the terms of this Agreement (Employee’s employment by Parent pursuant to the terms of this Agreement shall hereinafter be referred to as “Employment”).

       (a) Employee agrees to such Employment on the terms and conditions herein set forth and agrees to devote his reasonable best efforts to his duties under this Agreement and to perform such duties diligently and efficiently and in accordance with the directions of Parent.
 
       (b) During the term of Employee’s Employment, Employee shall be employed as Chairman of the Board of Directors, President and Chief Executive Officer of NOVA and a Vice Chairman of Parent. Employee shall be responsible primarily for such duties as are assigned to

 


 

  him from time to time by the Chief Executive Officer of Parent, which in any event shall be such duties as are customary for an officer in those positions.
 
       (c) Employee shall devote substantially all of his business time, attention, and energies to the business and affairs of Parent, shall act at all times in the best interests of Parent, and shall not during the term of his Employment be engaged in any other business activity, whether or not such business is pursued for gain, profit, or other pecuniary advantage, or permit such personal interests as he may have to interfere with the performance of his duties hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Employee may participate in industry, civic and charitable activities so long as such activities do not materially interfere with the performance of his duties hereunder. Further, Employee may engage in passive investments so long as the same are passive, are not inconsistent with Employee’s duties hereunder and do not involve the development, ownership, management or provision of credit and debit card processing and settlement services, including the related products and services of automatic teller machines and check guarantee services. Employee’s rights to make certain investments hereunder are in addition to and not in degradation of investments of less than 5% in a corporation as described in Section 12(a).

     2.      Compensation. During the term of Employee’s Employment and in accordance with the terms hereof, Parent shall pay or otherwise provide to Employee the following compensation:

       (a) Employee’s annual salary during the term of his Employment shall be Five Hundred Forty Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($540,000) (or such increased base salary as approved by NOVA Corp prior to the Merger, not to exceed 120% of such amount) (“Base Salary”), with such increases (each, a “Merit Increase”) as may from time to time be deemed appropriate by the Chief Executive Officer of Parent; provided, however, that so long as this Agreement remains in effect, Employee’s Base Salary shall be reviewed annually by the Chief Executive Officer of Parent at the beginning of each fiscal year. The Base Salary shall be paid by Parent monthly in arrears or in accordance with Parent’s regular payroll practice. As used herein, the term “Base Salary” shall be deemed to include any Merit Increases granted to Employee.
 
       (b) In addition to the Base Salary, Employee shall be eligible to receive annual bonus compensation pursuant to the schedule set forth as Exhibit A (“Bonus Compensation”) provided, however, that if Employee no longer is working primarily in the Business, Parent shall provide Employee with a different incentive compensation plan under which Employee will have a substantially similar opportunity to achieve annual bonus compensation in a substantially similar amount. Employee shall be eligible annually to receive restricted stock awards of shares of Parent Stock or stock options under the stock incentive plan of Parent. The amount of shares of restricted stock or options to be granted each year shall be determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of Parent.
 
       (c) Employee will be granted on the Effective Date the option to purchase 500,000 shares of Parent common stock at a price per share equal to the closing price of Parent common stock on the Effective Date (the “Option”). The Option will vest in four (4) equal increments of 25%. The first increment will vest on the first anniversary of the Effective Date. Another increment of the Option will vest every year thereafter until 100% of the Option is vested.
 
       (d) Parent may withhold from any benefits payable under this Agreement all federal, state, city or other taxes as shall be required pursuant to any law or governmental regulation or ruling.

2


 

     3.      Benefits. During the term of Employee’s employment, and for such time thereafter as may be required by Section 8 hereof, Parent shall provide to Employee the following benefits (or in lieu thereof for a transitional period immediately following the Merger, benefits equivalent to those provided to Employee by NOVA Corp immediately prior to the Merger):

       (a) Medical Insurance. Employee and his dependents shall be entitled to participate in such medical, dental, vision, prescription drug, wellness, or other health care or medical coverage plans as may be established, offered or adopted from time to time by Parent for the benefit of its similarly situated employees, pursuant to the terms set forth in such plans.
 
       (b) Life Insurance. Employee shall be entitled to participate in any life insurance plans established, offered, or adopted from time to time by Parent for the benefit of its similarly situated employees.
 
       (c) Disability Insurance. Employee shall be entitled to participate in any disability insurance plans established, offered, or adopted from time to time by Parent for the benefit of its similarly situated employees.
 
       (d) Vacations, Holidays. Employee shall be entitled to at least four (4) weeks of paid vacation each year and all holidays observed by Parent.
 
       (e) Stock Option Plans. Employee shall be eligible for participation in any stock option plan or restricted stock plan adopted by Parent’s Board of Directors or the Compensation Committee for the benefit of similarly situated employees.
 
       (f) Other Benefits. In addition to and not in any way in limitation of the benefits set forth in this Section 3, Employee shall be eligible to participate in all additional employee benefits provided by Parent (including, without limitation, all tax-qualified retirement plans, non-qualified retirement and/or deferred compensation plans, incentive plans, other stock option or purchase plans, and fringe benefits) on terms at least as favorable as the terms of any benefits that are afforded to other similarly situated employees during the term of this Agreement.
 
       (g) Terms and Provisions of Plans. Parent agrees that it shall not take action (during the term of this Agreement or the “Election Period,” as defined in Section 8(a)) to modify the terms and provisions of any such plan or arrangement so as to exclude only Employee and/or his dependents, either by excluding Employee and/or his dependents explicitly by name or by modifying provisions generally applicable to all employees and dependents so that only Employee and/or his dependents would ever possibly be affected.
 
       (h) Vesting of Rights Upon Change In Control. Upon the occurrence of a “Change in Control” (as defined in Section 8(h)) during the term of this Agreement, and regardless of whether Employee terminates this Agreement following such Change in Control, and notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in any other agreement or document (including Parent’s applicable plan documents), all stock options, restricted stock, and other similar rights that have been granted to Employee and are not vested on the date of such Change in Control, as well as any non-qualified retirement benefit or deferred compensation plan balance (collectively, the “Rights”) that is not vested on the date of occurrence of such an event, shall become vested and exercisable immediately and as provided under the applicable plan or agreement, Employee shall have the continuing right to exercise any or all of the Rights until such rights expire in accordance with their original terms (without regard to any provision thereof requiring earlier expiration upon termination of employment). Upon the Effective Date, the Rights of Employee existing on the Effective Date shall be and become fully vested, nonforfeitable and immediately exercisable.

3


 

     4.      Personnel Policies. Employee shall conduct himself at all times in a businesslike and professional manner as appropriate for a person in his position and shall represent Parent in all respects as complies with good business and ethical practices. In addition, Employee shall be subject to and abide by the good faith policies and procedures of Parent applicable generally to personnel of Parent, as adopted from time to time.

     5.      Reimbursement for Business Expenses. Employee shall be reimbursed, on a no less frequently than monthly basis, for all out-of-pocket business expenses incurred by him in the performance of his duties hereunder, provided that Employee shall first document and substantiate said business expenses in the manner generally required by Parent under its policies and procedures.

     6.      Settlement Payments . In consideration for Employee’s agreement to terminate the Prior Agreement and waive the right to receive cash payments or other benefits under the Prior Agreement upon termination of employment following a change in control by reason of consummation of the Merger, Parent shall provide on the Effective Date the compensation described in this Section 6 (provided this Agreement is not terminated prior to the Effective Date), and Employee shall have no other right to receive payments or other benefits under this Agreement or the Prior Agreement by reason of the Merger:

       (a) Parent shall pay Employee in cash the sum of Two Million Eight Hundred Eighty Thousand Dollars ($2,880,000.00) (the “Cash Settlement Payment”). The Cash Settlement Payment shall be paid in one lump sum on the Effective Date.
 
       (b) The provisions of Section 8(g) of this Agreement shall be applicable to the payments provided for in this Section 6. All payments under this Section 6 are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any payment due under this Agreement following termination of Employee’s Employment.
 
       (c) At the election of Employee, with respect to up to 80% of the aggregate number of shares subject to stock option agreements outstanding as of the Effective Date (“Option Shares”), Employee shall be entitled to receive from Parent in exchange for cancellation of the stock option agreements (or portion thereof) relating to such Option Shares for which Employee elects, a cash payment in an amount equal to (1) the Cash Consideration (as defined in the Merger Agreement) multiplied by the aggregate number of Option Shares subject to the option agreements (or portion thereof) to be cancelled less (2) the aggregate exercise price set forth in the stock option agreements (or portion thereof) being cancelled. Employee shall notify Parent no later than three (3) business days prior to the Effective Date with respect to the number of Option Shares subject to the stock option agreements Employee wishes to make the election pursuant to this Section 6(c). In exchange for such cash payments, Employee agrees to execute a cancellation agreement with respect to the Option Shares subject to the stock option agreements (or portion thereof) being cancelled, which cancellation agreement shall be in a form reasonably acceptable to Parent. The remaining Option Shares subject to stock option agreements (or portions thereof) not being cancelled hereunder shall be converted into the right to acquire shares of Parent’s common stock in accordance with Section 3.06 of the Merger Agreement and Employee shall have the continuing right to exercise any or all of the remaining Option Shares until such rights expire in accordance with their original terms (without regard to any provisions thereof requiring earlier expiration upon termination of employment).
 
       (d) Employee acknowledges and agrees that upon the Effective Date, the Prior Agreement is terminated, cancelled and of no further force and effect; provided, however, that this Agreement shall terminate upon any termination of the Merger Agreement (and, in case of any such termination hereof, this Agreement shall be deemed to be void ab initio and the Prior Agreement shall be deemed to have remained in full force and effect); provided further, that the termination of this Agreement shall only become effective if the Merger Agreement terminates

4


 

  prior to the Effective Date. Until the Effective Date, the Prior Agreement remains in full force and effect.

     7.      Term and Termination of Employment .

       (a) This Agreement shall be effective as of the Effective Date.
 
       (b) Employee’s Employment shall terminate immediately upon the discharge of Employee by Parent for “Cause.” For the purposes of this Agreement, the term “Cause,” when used with respect to termination by Parent of Employee’s Employment hereunder, shall mean termination as a result of: (i) Employee’s material violation of the covenants set forth in Section 11 or 12, (ii) Employee’s willful, intentional, or grossly negligent failure to perform his duties under this Agreement diligently and in accordance with the directions of Parent; (iii) Employee’s willful, intentional, or grossly negligent failure to comply with the good faith decisions or policies of Parent; or (iv) final conviction of Employee of a felony materially adversely affecting Parent; provided, however, that in the event Parent desires to terminate Employee’s Employment pursuant to subsections (i), (ii), or (iii) of this Section 7(b), Parent shall first give Employee written notice of such intent, detailed and specific description of the reasons and basis therefor, and thirty (30) days to remedy or cure such perceived breach or deficiency (the “Cure Period”); provided, however, that with respect only to a breach that it is not possible to cure within such thirty (30) day period, so long as Employee is diligently using his best efforts to cure such breach or deficiency within such period and thereafter, the Cure Period shall be automatically extended for an additional period of time (not to exceed sixty (60) additional days) to enable Employee to cure such breach or deficiency, provided, further, that Employee continues to diligently use his best efforts to cure such breach or deficiency. If Employee does not cure the perceived breach or deficiency within the Cure Period, Parent may discharge Employee immediately upon written notice to Employee. If Parent desires to terminate Employee’s Employment pursuant to subsection (iv) of this Section 7(b), Parent shall first give Employee three (3) days prior written notice of such intent.
 
       (c) Employee’s Employment shall terminate immediately upon the death of Employee.
 
       (d) Employee’s Employment shall terminate immediately upon ninety (90) days prior written notice to Employee if Employee shall at any time be incapacitated by reason of physical or mental illness or otherwise become incapable of performing the duties under this Agreement for a continuous period of one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days; provided, however, to the extent Parent could, with reasonable accommodation and without undue hardship, continue to employ Employee in some other capacity after such one hundred eighty (180) day period, Parent shall, to the extent required by the Americans With Disabilities Act, offer to do so, and, if such offer is accepted by Employee, Employee shall be compensated accordingly.
 
       (e) Employee may terminate this Agreement, upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to Parent (the “Notice Period”), in the event (i) there is a material diminution in Employee’s duties and responsibilities, or such duties and responsibilities are otherwise diminished from the duties and responsibilities held by Employee immediately prior to the Merger, or such greater duties and responsibilities, as may be assigned to Employee from time to time; provided, however, that the change in Employee’s duties and responsibilities resulting from Employee no longer being an officer of a publicly traded company shall not, by itself, be sufficient to qualify as a “Responsibility Breach”; (ii) Employee is required to relocate to an office that is more than thirty-five (35) miles from Employee’s current office located at One Concourse Parkway, Suite 300, Atlanta, Georgia 30328; (iii) there is a reduction in Employee’s Base Salary payable under Section 2, a materially adverse change in the terms of Exhibit A

5


 

  attached hereto or a material reduction in benefits provided to Employee under Section 3 (whether occurring at once or over a period of time); or (iv) Parent materially breaches this Agreement, (each of (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) being referred to as a “Responsibilities Breach”), Parent fails to cure said Responsibilities Breach within the Notice Period; provided, however, that with respect only to breaches that it is not possible to cure within the Notice Period, so long as Parent is diligently using its best efforts to cure such breaches within such Notice Period, the Notice Period shall be automatically extended for an additional period of time (not to exceed sixty (60) additional days) to enable Parent to cure such breaches, provided, further, that Parent continues to diligently use its best efforts to cure such breaches. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 7(e), the Notice Period for failure to pay compensation shall be five (5) days.
 
       (f) This Agreement shall automatically renew for successive three (3) year terms (each a “Renewal Term”) unless either Parent or Employee gives the other party hereto written notice of its or his intent not to renew this Agreement no later than ninety (90) days prior to the date the Initial Term, or the then-current Renewal Term, is scheduled to expire. Employee’s employment shall terminate upon termination or expiration of this Agreement.
 
       (g) Parent may terminate this Agreement at any time, without cause, upon ninety (90) days prior written notice to Employee.
 
       (h) Employee may terminate this Agreement at any time, without cause, upon ninety (90) days prior written notice to Parent.
 
       (i) Other than as specifically provided in and in strict compliance with this Section 7, this Agreement and/or Employee’s Employment may not be terminated.

     8.      Termination Payments.

       (a) Upon (1) the termination of Employee’s Employment by Parent pursuant to Section 7(g) or (2) the termination or expiration of this Agreement, for whatever reason, provided that in the case of this subsection (2), the earlier of (x) such termination or expiration or (y) notice of such termination or non-renewal occurs within three years after a Change in Control (the effective date of such termination or expiration being referred to as the “Termination Date”), Employee shall receive the payments and benefits set forth below.

       (i) Parent shall pay Employee accrued but unpaid Base Salary through the Termination Date, Bonus Compensation due and owing to Employee (as further set forth in Section 8(d)) and any other benefits required to be provided to Employee and his dependents under contract and applicable law.
 
       (ii) Parent shall pay Employee in cash an amount equal to his “Annual Compensation” (as defined in Section 8(h)(ii)) multiplied by three (3), which amount will be paid in one lump sum within fifteen (15) days of the Termination Date.
 
       (iii) All stock options, restricted stock, and other similar rights, including any nonqualified retirement plan benefit or deferred compensation plan balance (“Nonqualified Plan Benefit”) that is not vested on the Termination Date, that have been granted to Employee shall become vested and exercisable immediately, and as provided under the applicable plan or agreement, Employee shall have the continuing right to exercise such rights until such rights expire in accordance with their original terms (without regard to any provision thereof requiring earlier expiration upon termination of employment).

6


 

       (iv) Until the earlier to occur of: (x) the date which is three (3) years after the Termination Date, or (y) Employee’s accepting employment with another employer or otherwise obtaining coverage (the “Election Period”), Parent shall use commercially reasonable efforts to provide to Employee and his dependents the coverage for the benefits described in Sections 3(a), (b) and (c).
 
       (v) To the extent required, Parent shall pay to Employee the “Gross-Up Payment” as set forth in Section 8(g).

       (b) Upon termination of Employee’s Employment or the termination or expiration of this Agreement, which termination or expiration occurs: (1) as a result of Employee terminating this Agreement pursuant to Section 7(e), (2) this Agreement being terminated pursuant to Section 7(c) or 7(d), or (3) this Agreement not being renewed by Parent, and which termination or expiration is not covered by Section 8(a) hereof (the effective date of such termination or expiration being referred to herein as the “Termination Date”), Employee shall receive the payments and benefits set forth below.

       (i) Parent shall pay Employee accrued but unpaid Base Salary through the Termination Date, Bonus Compensation due and owing to Employee (as further set forth in Section 8(e)) and any other benefits required to be provided to Employee and his dependents under contract and applicable law.
 
       (ii) Parent shall pay Employee in cash an amount equal to his Annual Compensation multiplied by three (3), which amount will be paid in twenty-four (24) equal monthly installments beginning on the first day of the calendar month following the calendar month in which the Termination Date occurs.
 
       (iii) All stock options, restricted stock, and other similar rights, including any Nonqualified Plan Benefits that are not vested on the Termination Date, that have been granted to Employee shall become vested and exercisable immediately, and as provided under the applicable plan or agreement, Employee shall have the continuing right to exercise such rights until such rights expire in accordance with their original terms (without regard to any provision thereof requiring earlier expiration upon termination of employment).
 
       (iv) For the duration of the Election Period, Parent shall use commercially reasonable efforts to provide to Employee and his dependents the coverage for the benefits described in Sections 3(a), (b) and (c).

       (c) Upon termination of Employee’s Employment or the termination or expiration of this Agreement, which termination or expiration occurs: (1) as a result of Parent terminating this Agreement pursuant to Section 7(b), (2) as a result of this Agreement not being renewed by Employee, or (3) as a result of Employee terminating this Agreement pursuant to Section 7(h), and which termination or expiration is not covered by Sections 8(a) or 8(b)(the effective date of such termination or expiration being referred to herein as the “Termination Date”), Employee shall receive the payments and benefits set forth below.

       (i) Parent shall pay Employee accrued but unpaid Base Salary through the Termination Date, Bonus Compensation due and owing to Employee (as further set forth in Section 8(d)) and any other benefits required to be provided to Employee and his dependents under contract and applicable law.

7


 

       (ii) Parent shall pay Employee in cash an amount equal to his “Termination Base Salary” (as defined herein) in twelve (12) equal monthly installments beginning on the first day of the calendar month following the calendar month in which the Termination Date occurs; provided, however, that Parent shall not be obligated to make any such monthly payments covering the portion of the above-referenced twelve month occurring prior to the second anniversary of the Effective Date and such payments shall be waived. “Termination Base Salary” shall be the greater of Employee’s Base Salary in effect on the Termination Date or the greatest Base Salary in effect during the calendar year immediately prior to the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs.
 
       (iii) To the extent that Employee and/or any of his dependents is eligible to, and timely elects to, receive continuation coverage under any group health plan providing medical, dental, vision, prescription drug, wellness or other health care or medical coverage which is subject to the provisions of part 6 of Title I of ERISA (“COBRA”), Parent shall timely pay any premiums required for such coverage. This payment of premiums by Parent is not intended to alter in any way the provisions of any group health plan of Parent, and all time limits, effects of subsequent coverage and all other relevant provisions of any such plan remain unchanged and shall control Employee’s (and his dependents’) entitlement to coverage or benefits under such plan.

       (d) For the purposes of payments to be made under this Section 8:

       (i) Any accrued but unpaid Base Salary shall be paid to Employee within five (5) business days of the Termination Date.
 
       (ii) For purposes of calculating Bonus Compensation due and owing to Employee:

       (A) Regardless of the reason for termination or expiration of this Agreement, in the event that Bonus Compensation for the calendar year preceding the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs has not been paid by the Termination Date, such Bonus Compensation shall be paid to Employee concurrently with Parent’s payment of Bonus Compensation generally for such calendar year.

       (B) In the case of a termination or expiration of this Agreement governed by Sections 8(a) or 8(b) hereof, Employee shall receive an amount of Bonus Compensation for the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs equal to (x) the amount of Bonus Compensation which Employee would have been entitled to receive had termination or expiration not occurred in such calendar year multiplied by (y) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days beginning on January 1st of the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs and ending on the Termination Date, and the denominator of which is 365. This payment shall be paid to Employee concurrently with Parent’s payment of Bonus Compensation generally for such calendar year.

       (C) In the case of a termination or expiration of this Agreement governed by Section 8(c) hereof, Employee shall not receive any Bonus Compensation for the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs.

       (iii) For purposes of calculating the amount of payments made using the Annual Compensation formula, Parent shall initially compute the Annual Compensation under Section 8(h)(ii)(B) using the Prior Bonus Amount or $420,000, whichever is

8


 

  higher. However, in the event the Current Bonus Amount, when awarded, exceeds the higher of the Prior Bonus Amount or $420,000, then Parent will pay the difference to Employee, either in equal amounts over the remainder of the term over which such payments are to be made, or in one lump sum, as the case may be.

       (e) Following the termination or expiration of this Agreement, Employee shall be bound by the covenants not to solicit or compete set forth in Section 12 hereof as set forth below.

       (i) In the event of a termination or expiration of this Agreement which is governed by Sections 8(a) or 8(b) hereof, Employee shall comply with the covenants not to solicit or compete set forth in Section 12 hereof for a period of two (2) years immediately following the Termination Date.
 
       (ii) In the event of a termination or expiration of this Agreement which is governed by Section 8(c) hereof, Employee shall comply with the covenants not to solicit or compete set forth in Section 12 hereof for a period of one (1) year immediately following the Termination Date; provided, however, that if within ninety (90) days after the Termination Date, Parent provides Employee with written notice of such election (the “Extension Notice”), Employee shall comply with the covenants not to solicit or compete set forth in Section 12 below for a period of two (2) years immediately following the Termination Date. In the event that Parent provides Employee with the Extension Notice in the time provided, and in addition to the payment to be made pursuant to Section 8(c)(ii) hereof, Parent shall pay Employee in cash an amount equal to his Annual Compensation, which shall be paid in twelve (12) equal monthly installments beginning on the first day of the calendar month following the calendar month of the final payment to be made pursuant to Section 8(c)(ii), above.

       (f) In the event of the death of Employee, all benefits and compensation hereunder shall, unless otherwise specified by Employee, be payable to, or exercisable by, Employee’s estate.
 
       (g) Gross-Up Payment.

       (i) Anything in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, in the event it shall be determined that any payment, grant, acceleration or distribution by or on behalf of Parent to or for the benefit of Employee as a result of any change in control (within the meaning of Section 280 G of the internal revenue code) or as otherwise payable under Sections 3(h), 6 or 8(a) (whether paid or payable or distributed or distributable pursuant to the terms of this Agreement or otherwise, but determined without regard to any additional payments required under this Section 8(g) (a “Payment”)) would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), or any interest or penalties are incurred by Employee with respect to such excise tax (such excise tax, together with any such interest and penalties, are hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Excise Tax”), then Employee shall be entitled to receive an additional payment (a “Gross-Up Payment”) in an amount such that, after payment by Employee of all taxes upon the Gross-Up Payment (such taxes including, without limitation, any income taxes and Excise Tax imposed upon the Gross-Up Payment, and any interest or penalties imposed with respect to such taxes), Employee retains an amount of the Gross-Up Payment equal to the Excise Tax imposed upon the Payment.
 
       (ii) Subject to the provisions of Section 8(g)(iii), all determinations required to be made under this Section 8, including whether and when a Gross-Up Payment is

9


 

  required and the amount of such Gross-Up Payment and the assumptions to be utilized in arriving at such determination, shall be made by a nationally recognized accounting firm or law firm selected by Employee and reasonably acceptable to Parent (the “Tax Firm”); provided, however, that the Tax Firm shall not determine that no Excise Tax is payable by Employee unless it delivers to Employee a written opinion (the “Accounting Opinion”) that failure to pay the Excise Tax and to report the Excise Tax and the payments potentially subject thereto on or with Employee’s applicable federal income tax return will not result in the imposition of an accuracy-related or other penalty on Employee. All fees and expenses of the Tax Firm shall be borne solely by Parent. Within 15 business days of the receipt of notice from Employee that there has been a Payment, the Tax Firm shall make all determinations required under this Section 8, shall provide to Parent and Employee a written report setting forth such determinations, together with detailed supporting calculations, and, if the Tax Firm determines that no Excise Tax is payable, shall deliver the Accounting Opinion to Employee. Any Gross-Up Payment, as determined pursuant to this Section 8, shall be paid by Parent to Employee within fifteen days of the receipt of the Tax Firm’s determination. Subject to the remainder of this Section, any determination by the Tax Firm shall be binding upon Parent and Employee; provided, however, that Employee shall only be bound to the extent that the determinations of the Tax Firm hereunder, including the determinations made in the Accounting Opinion, are reasonable and reasonably supported by applicable law. As a result of the uncertainty in the application of Section 4999 of the Code at the time of the initial determination by the Tax Firm hereunder, it is possible that Gross-Up Payments which will not have been made by Parent should have been made (“Underpayment”), consistent with the calculations required to be made hereunder. In the event that it is ultimately determined in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 8(g)(iii) that Employee is required to make a payment of any Excise Tax, the Tax Firm shall reasonably determine the amount of the Underpayment that has occurred and any such Underpayment shall be promptly paid by Parent to or for the benefit of Employee. In determining the reasonableness of Tax Firm’s determinations hereunder, and the effect thereof, Parent and Employee shall be provided a reasonable opportunity to review such determinations with Tax Firm and their respective tax counsel, if separate from the Tax Firm. Tax Firm’s determinations hereunder, and the Accounting Opinion, shall not be deemed reasonable until Employee’s reasonable objections and comments thereto have been satisfactorily accommodated by Tax Firm.
 
       (iii) Employee shall notify Parent in writing of any claims by the Internal Revenue Service that, if successful, would require the payment by Parent of the Gross-Up Payment. Such notification shall be given as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after Employee actually receives notice in writing of such claim, and shall apprise Parent of the nature of such claim and the date on which such claim is requested to be paid; provided, however, that the failure of Employee to notify Parent of such claim (or to provide any required information with respect thereto) shall not affect any rights granted to Employee under this Section except to the extent that Parent is materially prejudiced in the defense of such claim as a direct result of such failure. Employee shall not pay such claim prior to the expiration of the thirty (30) day period following the date on which he gives such notice to Parent (or such shorter period ending on the date that any payment of taxes with respect to such claim is due). If Parent notifies Employee in writing prior to the expiration of such period that it desires to contest such claim, Employee shall do all of the following:

       (A) give Parent any information reasonably requested by Parent relating to such claim;

10


 

       (B) take such action in connection with contesting such claim as Parent shall reasonably request in writing from time to time, including, without limitation, accepting legal representation with respect to such claim by an attorney selected by Parent and reasonably acceptable to Employee;

       (C) cooperate with Parent in good faith in order effectively to contest such claim;

       (D) if Parent elects not to assume and control the defense of such claim, permit Parent to participate in any proceedings relating to such claim; provided, however, that Parent shall bear and pay directly all costs and expenses (including additional interest and penalties) incurred in connection with such contest and shall indemnify and hold Employee harmless, on an after-tax basis, for any Excise Tax or income tax (including interest and penalties with respect thereto) imposed as a result of such representation and payment of costs and expenses. Without limiting the foregoing provisions of this Section 8, Parent shall have the right, at its sole option, to assume the defense of and control all proceedings in connection with such contest, in which case it may pursue or forego any and all administrative appeals, proceedings, hearings and conferences with the taxing authority in respect of such claim and may either direct Employee to pay the tax claimed and sue for a refund or contest the claim in any permissible manner, and Employee agrees to prosecute such contest to a determination before any administrative tribunal, in a court of initial jurisdiction and in one or more appellate courts, as Parent shall determine; provided, however, that if Parent directs Employee to pay such claim and sue for a refund, Parent shall advance the amount of such payment to Employee, on an interest-free basis and shall indemnify and hold Employee harmless, on an after-tax basis, from any Excise Tax or income tax (including interest or penalties with respect thereto) imposed with respect to such advance or with respect to any imputed income with respect to such advance; and further provided that any extension of the statute of limitations relating to payment of taxes for the taxable year of Employee with respect to which such contested amount is claimed to be due is limited solely to such contested amount. Furthermore, Parent’s right to assume the defense of and control the contest shall be limited to issues with respect to which a Gross-Up Payment would be payable hereunder and Employee shall be entitled to settle or contest, as the case may be, any other issue raised by the Internal Revenue Service or any other taxing authority.

       (iv) If, after the receipt by Employee of an amount advanced by Parent pursuant to this Section 8(g), Employee becomes entitled to receive any refund with respect to such claim, Employee shall (subject to Parent’s complying with the requirements of Section 8(g)(iii)) promptly pay to Parent the amount of such refund (together with any interest paid or credited thereon after taxes applicable thereto). If, after the receipt by Employee of an amount advanced by Parent pursuant to Section 8(g)(iii), a determination is made that Employee is not entitled to a refund with respect to such claim and Parent does not notify Employee in writing of its intent to contest such denial of refund prior to the expiration of 30 days after such determination, then such advance shall, to the extent of such denial, be forgiven and shall not be required to be repaid and the amount of forgiven advance shall offset, to the extent thereof, the amount of Gross-Up Payment required to be paid.

       (h) For purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall be defined as follows:

11


 

       (i) “Change in Control” shall mean:

       (A) The acquisition (other than from Parent) by any person, entity or “group”, within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) (excluding, for this purpose, any employee benefit plan of Parent or its subsidiaries which acquires beneficial ownership of voting securities of Parent) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 25% or more of either the then outstanding shares of Parent’s stock or the combined voting power of Parent’s then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors; or

       (B) The consummation by Parent of a reorganization, merger, consolidation, in each case, with respect to which the shares of the company voting stock outstanding immediately prior to such reorganization, merger or consolidation do not constitute or become exchanged for or converted into more than 50% of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the reorganized, merged or consolidated company’s then outstanding voting securities, or a liquidation or dissolution of Parent or the sale of all or substantially all of the assets of Parent; or

       (C) The failure for any reason of individuals who constitute the Incumbent Board to continue to constitute at least a majority of the board of directors of Parent; or

       (D) The sale, assignment or transfer of the Business to an unaffiliated third party, whether by sale of all or substantially all the assets of the Business, sale of stock or merger.

       (ii) “Annual Compensation” means the sum of the following amounts:

       (A) the greater of Employee’s Base Salary in effect on the Termination Date, or the greatest Base Salary in effect during the calendar year immediately prior to the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs; and

       (B) the greater of the Bonus Compensation which Employee would have received for the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs had Employee’s Employment not been terminated (the “Current Bonus Amount”), or such Bonus Compensation for the calendar year immediately prior to the calendar year in which the Termination Date occurs (the “Prior Bonus Amount”); provided, however, in no event shall the Bonus Compensation be less than $420,000 for purposes of calculating Employee’s Annual Compensation. For purposes of calculating Employee’s Annual Compensation only, Employee shall be deemed to have met all conditions, including employment conditions, necessary for the receipt of the Current Bonus Amount.

       (iii) “Incumbent Board” shall mean the members of the board of directors of Parent as of the date hereof and any person becoming a member of the board of directors of Parent hereafter whose election, or nomination for election by Parent’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board (other than an election or nomination of an individual whose initial assumption of office is in connection with an actual or threatened election contest relating to the election of the

12


 

  directors of Parent, as such terms are used in Rule 14a-11 of Regulation 14A promulgated under the Exchange Act).

     9.      Products, Notes, Records and Software . Employee acknowledges and agrees that all memoranda, notes, records and other documents and computer software created, developed, compiled, or used by Employee or made available to him during the term of his Employment concerning or relative to the Business, including, without limitation, all customer data, billing information, service data, and other technical material of NOVA or Parent is and shall be NOVA’s or Parent’s, as the case may be, property. Employee agrees to deliver all such materials to NOVA or Parent, as applicable, thirty (30) days after Employee receives a written request therefor from NOVA or Parent. Employee further agrees not to use such materials for any reason after said termination.

     10.      Arbitration .

       (a) Parent and Employee acknowledge and agree that (except as specifically set forth in Section 10(d)) that any claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be settled by binding arbitration in Atlanta, Georgia, in accordance with the National Rules of the American Arbitration Association for the Resolution of Employment Disputes in effect on the date of the event giving rise to the claim or controversy. Parent and Employee further acknowledge and agree that either party must request arbitration of any claim or controversy within one (1) year of the date of the event giving rise to the claim or controversy by giving written notice of the party’s request for arbitration. Failure to give notice of any claim or controversy within one (1) year of the event giving rise to the claim or controversy shall constitute waiver of the claim or controversy.
 
       (b) All claims or controversies subject to arbitration pursuant to Section 10(a) above shall be submitted to arbitration within six (6) months from the date that a written notice of request for arbitration is effective. All claims or controversies shall be resolved by a panel of three arbitrators who are licensed to practice law in the State of Georgia and who are experienced in the arbitration of labor and employment disputes. These arbitrators shall be selected in accordance with the National Rules of the American Arbitration Association for the Resolution of Employment Disputes in effect at the time the claim or controversy arises. Either party may request that the arbitration proceeding be stenographically recorded by a Certified Shorthand Reporter. The arbitrators shall issue a written decision with respect to all claims or controversies within thirty (30) days from the date the claims or controversies are submitted to arbitration. The parties shall be entitled to be represented by legal counsel at any arbitration proceedings.
 
       (c) Parent and Employee acknowledge and agree that the arbitration provisions in this Agreement may be specifically enforced by either party, and that submission to arbitration proceedings may be compelled by any court of competent jurisdiction. Parent and Employee further acknowledge and agree that the decision of the arbitrators may be specifically enforced by either party in any court of competent jurisdiction.
 
       (d) Notwithstanding the arbitration provisions set forth herein, Employee and Parent acknowledge and agree that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to require the arbitration of any claim or controversy arising under Sections 11 and 12 of this Agreement, nor shall such provisions prevent Parent from seeking equitable relief from a court of competent jurisdiction for violations of Sections 11 and 12 of this Agreement. These provisions shall be enforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction and shall not be subject to arbitration except by mutual written consent of the parties signed after the dispute arises, any such consent, and the terms and conditions thereof, then becoming binding on the parties. Employee and Parent further acknowledge and agree that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to require arbitration of any claim for workers’ compensation or unemployment compensation.

13


 

     11.      Nondisclosure.

       (a) Confidential Information. Employee acknowledges and agrees that because of his Employment, he will have access to proprietary information of NOVA and Parent concerning or relative to the Business of NOVA and Parent which is of a special and unique value (collectively, “Confidential Information”) which includes, without limitation, technical material of NOVA and Parent, sales and marketing information, customer account records, billing information, training and operations information, materials and memoranda, personnel records, pricing and financial information relating to the business, accounts, customers, prospective customers, employees and affairs of NOVA and Parent, and any information marked “Confidential” by NOVA or Parent. Employee acknowledges and agrees that Confidential Information is and shall be NOVA’s or Parent’s property, as the case may be, prior to and after the Merger. Employee recognizes and acknowledges that this Agreement furthers Parent’s interest in connection with entering into the Merger Agreement and the consummation of the transactions contemplated thereby. Employee agrees that except as required by Employee’s duties with NOVA or, following the Merger, Parent, Employee shall keep NOVA’s or Parent’s Confidential Information confidential, and Employee shall not use Confidential Information for any reason other than on behalf of NOVA and Parent pursuant to, and in strict compliance with, the terms of this Agreement. Employee further agrees that for a period beginning on the Termination Date and ending two (2) years thereafter, Employee shall continue to keep Confidential Information confidential, and Employee shall not use Confidential Information for any reason or in any manner.
 
       (b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, Employee shall not be subject to the restrictions set forth in subsection (a) of this Section 11 with respect to information which:

       (i) becomes generally available to the public other than as a result of disclosure by Employee or the breach of Employee’s obligations under this Agreement;
 
       (ii) becomes available to Employee from a source which is unrelated to his Employment or the exercise of his duties under this Agreement, provided that such source lawfully obtained such information and is not bound by a confidentiality agreement with Parent or NOVA; or
 
       (iii) is required by law to be disclosed.

       (c) Trade Secrets. Employee acknowledges and agrees that because of his Employment, he will have access to “trade secrets” (as defined in the Uniform Trade Secrets Act, O.C.G.A. § 10-1-760, et seq. (the “Uniform Trade Secrets Act”)) of NOVA (“Trade Secrets”). Nothing in this Agreement is intended to alter the applicable law and remedies with respect to information meeting the definition of “trade secrets” under the Uniform Trade Secrets Act, which law and remedies shall be in addition to the obligations and rights of the parties hereunder.

     12.      Covenants Not to Solicit or Compete . Employee acknowledges and agrees that, because of his Employment and the anticipated Merger, he does and will continue to have access to confidential or proprietary information concerning merchants, associate banks and ISOs of Parent and shall have established relationships with such merchants, associate banks and ISOs as well as with the vendors, consultants, and suppliers used to service such merchants, associate banks and ISOs. As an inducement to Parent to enter into, complete and close the Merger and in consideration for Parent’s agreement to employ Employee with the compensation and benefits described herein, Employee agrees that from and after the Effective Date, and continuing thereafter for the period specified in Section 8(e) (provided NOVA complies with its obligations set forth in Section 8 hereof), except as permitted or contemplated by this Agreement, Employee shall not, directly or indirectly, either individually, in

14


 

partnership, jointly, or in conjunction with, or on behalf of, any person, firm, partnership, corporation, or unincorporated association or entity of any kind:

       (a) obtain any interest (except as a shareholder holding less than five percent (5%) interest in a corporation) in any person, firm, partnership, corporation, or unincorporated association of any kind which provides credit card or debit card transaction processing services within the Territory;
 
       (b) provide managerial, executive, advisory, consulting, sales or marketing services relating to credit card or debit card transaction processing to any person, firm, partnership, corporation, or unincorporated association of any kind which provides credit card or debit card transaction processing services within the Territory;
 
       (c) solicit or contact, for the purpose of providing products or services competing with those provided by the Business (or any other business of Parent in which Employee was engaged), any person or entity that during the term of Employee’s Employment was a merchant, associate bank, ISO or customer (including any actively-sought prospective merchant, associate bank, ISO or customer) with whom Employee had material contact or about whom Employee learned material confidential information during the last twelve (12) months of his Employment;
 
       (d) persuade or attempt to persuade any merchant, associate bank, ISO, customer, or supplier of Parent to terminate or modify such merchant’s, associate bank’s, ISO’s, customer’s, or supplier’s relationship with Parent if Employee had material contact with or learned material confidential information about such merchant, associate bank, ISO, customer or supplier during the last twelve (12) months of his Employment; or
 
       (e) persuade or attempt to persuade any person who was employed by Parent or any of its subsidiaries as of the date of the termination of Employee’s Employment to terminate or modify his employment relationship, whether or not pursuant to a written agreement, with Parent or any of its subsidiaries, as the case may be.

     13.      New Developments. Any discovery, invention, process or improvement made or discovered by Employee during the term of his Employment in connection with or in any way affecting or relating to the Business (as then carried on or under active consideration) shall forthwith be disclosed to Parent and shall belong to and be the absolute property of Parent; provided, however, that this provision does not apply to an invention for which no equipment, supplies, facility, trade secret information of Parent was used and which was developed entirely on Employee’s own time, unless (a) the invention relates (i) directly to the Business or (ii) to Parent’s actual or demonstrably anticipated research or development; or (b) the invention results from any work performed by Employee for Parent.

     14.      Remedy for Breach. Employee acknowledges and agrees that his breach of any of the covenants contained in Sections 9, 11, 12 and 13 of this Agreement would cause irreparable injury to Parent and that remedies at law of Parent for any actual or threatened breach by Employee of such covenants would be inadequate and that Parent shall be entitled to specific performance of the covenants in such sections or injunctive relief against activities in violation of such sections, or both, by temporary or permanent injunction or other appropriate judicial remedy, writ or order, without the necessity of proving actual damages. This provision with respect to injunctive relief shall not diminish the right of Parent to claim and recover damages against Employee for any breach of this Agreement in addition to injunctive relief. Employee acknowledges and agrees that, subject to Parent’s compliance with the provisions of Section 8 hereof, the covenants contained in Sections 9, 11, 12 and 13 of this Agreement shall be construed as agreements independent of any other provision of this or any other contract between the parties hereto, and that the existence of any claim or cause of action by Employee against Parent,

15


 

whether predicated upon this or any other contract, shall not constitute a defense to the enforcement by Parent of said covenants.

     15.      Reasonableness. Employee has carefully considered the nature and extent of the restrictions upon him and the rights and remedies conferred on Parent under this Agreement, and Employee hereby acknowledges and agrees that:

       (a) the restrictions and covenants contained herein, and the rights and remedies conferred upon Parent, are necessary to protect the goodwill and other value of the Business;

       (b) the restrictions placed upon Employee hereunder are narrowly drawn, are fair and reasonable in time and territory, will not prevent him from earning a livelihood, and place no greater restraint upon Employee than is reasonably necessary to secure the Business and goodwill of Parent;
 
       (c) Parent is relying upon the restrictions and covenants contained herein in continuing to make available to Employee information concerning the Business; and
 
       (d) Employee’s Employment places him in a position of confidence and trust with Parent and its employees, merchants, associate banks, ISOs, customers, vendors and suppliers.

     16.      Invalidity of Any Provision. It is the intention of the parties hereto that the provisions of this Agreement shall be enforced to the fullest extent permissible under the laws and public policies of each state and jurisdiction in which such enforcement is sought, but that the unenforceability (or the modification to conform with such laws or public policies) of any provision hereof shall not render unenforceable or impair the remainder of this Agreement which shall be deemed amended to delete or modify, as necessary, the invalid or unenforceable provisions. The parties further agree to alter the balance of this Agreement in order to render the same valid and enforceable. The terms of the non-competition provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary to be enforceable and, specifically, without limiting the foregoing, if the term of the non-competition is too long to be enforceable, it shall be modified to encompass the longest term which is enforceable and, if the scope of the geographic area of non-competition is too great to be enforceable, it shall be modified to encompass the greatest area that is enforceable. The parties further agree to submit any issues regarding such modification to a court of competent jurisdiction if they are unable to agree and further agree that if said court declines to so amend or modify this Agreement, the parties will submit the issue of amendment or modification of the non-competition covenants in this Agreement to binding arbitration in accordance with Section 10 hereof.

     17.      Indemnification; Full Settlement and Legal Expenses.

       (a) At all times during and after Employee’s Employment and the effectiveness of this Agreement, Parent shall indemnify Employee (as a director, officer, employee and otherwise) to the fullest extent permitted by law and shall at all times maintain appropriate provisions in its Articles of Incorporation and Bylaws which mandate that Parent provide such indemnification.
 
       (b) Parent’s obligation to make the payments provided for in this Agreement and otherwise to perform its obligations hereunder shall not be affected by any set-off, counter-claim, recoupment, defense or other claim, right or action which Parent may have, or claim to have, against Employee or others. In no event shall Employee be obligated to seek other employment or take any other action by way of mitigation of the amounts payable to Employee under any of the provisions of this Agreement. Parent agrees to pay, to the full extent permitted by law, all legal fees and expenses which Employee may reasonably incur as a result of any legitimate, non-frivolous contest (regardless of the outcome thereof) by Parent or others of the validity or

16


 

  enforceability of, or liability under, any provision of this Agreement or any guarantee of performance thereof (including as a result of any legitimate, non-frivolous contest by Employee concerning the amount of any payment pursuant to Section 8 of this Agreement), plus in each case interest at the applicable federal rate provided for in Section 7872(f)(2) of the Code. Parent will not be bound to pay any legal fees or expenses arising out of baseless, meritless or frivolous contests brought hereunder by Employee or others. A contest will be deemed baseless, meritless and/or frivolous if a court or other arbiter assesses penalties or sanctions for bringing said contest, or a court or other arbiter dismisses said contest for failure to state a colorable claim.
 
       (c) As a condition to receiving payments under Sections 8(a), (b) or (c), Employee must execute a release in the form attached hereto as Exhibit B.

     18.      Applicable Law. This Agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Georgia.

     19.      Waiver of Breach. The waiver by Parent of a breach of any provision of this Agreement by Employee shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any subsequent breach by Employee.

     20.      Successors and Assigns. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of Parent, its subsidiaries and affiliates, and their respective successors and assigns. This Agreement is not assignable by Employee or by Parent, except that Parent may assign its rights (but not its obligations) under this Agreement to any affiliated or subsidiary corporation, and Parent may assign this Agreement to any successor to Parent in any reorganization, merger or consolidation, or transfer of all or substantially all of Parent’s business or properties.

     21.      Notices. All notices, demands and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be delivered in person or deposited in the United States mail, certified or registered, with return receipt requested, as follows:

         
    (i)   If to Employee, to:
         
        Edward Grzedzinski
        Chief Executive Officer
        NOVA Corporation
        One Concourse Parkway, Suite 300
        Atlanta, Georgia 30328
         
      With a copy (which shall not constitute notice) to:
         
        Edward Grzedzinski
        695 Peace Creek Trace
        Alpharetta, Georgia 30005
         
    (ii)   If to NOVA, to:
         
        NOVA Corporation
        One Concourse Parkway
        Suite 300
        Atlanta, Georgia 30328
        Attention: Cherie Fuzzell
                 General Counsel
 
      With a copy (which shall not constitute notice) to:

17


 

         
        Long Aldridge & Norman LLP
        SunTrust Plaza
        303 Peachtree Street
        Suite 5300
        Atlanta, Georgia 30308
        Attention: David M. Ivey, Esq.
         
    (iii)   If to Parent, to:
         
        U.S. Bancorp
        U.S. Bank Place
        201 Second Avenue South
        Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402
        Attention: General Counsel

     22.      Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the parties, and as of the Effective Date, supersedes all other prior negotiations, commitments, agreements and understandings (written or oral) between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, including but not limited to the Prior Agreement, which is hereby terminated as of the Effective Date. It may not be changed orally but only by an agreement in writing signed by the party against whom enforcement of any waiver, change, modification, extension, or discharge is sought.

     23.      Indemnification. At all times during and after Employee’s Employment and the effectiveness of this Agreement, Parent shall indemnify Employee (as a director, officer, employee and otherwise) to the fullest extent permitted by law and shall at all times maintain appropriate provisions in its Articles of Incorporation and Bylaws which mandate that Parent provide such indemnification.

     24.      Survival. The provisions of Sections 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 21 and 23 shall survive termination of Employee’s Employment and termination of this Agreement.

     25.      Withholding; No Offset. All payments required to be made by Parent under this Agreement will be subject to the withholding of such amounts, if any, relating to federal, state and local taxes as may be required by law. No payment under this Agreement will be subject to offset or reduction attributable to any amount Employee may owe to Parent or any other person, as permitted by law. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to reduce Employee’s right to the payments described in Section 8(g).

(Signatures Begin on Next Page)

18


 

      IN WITNESS WHEREOF , the parties hereto have executed this Agreement under seal as of the date first above shown.

         
      “EMPLOYEE”:
         
      By: /s/ Edward Grzedzinski
       
        Edward Grzedzinski
         
         
      “NOVA CORP”:
         
      NOVA CORPORATION
         
         
      By: /s/ Stephen M. Scheppmann
       
      Name:  Stephen M. Scheppmann
       
      Title: Chief Financial Officer
       
         
        [CORPORATE SEAL]
         
         
      “NOVA”
         
      NOVA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC
         
         
      By: /s/ Stephen M. Scheppmann
       
      Name:  Stephen M. Scheppmann
       
      Title: Chief Financial Officer
       
         
        [CORPORATE SEAL]
         
         
      PARENT:
         
      U.S. BANCORP
         
         
      By: /s/ Lee R. Mitau
       
        Name: Lee R. Mitau
       
        Title: Executive Vice President
       

 

EXHIBIT 12

Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges

                                           
Year Ended December 31 (Dollars in Millions)   2002     2001     2000     1999     1998  

 
   
   
   
   
 
Earnings
                                       
1. Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principles
  $ 3,326.4     $ 1,706.5     $ 2,875.6     $ 2,381.8     $ 2,132.9  
2. Applicable income taxes
    1,776.3       927.7       1,512.2       1,392.2       1,167.4  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 
3. Income before income taxes and cumulative effect of change in accounting principles (1 + 2)
  $ 5,102.7     $ 2,634.2     $ 4,387.8     $ 3,774.0     $ 3,300.3  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 
4. Fixed charges:
                                       
 
a. Interest expense excluding interest on deposits
  $ 1,228.7     $ 1,846.7     $ 2,404.1     $ 1,820.3     $ 1,625.0  
 
b. Portion of rents representative of interest and amortization of debt expense
    78.2       89.0       86.7       78.9       73.3  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 
 
c. Fixed charges excluding interest on deposits (4a + 4b)
    1,306.9       1,935.7       2,490.8       1,899.2       1,698.3  
 
d. Interest on deposits
    1,485.3       2,828.1       3,618.8       2,970.0       3,234.7  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 
 
e. Fixed charges including interest on deposits (4c + 4d)
  $ 2,792.2     $ 4,763.8     $ 6,109.6     $ 4,869.2     $ 4,933.0  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 
5. Amortization of interest capitalized
  $     $     $     $     $  
6. Earnings excluding interest on deposits (3 + 4c + 5)
    6,409.6       4,569.9       6,878.6       5,673.2       4,998.6  
7. Earnings including interest on deposits (3 + 4e + 5)
    7,894.9       7,398.0       10,497.4       8,643.2       8,233.3  
8. Fixed charges excluding interest on deposits (4c)
    1,306.9       1,935.7       2,490.8       1,899.2       1,698.3  
9. Fixed charges including interest on deposits (4e)
    2,792.2       4,763.8       6,109.6       4,869.2       4,933.0  
 
                   
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges
                                       
10. Excluding interest on deposits (line 6/line 8)
    4.90       2.36       2.76       2.99       2.94  
11. Including interest on deposits (line 7/line 9)
    2.83       1.55       1.72       1.78       1.67  
 
 
   
   
   
   
 

 

EXHIBIT 21

SUBSIDIARIES OF U.S. BANCORP
(JURISDICTIONS OF ORGANIZATION SHOWN IN PARENTHESES)

U.S. Bank National Association (a nationally chartered banking association)

U.S. Bank Trust National Association (a nationally chartered banking association)

U.S. Bank National Association ND (a nationally chartered banking association)

U.S. Bank Trust Company, National Association (a nationally chartered banking association)

U.S. Bank Trust National Association SD (a nationally chartered banking association)

Elan Life Insurance Company (Arizona)

Miami Valley Insurance Company (Arizona)

Midwest Indemnity Inc. (Vermont)

Mississippi Valley Life Insurance Company (Arizona)

U.S. Bancorp Insurance Company, Inc. (Vermont)

U.S. Bancorp Insurance Services, Inc. (Delaware)

U.S. Bancorp Insurance Services, LLC (Wisconsin)

U.S. Bancorp Insurance Services of Montana, Inc. (Montana)

U.S. Bancorp Investments, Inc. (Minnesota)

U.S. Bancorp Piper Jaffray Inc. (Delaware)

PJI Arizona, Inc. (Arizona)

PJH Idaho, Inc. (Idaho)

PJH Montana, Inc. (Montana)

PJH South Dakota, Inc. (South Dakota)

PJH Utah, Inc. (Utah)

PJH Wyoming, Inc. (Wyoming)

USBPJI Oklahoma, Inc. (Oklahoma)

 

 

Exhibit 23

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS

We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Form S-3 (Nos. 333-67465; 333-32572; 333-65358; 333-72626; 333-76322 and 333-89410) and Form S-8 (Nos. 33-52835; 333-01421; 333-02623; 333-32635; 333-51627; 333-51635; 333-76887; 333-82691; 333-38846; 333-47968; 333-61667; 333-48532; 333-65774; 333-68450; 333-74036 and 333-100671) of U.S. Bancorp of our report dated January 21, 2003, except for Note 3, as to which the date is February 19, 2003, relating to the financial statements, which appears in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

PRICEWATERHOUSECOOPERS LLP

Minneapolis, Minnesota
February 28, 2003